JP6652104B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed.

JP 2012-217766 A

  However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a first variable ball-in means capable of changing to a first state and a second state in which a game ball is easier to enter than the first state, A determination means capable of performing a determination based on a game ball having entered the first variable ball-in means, and identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means are dynamically displayed on the display means for a predetermined period. and dynamic display means capable of displaying the dynamic display period setting unit capable of setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying identification information by its dynamic display means, the result of the determination by said discrimination means A bonus game providing means capable of providing a bonus game when the identification information indicating that is the first determination result is stopped and displayed , and a game which does not enter the first variable ball entry means A third state, which is provided at a position where the ball can reach, A fourth state easily ball entrance game balls than 3 states, capable of varying the second variable ball entrance means, second determination result different from the result of the determination is that said first determination by the previous SL discrimination means and variable control means capable of variably controlled by the predetermined variable pattern of said second variable ball entrance unit when the identification information is stopped display stop to indicate that is, the second variable ball entrance means a specific space game ball can pass through that entered the special has a grantable privilege granting means benefits in particular based game ball passes through the specific region, wherein the dynamic display period setting means, A game from the first variable ball entry means to the second variable ball entry means as the dynamic display period of the identification information for indicating that the result of the determination by the determination means is the second determination result. the likely be shorter than a falling period until the sphere reaches Period and, can be set a longer becomes liable second period than the falling period, the game machine, the than when the identification information is dynamically displayed in the first period, the in the second period When the identification information is dynamically displayed, the game ball is configured to easily reach the second variable ball-in means changed to the fourth state .

A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, further comprising a notifying unit capable of notifying that the privilege game is being executed .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , the first variable ball-in means capable of changing between the first state and the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than in the first state, and the first variable ball-in means capable and the viable discriminating means discriminating on the basis of the game ball is ball entrance, for a predetermined period of time dynamic display unit to display identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means to the kinematic Dynamic display period, dynamic display period setting unit capable of setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display unit, and a result of the determination by the determination unit is a first determination result . the and benefits game providing means capable of imparting benefits game when the identification information is displayed stopped, game balls that did not ball entrance to the first variable ball entrance means can reach a position indicating that Provided, and a third state, and a game ball is inserted more than the third state. The identification for indicating the second determination result different from easily and fourth state, and capable of varying the second variable ball entrance means, and the result of the determination is that said first determination by the previous SL discrimination means and variable control means capable of variably controlling the second variable ball entrance means in a predetermined variable pattern when information is stopped display stop, gaming balls which have entered the special second variable ball entrance means can pass and Do specific region has a possible privilege granting means grant the privilege to particular based game ball passes through the specific region, wherein the dynamic display period setting means, the determination result by said determining means As the dynamic display period of the identification information for indicating that the result is the second determination result, from the flow-down period until a game ball reaches from the first variable ball-in means to the second variable ball-in means. and it tends to be shorter first period, the flow-down period Can be set and easily second period becomes longer, the gaming machine, than when said identification information in the first period is dynamically displayed, the identification information is dynamically displayed in the second period In this case, the game ball is made to easily reach the second variable ball entry means changed to the fourth state .

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a figure which illustrated an actual display screen. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the ending of the big hit game in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display content during the probability change in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is not changed after the start of the change of the first special symbol in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the first embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of display contents at the time of the 2nd special design hitting small during RUSH in a form. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is changing after the start of the first special symbol hit change in the first embodiment, and (b) is the first example. It is a figure showing an example of display contents at the time of change of the 2nd special symbol during change of the hit of the 1st special symbol in a form. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a jackpot A during RUSH in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a RUSH in the first embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a state in which the result of the variable display of the first special symbol was a jackpot C or a jackpot D. (A) is a figure which showed the card forgetting alert screen in 1st Embodiment, (b)-(d) is the timing chart which showed the timing which displays the card forgetting alert screen in 1st Embodiment. is there. It is the model which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of a main control device 110. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a first random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a small random number table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the 2nd random number table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for normal use typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time saving / probability change table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a latent accuracy table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the normal figure fluctuation pattern table typically. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a stop display mode selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an additional effect selection table. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of an electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit determination processing performed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design fluctuation execution process performed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change start processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit determination processing performed by the MPU in the main control device. 6 is a flowchart showing special figure 2 deviation variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design fluctuation execution process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change stop processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 9 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 departure stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd winning processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the status command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flow chart which showed a hit related process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which showed the big hit related processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit related process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the update process of the remaining number of times performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary stop related process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation restart process performed by MPU in an audio ramp control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process for special figure 1 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process for special figure 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. 6 is a flowchart illustrating various counter updating processes executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 6 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a rush entry command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an additional effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of winning the big hit C in the probability change state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a relation figure between the game contents of special figure 1 game after a probable change state was set up in 2nd Embodiment, and an award. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is changing when the first special symbol hit symbol stops in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of stopping a 2nd special symbol during the hit symbol of the 1st special symbol in a form. It is the model which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection 2 table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection two table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the miss type selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of two tables for time saving and probable change. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit determination processing 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol determination period setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing during fixed time performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design movement stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol determination period setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 departure stop processing 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a remaining number update process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed temporary stop related processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the restart process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the symbol determination related process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed various counter update processing 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a relation figure of the game content of special figure 1 game after a probable change state was set up in 3rd Embodiment, and an award. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the big hit end in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the 1st fluctuation after a big hit. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the 3rd variation after a big hit in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the 4th variation after a big hit. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the 3rd fluctuation after a big hit in the case where the 3rd fluctuation after a big hit in 3rd Embodiment is a big hit, and (b) is between 1 to 3 fluctuations after a big hit. It is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the second variation after the big hit when the special figure 1 small hit is won. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first three random numbers table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the three small random numbers table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the three big hit type selection tables, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the three small hit type selection tables. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the three variation pattern selection tables, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the three tables for probable variation, and (c) is It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the probability change A table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probable variable B table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probable variable C table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the probable variable D table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of 3 tables for latents typically. It is a mimetic diagram showing typically composition of RAM of a main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the probability change effect selection table typically. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit determination processing 3 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 deviation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 departure stop process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing 3 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed command judgment processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed winning information related processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related process 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of the jackpot end performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed variable display setting processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process for probable change performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing a flow of a game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probable change state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) shows a flow when time is consumed during the probable change state. It is a timing chart shown. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the RUSH entry by reaching the number of time savings in 4th Embodiment, (b) is RUSH in special figure 1 big hit fluctuation in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of display contents to be notified. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of winning a fall lottery in the latent state in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a special figure in the latent state in 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display screen at the time of winning a big hit in 2. It is a figure showing an example of display contents in super RUSH in a 4th embodiment. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of a main control device 110 according to a fourth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection 4 table in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drop lottery table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a latent mode selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the notification selection table typically. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit determination processing 4 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows game state update processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit determination processing 4 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change stop processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a status command process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a latent mode setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fall effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed small hit related processing 4 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed variable display setting processing 4 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed fall notice processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 1 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed variable display setting processing 4 for special figure 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the variable winning device for small hits. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device for small hits. It is the operation | movement figure which looked at the variable winning prize apparatus for small hits from the back side. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of winning a special figure 1 big hit in the probable change state in 5th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of shortening the time during the probable change state in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the small hit in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display content during a small hit game. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the ball passing the fall gate during the small hit game in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the fall gate during the small hit game, and a ball. It is a figure showing an example of display contents at the time of not passing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the small hit end, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content in the latent state (invincible mode). It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection five table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario storage area. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit entrance passage process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a fall gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed the state command processing 5 performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed hit related processing 5 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the ball passage related process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit state flag, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit state flag. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation condition discrimination processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change start processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change start processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening / closing process 6 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing 6 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows round execution processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit interruption process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows ending execution processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing 6 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing 6 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the enlarged view which expanded the flow-path unit in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a top view which showed typically the ball flow in the case where the electric accessory in 7th Embodiment is a closed state (embedded state), (b) is a closed state (electrically-operated accessory) (embedded state) FIG. 4 is a perspective view schematically showing a spherical flow in the case of ()). (A) is a top view which showed typically the ball flow in the case where the electric accessory in the 7th embodiment is an open state (projection state), and (b) is an open state (projection state) of the electric accessory. FIG. 4 is a perspective view schematically showing a spherical flow in the case of ()). (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents at the time of the second symbol hit in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a second entrance opening in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a ball enters the ball. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents when a special figure 2 lottery result is out of the time reduction state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a time reduction state in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a ball is flowing down the delay path during the change of the special figure 2 in FIG. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation, and the ball is flowing down a normal path in the time saving state in 7th Embodiment, (b) is 7th execution. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of passing V during the small hitting game in a form. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents when V did not pass during the small hitting game in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) shows the time saving state in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents when a time-saving state A is set. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 7 table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table, (c) Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special symbol 2 random number table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection 7 table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 big hit type selection table, (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 big hit type selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number 7 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 7 table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the fluctuation pattern 7 table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first time-saving variation pattern table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second time-saving variation pattern table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the release scenario 7 table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of passing the small hitting V in the seventh embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing typically the composition of RAM of the sound ramp control device in a 7th embodiment in a 7th embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the delay path state flag typically. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving frequency update process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V entrance passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing 7 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing 7 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening / closing process 7 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 7 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process 7 performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit start process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the time-saving effect related process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the end time per-drawing process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed variable display setting processing 7 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process for special figure 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the ball passage monitoring process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a top view which showed typically the case where the opening and closing door 3650f which the 2nd attacker 3650 in 8th Embodiment has is open state, (b) is 2nd attacker 3650 in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a plan view schematically showing a case where an opening / closing door 3650f of the device is in a closed state. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 8th Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the ball to the 2nd attacker. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in an 8th embodiment, and is a mimetic diagram showing typically the flow of the ball to the 2nd entrance. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a ball during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a ball enters a second entrance. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the ending screen of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of display contents of a special figure 2 in-game screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the special figure 2 small hit is won in the normal state in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a big hit H in the special figure 2 in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the display contents when winning. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents during the special figure 2 game in the time reduction state in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is the end of the last special figure change in the time reduction state in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of display contents at the time. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first random number 8 table in the eighth embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st hitting type selection 8 table in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an operation scenario 8 table in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the contents of each scenario type in the eighth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 8 random numbers per 2 table in 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the change pattern selection 8 table in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the eight tables for normal / latent probability in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the eight tables for time saving / probability change in the eighth embodiment. FIG. It is a mimetic diagram showing typically the composition of RAM of the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the eighth embodiment. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing 8 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 8 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the processing related to the number of reserved balls performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of the reduction performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed small hit control processing 8 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in an 8th embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing typically the composition of RAM of the main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit determination processing 9 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving completion process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows game state update processing 9 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing 9 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a ninth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judgment processing 9 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a ninth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change stop processing 9 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the stop screen of the big hit symbol in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is an example of the display content during the symbol determination period in the big hit C in the tenth embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the random number 10 table per 2nd. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection 10 table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the specific winning operation pattern table. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 10 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit determination processing 10 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing 10 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific ball entry process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 10th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the effect content in the modification of 7th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a high probability second random number 11 table 202ja in a modification of the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a low probability second random number table in a modification of the seventh embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the random number 11 table 202jb. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 11 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 11 performed by the MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general figure effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of the seventh embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 87. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets 16a is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14. Through the glass unit 16, the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to (i), whereby the ball is hit on the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the out opening 66, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled. (See FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood laminated with a thin plate material, and is formed so that various structures provided on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof cannot be seen by a player. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. 13 is fixed from the front side by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening and the like are provided and fired) on the front surface of the game board 13. The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37A, which includes a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display along the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 62 is provided on the upper right side of the game area in the front view (upper right side in FIG. 2). 37B). The first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) performs a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. Will be In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) determines whether the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (upper first entrance 64b1, lower first entrance 64b2), It is configured so that it can be used properly depending on whether or not the ball has entered the second entrance 640. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, an upper first ball entrance 64b1 and a lower first ball entrance 64b2 are provided as a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol. In the following description, when both the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are indicated, the description will be made simply using the term of the first ball entrance 64.

  Specifically, when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate by a lighting state whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change state, a time saving state, or a normal state, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Or, the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability change jackpot or a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, a symbol that is out of the symbol, or a small hit symbol is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. , 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when one of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 receives a ball. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, there are prepared a 15R probability change jackpot, a 2R probability change jackpot, a 15R time reduction jackpot, and a 2R time reduction jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability changing jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts (sets) to the probability changing state in which the maximum number of rounds is the special symbol high probability state and the normal symbol high probability state after the 15 rounds of jackpots. In this case, the “2R probability change jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to (sets) the probability change state in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after the two rounds of jackpot. In addition, “15R time-saving jackpot” means that the maximum number of rounds is a 15-round jackpot, and then the special symbol low-probability state and the normal symbol high-probability state are changed for a predetermined number of changes (for example, 50 times). )) The jackpot to be set, and the “2R time-saving jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is set for a predetermined number of changes (for example, 50 times) after the jackpot of two rounds. .

  The “high probability state of the special symbol” is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, in other words, a game state in which it is easy to shift to the special game state. The “normal symbol high probability state” is a state in which the hit probability of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is increased, in other words, a game state in which the electric accessory 64a is easily opened.

  In addition, in the game state (probable change state, time saving state) in which the “normal pattern high probability state” is set, not only the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, but also the lower first entrance 64b2. Is set longer than the gaming state (the latent state, the normal state) in which the “normally low probability state of the symbol” is set as the time period during which the electric accessory 64 a accompanying the is opened. When the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (open state), the ball is moved to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state (closed state). It is easy to win. Therefore, during the probable change state or during the time saving state, the ball is more likely to win the lower first ball entrance 64b2, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  It should be noted that, during the probable change state or the time saving state, the opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, once. A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened at the time of hitting, compared to during the normal state. In addition, during the probable change state or during the time saving state, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened and the electric accessory is hit once. At least one of the number of times the opening 64a is opened may be changed. Further, during the probable change state or during the time saving state, the time during which the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened per one time are not changed. Only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased as compared with that in the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, a ball entry (start winning prize) into any one of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is used as a trigger to trigger the first symbol display 37A, 37B. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing a variation display of a third symbol (decorative symbol) in synchronization with the variation display, and a sphere to the through gate 67. There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that variably displays an ordinary symbol (second symbol) with the passage as a trigger.

  Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from an opening opening at the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 12). One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  Thus, the decorative third symbol is dynamically displayed so as to correspond to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the dynamic of the third symbol is displayed. By configuring the display mode to be notified to the player, the display mode during the dynamic display period is unified with respect to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110 ( For example, even if the processing load of the main control device 110 is reduced by performing a blinking display mode in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated in units of 0.1 seconds, even if the processing load of the third symbol set by the sound lamp control device 113 is reduced. For example, by dynamically setting the target display mode based on the lottery result of the first symbol (special symbol), the dynamic display mode (the second symbol) that can suggest to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit Production style using 3 symbols) It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a normal symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of “」 ”), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is moved. It is configured to be activated (operated to the open state) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is shorter in the high-probability state (probable change state, time-saving state) of the normal symbol than in the low-probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol as a game state. Is set to Thus, during the high probability state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2.

  Therefore, during the probable change state and during the time saving state, it is possible to set the gaming state in which a ball can easily enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. In the present embodiment, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are different depending on whether the gaming state is set to the probable change state or the time saving state is set. , The same display mode is set as the background mode displayed so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the current game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to estimate the current game situation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in a plurality of game states in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the same as the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are the same. Is configured to be set. Therefore, when the display modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the current game state depending on the operation state of the electric accessory 64a. be able to.

  In the probable change state or the time saving state, the probability of hitting is increased, and the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a per hit is increased. In the case where the ball easily enters the one entrance 64b2, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is set to be shorter in the probable change state or in the time saving state than in the normal state, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state. In addition, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a per hit may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is mounted on the game board in a region (right region) on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured to allow a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls fired on the game board to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be briefly described. In the first embodiment, a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), a probable change state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol), a time reduction state (a special symbol) Four game states are provided: a low-probability state of a symbol and a high-probability state of a normal symbol and a latent state (a high-probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol). And it is comprised so that a latent state becomes a game state most advantageous to a player.

  That is, when the latent state is set, the fluctuation time for indicating the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more likely to be a lottery result advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, is set to another game state. By defining the length to be shorter than that in the case where the lottery is performed, a lottery advantageous to the player can be executed most efficiently.

  In the first embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. The first specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (1.5 seconds × 1 time, 0.2 seconds × 6 times, or 0.06 seconds × 8 times). For this reason, in the lottery of the second special symbol, even if it does not win the jackpot, a lot of chances to get the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a and obtain a prize ball are given, so that the first special symbol is drawn. It is more advantageous than lottery. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the out-of-lot result in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened is referred to as "small hit".

  In the lottery of the second special symbol, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened in the case of a small hit in addition to the big hit, so that the prize ball can be obtained in a latent state in which the variation time of the second special symbol is short. Can continue to increase. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in expectation of a latent state. In a general gaming machine, the probable state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in the present embodiment, the latent state is more advantageous than the probable state, so that novel gaming properties can be provided.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). Fluctuating method). With this, even while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently. it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously fluctuating, if one of the symbols fluctuates and stops with a big hit or a small hit symbol, the other fluctuating display indicates the remaining fluctuating time or lottery. Regardless of the result, it is stopped and displayed with the off symbol. Thus, during execution of the big hit or the small hit, the other variable display is fixedly displayed as the hit or the small hit, and it is possible to prevent a problem that the big hit or the small hit is started repeatedly.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 2, various configurations provided in the game area in the first embodiment and a flow of a ball fired toward the game area will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the present embodiment is configured so that the game area is divided into a left area and a right area by a variable display device unit 80 disposed at the center of the game area. .

  In the present embodiment, the shot ball does not pass through the anti-foul ball valve 68 until the operation handle 51 is turned 20 degrees (clockwise) from the initial position (the state in which the player is not turned). A ball is fired with a moderate firing intensity. Therefore, the fired ball finally flows back through the firing channel formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 to become a foul ball. The backflowed foul sphere passes through the start position of the launch channel (the lower left end of the outer rail 62 shown in FIG. 2) and communicates with the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 1). (Not shown), and is returned to the upper plate 17. With such a configuration, even if a foul ball is generated when the player operates the operation handle 51 to fire the ball with a desired firing intensity, the foul ball remains in the firing path, and Can be suppressed.

  Next, when the operation amount (rotation amount) of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 20 to 80 degrees from the initial position (the state in which the player is not turning), the ball is fired at a firing intensity enough to flow down the left area described above. In the range of 81 degrees to 120 degrees (81 degrees to 120 degrees, which is the maximum rotation amount of the operation handle 51), the ball is fired at a firing intensity enough to flow down the above-described right region.

  That is, the present embodiment is configured such that the region in which the ball flows can be changed based on the operation amount of the operation handle 51, that is, based on the operation of the player. Further, as will be described later in detail, in the first embodiment, when a game state that is advantageous to the player is set as the game state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is adjusted so that the ball flows down the left area. Instead of a game played by adjusting (hereinafter, referred to as a left-handed game), a game (hereinafter, referred to as a right-handed game) performed by adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51 so that the ball flows down the right area is performed. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, the player only needs to maintain the state in which the operation handle 51 is rotated to the upper limit (the state in which the operation handle 51 is rotated by 120 degrees) while the gaming state advantageous to the player is set. This makes it easy for the player to play an appropriate game.

  Next, the left region of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. Although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, the normal state (special symbol low-probability state: normal symbol low-probability state), the time reduction state (special symbol low-probability state: normal symbol high-probability state), and the probable change state in the first embodiment. (Special symbol high probability state: normal symbol high probability state) and latent state (special symbol high probability state: normal symbol low probability state) are set. In addition, a jackpot gaming state executed when the special symbol lottery result is won and a small jackpot gaming state executed when the special symbol lottery result is won are set. It is configured.

  When the normal state, the time saving state, and the probable change state are set as the gaming state, the variable display device unit 80 causes the variable display device unit 80 to perform a left-hitting game in which a ball flows down to the left area of the gaming board 13. Using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 provided to guide the player to a game method, and when a latent state is set, a right-handed game in which a ball flows down to the left area of the game board 13 Is performed so as to guide the player to a game method using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, during the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) of the player is guided according to the game state before winning.

  In addition, as a guidance method of each game method (left-handed game, right-handed game), for example, a game method suitable for the current game state is configured to be constantly displayed, or only after the game method is switched, You may comprise so that a game method may be displayed. Further, when a game method (left-handed game in the present embodiment) which is easy to be set for a long period of time between a left-handed game and a right-handed game is a normal game, and a game method other than the normal game (right-handed game) is performed. The game method may be constantly displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the guidance display may not be performed when the left-handed game is performed.

  In the case where there are two types of game methods to be selected by the player as in the present embodiment, the other game method can be guided by not displaying a display mode for guiding one game method. That is, it is possible to guide a plurality of game methods depending on whether or not one display mode is displayed. In the present embodiment, the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the player to the game method, but the present invention is not limited to this. By not displaying the specific display mode as described above, a configuration for notifying the player of the game method may be used, or a configuration for notifying the player using sound or a lamp may be used.

  In the left area of the game board 13, a through gate 67 and a general winning opening 63 are provided. Further, an upper first ball entrance 64b1 is provided below the variable display unit 80 so that a ball flowing down the left area can enter. A lower first ball entry 64b2 provided with an electric accessory 64a is provided below the upper first ball entry 64b1. This electric accessory 64a enters the lower first entrance 64b2 when a winning is achieved in a normal symbol (second symbol) lottery executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67. It is configured to variably operate from a closed state (first state) in which the ball is difficult (impossible) to an open state (second state) in which the ball can easily (possibly) enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. ing.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, a state in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) can be executed (the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not executed, and the big hit game and the small hit game are executed) When the ball has entered the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 in a state where the drawing is not performed, the lottery of the special drawing 1 is executed. That is, the entry of a ball into the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 is a trigger for executing the lottery of the first special symbol.

  In addition, in a state in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) cannot be newly executed (a state in which the fluctuation of the special figure 1 has already been executed, or a state in which the big hit game and the small hit game are executed). When a ball has entered the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2, a storage means is provided for storing the right of entering the ball up to a predetermined number (four). ing.

  Therefore, the player can continue playing the game while the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being executed, so that the operation of the game can be improved. In the present embodiment, only the storage means for storing the right of the ball and the first special symbol are provided.

  80% of the balls flowing down the left area by the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67, and about 8% (8 out of 100 balls) of the shot balls enter the upper first ball entrance 64b1. A ball flow path is formed by a plurality of structures such as a nail and a windmill so as to be spherical. Also, when the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state, approximately 0% of the balls enter the lower first entrance 64b2, and when the electric accessory 64a is in the open state, the lower first entrance. The spherical flow path is formed so that about 25% of the balls enter 64b2. That is, it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball in the order of the lower first ball entry port 64b2 (in the state where the electric accessory 64a is open), the upper first entry port 64b1, and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 (in the state where the electric accessory 64a is closed). It is configured to be.

  As described above, the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are configured to provide a bonus for paying out a prize ball to the player in addition to the privilege of executing the lottery of the first special symbol. Each time one ball enters, four prize balls are paid out to the player. In the present embodiment, the same number (four) of prize balls are provided both when a ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 and when a ball enters the lower first entrance 64b2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a different number of prize balls may be set for each.

  On the other hand, a second entrance 640 and a first variable winning device 65 are provided in the right area of the game board 13. The second entrance 640 is configured so that a lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters, and a plurality of the plurality of entrances 640 are provided so that about 50% of the balls flowing down the right area enter. A ball channel is formed by the nail. Here, the ball that has not entered the second entrance 640 flows down to the first variable winning device 65 provided below the right region.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the time (variation time) from when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed to when the lottery result is displayed is long. In the state where the fluctuation time of the time (10 minutes) is set and the latent state is set, the short fluctuation time (1 second) is set.

  That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, a right-handed game is performed rather than a left-handed game and a ball being thrown into the first entrance 64 to execute the lottery of the first special symbol. It is easier to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, and the ball is easier to enter, but since the fluctuation time is set for a long time (10 minutes), the game efficiency is reduced. It will be very bad. Therefore, in the normal state, the player plays the left-handed game and executes the lottery of the first special symbol.

  Also, since the second entrance 640 is set with one prize ball, a right-handed game is performed in a state where the normal state is set, and a ball fired in a right-handed game at a rate of about 50%. When the ball is made to enter the second ball entrance 640, the ball does not increase.

  Further, when the time saving state or the probable change state is set as the gaming state, the state is usually a high probability state of the symbol, and the electric accessory 64a is easily opened. However, since the through gate 67, which is a trigger for drawing a normal symbol for opening the electric accessory 64a, is provided only in the left side region, the lower first ball entry port 64b2 makes it easier for the ball to enter than in the normal state. It is configured so that the player plays a left-handed game in order to make the ball enter the ball.

  On the other hand, in the state in which the latent state is set as the gaming state, the symbol usually has a low probability state and the electric accessory 64a is hard to open, and as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol is short. Since a fluctuation time of (one second) is set, it is appropriate to perform a right-handed game and execute a lottery of the second special symbol. Here, in the first embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is won in the small hit (the winning probability is about 1/2). When a small win is won, the first variable prize device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds) as a small hit game, and 10 balls are entered into the first variable prize device 65 for one ball. The prize balls are provided.

  That is, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, by continuously executing the right-handed game to the player, the lottery of the second special symbol aiming at the small hit winning, the small hit game, Can be executed continuously.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a second variable winning device 650 is provided at the bottom of the game area. The second variable winning device 650 is opened such that when a jackpot is won by lottery of a special symbol, the revolving door 650f is operated to the front side so that the ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a. Is what is done. The second variable winning device 650 is configured such that a ball that has flowed down the left area by a left-handed game and a ball that has flowed down the right area by a right-handed game can equally enter. Therefore, when the jackpot game in which the second variable prize device 650 is opened is executed, the game method before the jackpot game is executed may be continuously executed, and the game method may be provided to the player. Can be suppressed from being complicatedly changed.

  When a ball enters the above-described first entrance 64 (upper first entrance 64b1, lower first entrance 64b2), a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 ) Is turned on, and a jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) due to the turning on of the first entrance switch, and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A. It is.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) performs a jackpot lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  The first entrance 64 is a winning opening in which four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, and the second entrance 640 is one ball when a ball enters. It is one of the winning ports paid out as prize balls. In the present embodiment, the number of award balls paid out when a ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 and the number of award balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 Are the same (both are four) and different from the number of prize balls (one) paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640, but the ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1. The number of prize balls paid out in this case may be different from the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

  In this case, for example, the number of prize balls in the upper first entrance 64b1 is set to four, and the number of prize balls in the lower first entrance 64b2 is set to two, so that a normal state in which balls are difficult to enter is set. In this case, the privilege for the ball entering the upper first entrance opening 64b1 is increased, and when a specific game state (probable change state, time saving state) is set, the ball is easily entered. Even if a ball frequently enters the one entrance 64b2, the player may not be allowed to excessively acquire a prize ball, or the upper first entrance 64b1 may have four prize balls and the lower first entrance 64b1 may have four prize balls. The number of prize balls in the entrance 64b2 may be set to five, and when a specific game state (probable change state, time saving state) is set, a great privilege may be given to the player.

  Also, the same number of award balls that are paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the same number of award balls that are paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 (for example, both are 5). ).

  An electric accessory 64a is attached to the lower first entrance 64b2. The electric accessory 64a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 64a is in a closed state (restricted state), so that the ball is unlikely to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. I have. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display (ordinary symbol lottery) performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory is displayed. 64a is in an open state (permissible state), and the ball is in a state where it easily enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change state and during the time reduction state than during the normal state, and the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is shorter. In this case, the symbol “○” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened (allowed) increases. Further, during the probable change state or the time saving state, the time during which the electric accessory 64a is opened becomes longer than that during the normal state. Therefore, during the probable change state or during the time saving state, it is possible to create a state where the ball can easily enter the lower first entrance opening 64b2 as compared with the normal state.

  As described above, the lower first entrance 64b2, that is, the entrance with the electric accessory 64a, is in a state where the ball easily enters according to the set gaming state (first state). A state where the ball is hard to enter (second state) can be set. That is, from the viewpoint of ease of ball entry, the first state is an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous, and the second state is an unfavorable game state in which the player is disadvantageous (more disadvantageous than the first state). Becomes

  Here, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed) and when the ball enters the second entrance 640 (the lottery of the second special symbol) Is executed), and the probability of the jackpot is the same. If the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the lottery of the jackpot is executed with a predetermined low probability (for example, 1/280). When the high probability state of the special symbol is set, a lottery in which a large hit is made with a predetermined high probability (for example, 1/30) that is easier to win than the low probability state is executed. However, the type of the jackpot selected (set) in the event of a jackpot is set to be different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows the player to change the way in which the ball is fired (game method) to “left-handed (left-handed game)” and “right-handed” in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Hitting (right-handed game) ". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided a sticking space K 1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label, and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K 1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball flowing down the game area and not winning (entering) any of the winning ports (entrance ports) 63, 64b1, 64b2, 65a, 640, and 650a is illustrated through an out port 66. You will be guided to the ball discharge path. The out port 66 is provided below the lower first ball input port 64b2. Although the first embodiment has a configuration having one out port 66 in the game area, other configurations may be used, and two or more out ports 66 may be provided.

  By providing a plurality of out ports 66 in this manner, it is necessary to form a ball flow path for finally collecting the balls fired in the game area at one location (where the out port 66 is provided). Since it is eliminated, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging various devices constituting the game area. Specifically, for example, an out port dedicated to a ball flowing down the left area and an out port dedicated to a ball flowing down the right area may be provided. When a plurality of out ports are provided, a notifying means for notifying a player that the entrance port is an out port may be provided. As a result, a situation occurs in which no benefit is given even though a ball enters the entrance (actually, the exit) provided in the game area, thereby suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable. be able to.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol (decorative symbol dynamically displayed in correspondence with the dynamic display of the first symbol) is composed of nine types of main symbols numbered from "1" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numerals “1” to “9” on a rear symbol imitating various animals. Specifically, for example, a number “1” is assigned to a rear symbol imitating an elephant, and a number “2” is assigned to a rear symbol imitating a lion. In this manner, by displaying the third symbol in a display mode in which the rear symbol and the numeral are combined and associated with each other, the display mode of the rear symbol (for the player) even during the dynamic display of the third symbol is displayed. The type of the third symbol can be roughly grasped by the color, outline, size, etc.), and when the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the number attached to the rear symbol is identified to ensure the type of the third symbol. Can be grasped.

  In the first embodiment, the combination of the rear symbol and the numeral forming the third symbol is not changed. However, the combination of the rear symbol, the display mode, and the numeral may be changed. good. With this configuration, it is possible to display a lottery result different from the lottery result (the type of the third symbol) predicted by the player while the third symbol is dynamically displayed, and to the player. It is possible to provide a game that does not get tired. Also, by setting the combination pattern of the rear symbol and the number as the third symbol to be regularly changed according to, for example, the lottery result of the special symbol and the set game state, the third symbol is obtained. It is possible to enhance the accuracy of the prediction of the game content based on the display mode (combination of the rear symbol and the number) that is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to make a prediction.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a jackpot, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display ends. It is configured so that a big hit occurs later. On the other hand, when the result of the lottery of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the small symbol is won as a special symbol lottery result. When the special symbol lottery result is a small symbol, the main symbol is a specific combination (for example, “341”). Is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the combination of the main symbols stopped and displayed is made different according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol, so that the lottery result can be easily understood by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, the same main symbol may be stopped and displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and when the special symbol is a small hit.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower portions, and about 3/4 of the upper portion is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. Approximately 1/4 of the lower side is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, L3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. In other words, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the symbol rows L1 to L3 are periodically scrolled from side to side (usually from right to left) in a fluctuating manner. Is performed. In particular, in the upper symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three stages of left, middle, and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, the slanted line going down to the right and the slanted line going up to the right in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stop-displayed (confirmed display) on the activated lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1 → the lower symbol row L3 → the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), it is determined whether or not the player is the combination of the third symbol corresponding to the big hit (the lottery result of the special symbol is the big hit). Overlooked or not) can be suppressed. In addition, when the combination of the big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of the main symbols) is arranged on the activated lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, the big hit video (opening effect) is displayed as the big hit.

  If the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the departure, and there is a reserved ball, after a stop display (confirmation display) for one second, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the reserved ball. Is started. When there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the departure of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for one second in a state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. . This state is continued until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or until a new ball enters one of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped (determined), a demonstration effect (a customer waiting demonstration screen) indicating that the game was not executed is displayed. .

  In spite of the fact that the player has continuously fired a ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), there is rarely a situation where there is no ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. In many cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), because the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all because the player has quit the game. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. I do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance port 64. In the present embodiment, the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37). In this case, the number of entered balls is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the retained number of balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds allows the player to clearly recognize the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is currently reserved. In the present embodiment, only the variable display of the first special symbol can be held, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not held and stored. Therefore, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 4A, the sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm, and the third symbol is dynamically displayed (variable display) in the main display area Dm. (Fluctuating effect) is performed, and a notice effect, a display of the number of characters, the number of balls, and the like are executed in the sub-display area Ds. However, in all game states, FIG. It is not necessary to form each area indicated by. For example, when the player is gazing at an effect for suggesting whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the display area of the sub-display area Ds A powerful effect may be executed by reducing (erasing) and enlarging the display area of the main display area Dm. On the other hand, when the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol or the game guidance for explaining the game content in the future is emphasized and executed in the sub display area Ds, the display area of the main display area Dm is reduced, By expanding the display area of the display area Ds, an effect easy to understand for the player may be executed.

  Further, an area for displaying the number of reserved symbols and an area for executing a notice effect may be formed in the main display area Dm in accordance with the set game state and the effect mode being executed. An area for executing the variable display of the third symbol may be provided in the display area Ds.

  Next, an example of display contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols and sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. On the right and left sides of the display area Dm, three main symbols and a part of sub symbols are displayed. These show the lottery results of the first special symbol in the normal state. Further, a small area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol indicating a lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in an upper central portion of the main display area Dm. In this small area Dm1, a variable display of three third symbols in a simple mode composed of only one of the numbers “1” to “9” is executed. Also in this small area Dm1, the big hit is started by stopping and displaying the three third symbols constituted by the same numeral. The reason why the third symbol indicating the result of the lottery of the second special symbol is displayed in a simpler form than the third symbol indicating the result of the lottery of the first special symbol is basically in a normal state or a probable state. This is because the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, and the lottery of the second special symbol is hardly executed.

  Therefore, by displaying the variable display of the first special symbol mainly executed in a larger display area, the game result is displayed more clearly. In the following description, a variable display of a special symbol that is mainly executed in each game state (a variable display of the first special symbol corresponds to a normal state or a probable change state) is referred to as a main fluctuation, and in each game state, A change display of a special symbol that is hardly executed when the regular game method is performed (the change display of the second special symbol corresponds to a normal state or a probable change state) is referred to as a sub-change.

  Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the state in which the probable change state is set, the pachinko machine 10 has a long term (up to 10 minutes) A fluctuation display (dynamic display) is executed, and at the timing when the fluctuation display is started, the gaming state shifts from the probable state to the latent state. During the period in which the latent state is set (the period from the time when the variable display that becomes a big hit is executed to the time when the variable display ends and the big hit game is started), the lottery of the second special symbol is performed. It is configured to execute a game aiming at a small hit. Therefore, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is the main fluctuation, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is the sub fluctuation.

  In the small area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds, the same number of reserved symbols imitating a bird's face as the number of reserved balls in the first symbol are displayed. At the start of the fluctuating display based on the respective reserved balls corresponding to the reserved symbols, an effect of entering the inside of the house displayed to the right in the small area Ds1 is executed. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball has been started. In addition, in the small area Ds1, an announcement effect is performed such that the reserved symbol sometimes performs a special operation or another character appears.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball in the 1st ball entrance 64 might be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, but three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 can be held. Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, a flow of a variable display effect of the third symbol in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 5 is a timing chart schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation display effect executed in response to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the fluctuation state of each special symbol. Here, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a variable display (dynamic display) for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display (dynamic display) for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol. And) can be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

  When the variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed in the state in which the probable change state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is executed. Is shifted to the low probability state, and the gaming state is shifted from the probable state to the latent state. While the latent state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for indicating the result of the lottery of the second special symbol is set short, so that a lot of lotteries of the second special symbol can be executed. This is the period during which it is possible (the special figure 2 fluctuation advantage period).

  In the present embodiment, since it is configured to win the small hit with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is performed during the period in which the latent state is set as the gaming state. , A small win game executed when the player wins is frequently executed, and a game state (a special figure 2 advantageous state) advantageous to a player who can acquire many prize balls is obtained.

  As described above, the period during which the latent state is set in the present embodiment (the special figure 2 fluctuation advantage period) is during the fluctuation display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol that has won the jackpot in the probability change state. Since the special figure 1 is in the process of changing the big hit, when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends, the big hit game is executed. As described above, since a plurality of states (the special figure 2 advantageous state and the jackpot game state) that are advantageous to the player are continuously set, it is possible to continuously give the player various benefits. Can be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in one special symbol (special symbol 2) and the small hit game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (special symbol 1) is interrupted (variation display period). Is suspended), and when the small hitting game ends, the suspended measurement of the variable display period is restarted. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variable advantage period from being subtracted during the small figure game, and therefore, regardless of the number of small jackpot games executed during the special figure 2 variable advantage period, First, it is possible to provide a certain special figure 2 fluctuation advantage period to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the result of the lottery of one special symbol (special figure 1), the other special symbol (special figure 2) that is changing is displayed in a stop display mode indicating the departure. It is configured to stop forcibly. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the small hit game is executed during the big hit game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the fluctuation of the other special symbol is made different according to the result of the lottery of one special symbol. Specifically, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot (a lottery result that can give the first privilege to the player), the variation of the other special symbol is changed to the fact that the lottery result is out of order. When the stoppage is displayed in the display mode shown and the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (a lottery result in which a second privilege different from the first privilege can be given to the player), the fluctuation of the other special symbol is changed. Is stopped until the grant of the second privilege ends (until the small hit game ends), and restarted after the grant of the second privilege ends. In addition, when the lottery result of one special symbol is out of order, the change of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

  With this configuration, it is possible to change the lottery content (the lottery result, a period until the lottery result is displayed) of the other special symbol based on the lottery result of the one special symbol, A variety of playability can be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can give a privilege to the player, the control content for the other special symbol change is changed according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, in the case of a lottery result that gives the most advantageous privilege (big hit game) to the player, the lottery result corresponding to the change in the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result that gives the privilege. Even if the fluctuation is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result is out of order, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an extra privilege, and a lottery result (small hit) in which less privilege is given than the big hit game In the case of, without changing the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed, without changing the lottery result, during the small hit game, to prevent the bonus based on the other special symbol lottery from being given, It is possible to interrupt only the measurement period.

  Therefore, in a state where a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1 and special figure 2) are simultaneously fluctuating, by giving the least advantageous privilege to the player, the most advantageous privilege given later is given. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the game is not performed, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is uncomfortable.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a variable display period of a short period (0.5 seconds) is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special figure 2), The small hit game is configured to be executed frequently. Then, the condition in which the latent state is set as the gaming state is defined as a case in which the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state in which the probability changing state is set, and the condition in which the latent state is ended is defined as the first special symbol. Is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit, and the big hit game is executed. Therefore, the big hit game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period which is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the small hit game. A second game period is set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be set continuously, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

  Next, display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in each gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 5, when the jackpot game state is set as the game state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays the content of the jackpot game, for example, the round of the currently executing jackpot game. A round number display mode for indicating the number, an acquisition amount display mode for indicating the acquired number of balls, and a type for indicating the type of the jackpot game being executed (the number of rounds, a game state set after the end of the jackpot game) The number of jackpots won during the period in which the non-normal state (probable state, latent state, time saving state) is continuously set without setting the normal state as the suggestion display mode and the game state (so-called number of consecutive chans) ) Etc. are displayed.

  At the timing when the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 5 (a)), if the current jackpot type is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) for which a probable change state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends, FIG. As shown in FIG. 6 (a), an effect mode (chance zone mode) aiming at setting a latent state advantageous to the player is displayed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6A, the display contents of the big hit game end screen (ending screen) will be described. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the big hit game end screen (ending screen). As shown in FIG. 6 (a), on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a comment of “chance zone rush!” Indicating that the probable change state is set after the jackpot game ends is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Then, in the main display area Dm, a character 811 that is displayed during the period in which the probability change state or the latent state is set is displayed. The character 811 is configured not to appear (not be displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set, and the player is set to display the character 811 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the period in which the character 811 is displayed. (A gaming state more advantageous than the normal state).

  With this configuration, the player can grasp the outline of the currently set game state by grasping whether or not the character 811 is displayed on the display screen. Can be provided.

  In addition, a comment "Aim for RUSH !!" is displayed to aim at setting the latent state in the main display area Dm. Further, in the guidance display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the character "left-stroke" is displayed as a guidance display mode for causing the player to perform a left-strike game. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the left game is aimed at the left area when the probable change state is set. In the present embodiment, the second variable prize device 650 that is opened during the jackpot game has a ball that is fired by a left-handed game (a ball that has flowed down the left area) and a ball that is fired by a right-handed game. The characters ("left-handed" and "right-handed") which are arranged at positions where a prize can be won (downstream of the game area (see FIG. 2)) and are displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the jackpot game, The game method to be guided during the big hit game is configured to be variable according to the game state before the big hit game is executed.

  Specifically, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is determined, and when it is determined that the game state in which the left-handed game is to be guided (the normal state, the time saving state, the probable change state), the guidance display during the jackpot is displayed. If "left-handed" is displayed, and if it is determined that the game state in which the right-handed game is guided (probable state), "right-handed" is displayed as the guide display during the big hit. Thereby, when the big hit game is executed, the trouble of changing the game method for the player can be saved.

  In the main display area Dm, a special figure 1 display area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and a special figure 2 display area for displaying a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. Dm2 is formed, and according to the example shown in FIG. 6A, “777” is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game currently being executed (displaying the ending screen). Is displayed. In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, "-" is displayed as a non-variable display mode indicating that the second special symbol is not variably displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described non-variable display mode is configured to be displayed when the special symbol has not been variably displayed even once since the power was turned on. By displaying the non-variable display mode, it is possible for the player to predict a past game history (variation history of a special symbol).

  In the present embodiment, the above-described non-variable display mode is configured to be displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is configured to display a predetermined display mode (initial display mode) indicating a deviation. Alternatively, if it is determined that the elapsed time since the previous execution of the variable display has exceeded a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes), the display displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 You may comprise so that an aspect may be changed and displayed to an initial display aspect or a non-variable display aspect.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In a state in which the probable change state is set as the gaming state (see FIG. 5B), a gaming state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed by the left-handed game. In other words, the probability change state is a state in which the high-probability state of the normal symbol is set, so that the electric accessory 64a is easy to open, and the ball easily enters the lower first entrance opening 64b2.

  The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this probable change state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen during the probable change state. As shown in FIG. 6 (b), a comment “in the chance zone” indicating that the current gaming state is a probable change state is displayed in the sub-display area Ds so as to scroll horizontally (from right to left). You.

  In the main display area Dm, an effect in which the character 811 moves (runs) in the horizontal direction (from left to right) is displayed. Then, "left-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, and a changing display indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. At this point, the second special symbol is not newly changed from the state shown in FIG. 6A (because the ball has not entered the second entrance 640 by the right-handed game). In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the non-variable display mode "-" is continuously displayed.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of action display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the probable change state, and the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the first special symbol in the probable change state is stored. The motion display pattern of the character 811 is set to be different in accordance with this. Thereby, it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to predict whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol will win a big hit in the probable change state.

  After the display screen shown in FIG. 6B is displayed, when the variable display for indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol has won the jackpot is executed, the display shown in FIG. The screen is displayed. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram showing display contents displayed when a variable display in which a jackpot is won is started in the probability change state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming state shifts from the probable state to the latent state at the timing when the fluctuation display indicating that the first special symbol has won the jackpot during the probable state is started. It is configured as follows.

  Therefore, at the timing when the change of the first special symbol starts, the game state shifts to a state (probable state) advantageous to the player, so that the change of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 of the display screen. While the variable display mode indicating that the display is being executed is displayed, the display mode of the effect symbol 813 (the display mode of "333") for indicating to the player that the gaming state has shifted is stopped. Is done. Thereby, the player can be made to think that the game state has shifted from the probable state to the latent state by the stop display of the effect symbol 813. Further, in the present embodiment, since the same display mode as the display mode of the third symbol is used as the effect symbol display mode, the effect symbol display mode that is stopped and displayed is a display for indicating a special symbol lottery result. It can be considered as an embodiment.

  The present embodiment is configured such that, during the period in which the latent state is set, a large number of small hit games can be executed by frequently performing the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, at least during the period in which the latent state is set, “right-handed” for indicating a right-handed game to the player is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "RUSH rush in! Right-handed" is displayed to indicate that the latent state has been set as the gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect symbols displayed in the main display area Dm are stopped and displayed without changing the effect mode of the special figure 1 display area Dm1 at the start of the change of the first special symbol that has won the jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the gaming state has been shifted according to the lottery result of the effect symbol.

  Then, during the latent state in which the right-handed game is continuously executed (during the change of the big hit of the first special symbol), if the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 7B. As a result, an effect mode for indicating that a small win has been won is displayed. Here, the display contents when the latent state is set will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen during the latent state.

  According to FIG. 7B, in the state where the latent state is set (during RUSH), when the lottery of the second special symbol is won with a small hit, the first special symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. Is displayed in the display area Dm2 to indicate that is a change (during the change of the big hit), and a display mode "341" indicating that the small hit has been won is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. .

  Then, the treasure chest 812 displayed as the effect mode during the RUSH is opened, and “V” for indicating a small hit is displayed as an effect symbol 813 for indicating a game result from the inside. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the small hit is won in the second special symbol during the latent state (during the RUSH) and the small hit game is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 that is rotated when a small hit is won is provided in the right area, and the player can play a game using the same game method (right-handed) as in the latent state. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, even if the small hit game is frequently executed during the latent state, the player only needs to continue the right-handed game, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. it can.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the probable change state, the latent state is set from the start of the jackpot fluctuation, and the latent state is set. Is set so that the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

  Therefore, at the same time when the latent state is set (based on the fact that the latent state is set), the player is notified of the period during which the latent state is set (see FIG. 7A ))reference.

  However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can simultaneously change the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol is also changed to the second special symbol in the state where the probable change state is set. Both special symbols may fluctuate.

  In such a case, even if a display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) has been set is displayed at the timing when the latent state is set (see FIG. 7A), the second state that is currently fluctuating is displayed. Until the special symbol stops fluctuating, it is not possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state, and there is a problem that the small hitting game is not executed irrespective of the RUSH state. There was a fear.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for shifting to the latent state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the probable change state), the change state of the second special symbol (whether there is a change, The remaining fluctuation period is determined, and the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is made different based on the determination result.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5 and FIG. 8, when the condition for shifting to the latent state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by lottery of the first special symbol during the probable change state), the second special symbol ( The effect contents when the special figure 2) fluctuates will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, if the second special symbol is changing at the time when the jackpot change of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability change state is set (see FIG. 5 (c)), A “super chance zone” in which the degree of expectation for setting the RUSH state is higher than the “chance zone” for indicating the state is displayed.

  Here, the display contents of the display screen in the “super chance zone” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a diagram illustrating a case where a change in which a jackpot is won in a first special symbol is executed during a second special symbol change in the certainty change state. In other words, this “super chance zone” is a state in which the latent state is set as the gaming state, but the fluctuation display of the second special symbol executed before the latent state is set is displayed. It is a display mode showing a state in which processing has not been completed.

  When the “super chance zone” is set, a comment for indicating “in the super chance zone” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed so as to move at a higher speed than in FIG. 6B, so that the character 811 moving at a higher speed can easily find the treasure box 812.

  In the special figure 1 display area Dm1, a "variable display mode" for indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed, and in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, a latent state is set. A “variation display mode” that is changing from a point before the time is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The display screen of the “super chance zone” shown in FIG. 8A is displayed until the timing when the special figure 2 change, which is executed across the timing of shifting the gaming state from the probable state to the latent state, ends, When the change of the special figure 2 is completed (see FIG. 5D), a “RUSH” entry screen is displayed to notify the player that “RUSH” has been entered (see FIG. 8B).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 8B, the contents of the screen that has entered “RUSH” via the “super chance zone” will be described. FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram schematically showing a screen that has entered “RUSH” via the “super chance zone”. As shown in FIG. 8B, in the main display area Dm, an effect symbol 813 is displayed from the treasure box 812, and a display mode for notifying the player that the player has entered "RUSH" is displayed. Then, "Right" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to guide the game method during the rush game. At this time, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a fluctuating display mode for indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuating (the jackpot is fluctuating), and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 indicates a departure. The display mode “346” is stopped and displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. During a rush game (during a RUSH), that is, during a jackpot change of the first special symbol, a game in which a lottery of a second special symbol in which a variation pattern having a short variation time is set by performing a right-handed game is frequently performed. Is executed. Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, in a state where one of the special symbols has won the jackpot (including a change in the jackpot), it is possible to win the jackpot by lottery of the other special symbol. It is configured so as not to exist. Therefore, in the lottery of the second special symbol during the rush game, the lottery result is either a small hit or a loss. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (about 1/2).

  Therefore, during the rush game, the small hit is won with a probability of 1/2, and the game of obtaining the prize ball by the small hit game continues until the big hit change of the first special symbol ends. In other words, even if the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently performed during the rush game, the lottery of the second special symbol does not win the jackpot, so the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol is fully used. Rush games can be offered.

  When the jackpot change of the first special symbol ends (see FIG. 5 (f)), a screen corresponding to the jackpot type that has been won this time is displayed (see FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b)). Here, the display screen at the time of the end of the rush game (when the special figure 1 big hit variation stops) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b).

  FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing display contents when a big hit (big hit A (see FIG. 16A)) which is advantageous for the player is set, and FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing display contents when a jackpot (jackpot D (see FIG. 16A)) which is disadvantageous for the player is won.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, at the timing when the third symbol (“777”) indicating that the jackpot A has been won (see FIG. 16A) is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of "346" indicating the departure is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, an effect symbol 813 (“super-V”) indicating that the player has won a jackpot advantageous to the player from the treasure box 812 is displayed, and a comment “congratulations” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this case, the character “Right” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, which is the same game method as in the latent state.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 9B, at the timing when the third symbol (“666”) indicating that the jackpot D has been won (see FIG. 16A) is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of "346" indicating the departure is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, an effect symbol 813 (“End?”) Indicating that the player has won the jackpot disadvantageous to the player from the treasure box 812 is displayed, and a comment “Please return to left-handed” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Is done. In this case, in order to indicate to the player that the rush game has ended, the character "Left strike", which is the same game method as in the normal state, is displayed in the guide display area Dm3.

  Note that FIG. 9B shows the display screen when the jackpot D (see FIG. 16A) is won. However, when the jackpot C (see FIG. 16A) is won, that is, the jackpot D The same jackpot game as that described above is executed, but the same display screen is displayed even when the game state set after the jackpot is won for a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot D. At the end of the jackpot game, It is configured to execute an effect of performing a right-handed game as an effect. Thereby, a surprising effect can be provided to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a card forgetting alert screen displayed for a player will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is necessary to insert a card (valuable medium) into a card unit installed in association with the pachinko machine 10 in order to borrow a ball used for a game. In such a pachinko machine 10, when a player has won many prize balls by playing the game, the player forgets to insert the card into the card unit and forgets to take the card at the end of the game. There was something to do.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is configured to be displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of a jackpot game in which a prize ball can be acquired). This can prevent a situation in which a player forgets to take a card. Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set a jackpot that is easy to acquire a prize ball and a jackpot that is hard to win a prize ball as a jackpot game, and further, it is possible to set a game state in which a small jackpot game can be frequently executed in a short period of time. In addition, the timing for displaying the card forgetting warning screen can be set according to the game result (accumulation of the number of prize balls in a predetermined period).

  Here, the display contents of the card forgetting alert screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of a card forgetting alert screen. As described above, the operation of removing the card from the card unit is displayed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10, and the comment "Please note that the card is not removed" is displayed. .

  Next, the display timing of the card forgetting alert screen will be described with reference to FIGS. 10B to 10D. FIG. 10 (b) shows the case where the first jackpot is “jackpot A (see FIG. 16 (a))”, that is, a case where a single jackpot game wins a jackpot capable of giving many prize balls to a player. FIG. 10C and FIG. 10D are timing charts showing the display timing of the card display (card forgetting alert display). In FIGS. 10C and 10D, the first big hit is “big hit A (see FIG. 16A)”. That is, it is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgetting alert display) when a player has won a jackpot that can give many prize balls in one jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (b), if the first big hit (the big hit which is won when the normal state is set as the game state) is the big hit A, the sufficient number of prize balls during the big hit is obtained. The card is displayed during the jackpot ending period (ED).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10 (c) and (d), when the first jackpot is the jackpot C, a sufficient number of prize balls cannot be given during the jackpot, and the player The card display is not displayed on the end screen of the first big hit (big hit C) because there is a possibility that the ball may be continuously borrowed using the card.

  In such a state, in the present embodiment, the period from the first jackpot to the setting of the normal state again is defined as an advantageous continuation period, and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is accumulated. Card display is configured to be executed when a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) is reached, as a card display execution condition.

  In other words, if a small hit game occurs continuously after the big hit C ends and the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount, a card is displayed on the small hit game ending screen. (See FIG. 10 (c)), when the number of award balls during the advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount due to repeated execution of the jackpot C, a card is displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game. (See FIG. 10D).

<Transition of gaming state in the first embodiment>
Next, transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of shifting from one gaming state to another gaming state for four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  First, a description will be given of a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the normal state. As described above, in the normal state, a lottery frequency of a special symbol is more likely to be played in a left-handed game than in a right-handed game, so that a left-handed game is more advantageous to a player. This is because when the player hits the ball left, the ball easily enters the upper first ball entry opening 64b1. In addition, as described above, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first entrance hole 64, since the small hit is not drawn, the possessed ball will endlessly unless it becomes a big hit. It is a disadvantage that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility that the game will shift to another game state only when a big hit occurs. In addition, four types of jackpots A to D are provided as jackpot types that can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 11, if the jackpots A and C are determined at a ratio of 65% in total when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, after the jackpot ends, the center of FIG. The state shifts to the positive change state ST2 shown in FIG. In addition, when the jackpot is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, the state shifts to the time-saving state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. . On the other hand, when the jackpot B is determined at a rate of 25% when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the normal state is set again as the game state after the end of the jackpot (the normal state is looped). Do).

  In the normal state, it is normal to play a game by aiming at the upper first entrance 64b1 by left-handing, but the player intentionally right-hands and the ball enters the second entrance 640. As a result, a part of the left-handed ball may enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, a lottery of the second special symbol may be obtained. In the present embodiment, there are three jackpot types (jackpots E to G) as jackpot types set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol, and the jackpot is won in the second special symbol in the normal state. When the jackpots E and F determined by the total of 65% of the cases are reached, the process shifts to the positive change state ST2 after the jackpot ends, and when the jackpot G is determined by the ratio of 35%, the normal state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. Is set again (loops the normal state).

  As described above, when a jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, there is a possibility that the state may shift to a time saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state at a rate of 10% (big hit D), In the normal state, when a big win is made by the lottery of the second special symbol, the possibility of shifting to the time saving state becomes zero. Therefore, the disadvantage in the case of performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by right-handing in the normal state can be increased, so that the irregular game can be suppressed. In the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, a variation pattern having a variation time of a long time (10 minutes) is configured to be set. Therefore, the demerit in the case where the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by performing the right-hand in the normal state can be further increased.

  Next, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the probable change state will be described. As described above, in the probable change state, the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player because the special symbol lottery frequency is more likely to be performed in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game as in the normal state. Becomes In the probable change state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol increases in comparison with the normal state, which is advantageous in comparison with the normal state, but disadvantageous in comparison with the latent state. When the probable change state ST2 is set, the state shifts to the latent state SP1 when the big hit of the first special symbol is won (the change of the special figure 1 big hit starts).

  In the probable change state, a game is aimed at the lower first ball entrance 64b2 provided below the upper first ball entrance 64b1 while aiming at the upper first ball entrance 64b1 by hitting left as in the normal state. Will do. That is, since the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set during the probable change state, the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 is easily opened. Therefore, the game state is set in which the lottery of the first special symbol is more easily executed than in the normal state.

  In the probable change state configured as described above, normally, a left-handed game is performed and a lottery of the first special symbol is executed, but the ball enters the second entrance 640 and the second special symbol is drawn. Lottery could be a big hit. In this case, when the jackpots E and F are determined at a total of 65% when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won, the probability change state ST2 is set again after the end of the jackpot and is determined at a rate of 35%. When the big hit G is reached, the time-saving state is set as the gaming state after the big hit ends.

  In other words, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the probable change state, it is possible to shift to the latent state that is most advantageous to the player, whereas the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. In this case, the possibility of shifting to the latent state becomes zero. Therefore, the disadvantage in the case of performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by performing the right-hand in the probable variation state can be increased, thereby suppressing the irregular game.

  Next, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the latent state, unlike the normal state and the probable state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, so that the second special symbol can be efficiently drawn by playing the game by right-handing. . Therefore, right-handed is more advantageous to the player than left-handed.

  In the present embodiment, a case where the jackpot is won in the first special symbol with the probability change state set (first transition condition) and a case where the jackpot C is won in the state where the probability change state and the time saving state are set There are two transition conditions of (second transition condition), and when the first transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is changed before the jackpot game is started, that is, during the change of the special symbol jackpot. When the second transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is set after the big hit game is completed.

  With this configuration, the timing at which the gaming state (probable state) that is most advantageous to the player is set can be set before or after the jackpot game. Sex can be provided.

  Furthermore, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the period in which the latent state is set is the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol, so that the period in which the latent state is set can be determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to easily create an effect to be executed during the latent state in advance (at the time of setting the latent state) in accordance with the period in which the latent state is set.

  In addition, if the jackpot C is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability change state is set, the latent state can be set before and after the jackpot game, so that the player It is possible to provide unexpected playability.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate 65f of the variable winning device 65. As an axis, a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing to the right side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 issues various commands and commands to these via an input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). The display control unit 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, power outage signal SG1 is output to main controller 110 and payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. In addition, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, details of main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) provided in pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  In the main controller 110, main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device (not shown). Execute The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device. used.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, selection of the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the big hit (and the small hit) and selection of the big hit type (big hit symbol). , A variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. In addition, the random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. The small hit type is selected using a small hit type counter C5. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 52). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the first ball entrance 64 and each counter for the second ball entrance 640. A second special symbol execution area 203b in which a value is stored is provided. In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 is provided with up to four retaining balls. For this reason, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 during a period in which a special symbol can be selected by lottery, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a fluctuating manner or when a special symbol jackpot game is not being played, each counter value is increased. When the ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the ball enters the second entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. After that, the respective counter values stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). Various settings and control processing for displaying the information are performed. Each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used as it is for various settings and control processing for variably displaying the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, during the period in which the first special symbol cannot be selected, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball wins the first entrance 64, In addition, when the number of reserved balls at the first entrance 64 is less than the upper limit value (four in the present embodiment), each counter value is obtained and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Is done. When the number of reserves for the first entrance 64 is equal to or more than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value or the like is not obtained and the prize ball (four in this embodiment) is not obtained. Prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player. In addition, the ball enters the second entrance 640 during a period in which the second special symbol cannot be drawn, such as during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In such a case, only the prize balls (in this embodiment, two prize balls) are not obtained as the counter values and the like, but are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is four for the first entrance 64, but is not limited thereto, and may be smaller than four (for example, three). There may be more than four (eg, eight). Further, a configuration in which no upper limit is provided may be adopted. Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball entry (variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) to the second ball entry port 640 is not suspended, but it is possible to retain and store the ball as in the case of the first ball entry port 64. You may comprise.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 479). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. At the timing, it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that is a special symbol jackpot is defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and is stored in the first random number counter C1. If the value matches the value of the random number which is the big hit specified in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, the value of the random number that is a small hit of the special symbol is defined in a small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), when the special state is a low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol as the gaming state, the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. It is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is any of "7, 8", and if it is any of "7, 8", it is determined that the big hit has occurred.

  Also, when the special state is a high probability state (probable state, latent state) of the special symbol as a gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 per first acquired in the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery is determined. It is determined whether it is within the range of “0 to 5”, and if it is within the range of “0 to 5”, it is determined to be a big hit. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the 480 random number counters, two values are defined as values to be determined as big hits in the special symbol low-probability state. The jackpot probability at the time is 1/240. On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/80.

  Next, the small hit random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random value (judgment value) determined to be a small hit in a special symbol lottery is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15B, in the lottery of the first special symbol, a random number value to be a small hit is not defined. That is, the lottery of the first special symbol does not result in a small win. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is within the range of "212 to 432" regardless of the game state, and the range of "212 to 432" is determined. If it is within, it is determined that it is a small hit.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a small hit, the first symbol is used. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is a small hit.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is that at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value “7, 8” is the first random number as described above. It is stored in the random number table 202a. As described above, the total number of the random numbers is 480, and the total number of the random numbers to be the big hit is 2, so the probability of the big hit of the special symbol is “1/240”. On the other hand, in the special symbol high-probability state, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 serving as a special symbol jackpot, and the random numbers “0 to 5” are stored in the first random number table as described above. 202a. As described above, among the total number of the random number values of 480, the total number of the random number values to be the big hit is 6, and the probability of the big hit of the special symbol is “1/80”.

  Further, as described above, there are 221 values of the first random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random numbers "212 to 432" are stored in the small hit random number table 202b. ing. Since the total number of random hits is 221 out of the total of 480 random hits, the probability of a small hit of a special symbol is "221/480" (about 46%).

  Returning to FIG. 13, the description will be continued. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter ranging from 0 to 99. Then, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A). Becomes The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter ranging from 0 to 99. Then, when the special symbol lottery result is a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A) is determined based on the value of the small hit type counter and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B). To C) will be selected. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided within.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19). In the variation pattern selection table 202f, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables according to the game state are set, and for each of them, a variation pattern selection table is set for each of the hit / failure determination results. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 232 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 232). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interruption process (see FIG. 31), and it is detected that the ball has passed the normal starting port (through gate) 67. And stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a hit for the normal symbol is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is Is equal to the winning random number specified in the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). The details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 15C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In the second random number table 202c, there are eleven random numbers that can be a hit of a normal symbol in a low probability state (during a normal state or a latent state) of a normal symbol as a game state, and its range is "0 to 10". It has become. Since the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of random numbers that can be won is 11, and the probability of winning a symbol is normally “11/233”.

  On the other hand, in the high probability state (probable change state, time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, there are 232 random number values which are hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “0 to 231”. Since the total number of random numbers that can be obtained by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of random numbers that can be won is 232, so that the probability of winning a symbol is usually “232/233”. As described above, in the present embodiment, the random number value which is the hit of the ordinary symbol is configured such that a difference of about 20 times is provided between the low probability state of the ordinary symbol and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. I have. In addition, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 when the ordinary symbol hits are also higher than the ordinary symbol low probability state. The probability state is configured to be more advantageous (a ball can easily enter the lower first entrance port 64b2).

  When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device. Then, in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is within the range of “0 to 10”, it is determined that the symbol is a winning, and the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed. Later, a symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened for“ 1 second × 2 times ”. On the other hand, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 231” in the normal symbol high-probability state, it is determined that a win has occurred, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed. Later, a symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened for“ 1 second × 2 times ”. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time and the number of times of opening the ordinary electric accessory may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the game performance.

  The general-purpose variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 198 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). When a ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a general symbol variation pattern table 202g (see FIG. 20) for selecting a variation pattern of the ordinary symbol based on the value of the ordinary symbol variation type counter CS2. ) Are defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Details of the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 198), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first random number table 202a, the small random number table 202b, and the second random number table 202c already described above, a large hit type selection table 202d, a small hit type selection table 202e, and a variation pattern selection table At least a table 202f and a normal figure variation pattern table 202g are provided.

  First, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16 (a)) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is Is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the big hit type selection table 202d, and the first hit is determined. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, “big hit A” is associated with the first special symbol (special figure 1) in a range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 24”. Stipulated. The “big hit A” has 15 rounds, and a big hit game that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 25 counter values that are "big hit A", so "big hit A" is determined when a big hit occurs in the first special symbol lottery. Is 25% (25/100).

  Then, when "big hit A" is selected, a probable change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probable change flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, and the number of time savings of 10,000 times is reduced. Is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time reduction counter 203f). In other words, after the "big hit A" ends, the probable change state is set until the next big hit is won.

  “Big hit A” is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, and thus is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. In addition, since the big hit probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than in the normal state, a game state in which a more advantageous game can be performed than in the normal state is achieved. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent state is configured so that it is easier to provide an advantageous privilege to the player than the probability change state. It becomes a game state advantageous to.

  “Big hit B” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “25 to 49”. The “big hit B” is a game in which the same big hit game as the above “big hit A” is executed, the number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the big hit that opens the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650). A game is set. After the "big hit B", the probability change flag 203g is set to off, and the time saving counter 203f is set to a different value according to the gaming state at the time of winning.

  When the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning is the normal state, a value of “0” is set to the time saving counter 203f, and when the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning is the time saving state and the probability change state, the time saving counter 203f is set. A value of “100” is set. In other words, when the "big hit B" is won in the state where the normal state is set, the normal state is set after the end of the big hit, whereas when the "big hit B" is won during the time saving state, , The time saving state (100 times) is set after the end of the big hit. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counters that become "big hit B" is 25, so if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B" is determined. Is 25% (25/100).

  "Big hit B" is one of the big hit types having the largest number of rounds like "big hit A", so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but the special symbol high probability state is not set after the jackpot is over. , "Big hit A".

  "Big hit C" is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 89". The “big hit C” has two rounds, and a big hit game that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is also released in the small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. The configuration is such that it is difficult for a player to distinguish between a case where the "big hit C" is won and a case where the "small hit" is won.

  With this configuration, when a hit game in which the first attacker is released is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the big hit game or the small hit game has been executed. As described above, since the present embodiment is configured such that the small hitting game can be frequently executed during the big hit change period of the first special symbol, a latent state (RUSH state) is attained. The game is played while expecting that the hit game in which one attacker is opened is a small hit game. In other words, by providing a game period in which the player does not want the situation in which the jackpot game most normally desired by the player is executed, novel playability can be provided.

  After the "big hit C", the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, and a different value is set to the time-saving counter 203f according to the gaming state at the time of winning. When the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning is the normal state, the value of "10000" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and when the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning is the time saving state and the probability change state, the time saving counter 203f is set. A value of “0” is set. In other words, when the "big hit C" is won in the state where the normal state is set, the "big hit C" is won in the certain change state or the time saving state, while the positive change state is set after the big hit is completed. In this case, the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot.

  In this way, in the game state when the jackpot is won, even if the jackpot is of the same type, the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot is configured to be different, so that the player simply aims at the jackpot winning. Not only that, it is possible to watch the set game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the gaming state is set to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player. There are two conditions: the first setting condition in which the special symbol big hit change is started in the state where is set, and the second setting condition in which the big hit C is won in the state where the probable change state and the time saving state are set. are doing. In other words, the degree of expectation (probability) at which the latent state is set is made different depending on the game state when the jackpot is won. With this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to gradually increase the degree of expectation that a game state that is advantageous to the player is set in accordance with the progress of the game (in accordance with the set game state). It is possible to prevent the game from getting tired early.

  Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit C" is 40, so "big hit C" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 40% (40/100). "Big hit C" is one of the big hit types in which the number of rounds is small and the opening operation period is short in comparison with the above "big hit A" and "big hit B", and therefore it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of award balls that can be obtained. However, depending on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning, since it is the only jackpot type that can set the most probable state to the player as the gaming state set after the jackpot, it is set after the jackpot In the gaming state, the jackpot type is more advantageous than the jackpot A and the jackpot B.

  "Big hit D" is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "90 to 99". The "big hit D" has two rounds, and a big hit game (same as "big hit C") for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set.

  After the "big hit D", the probability change flag 203g is set to off and the value of "0" is set to the time saving counter 203f. That is, when the "big hit C" is won, the normal state is set after the end of the big hit. Since the “big hit D” has the same big hit game content as the “big hit C”, the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is configured to operate in the same opening operation as the small hit game. ing.

  After the "big hit D" is finished, the normal state is set as described above, so that the fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation) which has won the "big hit D" in the state where the probable change state is set is displayed. If executed, the small hit game is frequently performed during the big hit change, and then the big hit game is executed. Thereafter, the normal state is set.

  In other words, in the latent state (RUSH state) when the "big hit D" is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal state after the "big hit D" in which the same opening operation as the small hitting game is set ends. Is set, it is possible to make the player feel that the latent state in which the jackpot game is executed has ended.

  Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are ten counter values that are "big hit D". Therefore, if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit D" is determined. Is 10% (10/100). "Big hit D" is one of the big hit types in which the number of rounds is small and one opening operation period is short as compared with the above "big hit A" and "big hit B", and thus it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of award balls that can be obtained. Becomes Then, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning, since the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot, there is a disadvantage in the gaming state set after the jackpot. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment has four jackpot types ("jackpot A" to "jackpot D") as jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). I have. Of the two jackpot types ("big jackpot A" and "big jackpot B"), a jackpot game is executed in which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) that is opened only during the jackpot game is opened, In the other two big hit types ("big hit C", "big hit D"), a big hit game in which the same first attacker (first variable winning device 65) as the small hit game is opened is executed.

  That is, in the first embodiment, as the special symbol jackpot, the main jackpot game ("big jackpot A", "big jackpot B") for the purpose of causing the player to acquire a prize ball, and the gaming state is varied. , And for the purpose of making it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the jackpot has been won (to make it difficult to determine whether the small jackpot game is a jackpot game) (sub jackpot C, "Big hit D").

  Further, in the present embodiment, since it is not a big hit game but a game property that allows a player to obtain a prize ball by a small hit game, it is set to be difficult to obtain a large amount of prize balls during a big hit game. (Even if a jackpot game in which only a small amount of prize balls can be obtained is executed depending on the jackpot type), a jackpot game aimed at changing the playing state while suppressing the discomfort of the player is suppressed. Can be set.

  On the other hand, as the type of the big hit by the lottery of the second special symbol, “big hit E” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 4”. The “big hit E” has 15 rounds, and a big hit game that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are five counter values that are "big hit E", so if a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit E" is determined. Is 5% (5/100).

  Then, when "big hit E" is selected, a probable change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probable change flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, and the number of time savings of 10,000 times is reduced. Is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time reduction counter 203f). In other words, after the “big hit E” ends, the probable change state is set until the next big hit is won.

  "Big hit E" is one of the big hit types having the largest number of rounds, and thus is advantageous in terms of the number of award balls that can be obtained. In addition, since the big hit probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than in the normal state, a game state in which a more advantageous game can be performed than in the normal state is achieved. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent state is configured so that it is easier to provide an advantageous privilege to the player than the probability change state. It becomes a game state advantageous to.

  “Big hit F” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “5 to 64”. This “big hit F” has two rounds, and a big hit game that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that becomes “big hit F” is 60, so if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, “big hit F” is determined. Is 60% (60/100).

  Then, when the "big hit F" is selected, the probable change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probable change flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, and the number of time savings of 10,000 times is reduced. Is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time reduction counter 203f). In other words, after the “big hit F” ends, the probable change state is set until the next big hit is won.

  “Big hit F” is one of the big hit types with the smallest number of rounds, and thus is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. In addition, since the big hit probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than in the normal state, a game state in which a more advantageous game can be performed than in the normal state is achieved. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent state is configured so that it is easier to provide an advantageous privilege to the player than the probability change state. It becomes a game state advantageous to.

  "Big hit G" is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 99". This “big hit G” has two rounds, and a big hit game that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit G" is 35, so "big hit G" is determined when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. Is 35% (35/100).

  When the "big hit G" is selected, the normal state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF) regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, and the number of times of time reduction of 0 times is reduced. Is set (a value of 0 is set in the time reduction counter 203f).

  “Big hit G” is one of the big hit types with the smallest number of rounds, and thus is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the game state set after the big hit is the normal state, it is disadvantageous in the game state set after the big hit. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). The point that the probability that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot is 65% (65/100) is the same, but the 15 rounds are set as the jackpot game (the special figure 1 is 50%). , Special figure 2 is 5%), the rate at which the second attacker (second variable prize device 650) is selected as an opening target (special figure 1 is 50%, special figure 2 is 5%), and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot Is the time saving state and the probable change state (that is, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) when the value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f after the jackpot (25% for the special figure 1 and 65% for the special figure 2) Are configured to be different.

  In this way, by changing the jackpot game content and the game state after the jackpot according to the type of the special symbol that has won the jackpot, it is possible to provide various game properties to the player, Amusement can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described contents are configured to be different depending on the type of the special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that only some of the above-described contents are different. Other than the above, for example, by setting the number of rounds of the jackpot game to the number of rounds (for example, 7 rounds) that can be set only for the jackpot type corresponding to the special map 1, the number of rounds to be set is made different. Alternatively, the rate at which the probability change flag 203g is set to ON may be changed.

  Further, on condition that the ball has passed through a specific area (for example, an area through which a ball that has won the second variable prize device 650 can pass) during the jackpot game, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the end of the jackpot. In the gaming machine configured as described above, the jackpot type corresponding to Toku-zu 1 and the jackpot type corresponding to Toku-zu 2 may be configured to make the probability that a ball passes through a specific area different. Further, a data table for selecting a fluctuation pattern for indicating a lottery result in each game state set after the end of the jackpot may be configured to be different depending on the jackpot type.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 16A, in the present embodiment, both the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) can win in one round game. Although the upper limit is set to “10”, the upper limit may be different between the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). In addition, the upper limit of the opening operation in the round game may be made different depending on the type of the winning jackpot (or the type of the special symbol that has won the jackpot).

  Next, the details of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit type selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to in order to determine the type of the small hit when a small hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). In the small hit type selection table 202e, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of the value of the small hit type counter C5.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, “small hit A” is defined in association with the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of “0 to 93”. The "small hit A" is a small hit type in which the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state only once for 1.5 seconds during the small hit game.

  Of the 100 random numbers that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the random number value of "small hit A" is 94, so if a small hit is obtained in the second special symbol lottery, "small hit A" Is 94% (94/100).

  In addition, "small hit B" is associated with the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "94 to 98". The “small hit B” is a small hit type that sets the open state for 0.2 seconds × 6 times during the small hit game. Of the 100 random numbers that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are 5 random numbers that are "small hits B", so if a small hit occurs in the second special symbol lottery, "small hits B" Is 5% (5/100).

  Further, “small hit C” is defined in association with the value “99” of the small hit type counter C5. The “small hit C” is a small hit type for setting an open state of 0.06 seconds × 8 times during the small hit game. Since the random number value of "small hit C" is one of the 100 random numbers that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, "small hit C" is obtained when the small hit is won by the special symbol lottery. The ratio is 1% (1/100).

  Next, the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. In the variation pattern selection table 202f, as described above, a random value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display is defined from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the variation pattern selection table 202f includes a normal table 202f1 for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in a normal state, and a time reduction / probability variation for determining a variation pattern in a time reduction state and a probability variation state. At least a table 202f2 and a latent table 202f3 for determining a variation pattern in the latent state are included. The specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. In each of the tables shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the fluctuation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following description, the fluctuation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

  First, the normal table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. The normal table 202f1 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202f1. As shown in FIG. 18, the normal table 202f1 stores a random number value (variation type) for determining the type of variation pattern (variation time) for each special symbol type and each special symbol stop type (acceptance determination result). Counter value of the counter value CS1).

  Specifically, as a variation pattern determined when a large hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the variation type counter CS1 falls in a range of “0 to 50”, and normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the variation pattern. Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “51 to 100”, super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “101 to 150”, and super reach is associated with the range of “151 to 198”. C (30 seconds) is associated therewith.

  On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol is lost and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d). , The correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the selected variation pattern varies. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set to the range of “0 to 70”. An out-of-range (12 seconds) variation pattern is associated, and an out-of-range normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with a range of “71 to 150”. Further, as the value of the variation type counter CS1, the out-of-range super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "151 to 170", and the out-of-range super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "171 to 198". Have been.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is two or three, the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to a variation pattern that is short (8 seconds) within the range of “0 to 70”. As a value of the variation type counter CS1, a variation pattern of long (12 seconds) is associated with a range of "71 to 130", and a normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with a value of "131 to 170". ing. Also, as the value of the variation type counter CS1, the super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “171 to 185”, and the super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “185 to 198”. Have been.

  The process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol with reference to the normal table 202f1 (see S505 of FIG. 35) is based on the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 33). Is also executed later. Therefore, the normal table 202f1 is not referred to when there are four reserved balls.

  As described above, when the number of reserved balls is small (0 or 1), a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more easily selected than when the number of reserved balls is large (2 or 3). With this configuration, when the number of reserved balls is small, it is possible to secure a time for storing the reserved balls and make the fluctuation display hard to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting tired of the game. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is large, the fluctuation time becomes short, and it becomes difficult to accumulate the reserved balls. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit (four), the balls are further moved to the first entrance 64. Can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that the player has lost.

  On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long change A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the change type counter CS1 can take, If the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of range, the out-of-range long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Thereby, in the normal state, when right-handed and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set each time, so that the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated as compared with left-handed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the player makes a right-handed operation in normal times.

  Next, the details of the time saving / probability change table 202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. The time saving / probability change table 202f2 is a table that is referred to when a variation pattern is selected when a high probability state of a normal symbol (that is, a time saving state or a probable change state) is set as a game state.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, the time saving / probability change table 202f2 is used to determine the type (variation time) of the variation pattern for each special symbol type and each special symbol stop type (acceptance determination result). A random number value (counter value of the variation type counter value CS1) is defined. Note that the time saving / probability changing table 202f2 is different from the normal table 202f1 described above with reference to FIG. 18 in that a different changing pattern is not selected according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. are doing.

  That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, it is difficult to always secure the reserved ball of the first special symbol because the player plays the game aiming at the upper first entrance 64b1 while performing the left-handed game. There is a possibility that a period in which the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed (the first special symbol does not change) may occur. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, the normal table 202f1 is configured so that a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is easily selected. Thus, in the normal state, the state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed continues for a long time, and the problem that the player gets tired of the game can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the time-saving / probability changing table 202f2 shown in FIG. 19A performs a left-handed game and a game in which a ball is made to enter the lower first entrance 64b2, or during a probable changing state. This is a referenced data table. During this time-saving state or the probable change state, the electric accessory 64a is frequently opened, so that a game state in which the reserved ball of the first special symbol can be easily stored.

  As described above, when the game state in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily stored is set, and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small as in the case of the above-described normal table 202f1, the variation is made. If a configuration that makes it easy to select a variation pattern having a long time is added, the game is rested, and the first special symbol (special figure 1) variation executed when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol decreases. Becomes longer, and it becomes difficult to efficiently play a game during the time reduction state or the probable change state. Thus, in the present embodiment, a game state (time saving state, probable change state) in which a reserved ball of the first special symbol can be easily stored, that is, a variation pattern table (time saving The probable variation table 202f2) is set so that the variation pattern selected according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol does not differ (when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, a variation pattern having a long variation time is not selected. ) Make up. As a result, the game in the time saving state and the probable change state can be efficiently executed.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if a jackpot is won in a state where the jackpot is set, the jackpot changes from the jackpot to the latent state at the timing when the jackpot change is started. It is configured to shift to. Specifically, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed in a state where the probability change state is set, and when the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) is a big hit, the time saving / probability change table 202f2 is displayed. With reference to the case where the winning special fluctuation (600 seconds) is selected, while the winning special fluctuation (600 seconds) is being executed, the game state becomes a latent state, and when the winning special fluctuation ends, the special map 1 is displayed. The special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, and the big hit game is started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to execute the lottery and the fluctuation display at the same time, while the latent state is set (the special fluctuation in the special figure 1). Is executed), the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable display period (variable time) for indicating the result of the lottery of the second special symbol is defined as a short period (1 second) only for the latent state, and only for the second special symbol. It is configured to win a small hit. With this configuration, while the latent state is being set (while the special change of the special figure 1 is being executed), the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently performed, so that the player Can get many prize balls.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 19A, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won in a state where the probable change state is set, the value of the obtained change type counter CS1 is set to 60 seconds to 600 seconds. The configuration is such that a variation time of seconds is set, and this variation time is directly the duration of the latent state. Therefore, as a result of the special symbol lottery result, the player can pay attention to the selected fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) as well as the result of the win (win / fail judgment result) of the jackpot, The interest of the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the time saving / probability change table 202f2 is referred to, the fluctuation time is set to 60 seconds (1 minute) regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the hit long change (60 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the change type counter CS1 can take. 2 If the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long change (60 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the change type counter CS1 can take. When the special symbol lottery result is out of order, the outlier long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this way, when the player makes a right-hand in the time saving state and the probable change state, and when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set each time, so that the game efficiency is extremely higher than that of the left-hand Getting worse. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method of right-handing in the time saving state or the probable change state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19B, the details of the latency table 202f3 will be described. The latent probability table 202f3 is a table that is referred to when a variation pattern is selected when a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set as a gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (b), the latent probability table 202f3 has a random number for determining the type of the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time) for each of the special symbol type and the special symbol stop type (win / fail judgment result). A numerical value (a counter value of the variation type counter value CS1) is defined. Note that the latent probability table 202f3 is configured such that different variation patterns are not selected according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, similarly to the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 described above.

  The latent probability table 202f3 is used to select the variation pattern of the second special symbol (Tokuji 2) during the period when the jackpot variation of the special figure 1 is executed during the probability variation state, or when the time saving state or the probability variation state is selected. At the time of winning the jackpot which is the jackpot type of "jackpot C", and selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed after the jackpot game ends. Referenced.

  This latent probability table 202f3 is selected when the jackpot has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol with respect to the contents specified in the time saving / probability changing table 202f2 described above with reference to FIG. In that the value of the variation type counter CS1 defined for each variation pattern is different from the variation type counter CS1 in that the variation time of each variation pattern selected in the second special symbol lottery is varied, Otherwise, it is the same. A detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (b), as a variation pattern determined when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the variation type counter CS1 falls within the range of “0 to 39” and the normal variation (60 Second), a super variation (180 seconds) is associated with a range of “40 to 119”, and a special variation (600 seconds) is associated with a range of “120 to 198”.

  On the other hand, if the lottery of the first special symbol is lost and the latent probability table 202f3 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d) is set. ) And out-of-place middle fluctuation (30 seconds) regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the latent table 202f3 is referred to, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the hit short variation (1 second) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the variation type counter CS1. 2 If the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value in the whole range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. If the special symbol lottery result is out of order, the outlier short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Thereby, it is possible to execute lottery (change) of the second special symbol during the latent state.

  Next, details of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the ordinary symbol variation pattern table 202g is a table that is referred to when an ordinary symbol lottery is executed to select an ordinary symbol variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 20, the general figure fluctuation pattern table 202g includes a range of the value of the general figure fluctuation type counter CS2 and a fluctuation pattern (variation time) for each game state at the time when the ordinary symbol lottery is executed. Are defined in association with each other.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, when the gaming state is the normal state, the latent state, that is, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the entire range of values that can be taken by the ordinary figure variation type counter CS2 ( 0 to 198) is associated with a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds. Similarly, when the gaming state is the probable change state, a change pattern with a change time of 10 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that can be taken by the general-purpose change type counter CS2.

  On the other hand, when the game state is the time saving state, the probable change state, that is, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the general figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of “0 to 198” and the fluctuation time is 3 seconds. Patterns are associated.

  In the first embodiment, a plurality of variations of the variation pattern are provided only in the latent state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state or the probable state, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the ordinary symbol may have a variation. When the lottery of the ordinary symbol is executed in the latent state, the fluctuation time is 2 seconds of 1 second or 3 seconds. Any one of the types may be set. The variation time is not limited to two types, and a configuration may be adopted in which more variation times can be selected. The more variation the variation time has, the harder it is for the player to predict the variation time, so that it is possible to make the player make a right-handed more reliably during the latent state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is set based on the game state and the acquired value of the ordinary symbol variation type counter CS2. Alternatively, a configuration in which the variation time is changed based on the number of special symbol lotteries, or a configuration in which the variation time of the ordinary symbol is set by a method combining the various configurations described above may be used. Specifically, from the transition of the gaming state to the latent state to the execution of the special symbol lottery a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), 1 second is normally set as the fluctuation time of the symbol, and thereafter (for example, , 51 to 100 times), 3 seconds may be set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

  In this manner, the number of special figure fluctuations (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) from the end of the previous jackpot is measured, and the fluctuation time corresponding to the measurement result is selected and executed. During the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while having a sense of expectation so that more advantageous variation time (for example, shorter variation time) is executed more. it can.

  Also, during the execution of the odd number lottery of the special symbol after the gaming state shifts to the latent state, 1 second is usually set as the fluctuation time of the symbol, otherwise (odd number) Ordinarily, 3 seconds may be set as the fluctuation time of the symbol. In this way, by changing the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the fluctuation time, so that it is more reliable during the latent state. It is possible to make continuous right-handed. In this case, in the state where the special symbol lottery is not executed, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is longer (compared to the case where the special symbol lottery is executed), or the special symbol lottery is not performed. It is good to constitute so that the fluctuation | variation time of a normal symbol may become long, so that the number which hold | maintains a lottery may be small.

  In addition, when setting the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol based on the number of retained balls of the ordinary symbol, it is preferable to configure so that the longer the fluctuation number of the ordinary symbol is, the longer the fluctuation time becomes. With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls of ordinary symbols is hard to accumulate and the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted to easily accumulate the number of retained balls of ordinary symbols per unit time Usually, the number of symbol lotteries can be made uniform.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol holding ball. Number counter 203e, time saving counter 203f, probability change flag 203g, special figure 1 big hit flag 203h, special figure 1 big hit flag 203i, winning state storage area 203j, small hit flag 203k, special figure 1 change time counter 203m, special figure 2 change Time counter 203n, big hit flag 203o, small hit flag 203p, special figure 1 change stop flag 203r, special figure 2 change stop flag 203s, ordinary figure short change flag 203t, winning counter 203u, special figure 1 provisional stop flag 203v, It has at least a memory area 203z. .

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). In the area, respective values of a first random number counter C1, a first type counter C2, a small type counter C5, and a variation type counter CS1 are stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of each counter is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to first holding area). Of the vacant areas in the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are changed to the execution area. Is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the second special symbol execution area 203b, similarly to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a determination value (counter value) for executing a special symbol lottery is stored. In the second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the winning start to the second entrance 640 is detected is stored.

  Similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area (normal symbol holding ball execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ). Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) Are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) in the vacant areas indicated by ()). That is, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored in another reserved area as in the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process of packing the winning data into the reserved area having the smaller area number is performed. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is a variable display of the special symbol (the first symbol display device 37, which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 up to four times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value becomes 4. Are incremented by one (see S1704 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S303 in FIG. 33).

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of variable display in the first special symbol is retained) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (S304 in FIG. 33, FIG. 47). See S1705). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  Each time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 displays the variable display retained in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the number of retained balls can be obtained. As a result, the number of balls for the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual variable display held for the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of balls has deviated from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e counts the number of holding balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times M of the variable display is retained in the ordinary symbol) is set to zero, and the ball passes through the through gate 67 to increase the number of retained balls of the variable display. Each time it is performed, 1 is added to the maximum value 4 (see S1904 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by one every time when the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is newly performed (see S1805 in FIG. 48).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number of times M of the variable display is held in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained. The acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S1905 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the two through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c (S1903 in FIG. 49: No).

  The time reduction counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of times the remaining special symbols change in the time reduction state. After the end of the jackpot, a value corresponding to the type of the jackpot that has been won is set in the time-saving counter 203f. Then, the time-saving counter 203f is decremented by 1 in the gaming state update processing executed immediately after the start of the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set (see S308 in FIG. 36). If the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more when performing a lottery of a normal symbol, it is determined that the time saving of the normal symbol is in a state of a time saving, and the winning or non-acceptance determination of the normal symbol is executed by referring to a table for a high probability time. . On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state, and the winning / non-principle determination of the symbol is executed with reference to the low probability table.

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol high-probability state is set, and when set to on, indicates that the special symbol is in the high-probability state. In other words, when the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, the game state is a probability change state (special symbol: high probability state, ordinary symbol: high probability state) or a latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state, Normal pattern: low probability state) is set.

  The probability change flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot if the winning type of the hit is a jackpot for setting a probability change state or a latent state after the end of the jackpot (S2402 in FIG. 54: Yes). 54, S2403). When the symbol indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit is stopped and displayed, the symbol is set to off (see S806 in FIG. 38).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the special symbol high-probability state is set based on the special symbol jackpot winning, and the special symbol high-probability state is continued until the next big jackpot is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a special symbol after the special symbol high probability state (special symbol high-accuracy state) is set as the special symbol high-accuracy termination condition for ending the special symbol high-probability state When the number of times of change (the number of times of special figure change) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the probable change flag 203g may be set to off. In this case, in order to set the timing of setting the probability change flag 203g to OFF, a storage means for storing in advance the number of times of the variation of the special figure as the special figure high precision end condition, Measuring means for measuring the number of special figure fluctuations, and end determination for judging whether the number of special figure fluctuations measured by the measuring means satisfies the number of special figure fluctuations (special figure high accuracy termination condition) stored in the storage means. Means may be provided.

  Furthermore, a plurality of special figure high-accuracy termination conditions are prepared, for example, a special figure 1 high-accuracy termination condition that can be established based only on the number of times of the first special symbol change in the special figure high-accuracy state, and a variation of the second special symbol. Various conditions, such as special figure 2 high-accuracy termination conditions that can be satisfied based only on the number of times, and lottery termination conditions that can be satisfied when the special symbol lottery result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result that wins a small win) The special figure high-accuracy termination condition may be facilitated, and the probability change flag 203g may be set to off when any of the special figure high-accuracy termination conditions is satisfied.

  The special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 matches the big hit determination value at the start of the change. (See S407 in FIG. 34). The special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit (S806 in FIG. 38).

  When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends in a state where the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is on, a process of removing the second special symbol and forcibly stopping at the symbol is executed (see S804 in FIG. 38). . Thus, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is a big hit.

  The special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 matches the big hit determination value at the start of the change. (See S1007 in FIG. 40). The special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit (S1506 in FIG. 45).

  When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends in a state where the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is on, a process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol with the symbol is executed (see S1004 of FIG. 40). . Thus, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is a big hit.

  The winning state storage area 203j is a storage area for storing information indicating a gaming state at the time of winning a jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability change flag 203g is off), the normal state is stored in the winning state storage area 203j. "00H" is stored as information indicating On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probable change state (if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more and the probable change flag 203g is on), the probable change state is indicated in the winning state storage area 203j. “01H” is stored as information. If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability variable flag 203g is on), the latent state is stored in the winning state storage area 203j. “02H” is stored as the indicating information.

  The information stored in the winning state storage area 203j is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting a gaming state after the jackpot has ended (see S2404 in FIG. 54).

  The small hit flag 203k is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of the change. This flag is set (see S1102 in FIG. 41). The small hit flag 203k is turned off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit (see S1605 in FIG. 46). When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends with the small hit flag 203k turned on, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (subtraction of the counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is temporarily stopped). A process of stopping (stopping) is executed (see S1603 in FIG. 46). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem in which a large hit is started by the lottery of the first special symbol while the small hit of the second special symbol is being executed and the big hit is started during the small hit. it can.

  The special figure 1 fluctuating time counter 203m and the special figure 2 fluctuating time counter 203n are counters for measuring the fluctuating time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. When a symbol variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended based on the result of counting the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n.

  The big hit flag 203o is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit is being made. When the big hit flag 203o is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, and when it is off, it indicates that there is no big hit. This big hit flag 203o is set to ON when a big hit start is set. On the other hand, it is set to off in the jackpot end processing executed at the time of jackpot end.

  The small hit flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not a small hit is being made. If the small hit flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in small hit, and if it is off, it indicates that no small hit is in progress. The small hit flag 203p is set to ON when the start of the small hit is set (see S1406 in FIG. 221). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the small hit (see S2512 in FIG. 232).

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that only the second special symbol wins the small hit, and when the small hit is won (when the small hitting flag 203p is set to ON), the second special symbol wins. It is configured to interrupt the change display of one special symbol. In other words, among a plurality of types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), one of the special symbols (second special symbol) is won by lottery, and the small hitting flag 203p is set to ON. In this state, the variable display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) is not completed, so that the player can play the game by paying attention to the small hit game. In addition, during the small hit game, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from ending and starting the big hit game.

  The special figure 2 change stop flag 203 s is a flag indicating a period from when the change of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) in the stop pattern of the big hit to when the big hit is started. When the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided even when a new ball enters the second entrance 640. (See S901: Yes in FIG. 39). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON when the second special symbol is detached and forcedly stopped at the symbol (see S802 in FIG. 38), and the processing for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. In this case, it is set to off (S902 in FIG. 39).

  The normal symbol short variation flag 203t is a flag for indicating that the variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is a short variation (variation for 3 seconds), and is turned on to set the ordinary symbol (second symbol). (A symbol) is executed. The ordinary figure short variation flag 203t determines that the timing for setting the ordinary symbol variation time in the ordinary symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) is during the time reduction state (medium hours) (S1811 in FIG. 48: Yes). When the variation time (short variation) of 3 seconds is set, it is set to ON (S1814 in FIG. 48), and it is determined that the variation time of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) has elapsed (S1816 in FIG. 48). If it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) this time is a win (S1818 in FIG. 48: Yes), it is referred to (S1819 in FIG. 48).

  Here, when it is determined that the ordinary figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819 in FIG. 48: Yes), it is determined whether the present time is in the time reduction state (middle time reduction) (S1821 in FIG. 48). ), When it is determined that the vehicle is in the time-saving state (medium time) (S1821: FIG. 48: Yes), an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a (FIG. 48). 48, S1822). Note that the ordinary figure short variation flag 203t is set to off (S1820 in FIG. 48) after it is determined in the ordinary symbol variation processing (S106 in FIG. 48) that it is set to on.

  As described above, the game state at the start of the change of the normal symbol (second symbol) (when the variable time is set) and the opening state of the electric accessory 64a after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) elapses. Since the opening state (long opening) that is advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a only when both the gaming state and the time reduction state are set, the plurality of gaming states (the normal state) The change of the ordinary symbol (lottery) executed across the time-saving state can surely prevent the electric accessory 64a from being opened for a long time. (Open) to the player can be suppressed from being excessively provided.

  The winning counter 203u is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (entered) the first specific winning opening 65a in the small hitting game round. When the value of the winning counter 203u reaches the upper limit value of 10, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied, and the round is ended (see S2706 in FIG. 57). In each round of the jackpot, even if the value of the winning counter 203u is less than 10, the round is ended when the round period set in the round is reached. The value of the winning counter 203u is incremented by one each time a ball is detected in the first specific winning opening 65a during the small hit round effective period. At the end of each round, the value is reset to zero.

  Although not described in detail, the above-described winning counter 203u counts not only the small hit game but also the number of balls that have won the second specific winning opening 650a in each round during the big hit game. It is also used for

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened as the game content of the small hit game is set to 1.5 seconds, and the end condition of the round established by the winning number is set to 10 pieces. are doing. In other words, the effective period of the round game (1.5 seconds) elapses until ten balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a during the small hitting game (until the round end condition for the winning number is satisfied). Will be. Therefore, since the period of the small hit game can be made constant, the effect that straddles the small hit game (the period from the start of the change of one special symbol to the end of the change of the other special symbol via the small hit game) The effect period of a series of effects to be executed can be determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to easily synchronize the fluctuation timing of the special symbol with the execution timing of the effect, and to enhance the effect of the effect.

  The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1, and stops the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time when it is set to ON. When the state is set from on to off, the updating (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

  This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in which the lottery result is a small hit (S1602 in FIG. 46), and the special symbol fluctuation processing (FIG. 32 (see S202 in FIG. 32). As a result of the reference, if it is set to ON, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 in the same manner as during the change is executed (S203 in FIG. 32). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the fluctuation display is continuously executed. Become. Thus, the fact that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped can be notified by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v to ON. Then, when it is determined in the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 37) that the flag is set to on (S701 in FIG. 37: Yes), the flag is set to off (S703 in FIG. 37).

  In the present embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be able to win the small hit, so the special symbol for which the variable display is temporarily stopped based on the win of the small hit is the first special symbol. In the case where the lottery of the first special symbol can be won with a small hit, the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag may be provided to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol. good.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, the one special symbol is stopped in a combination indicating the big hit (based on the fact that the big hit game is executed). T), the process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation display of the other special symbol, and if the result of the lottery of one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol is stopped with a combination indicating the small hit. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hitting game ends).

  That is, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes according to the lottery result of the one special symbol. With such a configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes a game result (for example, a jackpot) that is most advantageous to the player, and while the variable display for indicating the game result is being executed, the other is displayed. The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and the big hit can be suppressed from being erased by the small hit.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on various tables provided in the ROM 202 and flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transition shown in FIG. 11 can be realized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 22A, the ROM 222 has at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, a stop display mode selection table 222b, and an additional effect selection table 222c.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a indicates that the sound ramp control device 113 is configured to determine the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. ) Is used to determine the details of the variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, various variations can be determined. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by main controller 110.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19 (a), when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol in the state where the probable change state is set, the fluctuation time is normal fluctuation and fluctuation per 60 seconds. The main controller 110 outputs a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to one of the super fluctuation with a time of 180 seconds and the special fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds, and the voice lamp controller 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command (variation time Is set.

  Here, as a fluctuating effect corresponding to the special fluctuation (600 seconds), the first 60 seconds executes the first stage effect mode (for example, an effect of defeating the first enemy), and the second effect is executed for a period of 60 to 180 seconds. A stage effect mode (for example, an effect for defeating a second enemy) is executed, and a variable effect for executing a third stage effect mode (an effect for defeating a third enemy) in a period of 180 seconds to 600 seconds is set. As a fluctuating effect corresponding to the fluctuation (180 seconds), the first 60 seconds executes the first stage effect mode (for example, an effect of defeating the first enemy), and the second stage effect mode during a period of 60 seconds to 180 seconds. (For example, an effect that is performed by a second enemy) is set, and the first 60 seconds of the effect mode (for example, the first enemy is changed) as a variable effect corresponding to the normal change (60 seconds). Defeat ) Change production to be executed is set to.

  In this way, by setting the effect mode so as to put a break in the variable effect executed in accordance with the stage of the variable time that can be set as a result of the special symbol lottery result, the variable pattern set this time for the player It is possible to entertain the fluctuating effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while predicting the type of the effect, and enhance the effect.

  In the case of performing the above-described variable production, the remaining time display mode (for example, the timing at which the production mode can shift to the next stage) for allowing the player to grasp the remaining time for the production period set as each stage An effect mode in which the remaining time up to the countdown display is displayed) may be displayed. This allows the player to know in advance at least the period during which the variable effect is continuously performed (the period during which the latent state is continuously set), so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. it can.

  In addition, a plurality of types of enemies appearing during the fluctuating effect are provided, and depending on the type of the appearing enemies, the degree of expectation that the fluctuating effect shifts to the next stage (the rate at which the effect mode that wins the enemy is selected) and It is preferable that the content of the jackpot game to be executed after the current fluctuation display ends and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game can be suggested.

  In addition, in this case, for example, when the enemy A is displayed as the enemy type, if the fluctuation pattern set this time is a hit super fluctuation (180 seconds), the jackpot type most advantageous to the player is It may be configured to indicate that it is selected, and if the fluctuation pattern is a hit special fluctuation (600 seconds), indicate that a type other than the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is selected. With this configuration, it is possible to determine the effect mode (the type of the enemy) of the variable effect by combining a plurality of elements for determining whether or not to give a benefit advantageous to the player. The effect can be further enhanced.

  The stop display mode selection table 222b indicates that the latent state is set as the game state, and that a period (hereinafter, referred to as a rush period) in which a small hit game can be frequently executed by lottery of the second special symbol is set. 9 is a data table that is referred to when selecting a stop display mode of effect symbols (see FIGS. 7A and 8B) for notifying a user. The stop display mode selection table 222b is configured to select a different stop display mode according to the jackpot type won in the first special symbol lottery and the length of the rush period to be executed.

  Here, the contents of the stop display mode selection table 222b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the stop display mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 23 (a), the stop display mode selection table 222b allows the player to predict the degree of advantage of each big hit type (the number of rounds, the game state set after the big hit game) and the length of the rush period. It is stipulated that the stop display mode of the effect symbol is set so that it can be performed.

  Specifically, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special map 1), the player wins the jackpot A, which is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player, and stores the remaining time storage area 223p (the length of the rush period In the case where the information stored in the information storage area) is “0 to 60 seconds”, that is, when the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h falls within the range of “0 to 39”. The stop display mode “111” is defined, the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range of “40 to 79”, and the stop display mode “666” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”. .

  In addition, the information that is won in the “big hit A” and stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) is “61 seconds to 300 seconds”, that is, the rush period is 61 seconds. If it is within 300 seconds, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of the acquired effect counter 223h of "0 to 39", and the stop display mode "333" is set in the range of "40 to 79". Is defined, the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) is stored. If the rush period is “301 seconds or more”, that is, the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode “777” is defined in the range of the acquired effect counter 223h of “0 to 39”, and “40 to 79”. "of In circumference, defined stop display mode "777", the range of "80 to 99" is defined stop display mode "VVV".

  Then, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special map 1), the player wins the jackpot B, which is a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player, and stores the remaining time storage area 223p (information indicating the length of the rush period). If the information stored in the area is “0 to 60 seconds”, that is, the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is set in the range of “0 to 39”, and the stop display mode is set. “222” is defined, the stop display mode “444” is defined in the range of “40 to 79”, and the stop display mode “666” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”.

  In addition, the information that is won in the “big hit B” and is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) is “61 seconds to 300 seconds”, that is, the rush period is 61 seconds. If it is within 300 seconds, the stop display mode “444” is defined in the range of the obtained effect counter 223h of “0 to 39”, and the stop display mode “666” is set in the range of “40 to 79”. Is defined, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) If “301 seconds or more”, that is, the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range of the obtained effect counter 223h of “0 to 39”, and “40 to 79”. "of In circumference, defined stop display mode "333", the range of "80 to 99" is defined stop display mode "333".

  Finally, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the jackpot is won for the jackpot C, which is the second most advantageous jackpot type, or the jackpot D, which is the most unfavorable jackpot type. If the information stored in the time storage area 223p (the area storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, if the rush period is within 60 seconds, the acquired effect counter 223h In the range of “0 to 39”, the stop display mode “444” is defined, in the range of “40 to 79”, the stop display mode “666” is defined, and in the range of “80 to 99”, The stop display mode “444” is defined.

  In addition, the information that is won in the “big hit C” and “big hit D” and stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (an area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is “61 seconds to 300 seconds”, that is, If the rush period is within the range of 61 to 300 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of “0 to 39”, the stop display mode “666” is defined, and in the range of “40 to 79”, The stop display mode "111" is defined, and the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (an area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period). If the displayed information is “301 seconds or more”, that is, the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode “333” is defined in a range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is “0 to 39”. , In the range of 40 to 99 ", it is defined stop display mode" 777 ".

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the rush period is started, the length of the rush period, and after the rush period ends, by the stop display mode of the effect symbols displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The content of the jackpot to be executed (jackpot type) is indicated to the player. This allows the player to predict the future game content by grasping the stop display mode of the effect symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is defined that the stop display mode of the effect symbol has a predetermined rule, and specifically, the stop display mode of the effect symbol is "even symbol", "odd symbol", It is stipulated that the benefits given to the player in the order of “777” and “VVV” increase (the rush period becomes longer, and the jackpot type becomes more advantageous). In this manner, by giving the predetermined design the stop display mode of the effect symbols, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, since it is configured to select the stop display mode of the effect symbol by combining the jackpot type and the length of the rush period, for example, the stop display mode of the effect symbol “111” is the most advantageous for the player. Only when the jackpot type “jackpot A” is set, even if the rush period is within 60 seconds, the selection is made. Therefore, when “111” is displayed, the player In contrast to the novel playability that the rush period is desired to end in 60 seconds, that is, the playability that normally requires a longer rush period, the jackpot type and the length of the rush period are combined. By displaying the stop display mode, it is possible to add a game property that desires a game result (short rush period) opposite to the normal game result.

  In addition, when "VVV" is displayed as the stop display mode of the effect symbol, it indicates that both the jackpot type and the length of the rush period have been selected to be the most advantageous for the player, It is possible to play the game with confidence.

  In the present embodiment, the timing of selecting the stop display mode of the effect symbol (the timing of stopping and displaying the effect symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) with reference to the stop display mode selection table 222b according to the game state is set. It is configured to be different. Specifically, at the time when the latent state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts in the state where the probability change state is set), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is changing. When it is determined that the second special symbol does not fluctuate, that is, when the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the latent state is set, the big hit variation of the first special symbol is changed. The effect design is configured to stop and display the effect symbol based on the start.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is changing at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the jackpot change of the first special symbol starts in the state where the probability changing state is set), In other words, unless the random display of the second special symbol currently being executed is terminated, if the lottery of the second special symbol cannot be executed in the state where the latent state is set, the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is displayed. It is configured to stop and display the effect symbol based on the timing when is finished.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in a state where the latent symbol is set immediately after the production symbol is stopped and the rush period is started. A game in a latent state can be performed without giving.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the second special symbol fluctuates at the point in time when the latent state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts in the state where the probable change state is set). In the case where it is determined, the length of the rush period from the timing at which the change display of the second special symbol being executed is ended is determined, and if the determination result is within a predetermined time, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. (The effect indicating that the rush period has started) is not executed. As a result, even if the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, and the rush period has been started (the rush game has been started), but the small hitting game is executed, the rush period ends. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the start of the rush period (rush game) is configured to be displayed in an effect symbol similar to the third symbol, so that the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol is displayed. It can be made to seem as if the rush game was executed based on the stop display of the symbol. Further, even when the length of the rush period is within the predetermined time and the effect symbols are not stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress giving a great uncomfortable feeling to the player.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the timing at which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed is the timing at which the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, or the timing of the second special symbol being executed at the timing when the latent state is set. Although the timing at which the fluctuation display of the symbols is stopped is used, the effect symbols may be stopped and displayed at other timings. For example, the effect symbols are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The winning information command indicating the winning information is analyzed, and if it is determined in advance that the jackpot change will be executed in the next change, immediately before the jackpot change is executed (the third symbol in the previous change of the jackpot change). May be configured to stop and display the effect symbol at the timing when the icon is stopped and displayed). With this configuration, it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol immediately after the latent state is set.

  As described above, when a configuration in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed before the jackpot change is executed and the rush game is started is used, the second input is performed from the timing when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. When playing a game aiming at the ball opening 640 (right-handed game), it is preferable that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed before the next big hit change is started. As a result, as a result of performing a right-handed game based on the stop display of the effect symbol, the second state is set before the latent state is set (before the jackpot change is started), that is, during the certain state. It is possible to prevent a situation where the lottery of the special symbol is executed and the period during which the rush game is executed is shortened.

  The additional effect selection table 222c is used to select an effect mode (additional effect mode) when resuming the variable display of the first special symbol temporarily stopped by winning the small hit in the second special symbol lottery. The data table to be referred to is configured such that a different additional effect mode (treasure box (see FIG. 7B)) is selected according to the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol after the restart. Here, the contents specified in the additional effect selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 23B, in the additional effect selection table 222c, a different additional effect type is selected based on the period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o and the additional effect counter 223i. The data content is defined as described above, and the additional effect mode corresponding to the selected additional effect type is executed, whereby the player predicts the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (the remaining period of the rush period). It is configured to obtain.

  Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period A (less than 5 seconds), the acquired value of the additional effect counter 223i is “0 to 99”. , The additional effect type “none” is defined, and “additional effect A” is defined in the range “100 to 198”. When the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period B (5 to 60 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is “0 to 99”. , An additional effect type “additional effect A” is defined, and “additional effect B” is defined in a range of “100 to 198”. If the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period C (60 seconds or more), the acquired value of the additional effect counter 223i is in the range of “0 to 99”. , An additional effect type “additional effect B” is defined, and “additional effect C” is defined in the range of “100 to 198”.

  Here, when the “additional effect A” is set, the display mode of the treasure chest 812 (see FIG. 7B) displayed during the rush period is changed to the tattered display mode. By grasping the tattered display mode, the player can predict that the rush period is remaining short. When “additional effect B” is set, the treasure chest 812 (see FIG. 7B) in the normal display mode is displayed. Also, a luxurious display mode is set. When “none” is selected, an effect is set in which the treasure box 812 is not displayed during the remaining rush period.

  Note that, in the additional effect selection table 222c (FIG. 23B) shown in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the remaining fluctuation time of the rush period and the additional effect type are completely associated with each other, but this is not limiting. Without the possibility, for example, it is configured such that “additional effect C” is set in the case of the period B or “additional effect A” or “none” is set in the case of the period C. Is also good. This makes it possible to execute a surprising effect for the player.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the stop display mode of the effect symbol displayed at the timing when the rush game is started in the latent state, the composite game information combining the rush period and the jackpot type is played. And the additional information during the rush period is provided to the player with the game information indicating the remaining period of the rush period. This allows the player to comprehensively determine the stop display mode of the effect symbol executed as the composite game information and the effect mode of the additional effect, thereby allowing more detailed game content to be predicted.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 change start flag 223d, a special figure 2 change start flag 223e, and a special figure 1 stop Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, effect counter 223h, additional effect counter 223i, state setting area 223j, remaining short time area 223k, special figure 1 variable time counter 223m, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n, remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, remaining time storage area 223p, card notification flag 223q, card notification enable flag 223s, rush display completed flag 223t, prize ball counter 223u, power supply The disconnect flag 223y and the other memory area 223z are at least It is provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the command is executed. To be more specific, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 60) of the sound ramp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is performed. , The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 detects a winning start with respect to the first ball entrance 64, a first random number counter C1 obtained in accordance with the starting winning, a first hit type counter C2, From the values of the small hit type counter C5 and the change type counter CS1, various information (whether or not, a big hit type in the case of a big hit, a change pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is obtained. The main control device 110 predicts (estimates), and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, a fluctuation pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and receives the prize information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223b. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area with the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (variation display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). This is a counter for counting the number of pending balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effect of the first special symbol up to four times for each type of special symbol.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c indicates the number of reserved balls in the special symbol. Is managed for each type.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 obtains the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command. Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4212 in FIG. 60). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball count command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c, and also stores the first special symbol retained after storage. In order to notify the value of the ball number counter 223 c to the display control device 114, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball count command, the display reserve value indicates the value of the reserved ball count indicated by the command, that is, the value of the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the ball number symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110. it can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The special figure 1 change start flag 223d and the special figure 2 change start flag 223e are respectively set when the change pattern command of the first special symbol and the change pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 are received. It is turned on (see S4206 and S4209 in FIG. 60) and turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5102 and S5108 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 change start flag 223d and the special figure 2 change start flag 223e are turned on, a display change pattern command is set based on the change pattern extracted from the received change pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g are provided when the stop type command of the first special symbol and the stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 are received. Are turned on (see S4301 in FIG. 61), and are turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command. It is determined.

  The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223h is configured by a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, every time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by one and updated. Is done.

  The additional effect counter 223i is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The additional effect counter 223i is configured by a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by one. Be updated.

  The state setting area 223j is a storage area in which information according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. Each time a status command output from main controller 110 is received, information corresponding to the status of pachinko machine 10 indicated by the status command is stored in status setting area 223j (see S4405 in FIG. 62). . More specifically, in the state setting area 223j, a 2-bit storage area is allocated, and in order from the most significant bit, whether or not the special symbol is in the high probability state, whether or not the normal symbol is in the high probability state Is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 223j is “11B”, it means a probable change state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol). It means a certain state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol). On the other hand, “00H” means a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol).

  By updating the status setting area 223j in response to the status command output from the main control device 110, the status of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the sound lamp control device 113.

  The remaining short-time count area 223k is a storage area for storing the remaining count of the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. The remaining working hours area 223k is updated to the number of times notified by the remaining working hours command output each time the value of the working hours counter 203f is updated in the main controller 110 (see S4802 in FIG. 66). As a result, the value stored in the remaining working hours area 223k can be updated in synchronization with the value of the working hours counter 203f of the main control device 110. The actual number of times saved by main controller 110 can be matched.

  The special figure 1 variable time counter 223m and the special figure 2 variable time counter 223n indicate the corresponding variable time when each variable display is set (executed) in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 69). Each time a value is set and various counter updating processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed, each value is decremented by 1 (see S5402 and S5404 in FIG. 72). Note that the period from when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received from the main control device 110 to when the special figure 1 resume command is received is a case where various counter updating processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed. Also, the configuration is such that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is not decremented by one.

  Then, in the temporary stop-related processing (see S4220 in FIG. 67) executed when it is determined that the temporary stop-related command is received in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 60), This is referred to (see S4903 in FIG. 67).

  The remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is a storage area for storing the remaining time of the rush period, that is, information indicating the remaining time of the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol. In this remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol fluctuation display is set, and the temporarily stopped first special symbol fluctuation is displayed. The remaining period information stored is referred to when setting an additional effect when resuming the variable display of the symbol.

  The card notification completion flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting alert screen (see FIG. 10A) is displayed (notifying), and is turned on when the card forgetting alert screen is displayed. Is set.

  The card notification possible flag 223 s is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) can be displayed (notified), and the card forgetting warning screen can be displayed. Is set to ON when certain conditions are satisfied.

  The rush display completed flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not the rush game has been started in the state where the latent state is set, and a rush entry screen (FIG. 7) indicating that the rush game has been started. (A) and FIG. 8 (b)) are displayed.

  The prize ball number counter 223u is a counter for continuously counting the number of prize balls after the big hit game is started, and is a prize ball during a period in which a gaming state advantageous to the player is continuously set. It is configured to accumulate numbers. Specifically, in the hit-related processing (S4216 in FIG. 63), when it is determined that the prize ball command has been received (S4505 in FIG. 63: Yes), a value corresponding to the received prize ball command is added ( S4506 in FIG. 63).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to acquire a large amount of prize balls not only in the big hit game but also in the small hit game. It is configured to be able to execute the card forgetting alert display after the end of the hit game or after the end of the big hit game in which a small number of rounds is set.

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether there has been a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y is set to on before receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110 and executing power-off processing (see S4117 in FIG. 59). Thereafter, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, in the startup process (see FIG. 58) of the audio lamp control device 113, if the power-off flag 223y is on (see 4008: Yes in FIG. 58), the power-off flag 223y is set to on and then kept constant. This is a case where the sound lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, a case where a momentary power failure occurs. In this case, all information in the RAM 223 has not been erased, and unnecessary information (or information incomplete due to the erasure of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information of the work area in the RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 58). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are read from the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a long time from the address designation to the data output in reading the first page of data, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at a high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. More specifically, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 73) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 30) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 74B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  Note that drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory generally facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  When drawing an image using nonresident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. However, at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data reside in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction, and temporarily stores the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character design area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. Further, the power-on fluctuation image area 235b indicates that the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b1. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays a result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuation effect when a ball is detected to enter the entrance 64b2.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

  Here, the fluctuation image at power-on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on and while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first and uses the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display control unit 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control unit 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is the change start instruction command, the display control unit 114 starts the process shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 25, on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a power-on fluctuation image of a symbol “○” is provided at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used to determine the lottery performed by the main control device 110. The result is judged, and when it is "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. 25 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the fluctuation effect, and when it is "special symbol loss", the image shown in FIG. 25 (c) is displayed. The image shown is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and a ball is detected in the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 25 (b) and (c) are drawn. Are instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so that are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected at the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding fluctuating effect is displayed in the third variation. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 26, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each of the back images. FIG. 26B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “town stage” and the back surfaces B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, “river stage”, and “sky stage”, respectively. . FIG. 27 shows the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 26, as the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A to D, images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, and then the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region. The back image is scrolled and displayed with a proper connection.

  When the change of the back type is determined based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “sky stage”, the MPU 231 First, the position between the position a and the position a 'of the corresponding rear image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the region reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display region is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, the back image on the back E is the third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back E is a third pattern in which the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed in the displayed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of an image of the sky spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, the rear image shown in FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27A, an orange sky indicating dawn is displayed. Then, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue with the elapse of time, and after the elapse of a predetermined time, the rear image shown in FIG. 27B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27B, a bright blue sky indicating the day is displayed. Next, as the time elapses, the color of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 27C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. Thereafter, as the time elapses, the color of the sky begins to gradually change from black to white and further changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the display returns to the back image shown in FIG. 27A, and the back images of FIGS. 27A to 27C are displayed again on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 26 (a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the rear surfaces of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage, "the city stage" is displayed, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the "city stage" displayed frequently is displayed. By making them all resident in the back image area 235c, the number of times of data access to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26B, the back surface B corresponding to the “forest stage”, the back surface C corresponding to the “river stage”, and the back surface D corresponding to the “empty stage” are part of the back surface. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 27 (a), and image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b) except for FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process, and is resident.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a '(or the range from FIG. 27A to FIG. 27B). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 27 (a) and (b)) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, if the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the change, the character ROM 234 may be stored on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces BD are immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the images in the partial range is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surfaces BD use the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to move the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b 'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the back E, the images shown in FIGS. 27A and 27B are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 27 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 27 (b) to 27 (c) and FIGS. 27 (c) to 27 (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. To (b) are set. Thus, while the images of FIGS. 27A and 27B are being displayed, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 27B and 27C and FIGS. Since the images can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 27A and 27B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 27 (b) to 27 (c) and 27 (c) to 27 (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear image. be able to.

  On the back sides B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 24) of the normal video RAM 236. Thereby, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be displayed reliably.

  On the backsides B to D, the image data stored in the backside image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Image data to be duplicated is stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so as to display the image between the position c and the position d as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow in the leftward direction.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect on the first symbol entrance device 64 or the second entrance port 640, the third symbol display device is started. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuation effect is not immediately started.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box, or a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, or the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the accessory symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one fluctuation effect. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but uses By reading out image data resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. Accordingly, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn in accordance with the instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed and the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and the read information is sent to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of FIG. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demo effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, a stop symbol indicating the departure is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to a special game state from now on and the large opening which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will start from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be performed. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol composed of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at a time corresponding to an address in which a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which an image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for designating an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is enlarged and displayed in a size larger than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the fluctuation display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. The back type corresponds to the stage selected by the player (one of the “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage”). Information specifying whether to display any one of them or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from the back A to E is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

  When it is specified by the back type that any of the backs A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies a back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the backs A to E as a drawing target, Further, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back A to E is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. In addition, the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing the offset information by expressing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the immediately preceding variable effect stopped symbol is switched to the offset information of the variable effect stopped symbol performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  The “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 29) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is used to add An image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer is set in accordance with the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is stored for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why the effect can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, the display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident one of the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 29). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 29 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the head address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 29, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 29, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. At the same time as setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 25A to 25C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85 (b)).

  This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 75 (b) of S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 30) described below, which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for the. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 30) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the content by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 30) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 75 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 30), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add the information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and generates detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source top address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination top address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and the display processing of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 75 (b) Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. Is In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that of the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter, referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information already developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. The process is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 75B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of FIG. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81A). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is turned off when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, a rear image corresponding to the rear image change command or the effect mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image determination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, one byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any of the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the back type corresponding to the ON bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface A is set. When a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, a bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON in the rear image determination flag 233x (FIG. 81 (a) ) Of S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With the back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the display data table for demonstration is displayed. If any other display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is turned off (S6505 in FIG. 77A, S6705 in FIG. 78A, and S6805 in FIG. 78B). 79 of FIG. 79). With the demonstration display flag 233y, it can be easily determined whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect is an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped (fixed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. When the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and when it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and other than the confirmed display data table. It is turned off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77A, S6705 in FIG. 78A, S6805 in FIG. 78B, FIG. 79, S6905). With the final display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether the final display effect is currently being produced.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switches are read (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (479 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the second random number counter C4, and the small type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the second random number counter C4, and the small type counter C5 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in the present embodiment, When they reach 479, 99, 232, 99), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4, C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning (start winning) in the first entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process (S105), a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and a process for passing a ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 are performed. A symbol variation process is executed (S106). The details of the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the normal symbol variation process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and, on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing has not been operated, is provided. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  First, with reference to FIG. 32, the contents of the special symbol change process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol change process (S104). When the special symbol change process (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the present is a big hit or a small hit (S201), and if it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is present (S201: Yes). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202). In the process of S202, it is determined whether or not the subtraction of the other special figure changing time during the change is interrupted by the stop display of one special figure with a symbol indicating a hit. In the process of S202, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated. Then (S203), that is, a process for continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed on the special figure for which the subtraction of the variable time has been interrupted, and the process ends. Thus, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure change is not forcibly stopped.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S201, when it is determined that the present is a big hit or a small hit (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 change time counter 203m is larger than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 is changed). Is determined (S204), and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S204: No), the first special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed, and thereafter, the flow shifts to S209 in which the fluctuation process for the special figure 2 is executed. Details of the first special symbol change start process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is executed. The first special symbol change executing process (S205) executes a process during the special figure 1 change, and will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  After completing the first special symbol variation execution process (S205), it is next determined whether or not it is the variation timing end timing (special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is 0) (S206). If it is determined that it is the end timing (S206: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S209. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S206 that the timing is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S206: No), the process of S207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S209.

  In the processing of S209 to S213, the same processing as that of S204 to S207 executed for the special figure 1 is executed. When the processing of S209 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is fluctuating) (S209). When it is determined that the value of the time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S209: No), the second special symbol change start process (S210) is executed, and thereafter, the present process ends. Details of the second special symbol change start process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S209 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (S209: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation execution processing (S211) is executed. The second special symbol change executing process (S211) executes a process during the special figure 2 change, and will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the second special symbol change execution process (S211), it is next determined whether or not it is the end timing of the change time (whether the special figure 2 change time counter 203n is 0) (S212). If it is determined that it is the end timing (S212: Yes), the second special symbol change stop process (S213) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S212 that the timing is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S212: No), the processing of S213 is skipped and the present processing ends.

  Next, a first special symbol change start process (S208), which is one of the special symbol change processes (S104 in FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start process (S208).

  In the first special symbol change start process (S208), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. ) Is greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed. One is subtracted (S303), and a reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S304). .

  The command of the number of retained balls set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in an external output process (S2201) of a main process (see FIG. 52) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  When the processing in S304 is completed, the data in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted to the immediately preceding data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3.

  When the processing of S305 ends, next, the first special symbol big hit determination processing is executed (S306). The first special symbol big hit determination process (S306) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 34, but the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a will be described. Is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot is based on a set gaming state.

  When the processing of S306 ends, next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection processing is executed (see FIG. 35). Although the details will be described later, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is performed by determining whether the first special symbol is correct or not, and the variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

  When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) ends, a game state update process is executed (S308). The game state updating process (S308 in FIG. 36) will be described in detail later, but the state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated by updating the state of the probable change flag 203g and the value of the time reduction counter 203f indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10. Is a process for updating. When the processing of S308 ends, the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), the processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, referring to FIG. 34, a first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) which is a process of the first special symbol change start process (S204 of FIG. 33) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. explain. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the period in which the fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation) in which one of the special symbols has been won is executed, it is determined whether or not the other special symbol lottery has won the big hit. It is configured not to perform the determination.

  In other words, in the state where it is determined that the jackpot game is executed after a predetermined period (after the elapse of the fluctuation time) by one special symbol lottery, the jackpot is won by the other special symbol lottery, and a plurality of times in a short period of time. The system is configured so as to suppress winning of the jackpot and excessive granting of the privilege.

  In this way, by performing a process of acquiring various counter values in the same manner as in a normal special symbol lottery, skipping the determination based on the various counter values acquired in the process, and setting a missing symbol, Can respond quickly to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery.

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the high probability state (probable state, latent state). If it is determined that the probable change flag 203g is on (that is, the probable change state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), the random number value to be the jackpot specified in the first per-random number table 202a for the high probability state And whether the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer matches, and obtains the determination result (lottery result) (S403). On the other hand, in the processing of S402, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is off (that is, the low probability state of the special symbol) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a for the low probability state is stored in the first random number table 202a. It is determined whether or not the specified random number value of the jackpot matches the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is obtained (S404).

  Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (S405). If it is determined that the lottery result is not on (that is, it is off) (S405: No), it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406). (S406: Yes), the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (S407), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the big hit (S408). Then, based on the obtained value of the hit type counter, the big hit symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S409), and the value according to the current gaming state is stored in the winning state storage area. The value is stored in the time-saving counter 203f (S410), and 1 is set in the time-saving counter 203f (S411), and this processing ends.

  Here, by setting the value of the time reduction counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the first special symbol change start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) determines the first special symbol big hit (see S306 in FIG. 34). In the game state update process (S308) executed at a later stage, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol can be shifted to the low probability state. Thereby, when a big hit is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, it is possible to set the low probability state of the ordinary symbol at the timing when the big hit change is started. Therefore, by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the state where the probable change state is set, the probable change state can be shifted to the latent state.

  Also. By performing the process of setting the value of the time reduction counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the process of shifting the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low-probability state on condition that the jackpot has been won, and the change of the special symbol Both the process of shifting the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low-probability state on condition that the number of times reaches the predetermined number can be executed using the game state update process (S308). Thereby, even when a plurality of conditions for terminating the high probability state of the ordinary symbol are provided, it is possible to prevent the processing of the main control device 110 from being complicated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S405 that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203h is ON (S405: Yes), or if it is determined in the processing of S406 that the lottery result is out of order (S406: No), an out-of-spec symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S412), and then the present process is terminated.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 35), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit, 1 It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot has been set (S501). Here, whether or not a big hit is determined is based on whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is on. The special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON in the processing of S407 in the first special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 34).

  In the process of S501, when it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the first special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 34) obtained in the process of S401 in the first special symbol big hit determination process described above. Based on the value of the one hit type counter C2, the big hit type is determined from the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) (S502), and the process proceeds to S503.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S501 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place (that is, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is off) (S501: No), the processing of S502 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S503.

  In the process of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained from the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, a variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the game state is read (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. Note that the game state is determined based on the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time reduction counter 203f. In the process of S505, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S505), and then a special figure 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S505). S506).

  When the process of S506 is completed, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S507), and then the first symbol display device 37 is set to start changing the first special symbol (S508), and the process of S505 is performed. The value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m, and this processing ends.

  Next, a game state update process (S308), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the gaming state update processing (S308). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, only the value of the time saving counter 203f of the state of the probability change flag 203g, which is a condition for setting the game state, and the value of the time saving counter 203f are updated at the start of the change of the special symbol. Furthermore, in the game state update process (see FIG. 36), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 33), a process of updating the value of the time reduction counter 203f is executed.

  Then, although the details will be described later, the probability change flag 203g which is set to ON is set to OFF when the jackpot fluctuation has ended and the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed). It is configured as follows.

  That is, of the two condition elements (the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time saving counter 203f) referred to when setting the game state, one condition element is updated at the start of the special symbol change, and the other condition elements are updated. Can be updated when the special symbol stops changing, it is possible to easily diversify the gaming state set by combining the two condition elements. Also, since a specific game state (for example, a latent state) can be set only during a period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the end thereof, it is advantageous for the player only during a predetermined period. A game state can be set.

  When the game state updating process (see FIG. 36) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is larger than 0 (S601). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0 (S601: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203f is greater than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S602), and a remaining time reduction command indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203f is set. (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S604). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S604: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S605). ). Here, if it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S605: No), it indicates the probability variation state in which the time-saving game is not provided (ie, the latent probability state), and thus indicates the latent probability state. The status command is set (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S605, when it is determined that the probable change flag 203g is not set to ON (S605: No), a status command indicating the normal state is set (S607) because the normal state is set, and this processing is performed. To end.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S604 that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is not 0 (S604: No), the processing is terminated as it is.

  In the present embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be continuously set until the next time the special symbol jackpot is won (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the jackpot). In addition to this, for example, a probable change counter is provided in place of the probable change flag 203g, and the value of the probable change counter is decremented every time a special symbol is changed, and the value of the probable change counter becomes 0 In such a case, the high probability state of the special symbol may be shifted to the low probability state.

  In the case of using such a configuration, the game state update processing (S308) shown with reference to FIG. 36 is defined as the special figure change start game state update processing, and separately from the special figure change display at the timing when the special symbol change display ends. By providing a special symbol fluctuation stop game state update process for updating the value of the probability change counter, a process of determining whether or not to end the high probability state of the special symbol, and whether or not to end the high probability state of the ordinary symbol It is possible to execute the process of determining whether or not it is different timing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the contents of the first special symbol change execution process (S205) executed in the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 31) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. Give an explanation. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change execution process (S205). In the first special symbol variation executing process (S205), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 1 is suspended, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

  When the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701). Here, a brief description will be given of a case where the present process is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when the special figure 1 is fluctuating and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit (small hit). When the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the big hit flag 203o is set to ON in the processing, so that the main controller 110 executes a timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds. When the process loops and the next special symbol change process (FIG. 32) is executed (two milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON) (FIG. 32), a big hit is found in the process of S201. Therefore, the first special symbol change executing process (S205) is not executed. Then, the big hit game (or the small hit game) is finished, and it is determined in the processing of S201 that the big hit is not being made (or the small hit is being made), so that the first special symbol change executing processing (S205) is executed. Will be. With this configuration, the state in which the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON is a big hit (or small hit) game. This is configured so that the timing is ended, and the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation, which has stopped the subtraction of the fluctuation time, is restarted.

  Returning to FIG. 37, the description will be continued. In the processing of S701, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701: Yes), a special figure 1 change restart command is set (S702), and the special figure 1 temporary The stop flag 203v is set to off (S703), and the process proceeds to S704. On the other hand, in the processing of S701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S701: No), the processing of S702 and S703 is skipped and S704 is performed. Move to the processing of.

  In the processing of S704, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is decremented and updated by 1 (S704), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and this processing ends.

  Next, a first special symbol change stop process (S207), which is one of the special symbol change processes (S104 in FIG. 32), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change stop processing (S207).

  In the first special symbol change stop process (S207), first, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) has the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h set to ON (S801). If it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S802), A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S803). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a deviated symbol (S804).

  When the processing of S804 is completed, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S805), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h and the probability change flag 203g are reset (S806). Next, the big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and the process proceeds to S808.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S801, if the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S801: No), the processing of S802 to S807 is skipped, and the processing shifts to the processing of S808.

  In the processing of S808, a special figure 1 determination command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is to be fixed and stopped is set (S808). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol, which is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37, is executed (S809), and this process is ended.

  As described above, in the first special symbol stop process (S207), the process (S802 to S809) of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S801: Yes), a process (S803, S804) of forcibly stopping the second special symbol during the variable display is executed.

  In the first embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, the second special symbol during the variable display is forcibly stopped and displayed with the off symbol. It is not limited to. For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) at the time of stopping and displaying the big hit symbol of the first special symbol. Then, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted after the jackpot of the first special symbol ends. As a result, an effect in a more natural mode can be achieved as compared with the case where the player is forcibly stopped due to the deviation. In the present embodiment, the jackpot scenario is set in the processing of S806 based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 34). For example, a jackpot scenario is set in the processing of S706 based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 34) using the opening period of the jackpot game. You may make it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the contents of the second special symbol change start process (S210) executed in the special symbol change process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start process (S210). In the second special symbol change start process (S210), a process for starting the change of the special figure 2 is executed. It should be noted that, with respect to the processing relating to the change of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46, only the target of the change is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. Detailed description of the elements will be omitted.

  In the second special symbol change start processing (S209), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 change stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901). When it is determined that the special figure 2 change stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 change stop flag 203s is set to OFF (S902), and the process ends. As described above, the special figure 2 change stop flag 203s is a flag that, when the big change of the first special symbol ends, causes the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the departure and is set to ON. . That is, if the special figure 2 change stop flag 203s is on, it means that the big hit is started, and the change start of the second special symbol should not be set. For this reason, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is ON in the processing of S901, this processing is terminated without executing each processing of S902 to S907 for setting the fluctuation start.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S901: No), the second special symbol execution area 203b (Various counter values) are acquired (S903). Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired data exists based on the data acquired in the processing of S903 (S904). That is, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area (S904: No), the present processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S903 that there is data (S904: Yes), a second special symbol jackpot determination process for executing a second special symbol jackpot determination based on the stored counter values is performed. The process is executed (S905). Details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S905 is completed, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S903 (S906). . Details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S906 ends, the above-described gaming state update processing (see FIG. 36) is executed (S907), and this processing ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 40, a second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), which is a process of the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 39), which is executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. explain. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol big hit determination process (S905).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), the same process as the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is performed, so that the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) The differences will be mainly described.

  When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is obtained (S1001). Then, based on each acquired counter value and the state of the probability change flag 203g, the processing of S1002 to S1004 for acquiring the lottery result of whether or not a big hit is executed. These processes are different from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) only in that the counter value used for the lottery (determination) is obtained from the second special symbol execution area 203b. Control is executed.

  When the processing of S1003 or S1004 is completed, it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S1005). When it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is not set to ON (S1005: No), it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big hit (S1006), and when it is determined that the big hit is obtained. (S1006: Yes), the processing of S1007 to S1010 for setting the lottery result of the second special symbol to the jackpot is executed, and this processing ends. In these processes of S1007 to S1010, the same processes as the processes of S407 to S410 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to the big hit in the first special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 34) are respectively executed. Is done.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1005, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S1005: Yes), or in the process of S1006, the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a big hit. If it is determined (S1006: No), special figure 2 departure variation processing for setting a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit or departure of the second special symbol is executed (S1011), and this processing ends. Details of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1011).

  In the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S1003 or S1004 in FIG. 40 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S1101), and the lottery result is determined to be a small hit. If it is determined that is (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1103). Then, a small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 is set as a stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1104), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that the lottery result is out of order (S1101: No), the out-of-spec symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1105). This processing ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 42, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is a process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. Will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 42), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1201). Next, in the second special symbol big hit determination processing (S905 in FIG. 40), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, that is, whether or not the second special symbol big hit is set. (S1202). Here, the determination as to whether or not it is a big hit is made based on whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is on for the second special symbol. The special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to ON in the processing of S1007 in the second special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 40).

  In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (see FIGS. 17 and 19) is read. (S1203). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S1001 in the above-mentioned second special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 40), the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16 (a)) The type is determined (S1204).

  When the processing of S1204 is completed, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S1205), and then a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern. (S1206). Then, the flow shifts to the process of S1208.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1202 that the jackpot of the second special symbol is not set (S1202: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S1207) is executed, and the process proceeds to S1208. Transition.

  In the process of S1208, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S1208). Next, the change start of the second special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S1209), and a value indicating the change time of the change pattern selected in the process of S1205 is set to the special figure 2 change time counter 203n ( S1210), and terminates this processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 43, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S1207) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S1207).

  In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207 in FIG. 43), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1301). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1301). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is on (S1301: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is obtained from the second special symbol execution area (S1302). The small hit type is selected based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) (S1303).

  Next, a variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the current game state is read (S1304), and the small hit variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the read variation pattern selection table. Is selected (S1305). After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected small hit fluctuation pattern is set (S1306), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out of place) (S1301: No), a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current game state (FIG. 17 and FIG. 19) (S1307), and a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the variation pattern selection table (S1308). After that, a special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S1309), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a second special symbol variation executing process (S211) which is one of the special symbol variation processes (see S104 in FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The contents will be explained. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change executing process (S211). In the second special symbol variation executing process (S211), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 2 is interrupted, a process of restarting the subtraction and a process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

  When the second special symbol change executing process (S211) is executed, first, the special symbol 2 change time counter 203n is decremented by 1 and updated (S1401), and the second special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Is updated (S1402), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the content of the second special symbol change stop processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change stop processing (S213). The second special symbol change stop process (S213) is a process for stopping the change of the special figure 2.

  When the second special symbol change stop process (S213) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S1501), and the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to ON. If it is determined (S1501: Yes), a special figure 1 change stop command indicating stop of the special figure 1 change is set (S1503). Next, when the processing of S1503 is completed, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is released and stopped and displayed with the symbol (S1504). Next, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1505), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i, the probability change flag 203g, and the time reduction counter 203f are reset (S1506). Next, the big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1507), and the process shifts to S1509.

  In the processing of S1509, a special figure 2 confirmation command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is to be fixed and stopped is set (S1509). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol, which is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37, is executed (S1510), and the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1501 that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is not set to ON (S1501: No), the special figure 2 departure stop processing is executed (S1508), and the above-described S1509 and S1510 are performed. Is performed, and this process ends.

  Next, the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1508), which is one of the second special symbol change stop processing (S213 in FIG. 45), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1508). In the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1508), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than the big hit (small hit, departure), the special figure 2 showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the lottery result of Toku-zu 2 is a small hit, a process for temporarily stopping the running of Toku-zu 1 is executed.

  In the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1508), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S1602). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating ON of the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set (S1603).

  When the processing of S1603 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S1604). Thereafter, the small hit flag 203k is set to off (S1605), and the small hit flag 203p is set to on (S1606).

  When the processing in S1606 is completed, a special figure 2 determination command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to determine and stop the second special symbol is set (S1607). Thereafter, the second special symbol, which is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37, stops changing with the small hit symbol (S1608), and the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1601, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order) (S1601: No), the second special symbol is fixed and stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to do so is set (S1609). After that, the second special symbol which is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is deviated and stopped at the symbol (S1610), and the process is terminated.

  As described above, since the control of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed. Can be displayed. Therefore, a lottery game of more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit is given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

  In the present embodiment, when a special symbol indicating a big hit is stopped and displayed in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed while being temporarily stopped or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, since the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can know that the temporary stop is being performed, the player loses the lottery game in the middle of the variable display. Can be grasped that it is not, you can play a jackpot game with confidence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the start winning process (S105), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47) is to determine whether or not a game ball has entered (wins) the first entrance port (first start port) 64, and if the game ball has entered (wins), it is suspended. This is a process of storing the acquired counter values up to the upper limit number (up to four in the first entrance 64) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Further, when each counter value obtained based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In addition, a process of predicting the result of the determination of the success or failure, the selected fluctuation pattern, and the like is performed in advance. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105) will be described.

  In the start winning process (S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball opening 64, which is the first starting port (start winning) (S1701). Here, the determination is made by using a detection result of a first ball entry switch (not shown) for detecting a ball entering the first ball entrance 64. When it is determined that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S1701: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is obtained (S1702). ). It is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703). It is determined whether the number is less than the upper limit of four pieces of the reserved number for the first entrance 64 (that is, whether the number of reserved pieces is not stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S1704). A suspended ball count command for notifying the suspended number to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S1705). The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is read. Are respectively held (stored) in the storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls (S1706).

  Next, based on the stored counter values, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination, the determined hit type, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted (S1707). Then, the winning information command including the predicted result of the first special symbol is determined (S1708), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port (first ball entry port) 64 and is newly held and stored, based on the information stored and held, the hit / failed determination result is obtained. Is determined before the start of the change, and is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the color of the reserved ball is changed to a color different from the normal color) based on the result of the determination of whether the ball is reserved or stored, It is possible to display an advance notice symbol or the like and execute an effect that suggests a result of the determination to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the ordinary symbol change process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). This normal symbol change process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the second symbol change display and change time performed by the second symbol display device 83, the lower first ball entrance 64b2. This is a process for controlling the opening operation and opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated with.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S1801). As the hit during the normal symbol (second symbol), the control for opening and closing the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 is performed during the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being made. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1801: Yes), a new normal symbol change (lottery) cannot be started (executed). This processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not hit (S1801: No), then it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (the normal symbol is changing). When it is determined (S1802), it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not fluctuating (ordinary symbol is fluctuating) (S1802: No), that is, the variation of the ordinary symbol while the current is hitting the ordinary symbol If it is determined that there is no state among them, that is, a state in which a new ordinary symbol change (lottery) can be started (executed), the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the change display of the ordinary symbol is held) The number of times M) is obtained (S1803).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S1804), and it is determined that the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is 0. (S1804: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S1804: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S1805). The data stored in the symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S1806).

  In the process of S1806, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding first to fourth areas of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the ordinary symbol holding first area → executing area, the ordinary symbol holding second area → the ordinary symbol holding first area, the ordinary symbol holding third area → the ordinary symbol holding second area, the ordinary symbol holding fourth area → Normally, the data in each area is shifted, for example, in the symbol holding third area. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is obtained (S1807).

  Then, based on the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S1807 and the normal symbol (second) random number table 202c, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is won is obtained (S1808). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 10”, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol hit, and the normal symbol is hit. When the high probability state is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 231”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “232”, Normally, it is determined that the pattern is out of place.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S1808 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S1809). If it is determined that the lottery result is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S1809: Yes), Is set (S1810), and the flow shifts to the process of S1811. In the process of S1810, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1809, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S1809: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1812, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol “x” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S1811.

  When the processing of S1810 or S1812 is completed, in the processing of S1811, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (hour saving state) of a normal symbol (S1811), and the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of normal pattern (hour saving). (S1811: Yes), the normal symbol variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S1813), and then the ordinary symbol short variation flag 203t is set to ON. (S1814), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (the low probability state of the normal symbol) (S1811: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device is determined. Is set to 10 seconds (S1815), and this processing ends.

  Note that the ordinary figure short variation flag 203t set to ON in the processing of S1814 is a configuration for temporarily storing the gaming state at the timing when the ordinary symbol lottery is executed, and the variation of the ordinary symbol is stopped. It is displayed and referred to when setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a. Thereby, the opening operation content of the electric accessory 64a can be changed according to the game state of the change timing of the normal symbol (lottery) and the opening operation timing of the electric accessory 64a.

  In the present embodiment, the game state at the start (execution) timing of the change (lottery) of the normal symbol is configured to be temporarily stored using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may be used. For example, in the gaming state storage means capable of always storing the currently set gaming state, when it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a hit, the gaming state when the lottery of the ordinary symbol is executed is displayed. You may comprise so that the storage area for temporarily storing may be provided. Further, a means for constantly storing the period in which the normal state is set is provided, and the period stored in the means (the period in which the normal state is set) is compared with the timing at which the lottery of the ordinary symbol is performed. By doing so, the game state at the timing when the normal symbol lottery is performed may be determined. In other words, any configuration may be used as long as it has a storage unit capable of storing the currently set game state and a storage unit capable of storing at least the game state set at a predetermined timing in the past.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1802, when it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1802: Yes), the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S1816). Here, the fluctuation time is a time set beforehand in the second symbol display device 83 by the processing in S1810 or the processing in S1812 before the fluctuation display is started.

  In the processing of S1813, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1816: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1816 that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S1816: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1817). In the process of S1817, the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S1810, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped (displayed on the second symbol display device). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S1812, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. Note that the period during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period during which one spot is turned on in the blinking display (alternate display of “O” and “X”) indicating that the second symbol is changing. (Determined and displayed). This allows the player to easily understand that the second symbol has been stopped and displayed.

  When the stop display is set by the process of S1817, when the second symbol display updating process (S2208 in FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is next performed, the variable display in the second symbol display device is performed. Is completed, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S1810 or the process of S1812.

  After the processing of S1817 is completed, next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, the result of the ordinary symbol lottery performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) (the current lottery result) Is determined to be a normal symbol (S1818). When it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S1818: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a winning of a normal symbol (S1818: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the general figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819).

  In the process of S1819, when it is determined that the ordinary figure short variation flag 203t is not set to ON (set to OFF), that is, the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the current ordinary symbol is started is set. When it is determined that it is in the normal state (S1819: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1821), and the process proceeds to S1820. I do.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1819, when it is determined that the ordinary figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON, that is, it is determined that the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (change) of the ordinary symbols is started this time is the time reduction state. If it has been done (S1816: Yes), the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to off (S1820), and it is then determined whether or not the current gaming state is the time reduction state (medium time reduction) (S1821).

  In the processing of S1821, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (S1821: No), the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (fluctuation) of the ordinary symbols is started this time is the normal state, and the current gaming state ( Since the timing of setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a) is in the normal state, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set. One time is set (S1824), and the process proceeds to S1823.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S1821: Yes), the timing of starting the current lottery (variation) of the ordinary symbol and the current gaming state (opening operation of the electric accessory 64a) Are set to the time saving state, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (the electric accessory). 64a long opening operation is set) (S1822), and the process proceeds to S1823.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the lottery (change) of the ordinary symbol is executed, the timing of setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a executed based on the winning of the ordinary symbol, Only when both are in the time saving state, the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a.

  With this configuration, it is possible to strictly set the condition for setting the opening operation that is advantageous to the player. For example, in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the lottery of the normal symbol ( Even if the time-saving state is set before the fluctuation time (10 seconds) of the normal symbol ends, long opening is set as the operation of the electric accessory 64a. There is nothing. Similarly, in the normal symbol fluctuation (lottery) executed in a state where the time saving state is set, a win is won, and the normal state is set as the gaming state until the fluctuation of the normal symbol stops. Also in this case, the long opening of the electric accessory 64a is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (long opening of the electric accessory 64a) for the player.

  Further, in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the long-opening of the electric accessory 64a can be suppressed, so that a lottery of a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player is easily executed. The time period can be limited during working hours. In the present embodiment, the game state at the timing at which the lottery (fluctuation) of the ordinary symbol is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set are determined, and the game state set at each timing is determined. Although the above-described configuration is used as the configuration for setting the opening operation content of the electric accessory 64a based on the configuration, other configurations may be used.

  For example, the opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player only when the timing at which the lottery (change) of the ordinary symbol is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set are both in the normal state (S1824 in FIG. 48). (Open operation set in step S1822 in FIG. 48) may be set (open operation set in step S1822 in FIG. 48). With this configuration, a privilege (long opening) that is advantageous to the player is provided even for a normal symbol change executed before and after the time saving state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, the time saving state can be made more advantageous for the player.

  As described above, while the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol becomes very short as “10 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case where the normal state is set, and further, Since the opening period of the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is extremely long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times”, the ball can easily enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2. Become. In this embodiment, when the big hit game is executed, the time saving state is configured to end, so that the normal state is set during the big hit game. On the other hand, when the small hitting game is executed, the time saving state is set continuously unless the time saving end condition is satisfied, so that the small hitting game is executed while the time saving state is set. During the winning game, a period in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the small winning game, and the electric accessory 64a is long opened, and a plurality of winning openings (a first specific winning opening 65a, a lower first winning opening). This is a specific period during which the ball can easily enter the ball 64b2).

  By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 illustrated in FIG. 2, the electric accessory 64 a and the lower first ball entrance 64 b 2 are disposed above the first variable winning device 65. It is preferable that the ball enter the two winning ports (specific winning port 65a and the lower first ball entry port 64b2) during the small hitting game, whereby the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the small hitting game. Can be increased, and a more advantageous privilege can be given to the player.

  Returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. In the process of S1820, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is set (S1823), and the process ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S1823, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S2206) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S1824 or S1822 are completed.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 31), and it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the passage of the game ball is determined. If there is, this is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and suspending it.

  In the through gate passage process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901). Here, the passage of the game ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number M of times of the fluctuation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S1903).

  Whether the game ball does not pass through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: No), or even if the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1903: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1903: Yes), the normal The value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S1904).

  When the process of S1904 is completed, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is stored in the free symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 in the free symbol holding area (holding number 1). (S1905), and the process is terminated. In the process of S1905, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, the state where a ball can enter the lower first entrance 64b2, which is provided by winning the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol), is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. .

  By indicating the timing at which such a game state is provided based on the pre-determination result of the ordinary drawing, the player can play the game without overlooking a more advantageous game state than the normal game state. In addition, when performing an effect using such a pre-judgment result of the general figure, not only the effect based on the result of the pass / fail determination of the general figure, but also the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a when the general figure is determined to be a hit. It is good to do a production that suggests the timing of By doing in this way, in the normal gaming state, the player plays the game aiming at the game area on the left side of the gaming board 13, and the lower first entrance 64 b 2 (the entrance with the electric accessory 64 a) is placed on the gaming board 13. , It is possible to switch to a game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right-handed) before the electric auditors product 64a performs the opening operation, and it is in a normal gaming state. Even so, there is an effect that the possibility of the ball entering the lower first ball entrance 64b2 can be increased.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S2001). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, an initial setting process is performed upon turning on the power (S2101). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S2102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S2104). If it is turned on (S2104: Yes), the process proceeds to S2110. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105). S2105: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off may not have been completed normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S2110.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also shifts to S2110 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S2110, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2110). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S2111, S2112).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the initialization processing (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203 is executed.

  Similarly, the initialization process (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203 is also performed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S2111, S2112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2111), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2112). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process shifts to the process of S2113.

  On the other hand, the RAM erasure switch (FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S2105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal. If there is any (S2107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S2108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2113). After that, the state of the probability change flag 203g and each value of the time reduction counter 203f are read (S2114), and a state command is set based on the read counter value (S2115). When the processing in S2115 ends, an interrupt is permitted (S2116), and the flow shifts to main processing described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In the main processing, roughly, a counter updating processing and a power-off processing are executed.

  In the main processing, first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices). ) Is executed (S2201).

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball count signal and the payout abnormal signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2203). A jackpot control process is executed (S2204). The details of the jackpot control process (S2204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 53. However, a process of setting the operation of the first variable prize device 65 and the second variable prize device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

  After the big hit game process (S2204) is executed, a small hit control process (S2205) is executed. The small hit control process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, an electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S2206). In the electric accessory opening / closing process (S2206), an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 64a is executed. Thereafter, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2207).

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “○” or “X”) by the second symbol display device is executed (S2208). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained at the timing when the ball passes, and the second symbol display device displays the value. The variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is performed. Then, a lottery of the second symbol (normal symbol) is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is hit, the electric accessory 64a is opened for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S2210). If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (S2210: Yes), the process proceeds to S2201, and the processes from S2201 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S2210: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2211).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2211). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S2202 (S2212).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S2201 to S2208 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S2209, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 50 has been executed, the processing at S2213 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2213), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S2214). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S2215), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2216), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S2209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S2201 to S2208 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S2211 and S2212 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. It can be started from the processing of S2201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S2201). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S2201. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S2204). The jackpot control process (S2204) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, and a first specific prize. This is processing for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a.

  In the jackpot control process (S2204), it is first determined whether a jackpot scenario has been set (S2301). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario has not been set (S2301: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2301 that the jackpot scenario has been set (S2301: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302), and it is determined whether it is time to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2303). . More specifically, in the process of S2302, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2303, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts the opening of the jackpot scenario. Is determined to be a value corresponding to.

  In the process of S2303, if it is determined that it is the timing of the start of the jackpot scenario opening (the jackpot start) (S2303: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S2304), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of starting the jackpot scenario opening (S2303: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of starting a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305).

  If it is determined in the process of S2305 that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot is executed ( S2306), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2305, when it is determined that the timing is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: No), it is next determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2305). S2307). Here, in the present embodiment, while the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in total, or If the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a has passed a predetermined time (30 seconds), it is determined that the round end condition has been satisfied. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied (S2307: Yes), it is set in the process of S2308 so that the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a that is currently open is closed. This processing ends. Note that the above-described determination processing in S2305 to S2307 is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2307, when it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S2309), and the ending effect is determined. (S2309: Yes), the big hit ending command is set (S2310), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S2201) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 to control the sound ramp. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2309 that the timing is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2309: No), it is determined whether the timing is the end timing of the jackpot (S2311). Here, the jackpot end timing indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed. In the process of S2311, if it is determined that it is the timing of ending the jackpot (S2311: Yes), a jackpot ending process for setting a game state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S2312), and this process ends. Details of the big hit end processing (S2312) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is not the jackpot end timing (S2311: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the jackpot end process (S2312), which is one of the jackpot control processes (S2204 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. The big hit end process (S2312) is a process for setting the game state after the big hit end, as described above. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big hit end processing (S2312).

  In the jackpot ending processing (S2312), first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the winning state storage area 203j (S2401). Next, it is determined whether or not the current big hit is a big change big hit (a big hit type in which the certainty change flag 203g is set to ON after the big hit game ends) (S2402). Here, in the process of S2402, determination is made based on the jackpot type set this time. In the process of S2402, when it is determined that the current big hit is a certainty big hit (S2402: Yes), the certainty changing flag 203g is set to ON (S2403), and the process proceeds to S2404. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, if it is determined that the current big hit is not the probability variable big hit (S2402: No), the process of S2403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2404. Thereby, the low probability state of the special symbol is set as the gaming state after the big hit.

  Next, a value corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning and the jackpot type read out by the processing of S2401 is set in the time reduction counter 203f (S2404). Specifically, when "big hit A" is set as the big hit type, the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to "10000" in order to continue the high probability state of the ordinary symbol until the next big hit, and "big hit B" Is set, the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to "100" in order to continue the high probability state of the ordinary symbol until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 100 times.

  After the process of S2404 is completed, the big hit flag 203o is turned off, and the winning state storage area 203j is cleared (S2405). After that, a state command corresponding to the set gaming state is set (S2406), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time and the game state at the time of the win are determined, and the two condition elements for setting the game state after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to set the contents of (probable change flag 203g, time reduction counter 203f). Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to pay close attention to both the jackpot type of the jackpot and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

  Next, the small hit control process (S2205), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process (S2205).

  In the small hit control process (S2205), first, it is determined whether a small hit scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, the processing of S1604 of the special figure 2 departure stop processing (see FIG. 46) is executed, and it is determined whether or not the small hit scenario is set. In the process of S2501, if the small hit scenario has not been set (S2501: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the small hit scenario is set in the process of S2501 (S2501: Yes), the small hit scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the small hit scenario opening (S2503). More specifically, in the processing of S2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S2503, the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown) is changed to the small hit scenario. Is determined to be a value corresponding to the start of the opening.

  In the process of S2503, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S2503: Yes), the small hit opening command is set (S2504), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of starting the small hit scenario (S2503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the round of the small hit scenario (S2505).

  In the process of S2505, if it is determined that it is time to start the round of the small hit scenario (S2505: Yes), a small hit operation setting process is executed (S2506), and this process ends. The details of the small hit operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing is not the round start timing of the small hit scenario (S2505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507). Here, in the present embodiment, while the specific winning opening 65a is open, a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are won in total, or the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a elapses a predetermined time. Is determined, the round end condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S2507, when it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of S2508, and this process is performed. To end. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S2509).

  In the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is the timing of the start of the ending effect (S2509: Yes), the small-hit ending command is set (S2510), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S2201) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 to control the sound ramp. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2511 that it is the timing of ending the small hit (S2511: Yes), the small hit flag 203p is set to off (S2512), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513), and this process ends. Details of the second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the small hit operation setting process (S2506), which is one of the small hit control processes (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit operation setting process (S2506).

  In the small hit operation setting process (S2506), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the small hit to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set by the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process ends.

  As described above, each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so that even if an unexpected power-off occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game may be terminated halfway. Defects can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the second winning process (S2513), which is one of the small hit control processes (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the second winning process (S2513). The second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55), and is a process for performing control according to winning in the specific winning opening 65a as described above.

  In the second winning process (S2513), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is a round valid period (S2701). Here, the round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from when the specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state to when the interval period (5 seconds) ends. In the process of S2701, if it is not the round valid period (S2701: No), the winning counter 203u is reset (S2702), and the process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the current time is the round validity period (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a winning in the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703), and the process proceeds to the specific winning opening 65a. If the winning has not been detected (S2703: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2703, if a winning for the specific winning opening 65a has been detected (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203u and updated (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or more than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) (S2705). If the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or less than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) (S2705). S2705: No), this process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or more than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) (S2705: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing plate 65f1 accompanying) is set (S2706). Next, the small hit scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and this processing ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 58, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-on processing in S4117 is performed (see FIG. 59) due to the instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 59, upon receiving the power-off occurrence information from main controller 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 59), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S4117. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4117 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), this startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S4117 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process moves to S4008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S4116 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword of “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the flow shifts to S4008.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S4117, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S4006). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S4117 (see S4116 in FIG. 59). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio ramp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The status setting area is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S4008 is reached in a state where the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after, for example, the power is completely shut off, and thus the process of step S4008 is performed via steps S4004 to S4006. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), the process skips S4009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S4010, and sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

  The reason why the clearing process in S4009 is skipped is that when the process from S4004 to S4006 is performed via the process in S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S4004. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing of S4101 was executed (S4101). If the above has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. The process in S4102 to S4110 is a process related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S4111 and the variable display setting processing in S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, a command received by the command determination process can be prevented. , The setting relating to the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processing of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the output mode of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S4108 described later (S4103), and then execute the power-on notification processing (S4104). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a held number display updating process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is performed as a command by the display control device. Sent to 114.

  After that, a frame button input monitoring / production process is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Upon completion of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing, a lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then a sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S4109, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). After that, the processing shifts to the processing of S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the processing in S4110, various counter update processings are executed (S4111), and the flow shifts to the processing in S4112. The details of the various counter updating processes will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, a command determination process (S4112) for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed, and the process proceeds to S4113. Details of the command determination processing (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4113, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. A variable display setting process, which is a process set for transmitting to the user, is executed. Details of the variable display setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Upon completion of the process in S4113, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4113 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off processing is executed (S4117). After the execution of the power-off process, the power-off process-in-progress flag is turned off (S4118). In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4115: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Hereinafter, the details of the command determination processing (S4112) will be described.

  In the command determination process (S4112), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the main control device 110 executes the special command. It is determined whether the 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: Yes), a stop type command receiving process is executed (S4202), and this process ends. Details of the stop type command reception processing (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110. Is determined (S4203). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4203: Yes), a status command process is executed (S4204), and this process ends. The details of this state command processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62. However, based on the state command output from main controller 110, the gaming state of pachinko machine 10 (normal state, probable state, latent state) The processing for setting (state) in the state setting area 223j is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4203 that no status command has been received (S4203: No), it is determined whether a special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4205). Here, the special figure 1 change pattern command is a command for notifying a change pattern (change time) of the first special symbol.

  If it is determined in the process of S4205 that the special figure 1 change pattern command has been received (S4205: Yes), the special figure 1 change start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4206). The variation pattern type is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S4207), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is used in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. To notify the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the first special symbol (set the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol). Used).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4205: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4208). The special figure 2 change pattern command is a command for notifying a change pattern (change time) of the second special symbol.

  In the process of S4208, when it is determined that the special figure 2 change pattern command has been received (S4208: Yes), the special figure 2 change start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4209). The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 2 (S4210), and the process ends. The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows identification of the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is used in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. To notify the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (set the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol). Used).

  In the process of S4208, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4211). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S4211: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 included in the received reserved ball number command (that is, the first reserved ball number command). (The number of reserved balls in the special symbol change display) is extracted, and the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is updated in accordance with the extracted counter value ( S4212), and terminates this processing. In this embodiment, since the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is not held and stored, the value of the first special symbol (special figure 1) reserved ball number counter 223c is set in the process of S4212. Only the process to be updated is executed.

  Here, since the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first ball entrance 64, every time there is a starting winning, the process of S4212 is executed. The value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is shifted from the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the engine is started. If the reserved ball number command is notified based on winning, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol reserved ball number of the main control device 110 is corrected. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203d.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4211 that no pending ball count command has been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4213). In the processing of S4213, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4213: Yes), the information of the received winning information command (whether or not the special symbol lottery is won, the winning type, and the variation pattern) is corresponding to the winning information. This is set in the storage area 223b (S4214), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4213 that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not a hit-related command has been received from the main control device (S4216). In the process of S4215, when it is determined that the hit-related command has been received (S4216: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S4216), and this process ends. The details of the hit-related processing (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63. However, as a result of the special symbol lottery, an effect corresponding to a big hit game or a small hit game executed when a big hit or a small hit is won. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the display.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4215 that the hit-related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether or not a command to reduce the number of remaining hours has been received from the main controller 110 (S4217). In the processing of S4217, when it is determined that the command for the number of remaining working hours has been received (S4217: Yes), the remaining number of times updating processing (S4218) is executed. The details of the remaining number update process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 66. However, based on the remaining short time command output from the main control device 110, the remaining symbol number updating process (S4218) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Processing for setting the contents of the effect display is executed.

  In the process of S4217, when it is determined that the remaining short time command has not been received (S4217: No), it is determined whether a temporary stop related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4219). In the process of S4219, when it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop related process is executed (S4220), and this process ends. The details of the temporary stop-related processing (S4220) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but a process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when a special figure 1 temporary stop command or a special figure 2 temporary stop command is received When the special figure 1 change restart command or the special figure 2 change restart command is received, processing for setting an effect (additional effect) to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4219 that the temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), processing corresponding to other commands is executed (S4221), and this processing ends. In the process of S4221, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the process of determining whether a status command has been received (see S4203 in FIG. 60). The processing is configured prior to the processing for determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern command of each special symbol has been received (see S4205 and S4208 in FIG. 60).

  With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are simultaneously output from the main control device 110, that is, during the first special symbol fluctuation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) of the main control device 110. Then, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 33) is executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and in the game state update process (see S308 in FIG. 33) executed thereafter, the game is executed. Even when a status command indicating that the status has changed is set, the game status currently set on the sound ramp control device 113 side can be determined earlier than the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

  Therefore, in the case where the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won in the state where the probable change state is set and the latent state is set during the change of the jackpot, the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the latent state is set. A fluctuation effect (see FIG. 7A) corresponding to a fluctuation pattern command that becomes a big hit fluctuation in the determined state can be easily set.

  Note that, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when the processing according to the fluctuation pattern command is executed at a stage prior to the state command determination processing, the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the above-described jackpot fluctuation is definitely changed. Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is received first, and the variable display according to the received content is set. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the fluctuation display indicating that the latent state has been set at the same time as the start of the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol. Since the fluctuation display indicating that the latent state has been set is delayed in this manner, the timing of notifying the player that the right-handed game is to be performed is delayed. Will give you the problem.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, on the main control device 110 side, the process of changing the gaming state after the jackpot determination (see S306 in FIG. 33) and the change pattern setting (S307 in FIG. 33). In contrast to executing the (game state update process (S308 in FIG. 33)), the sound lamp control device 113 first executes the process of determining the current game state (S4204 in FIG. 60), and thereafter It is configured to set a fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the variable display corresponding to the previous gaming state from being set and executed even though the latent state is set.

  Also, by configuring the voice lamp control device 113 to define the order in which various commands output from the main control device 110 are received, the main control device 110 needs to define the output order of various commands. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Next, the stop type command receiving process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the stop type command receiving process (S4202). This stop type command reception processing (S4202) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113. Hereinafter, the stop type command receiving process (S4202) will be described in detail.

  In the stop type command reception process (S4202), first, when a special figure 1 stop type command is received corresponding to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, and the special figure 2 If the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4301). Next, from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command, the stop type (big hit A to big hit G, small hit A to small hit C, out of reach, out of reach, etc.) is extracted (S4302). The process ends.

  The stop type extracted in S4302 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol. The type of stop is stored so as to be identifiable. As a result, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to change at the same time, it is possible to manage the respective stop types, and to execute an appropriate change display. Can be.

  Next, the state command processing (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this status command processing (S4204). This state command processing (S4204) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the status command processing (S4204) will be described.

  In this state command processing (S4204), processing for setting the current game state in the state setting area 223j based on the state command output from the main control device 110 is executed, and when the game state shifts to the latent state. To set an effect (chance zone effect (see FIG. 6B)) for notifying the player that the latent state has been set, and the game state has shifted to the normal state. In this case, a process for clearing various flags and counters used for displaying the card forgetting alert screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

  In the state command processing (S4204), first, the game state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223j provided in the RAM 223 (S4401). That is, it is determined in which gaming state the state command has been received. Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402). If it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (S4402: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating transition to the latent state (S4403). In the process of S4403, if the received command is a status command indicating a transition to a latent state (S4403: Yes), a latent probability notification effect for notifying entry of the latent state is set (S4404). Then, a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4406.

  On the other hand, in the processing of 4402, when it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402: Yes), or in the processing of S4403, the received command shifts to the latent state. If the status command is not the indicated status command (S4403: No), the process proceeds to S4406.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the received command is a status command indicating transition to a normal status (S4406). If it is determined that the received command is not the status command indicating the transition to the normal status (S4406: No), the processing of S4407 to S4410 is skipped, the processing of S4411 described below is executed, and this processing ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a status command indicating transition to the normal state (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4407). When it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4407: Yes), the value of the prize ball number counter 223u is cleared to 0 (S4408), and the card notification flag 223q and the card notification enable flag are set. 223s and the rush display completed flag 223t are set to off (S4409). Next, the contents of the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o and the remaining time storage area 223p are cleared (S4410), and the value corresponding to the game state notified by the other state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4411). This processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4407, if it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to OFF (S4407: No), the processes of S4408 and S4409 are skipped, and the processes of S4410 and S4411 are executed. The process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the hit-related process (S4216), which is one of the command determination processes (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the content of the hit-related processing (S4216). In the hit-related process, as a result of a special symbol lottery, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a big hit game or a small hit game executed when a big hit or a small hit is won. In this case, a process corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

  In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during a hit game (big hit game, small hit game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball command is accumulated, and Based on the result, processing for displaying a card forgetting alert screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

  In the hit-related processing (S4216), first, it is determined whether or not the command received in the command determination processing (see FIG. 60) has received a big-hit-related command (S4501). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4501: Yes), a jackpot-related process is executed (S4502), and this process ends.

  Here, the jackpot-related process (S4502), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot-related processing (S4502). In the jackpot-related process, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won is performed. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

  In the jackpot-related processing (S4502), first, it is determined whether the jackpot-related command received in the jackpot-related processing (S4216) has received a jackpot start command (S4601). If a jackpot start command has been received (S4601: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4602), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4601 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S4603). If the round number command has been received (S4603: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S4604), and the process ends. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 as the number of rounds command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control device 110, when the main control device 110 is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has been started as a round update command, the audio ramp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the RAM 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the sound lamp control device 113 side determines the current round based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. Calculate the number and configure the display round number command Good.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4603 that the round number command has not been received (S4603: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4605). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4605: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4605: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S4606), and it is determined whether or not the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4607). If it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4607: Yes), a display ending command not including the card notification is set (S4608). That is, a process for preventing the display mode of FIG. 10A from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4607 that the card notification flag 223q is not set to ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4607: No), the current jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. Is determined (S4609). If it is determined that the current jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B (S4609: Yes), a display ending command including a card notification is set (S4610), and the card notification flag 223q is set to ON. (S4611). That is, a process for displaying the display mode of FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the current jackpot type is not the jackpot A or the jackpot B (S4609: No), it is determined whether the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4612). If it is determined that the card notification enabled flag 223s is set to ON (S4612: Yes), the card notification enabled flag 223s is set to OFF (S4613), and the above-described processes of S4610 to S4611 are executed. The process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4612, when it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4612: No), the process of S4608 described above is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the jackpot-related processing (S4502 in FIG. 64), as the various display modes displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game, the game information (opening, In addition to the process of setting the display contents of the ending and the number of rounds), a process is performed to determine whether or not to display a card forgetting alert screen (see FIG. 10A).

  This card forgetting alert screen is displayed when a player wins a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls in a hit game (big hit game, small hit game) and borrows a card (ball) to the player. This is a notification mode for calling attention so as not to forget the valuable medium used at the time. In the present embodiment, the card described above is used when the condition that the number of awarded balls acquired in the period (continuous advantage period) from the normal state to the jackpot and the transition to the normal state again reaches the predetermined amount is satisfied. It is configured to display a forgetting alert screen.

  Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 64, a jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot A, which can easily acquire a prize ball exceeding a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) in a jackpot (initial hit) won in a normal state. When the jackpot is won, the card notification for displaying the card forgetting alert screen at the end of the jackpot game is executed, and when the other jackpots (jackpot C, jackpot D) are won, the card notification is executed. It is configured not to.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the card forgetting warning screen is displayed for a player who has not obtained a predetermined amount of prize balls. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit game, the small hit game can be frequently set to be set in a game state (probable state) in which it is easy to execute the small hit game. In some cases, a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls may be obtained. Therefore, the number of prize balls acquired by the player during the advantageous continuation period (the number of prize balls paid out during the advantageous period) is accumulated, and when the accumulated result exceeds a predetermined amount (250 shots), the execution is performed at that time. It is configured to display a card forgetting alert screen on the ending screen of the middle jackpot game or the small jackpot game. As a result, a card forgetting warning screen can be displayed to the player at an appropriate timing.

  In the present embodiment, the card forgetting alert screen is notified only once during one advantageous continuation period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the card forgetting alert screen from being displayed frequently and giving the player an unpleasant feeling. The method for displaying the card forgetting alert screen is not limited to the contents of the present embodiment. For example, a measuring means for measuring an advantageous continuation period is provided, and the elapsed time since the previous card forgetting alert screen was displayed. When the time exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes), the card forgetting warning screen may be displayed again. In this case, since the card forgetting alert screen is once displayed (since the display conditions for displaying the card forgetting alert screen are already satisfied), during the special symbol fluctuation period (for example, during the advantageous continuation period) In the case where a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds or more is selected in (2), a card forgetting alert screen may be displayed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the current game situation by using the fixed concept of the player that the card forgetting alert screen is displayed after the big hit game ends. In addition, as a method for achieving the same effect, a card-forgetting warning screen may be displayed using the opening period of the small hit game in the big hit game.

  Referring back to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4501 that the received command is not a jackpot-related command (S4501), it is determined whether the received command has received a small jackpot-related command (S4503). If it is determined that the received command is the small hit related command (S4503: Yes), the small hit related process (S4504) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 65, the small hit-related process (S4504), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit-related process (S4504). In the small hit-related process, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small hit game executed when the small hit is won is performed. The processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.

  In the small hit-related process (S4504), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received in the hit-related process (S4216) has received a small hit start command (S4701). If the small hit start command is received (S4701: Yes), a small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4701 that the received command is not the small hit start command (S4701: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S4703: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the ending command (S4703: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S4704), and it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4705). . If it is determined that the card notification completed flag 223q is set to ON (S4705: Yes), a display ending command not including the card notification is set (S4706), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4705 that the card notification completion flag 223q is not set to ON (S4705: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4707). When it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4707: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to OFF (S4708), and a display ending command including the card notification is set (S4708). (S4709), the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4710), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4707, the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4707: No), the process of S4706 described above is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even in the small hit game which does not satisfy the display condition for displaying the card forgetting warning screen in one game, the big hit is won in the normal state, If the accumulated value of the number of awarded balls acquired during the game period (advantageous continuation period) until the normal state is set again satisfies the display condition (for example, the number of acquired awarded balls reaches 250 shots), a small hit It is configured to display the card forgetting alert screen even after the game is over. As a result, a card forgetting warning screen can be displayed to the player at an appropriate timing.

  Referring back to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the process of S4503, when it is determined that the received command is not the small hit-related command (S4503: No), it is determined whether or not a prize ball command is received (S4505). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4505: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4505: Yes), a value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball counter 223u (S4506). It is determined whether the notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4507). If it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is not set to ON (S4507: No), it is determined whether the value of the prize ball counter 223u added in the processing of S4506 is 250 or more (S4508). When it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter 223u after the addition is equal to or greater than 250 (S4508), the card notification enable flag is set to ON (S4509), and the display prize ball number command is set (S4510). Then, the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4507, when it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4507: Yes), or in the process of S4508, the prize ball number counter 223u after addition is less than 250. If it is determined (S4508: No), the process of S4509 described above is skipped, the process of S4510 is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined that the normal state has been set by the state command processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62), and the value of the award ball counter 223u is cleared. The prize ball number corresponding to the prize ball number command received during the period up to (the advantageous continuation period) is accumulated by the prize ball number counter 223u. Then, at the end of the hit game (big hit game, small hit game) (at the ending screen display timing), a card forgetting alert screen is displayed according to the value of the prize ball number counter 223u at the ending screen display timing.

  Thus, for example, when the jackpot (initial jackpot) that triggers the setting of the advantageous duration is a jackpot C (a jackpot in which it is difficult to obtain a predetermined amount (250 shots) of prize balls in one jackpot game). For example, when the small hit game is won during the advantageous continuation period, or when the big hit C is won again, the card forgetting warning screen can be displayed.

  Next, the remaining number update process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the content of the remaining number update process (S4218). This remaining number update process (S4218) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113. Is received, the process of updating the contents set in the remaining short time count area 223k, the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, and the remaining time storage area 223p is executed.

  In the remaining number update process (S4218), first, it is determined whether or not a command to reduce the number of remaining hours has been received from the main controller 110 (S4801). If it is determined that the remaining short time command has not been received (S4801: No), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4801, if it is determined that the remaining time reduction command has been received (S4801: Yes), the display time reduction command corresponding to the received command is set (S4802), and this process ends.

  Next, the contents of the temporary stop related processing (S4220) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related processing (S4220). In this temporary stop-related processing (S4220), the processing of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received, and the processing of the third symbol display device when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is received The processing for setting the effect (additional effect) to be executed at 81 is executed.

  When the temporary stop related processing (S4220) is executed, first, it is determined whether a special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901), and if it has not been received (S4901: No), the fluctuation restart processing is performed. (S4902) is executed. Details of the change restart processing (S4902) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901: Yes), the remaining variation time of the variation pattern currently set is calculated (S4903). Then, it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time calculated in the process of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904), and if it is determined that it is shorter than 2 seconds (S4904: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time is stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o. A period A indicating that the time is short is set (S4905), and the flow shifts to the process of S4902.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4904 that the remaining fluctuation time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4904: No), then the remaining fluctuation period is 2 seconds or more and is longer than 15 seconds. It is determined whether it is short (S4906), and when it is determined that it is 2 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o indicates a period B indicating the normal remaining fluctuation time. Is set (S4907), and the flow shifts to the process of S4902.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4906, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is not less than 15 seconds (exceeding 15 seconds) (S4906: No), it indicates that the remaining fluctuation time is long in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o. The period C is set (S4908), and the flow shifts to the process of S4902. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) to be executed when the special figure fluctuation is resumed is calculated at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), and the fluctuation time is calculated. By setting such information, an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining fluctuation time can be executed without delay at the timing of restarting the special figure fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, if the period information (period A to period C) set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is different according to the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when the special figure fluctuation is restarted. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the remaining time is shorter, the period A is more easily selected, and as the remaining time is longer, the period C is more easily selected. The ratio may be made different according to the remaining time, or the remaining period may be divided at predetermined intervals (for example, 30 seconds), and the periods A to C may be sequentially allocated to each division. You may comprise.

  With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional effect executed based on the period information set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o and the remaining fluctuation time, The fun of estimating the fluctuation time can be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the contents of the fluctuation restart processing (S4902) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the change restart processing (S4902). The fluctuation restart processing (S4902) executes processing for setting an additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is received.

  When the fluctuation resumption processing (S4902) is executed, first, it is determined whether a special figure 1 fluctuation resumption command has been received (S5001), and if it has not been received (S5001: No), this processing is ended. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5001 that the special figure 1 change restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), the remaining change time information stored in the remaining change time information storage area 223o is read out (S5002). ), The additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 222c based on the read remaining fluctuation time information and the additional effect counter 223i (S5003). Next, a display additional effect command corresponding to the read additional effect type is set (S5004), the information set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area o is cleared (S5005), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special figure change is interrupted, the normal effect (the effect display performed when the special figure change is started) ends, and then the special figure change is restarted. During the period until the third symbol is swung, a swing effect for swinging and displaying the third symbol is executed, and when the special figure change is restarted, an additional effect corresponding to the special figure change period (remaining change period) after the restart is executed. Although such a configuration is used, other configurations may be used.

  For example, an effect period determining means for determining a normal effect period in which a normal effect is performed is provided, and an additional effect is executed when the effect period determining means determines that the normal effect period has ended. Is also good. With this configuration, the normal effect and the additional effect can be continuously executed, so that an effect display more suitable for the player can be provided. Also, in this case, an error may occur between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is performed and the special figure fluctuation period after the restart, and the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Alternatively, a swing effect of swinging and displaying the third symbol may be executed. Further, an error period determining unit for determining the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period determining unit determines that the error period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), an additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as follows.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting processing (S4113). The variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is performed in accordance with the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a process of setting a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit G), a process for setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the variation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5101). If it is determined that the special figure 1 change start flag 223d is off (S5101: No), the special figure 1 change pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S5105. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 change start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 change start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a latent state (S5103). If it is determined that the current game state is the latent state (S5103: Yes), the special figure 1 variable display setting process (S5104) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the details of the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104), which is one of the variable display setting processes (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. I do. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 variable display setting process (S5104). In the special figure 1 variation display setting (S5104), when the current game state is the latent state, the first special symbol display is performed based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. A process of setting a latent variation pattern command and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed.

  In the variation display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104), first, the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read (S5201), and the value corresponding to the variation time read in the process of S5201 is set to the sub special figure 1. The variable time counter 223m is set (S5202). Next, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is a value larger than 0 (S5203). If it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5203: No), a rush entry command for display is set (S5204), and the rush display completed flag 223t is set to ON (S5205). ). On the other hand, in the process of S5203, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter is greater than 0 (S5203: Yes), the process of S5204 and S5205 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5206. Next, based on the extracted fluctuation pattern, a display latent fluctuation pattern command for the first special symbol is set (S5206), and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. In the processing of S5103, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5103: No), the command is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the processing of S4205 in the command determination processing (see FIG. 60). A variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated (S5105). In addition, the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is the display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration are "10", it indicates that the command corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01", it indicates the second special symbol. It is configured to show that

  The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the processing of S5104 or S5105 is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 59) is performed. The information is transmitted to the display control device 114 by S4102). The display control device 114 receives the first special symbol display variation pattern command, and receives the special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 in the first special symbol variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command for the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). The data corresponding to the first special symbol is shifted in the winning information storage area 223b (S5106).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 change start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5107). When it is determined that the special figure 2 change start flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S5107: No), the special figure 2 change pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the processing of S5111 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 change start flag 223e is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 change start flag 223e is set to off (S5108). Next, the variable display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109) is executed.

  Here, the variable display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109), which is one of the variable display setting processes (S4113 in FIG. 69), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variable display setting process (S5109).

  In the variation display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109), first, in the process of S4210 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read (S5301), and the read variation is read. The value corresponding to the time is set in the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n (S5302). Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a latent state (S5303). If it is determined that it is in the latent state (S5303: Yes), it is determined whether the rush display completed flag 223t is on (S5304). If it is determined that the rush display completed flag 223t is not on (S5304: No), the remaining time stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is read (S5305). Next, it is determined whether the remaining time read in the process of S5305 is less than 1 second (S5306). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 1 second (S5306: Yes), the process of S5307 is skipped, and the process shifts to S5308.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5306, if it is determined that the read remaining time is 1 second or more (S5306: No), a rush entry command for display is set (S5307), and the lash display completed flag 223t is set to ON. (S5308). Next, based on the extracted fluctuation pattern, a display latent fluctuation pattern command for the second special symbol is set (S5309), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5303, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5303: No), or in the processing of S5304, it is determined that the rush display completed flag 223t is set to ON. (S5304: Yes), the processing of S5305 to S5308 described above is skipped, the processing of S5309 is executed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is set in a state where the latent state is set in the state setting area 223j, that is, the latent state is set during the jackpot variable period. When the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation is set, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing and if it is determined that the special figure 2 is not changing. Is configured to set a rush entry command as an effect mode of the variable display. In other words, a configuration is provided in which a screen (see FIG. 7A) for notifying the player that a rush has occurred on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed at the timing when the target special figure 1 change is executed. are doing.

  On the other hand, when setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation in which the jackpot fluctuation period is in the latent state, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing, and the special figure is determined. If it is determined that No. 2 is fluctuating, as a staging mode of the fluctuating display, a screen indicating that it is in a latent state without setting a rush entry command for display (see FIG. 6B). It is configured to display.

  With this, when the display rush entry command is set and a right-handed game is performed at the time when a screen (see FIG. 7A) for notifying the player of the entry into the rush is displayed, immediately It is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state, and to provide a game without a sense of incongruity to the player.

  In addition, when setting a fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation in which the jackpot fluctuation period is in a latent state, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing, and the special figure 2 is determined. Is determined to be changing, the changing special figure 2 change may be forcibly terminated and a new special figure 2 change may be executed.

  Note that the timing for setting the display rush entry command when the game state shifts to the latent state while the special figure 2 is changing is not limited to the content of the present embodiment, and a game that does not give a player a sense of incompatibility is provided. What is necessary is just the structure which can perform. For example, when it is determined that the changing special figure 2 fluctuation is completed at the timing when the latent state is set, a rush entry command for display may be set, or the fluctuation occurs at the timing when the latent state is set. The remaining time until the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the middle may be determined, and a rush entry command for display may be set when the determination result becomes a predetermined time (1 second). In this case, the predetermined time to be set is required from when the player operates the operation handle 51 to start the right-handed game to when the ball fired by the right-handed game enters the second entrance 640. The time may be shorter than the period, and may be appropriately set according to the configuration of the game board 13.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The display variation pattern command of the second special symbol set in the process of S5109 is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59). This is transmitted to the control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol, and receives a special variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display corresponding to the third symbol display device 81. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed. Then, the data corresponding to the second special symbol is shifted in the winning information storage area 223b (S5110).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S5111). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is not set to ON (that is, it is OFF) (S5111: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S5111: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on. Sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f to off and, if the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on, sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g to off (S5112).

  In the processing of S4201 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 60), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S5113), and this processing ends. If the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. If the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. . Note that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the type of the big hit when the big hit occurs. Is done. If the determination result is a miss, a miss symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

  Next, various counter updating processes (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the various counter updating process (S4111). The various counter updating process (S4111 in FIG. 72) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, and the values of the various counters provided in the RAM 223 are updated. This is the process of executing the update.

  In the various counter updating process (S4111), first, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401). If it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5402). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5401 that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5401: No), the processing of S5402 is skipped and S5403 is performed. Move to the processing of. Next, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403). When it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is decremented by 1 (S5404).

  Next, the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and the reading of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n are executed (S5405), and the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is read. Is subtracted to calculate the remaining time (S5406). The remaining time calculated in the processing of S5406 is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (S5407), and the values of other various counters are decremented by 1 (S5408), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5403, when it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5403: No), the above-described S5404 to S5407 are skipped. , S5408, and terminates the present process.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 of the boot program after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 performs various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even when a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is used. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  By executing the boot process (S6001) in this manner, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is changed to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part to the program storage area 233a. The processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102 and S6102, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main power of the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a ends based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller responds to this transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85A) described later, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75 (b)), a simple image at power-on (a main image at power-on and a fluctuation image at power-on) (not shown) is drawn. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some sort of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. Since the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning prize) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued. When the main control unit 110 receives the display fluctuation pattern command via the audio lamp control unit 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the power-on fluctuation image is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and the simple fluctuation is performed. You can make a production. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and its transfer takes a long time, so that after power-on, the time during which the main image is displayed at power-on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S6005, interruption permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S6006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), it is first determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S6302) is executed to display the image on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear face image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S6305) are used. 29, and sends the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination processing, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (big hit A, big hit B, reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, reach out) is indicated by the display stop type command. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the flow shifts to the process of S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, details of the above-described command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), a variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 77A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). The fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of step S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S6502. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6404, when it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is performed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (b). FIG. 77 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command process (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpots A to G, small hits A to C, out of reach, or completely out of reach) indicated by the stop type command for display. (S6601), and compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to ON (S6603), and returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the main control device 110 always determines the start of the change at a distance of several seconds or more, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S6602.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure as in the present embodiment, in fact, if the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, the stop of the complete departure is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the opening command processing (S6409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 78A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6705), the opening command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. The round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to off (S6805), the round number command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether an unprocessed command includes a display ending command (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the ending command processing (S6413) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to off (S6905), the ending command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether there is a display rush entry command among unprocessed commands (S6414), and display is performed. If there is a rush entry command for use (S6414: Yes), rush entry command processing is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the rush entry command processing (S6415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the rush entry command processing. The rush entry command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rush entry command processing, first, a rush entry display data table corresponding to the display mode of the rush entry effect indicated by the display rush entry command is determined, and the determined rush entry display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Then, it is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

  Next, based on the rush entry display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6934). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to off (S6935), the rush entry command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no rush entry command for display (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an additional effect command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is a command (S6416: Yes), additional effect command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the additional effect command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 (b) is a flowchart showing the additional effect command processing. The additional effect command process executes a process corresponding to the display additional effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the additional effect command processing, first, an additional effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the additional effect indicated by the display additional effect command is determined, and the determined additional effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Are set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

  Next, based on the additional effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S6955), the additional effect command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no additional production effect command for display (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is an image change command (S6418: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag 233w that notifies the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each of the rear image types (back A and B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after change is determined from the rear image determination flag 233x set in the process of S7002. Identify.

  Also, in the task processing, if it is specified to display either the back A or B according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002 is used. The type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the type of the RAM storing the image data corresponding to the range of the back image ( Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the effects of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the rear image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then, it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420). If it is (S6420: Yes), an error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S7102 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6416, when it is determined that there is no error command (S6420: No), a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to S6401.

  In the processing of S6401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S6402 to S6422 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S6401 to S6422 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extraction and execution of the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 77 (b)), which are the processing corresponding to each command, are performed. A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image which are set and necessary in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S7201: No) ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the process of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

  In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, And various parameters required for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, a pointer update process is performed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( In step S7406, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the process of S7206 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like. And various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S7209: No), the finalized display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the finalized display effect. First, the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state (S7214), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7215 is used for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), a stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7215 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, and a certain time has elapsed since the end of the fixed display effect. Thereafter, processing for displaying the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7222), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), and the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The content of the drawing can be set.

  In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. A process of setting a display data table defining that the image is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, details of the above-described transfer setting processing (S6305), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is read from the character ROM 234 from the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7602 (S7602: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). If there is an untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and the process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here) The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. At the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined from the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the flow shifts to the processing of S7705.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been completed (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, after setting a transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7706 (S7706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the processing in S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S7705: No), the processing shifts to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow proceeds to the processing of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710) and provided for each back image type. Among the rear image determination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the flow shifts to the process of S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7713, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite in the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When the indicated stop type information is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), to generate a drawing list (FIG. 29) (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, the type of the storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information indicating that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously performed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 75B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be able to be executed simultaneously in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, irrespective of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when one variable display is being executed, another variable display may not be executed. When a reserved ball exists, a variation display may be performed in order from the reserved ball whose start winning is temporally older. With this configuration, the control can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the ordinary symbol), the probable change state (the high probability state of the special symbol, and the high probability of the ordinary symbol) State), time saving state (low probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol), and latent game state (high probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol) are provided. I have. And it is comprised so that a latent state becomes a game state most advantageous to a player.

  That is, when the latent state is set, the fluctuation time for indicating the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more likely to be a lottery result advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, is set to another game state. By defining the length to be shorter than that in the case where the lottery is performed, a lottery advantageous to the player can be executed most efficiently. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel playability in which the player is expected to set the latent state.

  More specifically, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened even in the case of a small hit in addition to the big hit, so that the variation time of the second special symbol is short. In the state, the prize ball can be continuously increased. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in expectation of a latent state. In a general gaming machine, the probable state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in the present embodiment, the latent state is more advantageous than the probable state, so that novel gaming properties can be provided.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). Fluctuating method). With this, even while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently. it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously fluctuating, if one of the symbols fluctuates and stops with a big hit or a small hit symbol, the other fluctuating display indicates the remaining fluctuating time or lottery. Regardless of the result, it is stopped and displayed with the off symbol. Thus, during execution of the big hit or the small hit, the other variable display is fixedly displayed as the hit or the small hit, and it is possible to prevent a problem that the big hit or the small hit is started repeatedly.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed in the state where the probable change state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set. The high-probability state of the ordinary symbol is shifted to the low-probability state, and the gaming state is shifted from the probable state to the latent state. While the latent state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for indicating the result of the lottery of the second special symbol is set short, so that a lot of lotteries of the second special symbol can be executed. This is the period during which it is possible (the special figure 2 fluctuation advantage period).

  In the present embodiment, since it is configured to win the small hit with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is performed during the period in which the latent state is set as the gaming state. , A small win game executed when the player wins is frequently executed, and a game state (a special figure 2 advantageous state) advantageous to a player who can acquire many prize balls is obtained.

  As described above, the period during which the latent state is set in the present embodiment (the special figure 2 fluctuation advantage period) is during the fluctuation display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol that has won the jackpot in the probability change state. Since the special figure 1 is in the process of changing the big hit, when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends, the big hit game is executed. As described above, since a plurality of states (the special figure 2 advantageous state and the jackpot game state) that are advantageous to the player are continuously set, it is possible to continuously give the player various benefits. Can be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in one special symbol (special symbol 2) and the small hit game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (special symbol 1) is interrupted (variation display period). Is suspended), and when the small hitting game ends, the suspended measurement of the variable display period is restarted. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variable advantage period from being subtracted during the small figure game, and therefore, regardless of the number of small jackpot games executed during the special figure 2 variable advantage period, First, it is possible to provide a certain special figure 2 fluctuation advantage period to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the result of the lottery of one special symbol (special figure 1), the other special symbol (special figure 2) that is changing is displayed in a stop display mode indicating the departure. It is configured to stop forcibly. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the small hit game is executed during the big hit game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the fluctuation of the other special symbol is made different according to the result of the lottery of one special symbol. Specifically, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot (a lottery result that can give the first privilege to the player), the variation of the other special symbol is changed to the fact that the lottery result is out of order. When the stoppage is displayed in the display mode shown and the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (a lottery result in which a second privilege different from the first privilege can be given to the player), the fluctuation of the other special symbol is changed. Is stopped until the grant of the second privilege ends (until the small hit game ends), and restarted after the grant of the second privilege ends. In addition, when the lottery result of one special symbol is out of order, the change of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

  With this configuration, it is possible to change the lottery content (the lottery result, a period until the lottery result is displayed) of the other special symbol based on the lottery result of the one special symbol, A variety of playability can be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can give a privilege to the player, the control content for the other special symbol change is changed according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, in the case of a lottery result that gives the most advantageous privilege (big hit game) to the player, the lottery result corresponding to the change in the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result that gives the privilege. Even if the fluctuation is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result is out of order, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an extra privilege, and a lottery result (small hit) in which less privilege is given than the big hit game In the case of, without changing the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed, without changing the lottery result, during the small hit game, to prevent the bonus based on the other special symbol lottery from being given, It is possible to interrupt only the measurement period.

  Therefore, in a state where a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1 and special figure 2) are simultaneously fluctuating, by giving the least advantageous privilege to the player, the most advantageous privilege given later is given. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the game is not performed, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is uncomfortable.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a variable display period of a short period (0.5 seconds) is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special figure 2), The small hit game is configured to be executed frequently. Then, the condition in which the latent state is set as the gaming state is defined as a case in which the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state in which the probability changing state is set, and the condition in which the latent state is ended is defined as the first special symbol. Is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit, and the big hit game is executed. Therefore, the big hit game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period which is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the small hit game. A second game period is set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be set continuously, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the probable change state, the latent state is set from the start of the jackpot fluctuation, and the latent state is set. Is set so that the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

  Therefore, at the same time when the latent state is set (based on the fact that the latent state is set), the player is notified of the period during which the latent state is set (see FIG. 7A ))reference.

  However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can simultaneously change the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol is also changed to the second special symbol in the state where the probable change state is set. Both special symbols may fluctuate.

  In such a case, even if a display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) has been set is displayed at the timing when the latent state is set (see FIG. 7A), the second state that is currently fluctuating is displayed. Until the special symbol stops fluctuating, it is not possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state, and there is a problem that the small hitting game is not executed irrespective of the RUSH state. There was a fear.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for shifting to the latent state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the probable change state), the change state of the second special symbol (whether there is a change, The remaining fluctuation period is determined, and the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is made different based on the determination result.

  Specifically, when the condition for shifting to the latent state is satisfied, it is notified that the RUSH state has been set if it is determined that the state of the second special symbol can be changed. Make up. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a new second special symbol is not started to change and a small hitting game is not executed even though the RUSH state is notified.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for shifting to the latent state is satisfied, a period from when the state of the second special symbol can be changed to when the latent state ends is determined. If the determined period is shorter than the predetermined period, the RUSH state is not notified. Thus, it is possible to suppress the start of the big hit game without executing the small hit game, despite the fact that the RUSH state has been set.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability change state, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is shifted to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts, so that the gaming state is set. When the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery by setting the latent status, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol does not shift to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot change starts , The probability variation state is continued even during the change of the jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide different game characteristics depending on the type of the special symbol.

  In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, even when a jackpot is won by lottery of the second special symbol in the probability change state, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is changed to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It may be configured to set the latent state as a gaming state by shifting to, and only when a specific jackpot type is set among a plurality of jackpot types, the The latent state may be set as the gaming state by shifting the high probability state of the symbol to the low probability state.

  Furthermore, the number of jackpots won during the advantageous continuation period is measured, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined number, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is shifted to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. May be configured to set a latent state as a game state.

  In the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the probable change state, the latent state is set in a period until the jackpot change ends at the time when the jackpot change starts. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot fluctuation corresponding to the predicted winning information is terminated based on the fact that it is predicted that the jackpot will be won in the start winning process (see FIG. 47). It may be configured to set a latent state during a period (a plurality of fluctuation periods) before the operation.

  In the present embodiment, when a variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected in the state where the latent state is set, a constant variation pattern table is always set regardless of the number of times the second special symbol changes during the latent state setting. (See FIG. 19 (b)). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of times the second special symbol changes after the latent state is set reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50). It is also possible to provide a determining means for determining whether or not the change has been performed, and to make the data table for selecting the variation pattern different based on the determination result of the determining means.

  Specifically, when the number of times of the change of the second special symbol has not reached the predetermined number (for example, 50 times), the data table in which the average of the change time is about 2 seconds is referred to, and the change of the second special symbol is changed. When the number of times has reached a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), it is preferable to refer to a data table in which the average of the fluctuation time is about 1 second. Thereby, when the fluctuation pattern in which the long fluctuation time is set as the large fluctuation of the first special symbol is selected, more small hit games can be provided to the player.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the latent state is set during the jackpot change in the probability change state. In addition, the lottery result of the special symbol is out of a specific or small hit. The latent state may be set during the fluctuation display in the case, or the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol is out of a specific or small hit reaches the predetermined number of times during the probable change state In such a case, a latent state may be set.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, when a probability change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set and a jackpot is won in a lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). In addition, the game state during the change of the big hit is set as the latent state, and the small hit game is easily executed when the latent state is set. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the above-described first embodiment, the game state can be changed during a symbol determination period (a period in which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) in which the result of drawing a special symbol is displayed. It is configured to be. In other words, when a win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the state where the probability change state is set, the start timing of the symbol determination period in which the lottery result is displayed (the first symbol showing the big hit) At the timing when is stopped and displayed), the latent state is set as the gaming state.

  Further, the second embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that a different symbol determination period is set based on the result of the special symbol lottery. With this configuration, the length of the period in which the latent state that is advantageous to the player is set can be changed according to the length of the symbol determination period that is set. In addition, as compared with the configuration in which the latent state is set in accordance with the change time of the special symbol (the period in which the special symbol is changed) as in the first embodiment described above, the symbol determination period (special Since the latent state is set in correspondence with the symbol stop period, the display mode corresponding to the special symbol in the state where the latent state is set can be simplified. The control of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

  Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, once the probability change state is set, the probability change state is configured to continue until the next jackpot is won. In the second embodiment, however, the special symbol jackpot is set. Even if the winning has not been achieved, the probable change state is terminated when a predetermined end condition (the number of special symbol changes after the probable change state is set reaches the predetermined number of times (50)) is satisfied. In that it is configured in With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game for a player who shifts to the latent state during the period in which the probability change state is set.

  Here, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of a game when a specific big hit (big hit C) is won by lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in a state where the probability change state is set. . As shown in FIG. 88, in the second embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a state in which the probability change state is set, the jackpot game starts from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation stops (see FIG. 88 (c)). The latent state is set in a period (symbol confirmation period) until it is executed.

  Then, in a state in which the latent state is set, a game for performing a lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed as in the first embodiment described above. In addition, if the small hit of the special figure 2 is won during the symbol fixing period of the special figure 1, the measurement (subtraction) of the symbol fixing period of the special figure 1 is interrupted while the small hit game is executed. ing. In addition, in the second embodiment, a different symbol confirmation period is set according to the lottery result even when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place or a small hit. Thereby, the player desires that a long period be set as the symbol determination period as the lottery result of the special figure 1 (the lottery result that has won the jackpot) corresponding to the period in which the latent state is set, In the state in which the latent state is set, it is desired that a short period be set as the symbol determination period in order to execute the lottery of the special figure 2 more.

  In other words, in the second embodiment in which the symbol confirmation period is changed according to the lottery result, a case where a long symbol confirmation period is desired and a case where a short symbol confirmation period is desired according to the game state or the type of the special symbol. And can be provided to the player. Further, in the second embodiment, different symbol determination periods are set for the same variation pattern in which the same variation display can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the symbol determination period from being predicted in advance by the special symbol change display content for the player, and which symbol determination period is set for this special figure lottery. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the special symbol is actually displayed until the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, because of the above-described configuration, a variation effect (an effect mode executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) performed in response to one variation time (variation pattern) is performed. Since a plurality of symbol determination periods are set, the time required for one special symbol lottery (the special symbol lottery is performed before the next special symbol lottery can be performed) ) Can be unified even if the time until is complicated.

  In the example described with reference to FIG. 88, the flow of the game in the case where the probability change state is set, that is, when the number of remaining working hours is 47, and the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won, is shown. It is configured such that the latent state is set from the time when the jackpot fluctuation stops. In addition, when the probability change state ends (when the value of the probability change counter 203aa becomes 0) (for example, the 50th special figure lottery after the probability change state is set), the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won. Is configured such that the latent state is set from the timing at which the jackpot fluctuation starts.

  With this configuration, in the state where the probable change state is set, the advantageous periods of different lengths are set based on the timing of winning the jackpot in Toku-zu. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while desiring to win a jackpot at a timing when a long advantageous period is set, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, the game state set for the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed when the probability change state is set will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the relationship between the contents of the special figure 1 game and the awarded score after the probability change state is set.

  As shown in FIG. 89, in the second embodiment, the game state is variably set based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the state in which the probable change state is set, and the number of lotteries (the number of special figure changes). It is configured to be. Specifically, in the second embodiment, the probable change state is set so that the number of lotteries of the special symbol (the number of fluctuations) reaches a predetermined number of times (50 times) without winning a jackpot. If the number of special symbol lottery times (number of times of change) is 1 to 49 times, the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed during the change of the special jackpot. During the confirmation period, a latent state is set. As a result, a latent state game (RUSH game) during the symbol determination period and a jackpot game after the completion of the latent state are given as a bonus to the player.

  Next, when the number of lotteries (number of changes) of the special symbol is the 50th big win, the latent state is set during the change of the big hit and during the symbol determination period. As a result, a bonus game (RUSH game) from the jackpot change to the end of the symbol determination period and a jackpot game after the completion of the latent state are given to the player as a bonus. That is, in the second embodiment, in the state where the probable change state is set, the condition for shifting to the latent state (the jackpot winning) while the specific condition (the specific number of lotteries (the 50th)) is satisfied is satisfied. In the case where the condition is satisfied, a configuration is provided in which a benefit more advantageous to the player is given than when the condition for shifting to the latent state is satisfied in a state where the specific condition is not satisfied.

  When the number of special symbol lotteries exceeds 50, the predetermined number of variations is reached, and the normal state is set as the gaming state. If a jackpot is won during the normal state, the normal state continues during the change of the special symbol and during the symbol determination period, and the jackpot game is executed.

  On the other hand, if the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of fluctuations) is out of the range from the first to the 49th after the probability change state is set, the probability change state during the fluctuation of the special symbol and also during the symbol determination period is changed. Continuing, if it is off at the 50th time, since the latent state is set during the change of the special symbol and during the symbol determination period, the latent state from the special figure change to the end of the symbol determination period A game (RUSH game) can be executed.

  Although the detailed description will be described later, in the second embodiment, if the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, the special symbol variation time and the symbol confirmation period in the probable change state will be other than the jackpot. , A small hit), and a longer time is more easily selected. For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation time is set to “60 seconds to 180 seconds”. Is selected and the symbol determination period of “5 seconds to 150 seconds” is selected as the symbol determination period. If the lottery result of the special symbol is other than a jackpot (for example, a loss), the A variation time of “5 seconds to 150 seconds” is selected as the variation time, and a symbol determination period of “0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds” is selected as the symbol determination period.

  With this configuration, the latent state game (RUSH game) according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of lotteries is 330 seconds at the maximum (when the jackpot is won at the 50th special figure change number) and the minimum. 5 seconds (when the jackpot is won at the 1st to 49th variation of the special figure), and the player can be provided with a certain width. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of predicting how long the current latent state continues.

  Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of the special symbol lottery result, when the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of times of change) since the probability change state is set to 50 times, during the change of the special symbol, and Since the latent state is set during the symbol determination period, even if the jackpot is not won during the probability change state, the latent state game (RUSH game) is given to the player. Can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the latent state game (RUSH game) than the configuration of the first embodiment in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is provided only when the jackpot is won. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot experience the latent state game (RUSH game) despite having played the game for a long time and is bored with the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the latent state is set based on the fact that the jackpot has been won during the probability change state, a longer latent state is set than when the latent state is set without winning the jackpot. It is configured to be easy. Thus, the longer the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed, the easier it is to execute the big hit game after the end of the latent state game (RUSH game). Therefore, it is possible to cause a player who is in a latent state game (RUSH game) to play a game while expecting a jackpot game to be executed.

  Note that, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment described above, in a case where the latent state is set without winning a jackpot, a part of the case where the latent state is set based on winning of a jackpot is equivalent to a part of the case where the latent state is set without winning a jackpot. Alternatively, a special symbol lottery result is set to a fluctuation time or a symbol confirmation period corresponding to a non-big hit (out, small hit) so that a latent state game (RUSH game) of a longer length is executed. Is also good. As a result, it is possible to provide a situation in which it is advantageous for the player not to win a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, thereby providing a surprising game.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, a long latent state is easily set when a jackpot is won during the probable change state, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the state is set, a long latent state may be set. In this case, for example, the number of times of probability change (the number of times of lottery of a special symbol in which the probability variation state is set continuously (the number of times of change)) is 50, and the probability of jackpot in the probability variation state, that is, the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/20. , And a long latent state may be set if the result of the special symbol lottery is 50 consecutive misses (about 7%).

  Next, among display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, display contents different from those in the above-described first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, since the latent state is set during the symbol determination period, the special figure 1 for the effect content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set. The display mode of the display area Dm1 or the special figure 2 display area Dm2 is different from that of the first embodiment. FIG. 90A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 90A, in the second embodiment, the latent state is set during the period in which the first special symbol is stopped (fixed display), so the latent state is set. The effect state (super chance zone display) indicating the state where the change of the second special symbol is executed over the timing is displayed, and the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. This is different from the display screen of the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 8A) in that it is executed during a period in which the second symbol for displaying is stopped (fixed display). The other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 90A, the third symbol display mode (“777”) for indicating that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) has won the jackpot is stopped and displayed. This indicates that the latent probability state is set based on the fact that the jackpot has been won in the first special symbol during the probability change state. In the example shown in FIG. 90A, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 in which the third symbol is displayed in a display mode that can be visually recognized by the player is formed. By grasping the display mode of the third symbol displayed on Dm1 and the effect mode indicating that the latent state displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been set, it is possible to determine the future game flow. A game can be played in a state in which information (information on whether or not a jackpot game is executed after the end of the latent game) is obtained in advance.

  In the second embodiment, when the latent state is set based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol, when the special symbol lottery is performed during the latent state, the falling lottery (special symbol) is performed. (A lottery for shifting the high-probability state to the low-probability state) is not performed. Therefore, by identifying the display state of the third symbol displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, it is possible to know whether the current latent state is an advantageous latent state that is advantageous to the player, The game can be performed with peace of mind.

  In the second embodiment, the configuration is used in which the third symbol is displayed so that the player can easily identify the lottery result of the special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In order to make it difficult for the player to identify, the display area is reduced or the display area other than the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, provided on the light emitting body attached to the game board 13 or other than the third symbol display device 81) Or a display using a liquid crystal display device or the like). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know what triggered the latent state to be set, so that the jackpot game is executed after the completion of the latent state game (RUSH game). It is possible to play a game while predicting whether or not a drop lottery is being performed during a latent state game (RUSH game).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol is changed from when the third symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 until the fixed display period (symbol fixed period) elapses. Although it is configured to completely stop without changing, if it is to notify the player that the special symbol confirmation display period (symbol confirmation period) is currently in progress, without being limited to this, for example, During the fixed display period, the variable display of the third symbol is stopped, but the display mode (color) of the third symbol may be gradually changed, or the third symbol may be so changed that the player cannot be identified. The design may be configured to swing.

  In addition, a new lottery (variation) of the special symbol is given to the player because the right to the newly executed special symbol lottery has not yet been acquired, whether the present is in the final display period (the symbol final period). ) May be configured to set a display mode for allowing the player to identify whether or not the state is not executed. For example, “fixed display” or “waiting” is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. May be displayed, or the display mode (color, design) of the third symbol may be changed between “fixed display” and “standby”. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress erroneous recognition that a new lottery is not started during the final display period despite the state where the lottery is held.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90 (b), the display contents at the time of entering the latent state game (RUSH game) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when a latent state game (RUSH game) enters. As shown in FIG. 90 (b), in the present embodiment, since the latent state is set during the period when the first special symbol is stopped (fixed display), the latent state game (RUSH game) is performed. The effect of indicating the entry is executed during the period in which the second symbol for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is stopped (fixed display) in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1. This is different from the display screen of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8B). The other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. It is different in that it is. Other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 91 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91, in the ROM 202 of the second embodiment, the big hit type selection table 202aa is replaced with the big hit type selection table 202d, and the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab is replaced with the small hit type selection table 202e. Is different from the above-described first embodiment in that a variation pattern selection 2 table 202ac is provided in place of the variation pattern selection table 202f, and a deviation type selection table 202ad is provided.

  The jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is different from the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment in that the type of the jackpot type is changed and various counters (hour saving counter 203f, probability change counter 203aa) set after the end of the jackpot. The difference is that the contents of the fixed time counters 203ad and 203ae) are changed, and that the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each big hit type is changed. Here, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa specifies the same jackpot operation content as the jackpot type specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) of the first embodiment described above. The value of the time saving counter 203f, the probability change counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae are defined for each big hit type.

  Specifically, the jackpot type (jackpot A1 to jackpot A3) in which the same jackpot operation content as jackpot A in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the above-described first embodiment is executed is selected (the jackpot is won). The value of "100" is set in the time saving counter 203f when the gaming state is "normal" or the latent state, and the value of "50" is set in the time saving state or the probable changing state. Thus, it is defined that a value of “50” is set in the probability change counter 203aa.

  Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, the jackpot A1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot A2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot A3 is set to "150 seconds". The jackpot A1 is defined in the range of the counter C2 (0 to 99) in the range of “0 to 19”, the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of “20 to 23”, and the jackpot A3 is defined in the range of “24”. That is, in the second embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (jackpots A1 to A3) is executed in 25% of the case where the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and 80% (20/20) 25) is the jackpot D, 16% (4/25) is the jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is the jackpot A3.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the player wins a jackpot in which a jackpot game most advantageous to the player is executed, a short symbol determination period is used as a period (symbol determination period) for stopping and displaying the lottery result to the player. When selected, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention not only to the winning of the big hit but also to the length of the symbol determination period for the special symbol lottery, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Further, in the second embodiment, a configuration in which the symbol determination period is defined in association with the jackpot type is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for selecting the jackpot operation content (jackpot type), The lottery for selecting the symbol confirmation period may be executed independently. In this case, since a plurality of symbol determination periods can be combined with a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide a gaming property that is difficult for the player to predict.

  Next, similarly to the jackpots A1 to A3 described above, jackpots B1 to B3, jackpots C1 to C3, and jackpots D1 to D3 are defined, respectively.

  Specifically, the jackpot type (jackpot B1 to jackpot B3) in which the same jackpot operation content as the jackpot B in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the above-described first embodiment is executed is selected (the jackpot is won). When the gaming state is the normal state or the latent state, the value of “0” is set to the time-saving counter 203f, and the value of “100” is set in the time-saving state or the probable state. Thus, it is defined that a value of “0” is set to the probability change counter 203aa.

  Furthermore, as the symbol determination period of the special symbol, the jackpot B1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot B2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot B3 is set to "150 seconds". The jackpot B1 is defined in the range of the counter C2 (0 to 99) “25 to 29”, the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of “20 to 23”, and the jackpot A3 is defined in “24”. That is, in A2 of the second embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (jackpots A1 to A3) is executed at 25% of the jackpot winning in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 80% ( 20/25) is a jackpot D, 16% (4/25) is a jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is a jackpot A3.

  Next, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93 (a), the small hitting type selection 2 table 202ab is different from the small hitting type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) of the first embodiment described above in terms of each small hitting type (small hitting type). The difference is that the hits A to C are further subdivided and defined. Otherwise, it is the same as the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B). Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  Specifically, as the small hit type in which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit A in the first embodiment described above is performed, the value of the small hit type counter C5 falls within the range of “0 to 9”. The "small hit A1" with the symbol determination time of "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "10 to 89", and the "small hit A2" with the symbol determination time of "0.5 seconds" is "90 to 93". "A small hit A3" in which the symbol determination time is "1.5 seconds" is defined in the range of "."

  Then, as the small hitting type in which the small hitting operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hitting B of the above-described first embodiment is executed, the value of the small hitting type counter C5 is set in the range of “94 to 95” and the symbol is determined. "Small hit B1" with a time of "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "96 to 97", and "Small hit B2" with a symbol determination time of "0.5 seconds" is a value of "98". The "small hit B3" with a fixed time of "1.5 seconds" is defined. Further, as the small hit type in which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit C of the first embodiment is executed, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is set to “99” and the symbol determination time is set to “1. A small hit operation (opening operation) of "5 seconds" is specified.

  Next, the contents of the departure type selection table 202ad will be described with reference to FIG. When the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the outlier type selection table 202ad is referred to in order to select the outlier type, and is different according to the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. The fixed time is specified.

  In the present embodiment, the same counter value (the value of the small hit type counter C5) is used for the special symbol lottery result and the special symbol lottery result because the special symbol lottery result cannot overlap. ) To select a type. Thereby, the number of counters provided in main controller 110 can be reduced. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and a configuration may be adopted in which different counters are used depending on whether a special symbol lottery result is a small hit or a loss.

  FIG. 93B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the departure type selection table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), the symbol type (out-of-range type) whose symbol confirmation time is 0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. It is defined corresponding to the value of the type counter C5.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, it is possible to set a lottery result, a small hit, a missed lottery result as a special symbol lottery result, and it is possible to set a different symbol determination time for each lottery result. It is composed. Thereby, even if the lottery results of the special symbols are the same, different symbol determination times can be set.

  Here, for example, when a lottery result of a special symbol is a big hit and a latent state is set during the symbol determination period, a longer time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as the symbol determination time. Since the period during which the latent state is set can be lengthened, it can be advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the longer the symbol determination time is selected, the smaller the number of games per unit time (the number of special symbol lotteries) becomes, which is disadvantageous to the player.

  Furthermore, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) in the case where the latent state is set during the period in which the special symbol indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is a big hit is stopped and displayed. During the game (RUSH game) where the lottery is executed, if the lottery result of Toku-zu 2 is a small hit or a miss, a long symbol determination time is selected to set a predetermined latent state. Since the number of special figure 2 lotteries that can be executed during the period (the symbol determination period of the special figure 1) is reduced, it is disadvantageous for the player.

  As described above, the degree of advantage of the set symbol determination period can be varied according to the result of the special symbol lottery, so that a novel playability can be provided to the player.

  In the present embodiment, by changing the symbol determination period of the special symbol, the period in which the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set, and the period is set during the latent state. By varying the number of special symbol lotteries, the degree of advantage provided to the player is configured to be different, but other configurations may be used, for example, a special symbol lottery Only when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol indicating the winning is longer than the predetermined period, a privilege for displaying a preferable image to the player may be provided, or the music played during the jackpot game may be provided. The selection operation may be configured to be executable during the symbol determination period.

  Next, the contents of the time saving / probability change 2 table 202ac2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time-saving / probable-change two table 202ac2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94, the time saving / probability variation 2 table 202ac2 is different from the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A) of the above-described first embodiment in the variation pattern corresponding to the special figure 1. The difference is that the lengths are different. Otherwise, it is the same as the time saving / probability change table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A). Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the latent state is set during the special symbol stop display period (symbol determination period) when a special symbol lottery (lottery of special figure 1) is won during the probability change state. With this configuration, the variable display period of the special figure 1 during the probable change state is configured to be shorter than that of the first embodiment.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 95, the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a probable variable counter 203aa is provided instead of the probable variable flag 203g. The difference is that a symbol fixing flag 203ac, a special figure 1 fixing time counter 203ad, and a special figure 2 fixing time counter 203ae are added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

  The probability change counter 203aa is a counter for continuing the number of special symbol lotteries executed in the special symbol high-probability state (latent state, probability change state), and is a period during which the special symbol lottery is executed with a high probability. It is for showing.

  The value of the probability change counter 203aa is determined at the timing when the probability change flag 203g is set to ON in the jackpot termination process (see S2312 in FIG. 54) of the first embodiment described above, in accordance with the type of the winning jackpot (see FIG. 92 is set, and the value is referred to in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) (S451 in FIG. 98), and a jackpot lottery according to the value set in the probability change counter 203aa is performed. This is executed (see S403 and S404 in FIG. 98). It is also referred to when the second special symbol lottery is executed (see S953 in FIG. 102).

  Then, the value is decremented by 1 at the timing when the symbol fixing period of the special symbol (special figure 1, special symbol 2) has elapsed, and reset to 0 at the timing when the symbol fixing period of the special symbol which has won the jackpot has elapsed. .

  The special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is a flag for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed, and when it is set to ON, the stop display of the special figure 1 is performed. It is during the period (during the symbol confirmation period). This special symbol 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON in the first special symbol fixing period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) (see S2802 in FIG. 100), and the first special symbol variation stopping process 2 (FIG. 99) In S257). Then, when it is determined that the symbol confirmation period has elapsed (S853 in FIG. 99: Yes), it is set to OFF.

  The special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed. It is during the period (during the symbol confirmation period). The special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is different from the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab in that the type of the target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol (special figure 1) to the second special symbol (special figure). The only difference is that the step is changed to 2), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae are counters for measuring the symbol fixed period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2). When the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) 1 is stopped and displayed, a value indicating the current symbol determination period is set in a corresponding counter. Then, in the process during the fixed time (see S860 in FIG. 101) that is periodically executed, the value of the counter is subtracted, and the values of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae become 0. In this case, a process for ending the symbol fixing period of the special symbol is executed.

  In the second embodiment, a different symbol confirmation period is set according to the type for indicating the special symbol lottery result (see FIGS. 92 and 93). Then, during the symbol determination period, the latent state is set as the gaming state.

  Next, information stored in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96, in the RAM 223 of the second embodiment, in addition to the electrical configuration of the above-described first embodiment, a special figure 1 decision counter 223aa, a special figure 2 decision counter 223ab, and a remaining decision time information storage area 223ac and a decision flag 223ad are added.

  The special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is a counter for measuring a period in which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol confirmation period), and is a main symbol of the first special symbol (special figure 1) from the main control device 110. Is received, a value corresponding to the symbol fixing period of the special figure 1 is set.

  The value set in the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is periodically decremented by various counter update processing 2 (see FIG. 111) executed every millisecond. In the second embodiment, the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the symbol determination period of the special symbol (first special symbol). By managing the value of the one confirmation counter 223aa, it is possible to set remaining period information indicating the remaining period in which the latent state is continuously set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the small hit of the second special symbol is won during the symbol fixing period of the special figure 1 (during the latent game), the value of the special figure 1 fixing counter 223aa is determined during the small hit game. Is configured to interrupt the process of subtracting. Therefore, since the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 is not subtracted while the small hit game is being executed, it is possible to appropriately execute the lottery of the second special symbol during the symbol determination period.

  In addition, in addition to the configuration of the above-described second embodiment, a process for accumulating a period during which the subtraction process of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa is suspended may be provided. Specifically, there is provided a small hitting game counter for measuring a period in which the small hitting game is executed, and the small hitting game counter is used to continuously set the small hitting game during the latent state. May be calculated, or an interrupting counter for measuring a period in which a flag for interrupting the subtraction process of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is set to ON is provided. The medium counter may be used to calculate the cumulative period during the small hitting game in the latent state that is continuously set.

  As described above, the result of the current latent state game (RUSH game) is notified to the player by calculating the cumulative interruption information in which the period in which the subtraction process of the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 is interrupted is calculated. Can be. Further, as the detailed game result of the latent state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of balls acquired during the latent state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of wins per small win, and the above-described interrupted cumulative Based on the information, a game result indicating whether there are more benefits obtained than the design value (or more than the past history), and whether the number of obtained balls is larger than the number of winning small hits. It may be configured to notify the player of the game result indicating the game result or the game result indicating whether or not the interrupted cumulative information is long with respect to the number of winning small hits. Alternatively, the system may be configured to simply notify the cumulative number of acquired balls, the cumulative number of small hits, and the cumulative interruption information.

  The special figure 2 confirmation counter 223ab is a counter for measuring a period (symbol confirmation period) in which the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, and is a symbol confirmation period of the second special symbol (special figure 2) from the main controller 110. Is received, a value corresponding to the symbol determination period of the special figure 2 is set. The specific contents are the same as the above-described special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa except that the measurement target is changed to the special figure 1 period of the special figure 1 and changed to the special figure 2 of the special figure 2 period. Description is omitted.

  The remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac stores the remaining time (remaining fixed time) of the symbol fixed period at the time when the subtraction processing of the symbol fixed period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (temporary stop of the special figure 1). This is a data area for storing the remaining determination time information shown. In the second embodiment, an effect mode when restarting the symbol confirmation period subtraction process is set based on the remaining confirmation time information stored in the remaining confirmation time information storage area 223ac. This makes it possible to predict the period until the latent state ends by grasping the effect mode executed when the small hitting game ends and the symbol determination period subtraction process is restarted.

  If it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received in the command determination process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106) of the sound ramp control device 113 (S4219 in FIG. 106: Yes), the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac is stored. The remaining determination time information (period A to period C) set in the temporary stop related processing 2 to be executed (see S4253 in FIG. 108) is stored (see S4956, S4958, and S4959 in FIG. 108). Then, in the resumption process (see S4952 in FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop-related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108), the reading is performed when setting the effect mode when resuming the symbol fixed period subtraction process. It is issued (see S5002 and S5052 in FIG. 109) and is referred to when determining the additional effect type (see S5003 and S5053 in FIG. 109).

  Since the information for indicating the remaining period of the latent state game is notified by the establishment of various notification conditions in this way, the remaining period of the symbol determination period, that is, the latent state game is performed. The information indicating the remaining period that can be executed can be obtained by grasping the effect form of various effects performed during the latent state. Therefore, the effect can be watched by the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the second embodiment, the remaining period of the symbol determination period, that is, the remaining period in which the latent state game can be executed is divided into predetermined ranges, and the remaining period information for indicating the divided range is provided by the player. Is configured to inform the player of the remaining period of the latent state game roughly, and to provide the player with a fun of predicting the specific remaining period. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific remaining period may be notified to the player in seconds.

  The in-determination flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the special symbol is in the stop display period (symbol determination period), and is set to ON when the special symbol is in the stop display period (symbol determination period). You. The in-determination flag 223ad is configured to be set to ON regardless of which of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) is in the symbol fixing period. I have.

  The determination flag 223ad is a symbol determination executed when it is determined that the symbol determination related command has been received in the command determination process 2 (see S4152 in FIG. 106) of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4254 in FIG. 106: Yes). It is set to on in the related processing (see S4255 in FIG. 110) (see S5077 in FIG. 110). When it is determined in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (see S4951 in FIG. 108), the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 is changed during the symbol determination period. It is referred to to determine whether or not (see S4953 in FIG. 108). Also, when it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has been received in the restart processing (S4952 in FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop related processing 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) (S5001: Yes in FIG. 109). This is referred to to determine whether or not the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 is during the symbol determination period (see S5051 in FIG. 109).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, at the time when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (the time when the small hit game is executed) or at the time when the small hit game ends. It is determined whether the fluctuating state of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is during the fluctuating display period or during the symbol confirmation period, and based on the result of the determination, temporarily suspending the special figure 1 (fluctuating display period, The processing when the subtraction of the symbol fixed period is interrupted) and the effect mode when the special figure 1 is restarted (the variable display period and the subtraction of the symbol fixed period are restarted) are set.

  With this configuration, the processing is appropriately executed at any timing when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is in the fluctuation state at the timing of winning the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). can do.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above in that a special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 32) is used instead of the special symbol variation process. (See FIG. 97), the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), and the first special symbol jackpot determination stop process (see FIG. 38). First special symbol change stop processing 2 (see FIG. 99) and second special symbol jackpot determination processing 2 (see FIG. 102) instead of the second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 40), and second special symbol change stop processing The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see FIG. 103) is executed instead of (see FIG. 45), and the special figure 2 off stop processing 2 (see FIG. 105) is executed instead of the special figure 2 off stop processing (see FIG. 46). The first special Pattern confirmation period setting process (see FIG. 100), with the difference that adding a new second special symbol determined period setting process (see FIG. 104). Otherwise, the same processing is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, in the contents of the control processing executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment, the points that are significantly different from the above-described first embodiment will be briefly described. In the first embodiment described above, the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set during the variable display period of one special symbol (special figure 1). More specifically, in the state in which the probable change state is set, the latent state is set during the fluctuation display period of the special symbol that has won the jackpot, and the latent state game (RUSH game) is performed until the fluctuation display period ends. And the big hit game is executed immediately after the variable display period ends. As a result, the player can continuously execute two different privilege games (a game in which small hits frequently occur and a big hit game in the latent state), and the player can frequently execute the bonus games in a short period of time. Benefits can be granted.

  Furthermore, since the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed in a state before the jackpot game is executed, the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed with confidence. In other words, even when the game result of the first half is not good, the big hit game in which the bonus given to the player is generally larger than the small hit game is set in the latter half of two consecutive bonus games. Thus, it is possible to enthusiastically obtain a privilege in a game (big hit game) executed in the second half.

  In addition, since the latent state game (RUSH game) is configured to be performed during execution of the jackpot fluctuation, a period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed may be set in advance. it can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed for an unexpectedly long time and a privilege is excessively given to the player.

  In addition, the period during which a latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed varies according to a fluctuation pattern selected when a jackpot is won. In other words, since a single lottery of a special symbol determines whether or not a jackpot game is to be executed and the length of the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game), the latent state game ( The processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced as compared with the case where a process using a dedicated selection table is executed to preset the length of the game period of (RUSH game).

  However, in the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) is determined only by the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol. In order to prepare a plurality of (RUSH games) game periods, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of variation patterns (variation times) in advance, and there is a possibility that a data area for storing the variation patterns may be squeezed.

  Therefore, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the period in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol confirmation period) is also a period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. It is configured such that the length of the symbol confirmation period is changed according to the symbol type based on the special symbol lottery result.

  With this configuration, the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) can be set by adding (combining) the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the symbol determination period, so that the latent state game can be set. A plurality of patterns can be set for a game period (RUSH game) with a small data amount.

  Further, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the latent state game (RUSH game), a different symbol confirmation period is set according to the lottery result, so that it is set. The lottery frequency of the special figure 2 executed during the predetermined latent state game (RUSH game) period (variable display time of the special figure 1) can be varied depending on the symbol determination period.

  That is, in the lottery of the first special symbol in which the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) is set, it is desired that a longer symbol determination period is set, and the latent state game (RUSH game) is set. In the lottery of the second special symbol that is repeatedly executed during the game, it becomes a gaming property that it is desired to set a shorter symbol determination period, and a novelty that a different lottery result is desired depending on the special symbol type to be drawn. Some playability can be provided to the player.

  Further, in the second embodiment, a process for shifting the high probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low probability state (subtraction process of the time saving counter 203f) is executed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation, and the special symbol high probability state is executed. To a low-probability state (subtraction processing of the probability change counter 203aa) is executed at the end of the special symbol determination period, and the special symbol high-probability state is set. When the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (50 times), the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state, and the special symbol is specially set in the state where the high probability state is set. When the number of times of symbol change (number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number of times (50 times), it is configured such that a high probability state of a normal symbol can be shifted to a low probability state.

  In other words, if the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of lotteries) reaches 50 in a state in which the probable change state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set, the change (the 50th fluctuation) ) Is started, the gaming state shifts to the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), and the timing when the variation (the 50th variation) ends (the symbol confirmation period ends) ), The gaming state can be shifted to a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol).

  With this configuration, even if the jackpot has not been won, the latent state can be set only for a predetermined specific period (the 50th fluctuation period (including the symbol confirmation period)). , It is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the latent state game (RUSH game).

  First, with reference to FIG. 97, a special symbol change stop process 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the content of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154). The special symbol variation stop process 2 (S154) is different from the special symbol variation process (S154) in the above-described first embodiment in that the processes of S251 and S252 are added to the first special symbol variation stop process (S207). The difference is that the second special symbol change stop process 2 (S263) is executed instead of the first special symbol change stop process 2 (S257) and the second special symbol change stop process (S213).

  In the special symbol variation process 2 (S154), if it is determined in the process of S204 that the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203m is 0 (S204: No), the special symbol 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is turned on. It is determined whether it has been set (S251). When it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to ON (S251: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) is executed, and the process proceeds to S209. Details of the first special symbol change stop processing 2 (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to OFF (S251: No), the first special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed, and the process proceeds to S209. Move on to processing.

  If it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is not 0 (greater than 0) in the processing of S206 described above (S206: No), or if the processing of S208 and S257 is executed, It is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 203n in FIG. 2 is greater than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S209: No), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 symbol determination in-progress flag 203ac is set to ON. (S252).

  In the process of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol determination in-progress flag 203ac is not set to ON (S252; No), that is, by the processes of S209 and S252, the present is the second special symbol (special figure 2). If it is determined that it is neither during the fluctuation display nor during the symbol confirmation period, the second special symbol fluctuation start process is executed to newly start the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (S210). The process ends. The details of the second special symbol change start process (S210) are the same as those in the above-described first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to ON (S252: Yes), that is, during the symbol fixing period of the second special symbol (special figure 2). If it is determined that the above is the second special symbol change stop process 2 (S263), the process is terminated. Details of the second special symbol change stop processing 2 (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the content of the first special symbol big hit determination process 2 (S356). The first special symbol big hit determination process 2 (S356) is different from the first special symbol big hit determination process (S306) in the first embodiment in that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is larger than 0 instead of the process of S402. The difference is that a process (S451) of judging is performed.

  That is, in the first embodiment described above, when the special symbol high probability state is set, the special symbol high probability state is continued until the special symbol jackpot is won. Although the probable change flag 203g for indicating the high probability state is used, in the second embodiment, as a condition for terminating the special symbol high probability state, a special symbol jackpot winning (first termination condition) is set. In addition, there is a second ending condition that is satisfied when the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50). Therefore, the probable change counter 203aa is used to measure the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of lotteries) during the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. The probability change counter 203aa is for measuring the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of lotteries) until the above-described second end condition is satisfied, and updates the value based on the execution of the special symbol lottery. It is configured to be.

  It should be noted that any configuration other than the present embodiment may be any configuration that can determine whether the above-described second end condition is satisfied. For example, the probable change flag 203g used in the first embodiment and the second variable The probability variation counter 203aa used in the embodiment may be used, or a variation number counter that always measures the variation number (lottery number) of the special symbol regardless of the game state is provided. The number of times the special symbol changes during the probable change state may be determined based on the number of updates of the change number counter.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the number of times of the change of the special symbol, that is, the number of times of the change of the first special symbol (the special figure 1) and the number of times of the change of the second special symbol (the special figure 2) are added. The end condition (second end condition) for terminating the probable change state is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the number of times of change (number of lotteries) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is measured. The FIG. 1 change number counter and the special figure 2 change number counter that measures only the change number (lot number) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are provided. End conditions (end conditions for ending the probable change state) may be set.

  In the second embodiment, as a termination condition for terminating a high probability state (for example, a probable change state) of a special symbol, in addition to the first termination condition based on a special symbol jackpot winning, the number of times the special symbol changes Although the second end condition based on the (number of lotteries) is provided, other end conditions may be provided. For example, the lottery result of the special symbol may be different from the specific lottery result other than the big hit (for example, a small hit). A third ending condition that is satisfied when the number of times has reached a predetermined number of times may be provided. Further, the third ending condition may be a lottery result of a first special symbol, a lottery result of a second special symbol, May be set for each.

  In addition, a time counter is provided to measure the time during which the special symbol high-probability state is set. The fourth end condition that is established when the clock counter has counted a predetermined time, and the special symbol high-probability state are set. A fifth end condition that may be established based on the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol executed in the state where the lottery is performed or the number of lotteries may be provided.

  In addition, when any of the above-described plurality of termination conditions is satisfied, the timing for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is set to a timing other than the timing used in the second embodiment. For example, for example, immediately before starting the special symbol lottery, immediately after the special symbol lottery is executed, the timing to start the special symbol fluctuation, or a predetermined time after the special symbol fluctuation is started (for example, 5 seconds), the timing at which the change of the special symbol is stopped, the timing at which a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the stop display period of the special symbol (symbol confirmation). The transition may be made at any timing of the end timing of the period.

  By providing a plurality of ending conditions for ending the special symbol high probability state and the timing of ending the special symbol high probability state when the ending condition is satisfied, a special Since it is difficult to understand how long the high probability state of the symbol continues and at what timing (at the start of the change of the special symbol, at the time of the change stop, at the end of the symbol fixing period), it is nervous to the player. The game can be performed while giving a feeling.

  Other processes of the first special symbol big hit determination process 2 (S356) are the same as those of the first special symbol big hit determination process (S306), and thus detailed description is omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 99, a first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257), which is one of the special symbol variation processes 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change stop processing 2 (S257). The first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) is a process (S851-S858) performed during the special symbol symbol determination period in contrast to the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) in the above-described first embodiment. , S860) is added, and the content of the reset processing when the first special symbol (special figure 1) that has won the jackpot is stopped and displayed is different. Other processes are the same as the first special symbol change stop process (S207), and thus detailed description is omitted.

  Here, returning to FIG. 97, the conditions under which the first special symbol change stop processing 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) is executed will be described. In the first special symbol change stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99), a process of stopping the change of the special symbol, a process of setting a period for stopping and displaying the special symbol (symbol determination period), and a process of fixing the set symbol are set. It is configured to execute a process of measuring a period, and various execution processes corresponding to a lottery result of a special symbol after a symbol determination period has elapsed.

  Therefore, in the process of S206 in FIG. 97, that is, in the process of determining whether or not the timing to end the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) (The value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is 0) (S206: Yes in FIG. 97), and the processing of S251, that is, the current state of the first special symbol (special figure 1) When it is determined in the process of determining whether or not the stop display is being performed, the stop display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being performed (the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to ON). (S251 in FIG. 97: Yes).

  Returning to FIG. 99, the description will be continued. In the first special symbol change stop processing 2 (S257), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 symbol determination in-progress flag 203ab is set to ON (S851). Here, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed and the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257) is executed to stop and display the special figure 1, that is, in the processing of S206 of FIG. When the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) is executed by determining that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter is 0, the special figure 1 symbol determination in-progress flag 203ab is not set to ON. Therefore, in the processing of S851, it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S851: No), and the first special symbol determination period setting processing is executed (S851: No). S852).

  In the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852), a process is executed to set a period (symbol determination period) in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the first special symbol determination period setting process, which is one of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. (S852) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852). In the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852), a determination time (symbol determination period) is set, and a command to be transmitted to the first symbol display device 37 is set. When the lottery result of 1) is a big hit, a process for shifting the high probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low probability state is executed.

  In the second embodiment, as a condition for shifting the high probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low probability state (time saving end condition), a case where a special symbol jackpot is won (first time saving end condition) and a normal symbol In the state where the high-probability state is continuously set, the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50) (second time-saving ending condition); If the first time-saving termination condition described above is satisfied, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the timing of starting the symbol fixing period), When the two-hour reduction end condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set at the timing when the special symbol fluctuating display is started (the timing when the special symbol lottery is executed). .

  In this way, a plurality of conditions (time saving termination conditions) that trigger the transition of the high probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low probability state are provided, and the transition timing to the low probability state is changed according to the established time saving termination condition. With this configuration, a low probability state of a normal symbol is set at any timing for a player who is playing a game in a game state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set (a time saving state, a probable change state). Since it can be made difficult to predict whether the game state will transition to the game state (normal state, latent state), it is possible to always keep an eye on the game content and provide a game that does not get tired.

  In the second embodiment, the state of the ordinary symbol is configured to be shifted with the above-described contents, but other configurations may be used. For example, immediately before starting the special symbol lottery, or the special symbol. Immediately after the lottery is executed, the timing at which the change of the special symbol is started, the timing at which a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the change of the special symbol is started, the timing at which the change of the special symbol is stopped, and the like. It is configured such that the transition is made at any of a timing when a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the special symbol is stopped and displayed and a timing when the special symbol stop display period (symbol determination period) ends. May be.

  In the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852), first, a value indicating a determination time (symbol determination time) corresponding to a stopped symbol is set in the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad (S2801). In the second embodiment, the fixed time corresponding to each type selected in the various tables (the big hit type selection 2 table 202aa, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, and the off type selection table ad) used in the special symbol lottery. Since the (symbol determination period) is defined, a value indicating a determination time (symbol determination period) corresponding to the type that is stopped and displayed this time is set in the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is a jackpot and the jackpot type selected using the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa (see FIG. 92) is the jackpot A3, the determination is made. Since 150 seconds is defined as the time (symbol determination period), a value indicating 150 seconds is set in the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad.

  Next, the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON (S2802), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S2803). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S2803: Yes), that is, this time, it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol for which the fixed time (symbol fixed time) is set is a big hit. In this case, the value of the time reduction counter 203f is reset in order to shift the high probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low probability state (S2804). On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is not set to ON (S2803: No), the process of S2804 is skipped, and the process shifts to S2805. Thereby, only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol can be set at the timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol.

  In addition, for example, when the special symbol jackpot is won (first time reduction end condition), and when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is continuously set, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (the number of lotteries) is a predetermined number ( (For example, 50 times) (second time-saving end condition) and when the two time-saving end conditions are satisfied based on the same special symbol lottery, it is determined whether the first time-saving end condition is satisfied. Since the processing for determining whether or not the second time-saving end condition is satisfied is performed with priority over the processing for performing the special time-saving end condition, the special symbol jackpot is won when setting the special symbol fixing period. Even in this case, the processing of S2804 is skipped.

  After executing the processing of S2803 or S2804, it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203aa is greater than 0 in the processing of S2805 (S2805). If it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S2805: Yes), a state command indicating a latent state is set (S2806), and the flow shifts to the processing of S2808. On the other hand, in the process of S2805, when it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is 0 (S2805: No), a status command indicating a normal status is set (S2807), and the flow shifts to the process of S2808. After executing the processing of S2806 or S2807, a special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S2808). Next, the change of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S2809), and the present process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 99, the description will be continued. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S851 that the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON (S851: Yes), that is, during the symbol fixing period of the first special symbol (special figure 1). When it is determined that there is, the process of S852 is skipped and the process proceeds to S853. In the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97), it is determined that the special symbol 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to ON (S251: Yes in FIG. 97), and the first special symbol variation stop process 2 is performed. When (see S257 in FIG. 99) is executed, it is determined in the process in S851 that the special figure 1 symbol determination in-progress flag 203ab is set to ON.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is 0 (S853). That is, it is determined whether or not the present time is the timing when the symbol determination period of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad is not 0 (1 or more), that is, it is determined that the present is in the symbol confirmation period of the first special symbol (special figure 1). In this case (S853: No), the processing during the fixed time (S860) is executed, and this processing ends. The process during the fixed time (S860) executes the process of updating the elapsed time of the symbol fixed period, or updates the elapsed time of the temporarily fixed symbol fixed period based on the execution of the small hit game. For example, the processing for restarting the processing is executed, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S853, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad is 0 (S853: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the end time of the determination time (symbol determination period) is reached. Then, the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to off (S854). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability change counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S855). When it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S855: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is decremented by 1 (S856). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is 0 (S855: Yes), the process of S856 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S857. In the process of S857, a state command corresponding to the values of the time-saving counter 203f and the probability change counter 203aa is set (S857).

  By executing the process of S856 described above, in the present embodiment, after the special symbol stop display period has elapsed (after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed), the process of subtracting the value of the probability change counter 203aa is executed. When the value of the later probability change counter 203aa becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state. As a result, the probable change termination condition (the condition for shifting the special symbol high-probability state to the low-probability state) that is satisfied when the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50) is satisfied. In this case, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the special symbol stop display period has elapsed, so the special symbol is displayed during the variable display period of the target special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period. It can be a stochastic state. Therefore, for example, even if the above-described probable change end condition is satisfied by the change (lottery) of the first special symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol is displayed during the change display period of the first special symbol and during the symbol determination period. Can be executed (lottery) of the second special symbol in a state where is set.

  The content of the state command set in the above-described processing of S857 will be specifically described. When the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set), the probability change counter is set. When the value of 203aa is larger than 0, a state command indicating that the gaming state is the probable change state is set, and when the value of the probable change counter 203aa is 0, it indicates that the gaming state is the time saving state. A status command is set. When the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set) and the value of the probability change counter 203aa is larger than 0, the gaming state is a latent state. Is set, and when the value of the probability change counter 203aa is 0, a state command indicating that the gaming state is the normal state is set.

  Further, in the process of S857, when the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (is 1 or more), the residual probability variation number command is set as the value of the probability variation counter 203aa, that is, information indicating the frequency of the residual probability variation. The status command and the remaining probability change number command set in the process of S857 are output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S2201 in FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110. Is done. The voice lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110, and executes a process corresponding to the command received in the command determination process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106). Thus, the current game situation can be properly determined on the sound ramp control device 113 side.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the first time-saving end condition (the condition that is satisfied when the jackpot is won) is satisfied, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is changed to the low probability state at the stop display timing of the special symbol. When the second time-saving end condition (the condition that is satisfied according to the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of lotteries)) is satisfied, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is changed to low at the special symbol change start timing. When the state is shifted to the probability state, and the probability change end condition (the first probability change end condition that is satisfied when a jackpot is won, the second probability change end condition that is satisfied according to the number of times of changing the special symbol (number of lotteries)) is satisfied Is configured to shift the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state at the end timing of the special symbol stop display period (symbol confirmation period).

  With such a configuration, the period in which the latent state in which the gaming state is advantageous for the player as the gaming state can be set differently according to the time-saving end condition that is established, In addition, it is possible to expect not only whether or not a special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, but also that the length of a period in which an advantageous gaming state is set is longer.

  Next, a special figure 1 determination period end command is set (S858), and the same processing as the processing of S801 to S805 in the first embodiment described above is executed. Next, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h and the probability change counter 203aa are reset (S859), the big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and this processing ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 101, during the fixed time processing (S257 in FIG. 99) which is one of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. S860) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the processing during the fixed time (S860).

  In the processing during the fixed time (S860), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901). The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery and the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed (see S1602 in FIG. 46). Then, during the period in which the small hitting game is being executed, the first special symbol variation stop process 2 is not executed in the process of S201 of the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 of FIG. 97). That is, in the processing in S2901 of the processing during the fixed time (see S860 in FIG. 101), it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON only after the small hitting game is over. This is only when the fluctuation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) is executed.

  Therefore, if it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), a special figure 1 resume command is set (S2902), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. 203v is turned off (S2903), and the flow shifts to S2904. That is, if it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the small hitting game has been completed, and the small hitting game is executed. Then, the processing of S2902 and S2903 is executed in order to restart the updating processing of the symbol fixed period which has been temporarily stopped.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S2901: No), the processing of S2902 and S2903 is skipped and S2904 is performed. Move to the processing of.

  In the processing of S2904, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is decremented and updated by 1 (S2904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2905), and this processing ends.

  Next, a second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the content of the second special symbol big hit determination process 2 (S953). The second special symbol big hit determination process 2 (S953) is different from the second special symbol big hit determination process (S905 in FIG. 40) in the first embodiment in that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is changed to the process of S1002. The difference is that a process (S1051) of determining whether the value is greater than 0 is performed. Other processes are the same as those of the second special symbol big hit determination process (S903), and thus detailed description will be omitted. Further, the content of the process executed in S1051 is the same as the content executed in S451 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98). Description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) which is one of the special symbol variation processes (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. explain. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change stop processing 2 (S263). The second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) is different from the second special symbol variation stop process (see S213 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1551 to S1563 are added and S1506. The difference is that the processing of S1560 is provided in place of the processing of, and the processing of S1509 and S1510 is deleted. The other processing is the same as the second special symbol change stop processing (S213 in FIG. 45), and thus detailed description is omitted.

  In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263), the symbol determination period elapses after the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99). This is different from the first embodiment in that the control target is changed from a first special symbol (special figure 1) to a second special symbol (special figure 2). Of the various processes executed in the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263), the various processes of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) are simply controlled. The detailed description of the processing that only differs the symbol type will be omitted.

  In the second special symbol change stop process 2 (S263), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 symbol determination in-progress flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551). When it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol determination flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551: Yes), the process of S1552 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1553. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1551 that the special figure 2 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to off (S1551: No), the second special symbol determination period setting process (S1552) is executed.

  Here, referring to FIG. 104, the second special symbol which is one of the second special symbol change stop processing 2 (see S263 in FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. The determination period setting process (S1552) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol determination period setting process (S1552). The second special symbol determination period setting process (S1552) is a process in which the symbol type targeted for the process executed in the first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) is the first special symbol. To the second special symbol, the command to be set is the special symbol 2 finalizing command corresponding to the second special symbol, and the symbol type to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the second special symbol. The only difference is that the other processing contents are the same. Therefore, referring to the content of the above-described first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100), detailed description of this process is omitted.

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. After executing the processing of S1551 or S1552, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553), and the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is not 0 (ie, If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S1553: No), the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is updated (S1562), and the display of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1563). ), End this processing.

  The processing of S1563 is for updating the display of the second special symbol already stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays the symbol on the first symbol display device 37 to indicate that the special symbol is stopped (including a display blinking at a high speed enough to recognize that the player is lit). Thus, in the processing of S1563, an instruction to light the second special symbol is output to the first symbol display device 37.

  In the case of using a configuration in which only the special symbol is continuously turned on during the symbol determination period as in the present embodiment, for example, the second special symbol determination period setting process (see S1552 in FIG. 104). In the processing of S3009, an instruction to stop and change (stop display) the second special symbol is output, and information indicating a period for stopping and displaying (symbol determination period) is also output. During the period, the second special symbol may be set in advance so as to be lit. With this configuration, in the process executed in a short cycle, it is not necessary to execute the process for updating the display content of the first symbol display device 37 each time, so that the processing load of the main control device 110 is reduced. Can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 determination time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553: Yes), the special figure 2 symbol determination in-progress flag 203ac is set to off (S1554). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S1555). If it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to OFF (S1555: No), the probability change counter 203aa is determined. It is determined whether the value of is larger than 0 (S1556).

  When it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S1556: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is decremented by 1 (S1557), and the process proceeds to S1558. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1555 that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S1555: Yes), or if it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is 0 in the processing of S1556. (S1556: No), the process of S1557 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1558.

  In the processing of S1558, a state command corresponding to the values of the time-saving counter 203f and the probability change counter 203aa is set (S1558), and then a special figure 2 fixed period end command is set (S1559), and thereafter, the first embodiment described above. The same processing as S1501 to S1505 is executed. If it is determined in the processing of S1501 that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S1501: No), the special figure 2 departure stop processing 2 (S1561) ), And terminates the present process.

  After the processing of S1505 is completed, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to OFF, the value of the probability change counter 203aa is reset (S1560), and the same processing of S1507 as in the above-described first embodiment is executed. Then, the present process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 105, the special figure 2 departure stop processing 2 (one of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment) S1561) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 departure stop processing 2 (S1561). The special figure 2 departure stop processing 2 (S1561) in the second embodiment is different from the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1508) in the first embodiment in that the processing of S1607 to S1610 is not executed. The other processing is the same processing, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process of the sound ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment is different from the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment in that the command judgment process (see FIG. 59) is replaced with the command judgment process 2 (Refer to FIG. 106), in that various counter update processing 2 (refer to FIG. 111) is executed instead of various counter update processing (refer to FIG. 71), and the same processing is executed in the other points. More specifically, a process executed when various commands output by changing the control content executed by main controller 110 from the first embodiment are received, and various commands added from the second embodiment are added. A process for updating the counter value has been added.

  First, the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S4162). The command determination process 2 (S4162) differs from the command determination process in the first embodiment (S4112 in FIG. 60) in that the processes of S4251 to S4255 are added. Other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  When the command determination process 2 (S4162) is executed, first, the same processes of S4201 to S4216 as the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) in the above-described first embodiment are executed. Then, in the process of S4215, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S4215: No), it is next determined whether or not the remaining number-related command has been received (S4251). ).

  Here, as the command related to the remaining number of times, the remaining short time command indicating the number of remaining times (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is continuously set (set by the processing of S603 in FIG. 36). Command), and a remaining probability variable number command (a command set by the process of S857 in FIG. 99) indicating the remaining number (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. If it is determined that the remaining number related command has been received (S4251: Yes), the remaining number updating process 2 (S4252) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, the remaining number update process 2 (S4252), which is one of the command determination processes 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. . FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the content of the remaining number update process 2 (S4252). The remaining number update process 2 (S4252) is different from the remaining number update process (S4218) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S4851 to S4852 are added. Specifically, the difference is that a process for transmitting a command for displaying the number of times of remaining probability change to the display control device 114 is added.

  In the remaining number updating process 2 (S4252), first, it is determined whether or not a command to reduce the number of remaining hours has been received from the main controller 110 (S4801). If it is determined that the command has been received (S4801: Yes), a display remaining time command corresponding to the command is set (S4802). On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining short time command has not been received (S4801: No), the process of S4802 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4851. Next, it is determined whether or not the remaining probability change number command has been received (S4851). If it is determined that the residual probability variable number command has been received (S4851: Yes), a display residual probability variable number command corresponding to the command is set (S4852), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining probability change number command has not been received (S4851: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. In the processing of S4251, if it is determined that the command related to the remaining number of times has not been received (S4251: No), it is determined whether a command related to the temporary stop has been received (S4219). Here, the temporary stop related command includes a special figure 1 temporary stop command set when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v for temporarily stopping the first special symbol is set to ON (see S1603 in FIG. 46). And a special figure 1 restart command (see S2902 in FIG. 101) set when the temporarily stopped first special symbol is changed or the stopped display is restarted. If it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 108, the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253), which is one of the command determination processes 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related processing 2 (S4253). The temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) is different from the temporary stop related process (S4203) in the first embodiment in that a process for calculating the remaining confirmation time is added.

  In the temporary stop related processing 2 (S4253), when the change display of the first special symbol or the elapsed time of the stop display is temporarily interrupted (temporarily stopped), the temporarily stopped first special symbol is displayed. A process for executing an effect mode corresponding to the variable display mode or the stop display mode on the third symbol display device 81 is performed. In the temporary stop related processing 2 (S4253), first, it is determined whether a special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4951). When it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has not been received (S4951: No), the resumption processing (S4952) is executed, and this processing ends. Details of the restart processing (S4952) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4951 that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4951: Yes), that is, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) accompanying the execution of the small hit game, or If it is determined that it is time to temporarily stop the stop display, it is next determined whether the in-determination flag 223ad is set to ON (S4953). Here, when it is determined that the in-determination flag 223ad is set to ON (S4953: Yes), the first special symbol is being stopped and displayed (during the symbol determination period), so the set symbol determination time is set. The remaining time of the (symbol confirmation time of the first special symbol) is calculated (S4954), and the flow shifts to the process of S4955.

  In the process of S4954, the remaining time of the set symbol determination time is calculated by reading the value of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa, that is, the value indicating the remaining time of the symbol determination time of the first special symbol. Next, it is determined whether the remaining time of the symbol determination time calculated in the process of S4954 is less than 2 seconds (S4955). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 2 seconds (S4955: Yes), a period A indicating that the remaining determination time is short is set in the remaining determination time information storage area 223ac (S4956), and the process of S4952 is executed. Then, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4955 that the remaining time is not less than 2 seconds (more than 2 seconds) (S4955: No), then the remaining time is more than 2 seconds and less than 60 seconds Is determined (S4957). In the process of S4957, if it is determined that the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds (S4957: Yes), the remaining remaining time information storage area 223ac indicates that the remaining time is the normal remaining time. The period B shown is set (S4958), the process of S4952 is executed, and this process ends.

  In the process of S4957, when it is determined that the remaining time is not less than 60 seconds (more than 60 seconds) (S4957: No), the remaining determination time information storage area 223ac indicates that the remaining determination time is long. The period C is set (S4959), the processing of S4952 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4953 that the in-determination flag 223ad is set to OFF (S4953: No), that is, if it is determined that the present is during the variable display period of the first special symbol, The processing (see S4903 to S4908) for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed in the temporary stop related processing (see S4220 in FIG. 67) of the first embodiment is executed, and the processing in S4952 is performed. Move to. Note that the processing for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (see S4903 to S4908) is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a restart process (S4952) which is one of the temporary stop related processes 2 (S4253) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the restart processing (S4952).

  In the second embodiment, the change (lottery) of the second special symbol can be executed not only during the variable display of the first special symbol (during the variable display period) but also during the stop display (during the symbol determination period). Because of the configuration, when the small hitting game is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol, the stop display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (the subtraction of the symbol confirmation period is temporarily interrupted). It is configured as follows. In addition, at the timing when the small hitting game ends, the stop display of the first special symbol is restarted (reduction of the symbol determination period is restarted). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the state of the first special symbol when the variable display or the stop display of the first special symbol is restarted is determined, and the effect mode after the restart is set based on the determination result. It is configured to be.

  In the restart processing (S4952), first, it is determined whether a special figure 1 restart command has been received (S5001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has not been received (S5001: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether the in-determination flag 223ad is set to ON (S5051). If it is determined that the fixed flag 223ad is set to ON (S5051: Yes), that is, if the timing of receiving the special figure 1 restart command is during the stop display of the first special symbol, the remaining fixed is set. The remaining effect time information stored in the time information storage area 223ac is read (S5052), and the additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection 2 table 222aa based on the read remaining time information and the additional effect counter 223i (S5052). (S5053), an additional effect command for display corresponding to the additional effect type determined in the process of S5053 is set (S5054), and the information set in the remaining determined time information storage area 223ac is cleared (S5055). Then, the in-determination flag 223ad is set to off (S5056), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5051, if it is determined that the in-determination flag 223ad is set to OFF (S5051: No), that is, the timing at which the special figure 1 restart command is received indicates that the first special symbol is being fluctuated. In some cases, the same processing as S5002 to S5005 as the above-described change restart processing (S4902 in FIG. 68) of the first embodiment is executed, and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. In the process of S4219, when it is determined that the temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), it is determined whether a symbol confirmation related command has been received (S4254). If it is determined that the symbol determination related command has been received (S4254: Yes), the symbol determination related process (S4255) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol determination related command has not been received (S4254: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4221), and this processing ends.

  Here, the symbol determination related process (S4255), which is one of the command determination processes 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol determination related process (S4255).

  In the symbol determination related processing (S4255), first, it is determined whether a special figure 1 determination command has been received from the main control device 110 (S5071). If it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received (S5071: Yes), a display special figure 1 confirmation command corresponding to the received command is set (S5072). Next, a value corresponding to the received command is set in the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa (S5073), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5074. On the other hand, in the process of S5071, if it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has not been received (S5071: No), the processes of S5072 and S5073 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5074.

  In the process of S5074, it is determined whether a special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074). If it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074: Yes), a display special figure 2 confirmation command corresponding to the received command is set (S5075), and the value corresponding to the received command is set to the special figure. 2 is set in the decision counter 223ab (S5076), the decision flag 223ad is set to ON (S5077), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5074, when it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has not been received (S5074: No), the processes of S5075 and S5076 are skipped, the process of S5077 is executed, and this process ends. I do.

  Next, various counter update processing 2 (S4161) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the various counter updating process 2 (S4161).

  In the various counter updating process 2 (S4161), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is decremented by 1 (S5452). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa is 0 (S5451: No), the process of S5452 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5453. In the process of S5453, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5453). When it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5453: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5454), and the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa. Then, the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is read (S5455). Next, the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa read out in the processing of S5455 to calculate the remaining time (S5456). Next, the processing of S5407 and S5408 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5453, when it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5453: No), the processes of S5454 to S5456, S5407 are skipped, and the process of S5408 is executed. Then, the present process ends.

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment described above, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to simultaneously change (so-called “figure 2”). , Simultaneous fluctuation type), a lottery game (RUSH game) can be executed by executing the lottery (fluctuation) of the special figure 2 during the period in which the latent state is set as the game state. Was configured.

  Further, as a condition for setting the latent state (a condition under which the RUSH game can be executed), in the state in which the probability change state is set, the first probability change end that is established when a jackpot is won in the drawing of Toku-zu 1 A condition and a second probable change end condition that is satisfied when the number of times the special symbol changes (number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number of times (five times) are provided. If the first probable change end condition is satisfied, a jackpot is won. During the period in which the special symbol (special symbol 1) indicating that the operation has been stopped is displayed (symbol confirmation period), the latent symbol is in the latent state, and when the second probability change end condition is satisfied, the special symbol is variably displayed. The period (variable display period) and the symbol determination period are in a latent state.

  In addition, the length of the symbol confirmation period is configured to be different according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol, and the symbol confirmation period is set longer when the jackpot is won than when the jackpot is not won. Was configured as follows.

  In addition, in the case where a jackpot has been won in the lottery of one special symbol (special figure 1), an invalid lottery that does not win a jackpot in the other symbol (special symbol 2) is executed. And the value related to the condition for changing the game state is not updated by the invalid lottery. Specifically, the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed during the period in which the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 (during the fluctuation display period of the special symbol that has been won by the jackpot and during the symbol confirmation period). Even if it does, the value of the probability change counter 203aa is configured not to be updated (subtracted).

  In the second embodiment configured as described above, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 in the state where the probability change state is set, the jackpot game for the jackpot winning is executed (variable display). Until the period (symbol determination period) ends, the value of the probability change counter 203aa is not updated (subtracted) even if the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed many times. Can be performed.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the type of the probability change end condition is increased as compared with the above-described second embodiment, and the period during which the latent state is set is longer than that of the above-described second embodiment. are doing. More specifically, the probable change end condition (third probable change end condition) is configured such that the probable change end condition (third probable change end condition) is satisfied when a small hit is won in the special figure 1 in the state where the probable change state is set as the probable change end condition. When the probability change end condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted from the probability change state to the latent state at the time when the small hitting game is started.

  Further, the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol is set (the value of the probability change counter 203aa) is the same as the period during which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set (the value of the time reduction counter 203f) (for example, “4”). )), The probabilistic state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set, and if the jackpot is not won, the gaming state is shifted from the probable state to the normal state. It is composed.

  That is, in the third embodiment, while the probable change state (the special symbol and the ordinary symbol are both in the high probability state) is set, the small symbol is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 and the ordinary symbol is changed to the low probability state. By shifting, the period from the start timing of the small hit game to the setting of the low probability state of the special symbol can be set to the latent state.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to vary the period in which the latent state in which the gaming state is advantageous for the player is continuously set according to the timing of winning the small hit in the lottery in Toku-zu. . Therefore, the player can be more interested in the special symbol lottery result, and a gaming machine that does not get tired can be provided.

  Further, in the third embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the final change in which the probable change state ends, a change pattern having a long change time is easily selected. As a result, even if the final fluctuation of the probable change state is reached without winning a small hit, a long-time latent state can be set, so that the player can expect a game to the end. Can be made.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 112, a description will be given of the types of benefits granted based on the game content of the special figure 1 in the probable change state in the third embodiment. FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram summarizing the relationship between the game content of the special figure 1 game after the probability change state is set and the added privilege. As shown in FIG. 112, in the present embodiment, a probable change state is set in a predetermined period (four special fluctuations of the special symbol) after the end of the big hit, and the number of fluctuations during the probable change state (after the big hit) The number of special figure changes) and the result of the special figure lottery are different from each other in the contents of the privilege given to the player.

  Specifically, in the first and second variation of the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, if the lottery result (the lottery result of the special figure 1) is a big hit, many players In addition to the jackpot game in which the prize ball can be acquired, the period in which the special state game 1 (RUSH game) is executable is a period in which the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot (a symbol determination period). ) Is set. When the lottery result (lottery result of Toku-zu 1) is a small hit, a small hit game is executed based on the lottery result of Toku-zu 1 as a period in which a latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. Then, a period (symbol confirmation period) until the number of special symbol changes after the big hit reaches four times is defined.

  In other words, when the small hit is won in the first special figure 1 lottery after the end of the big hit, the timing when the small hit game is started (the timing when the first special symbol change is stopped and the small hit game is executed) ) To the end of the fourth special figure change after the end of the big hit, a latent state game (RUSH game) is set. Therefore, the period in which the latent state (RUSH state) is set is “extremely long” in which the longest period can be set. In addition, if the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is out of order in the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the probable change state is set, no privilege is given to the player. Is not given.

  In the third special figure 1 change (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, the latent state is set under the same conditions as the first and second times after the probability change state is set. Make up. Here, when the small hit is won, the period until the end of the fourth special figure change is set as the latent state in addition to the small hit game, so that the above-described probability change state is set. The period during which the latent state is set is shorter than when the small figure is won in the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (the special figure 1 lottery).

  Further, in the third embodiment, as the number of special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the probable change state is set during the probable change state increases, the fluctuation having a longer fluctuation time when a jackpot is won is increased. The pattern is configured to be easily selected. Therefore, the period during which the latent state is set is easily made longer than when a jackpot is won in the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (the special figure 1 lottery) after the above-described probability change state is set. be able to.

  Next, in the fourth special figure change (special figure lottery) after the probability change state is set, that is, in the special figure final fluctuation in the probability change state, the special figure change is started regardless of the result of the special figure lottery. The period from to the end (until the symbol determination period has elapsed) is set as the latent state. In the third embodiment, a long-term fluctuation time is easily set when a jackpot is won in the special figure final fluctuation in the probable state (fourth special figure fluctuation after the probable state is set). Therefore, the length of the period in which the latent state is set is “long”.

  Then, if a special jackpot is not won in the special figure final variation in the probable variation state, the normal state is set after the symbol determination period elapses, and the fifth or subsequent special figure lottery is executed.

<About the effect display contents in the third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 112, the period during which the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set according to the transition condition (probable change end condition) that is satisfied. In the probable change state, a suggestion effect (a bingo game) for indicating to the player the possibility of the latent state being set or the timing at which the latent state is set is executed. Make up.

  The display contents of the suggestion effect (bingo game) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that, among the elements displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 113 (a), the display contents of the big hit game end screen (ending screen) in which the probability change state is set will be described. FIG. 113 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen at the end of the big hit. As shown in FIG. 113A, in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the main display area Dm includes the same special figure 1 display area Dm1 and special figure 2 display area as those in the above-described second embodiment. Dm2 and a guide display area Dm3 are formed. In addition, a special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm4 indicating the number of reserved balls of the special figure 1 and a special figure 2 reserved number display area Dm5 indicating the reserved ball number of the special figure 2 are provided. , Are formed.

  FIG. 113 (a) shows the end screen of the jackpot game executed based on the special figure 1 big hit, and shows that the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a big hit in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. In addition, the stop display mode “777” of the third symbol is displayed, and “−” indicating that the special figure 2 change is not executed is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. In addition, in the guidance display area Dm3, the character "left-handed" is displayed to indicate that the big hit game is being played in the left-handed game.

  In the third embodiment, similarly to the above-described second embodiment, the game content (right or left) displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the big hit game is the same as the game content at the time of the big hit winning. It is configured so that That is, the state shown in FIG. 113 (a) is a jackpot that has been won during a left-handed game.

  Further, in the center of the main display area Dm, a bingo card 820 used in a probable change state set after the end of the big hit game is displayed. Here, the suggestion effect (bingo game) executed in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, during the period in which the probable state is set, bingo is provided as a suggestion effect for indicating to the player whether or not the latent state is set or whether or not the jackpot is won. The game is configured to be executed.

  In this bingo game, a bingo card 820 (see FIG. 113 (a)) in which arbitrary numbers are arranged for nine squares (3 × 3) is displayed on the big hit end screen (ending screen). The numbers are announced based on the drawing of the special figure 1 executed in the state where the probable change state is set, and the player is notified based on the announced numbers and the arrangement of the numbers described in the bingo card 820. An effect indicating a game result (lottery result of Toku-zu 1) is executed.

  Next, display contents (effect contents) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the bingo game will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 (b) to 115. When the bingo game is started (when the change in the special figure 1 in the probable change state is started), the display shown in FIG. 113B is executed. FIG. 113B is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents displayed when the special figure 1 change (first time) is executed after the end of the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 113B, when the special figure 1 change (first time) is executed, a display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. . Then, "3" is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm4, and it is subtracted (updated) from the value ("4") shown in FIG. Is shown.

  Also, in the lower left area of the main display area Dm, a number “1” is displayed as a bingo game lottery result 821 based on the lottery result of this time (special figure 1 change (first time)), and the lower right area , A remaining number display 822 indicating the remaining number of bingo games “last 3” is displayed. Here, for example, an effect example in the case where the special figure 1 change (fourth time) in the probability change state is a big hit will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 114A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the bingo game during the change of the special figure 1 change (the third time) when the special figure 1 change (the fourth time) in the probable change state is a big hit. 114 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time). In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 112, in the final fluctuation of the probable change state (figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time)), the latent state is set at the timing when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. During the latent state, a latent state game (RUSH game) in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed by the right-handed game is executed.

  Therefore, immediately after the final change of the probable change state is executed (after the elapse of the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 change (third)), in order to make the player immediately perform a right-handed game, The production result (bingo two rows aligned display) to notify that the setting is made is before (during the special figure 1 change (third time)) the special figure 1 change (fourth time) where the latent state is set It is configured to be executed. With such a configuration, the latent state can be set in a state in which the player sufficiently understands that the latent state is set.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment, in the case where the jackpot or the small jackpot has not been won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in the final variation of the probable variation state (in the case where the winning has been lost), the short is set. It is configured so that the effect result (bingo two-row aligned display) for notifying that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time (1 second) is selected and that the latent state is set in the bingo game is not displayed. . Thus, it is possible to execute a failed production of the bingo game without actually informing the player that the latent state is set for a short time. In addition, when the short-term latent state is set, the fact that the player is to perform a right-handed game is not displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, so that it is possible to suppress troublesomeness in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 114 (a), the description will be continued. In FIG. 114 (a), the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) is performed, and the lottery result “1” of the special figure 1 fluctuation (first time) and the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (second time) “8” is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm as the past history 823, and “5” is displayed as the current lottery result 821. In the bingo card 820, squares corresponding to “1,” “8,” and “5” displayed in the current bingo game are changed to “cross marks”, and two lines are formed and displayed. .

  Further, “double bingo” is displayed as the status display mode 821 indicating the current status, and a comment “super lucky” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In this way, by notifying the player that the bingo game was successful during the change before the special figure 1 change (fourth time) that actually wins the jackpot, the player can be directed to the effect. It is possible to provide a period for enjoying a successful satisfaction and to notify in advance that it is necessary to perform a right-handed game from the next fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, as a comment that notifies that a right-handed game is performed from the next fluctuation (a comment that notifies that the right-handed game condition has been satisfied (the condition for setting the latent state has been satisfied)). Although "It's almost a right-handed game" is displayed in the sub display area Ds, a configuration is provided in advance informing the player of the timing at which the latent state is set, that is, the timing at which the right-handed game is performed. For example, a remaining period until the end of the special figure 1 change (the third time) (the remaining period obtained by adding the remaining change display period of the special figure 1 change (the third time) and the symbol confirmation period) is calculated. A calculation means may be provided, and information (information for indicating the remaining fluctuation period of the special figure 1 change (third time)) based on the calculation result of the calculation means may be notified to the player.

  In the third embodiment, when a ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 in a state where the probability change state is set as the game state (when the starting condition of FIG. 2 is satisfied), It is configured such that a fluctuation pattern of a short fluctuation time (0.5 second to 1 second) is set regardless of the lottery result. Thus, if a right-handed game is performed in the state in which the probable state is set and the fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed, the period in which the probable state can be set is set in the probable state. This is extremely short compared to the case where the left-handed game is performed in the state and the variation (lottery) is executed in the special figure 2, so that the right-handed game in the probable change state can be regarded as a disadvantageous game disadvantageous to the player. . Therefore, during the probable change state in which “left-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress an intentional play of an irregular game different from the display content.

  Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, when a ball is thrown into the second entrance 640 in a state in which the probable change state is set as the game state (when the starting condition of FIG. 2 is satisfied) ) Is configured so that a fluctuation pattern of a short fluctuation time (0.5 second to 1 second) is set regardless of the lottery result. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The time may be set to a fluctuation time extremely longer than the special figure 1 fluctuation time (for example, 120 seconds).

  With this configuration, for example, when a right-handed game is performed in a state in which the probable change state is set ignoring the progress of the suggestion effect (bingo game) executed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, since the special figure 2 fluctuation for a long time (for example, 120 seconds) is executed, even if the latent state is set thereafter, for example, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time) which has won the jackpot Even if the display is started), since the special figure 2 change is being executed, a latent state game (a game in which the special figure 2 change is executed in a state where the latent state is set) is newly added. It can be difficult to execute.

  In the present embodiment, the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set based on the fluctuation period of the special symbol (special figure 1) and the symbol determination period. Is set (the predetermined special figure 1 fluctuation is started), and the longer the period from the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed to the end, the longer the period during which the special figure 2 fluctuation in the latent state can be executed (the latent State game period) is shortened. In addition, in order to reliably prevent the execution of the special figure 2 change in the state in which the probable change state is set, a point in time when a sufficient time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the latent state is set. Similarly, when the right-handed game is started, the latent state game period is similarly shortened. Therefore, in order to grasp the timing of executing the right-handed game, the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the player is performed. The display contents on the screen can be watched.

  When the right-handed game is performed during the latent state and the special figure 2 change is executed, the effect display in the RUSH game (the latent state game) shown in FIG. 114 (b) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed on the display screen. FIG. 114 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the fourth special figure change after the end of the big hit (after setting the probable change state) is the big hit. In the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described second embodiment, when the latent state is set, a latent state game (RUSH game) in which the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed by a right-handed game is performed. That is, during the latent state, the right-handed game is an advantageous game, and the left-handed game is a disadvantageous game.

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 114B, in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the guide display area Dm3 is “right-handed”, and the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is a special figure 1 change (4). In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, a display form indicating that the change of the special figure 2 is being executed is displayed, and in the special figure 2 hold number display area Dm4. "0" indicating that there is no reserved number in Tokuju 1 is displayed, and "0" indicating that there is no reserved number in Tokuju 2 is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved sphere count display area Dm5.

  During the period in which the RUSH game is being executed, the character 811 imitating a rabbit runs from left to right while opening the treasure chest 812 found on the way (the same effect as in the first embodiment). Is displayed in the main display area Dm, and in the sub display area Ds, the character “RUSH in progress” indicating that the game is in the latent state game (RUSH game) is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily inform the player that the current state is a latent state game (RUSH game).

  In FIG. 113 to FIG. 114 described above, as the probable change end condition for terminating the probable change state, the second probable change end condition that is satisfied based on the number of times of the change of the special symbol is satisfied, that is, the final change (4 An example of the display screen in the case where the latent state is set in the (second variation of the special figure) has been described. In the third embodiment, the first variation condition for terminating the probability change state (transition from the probability variation state to the latent state) (the condition for transitioning the high probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low probability state) is the first condition. Probable change end condition (probable change end condition that is established based on the jackpot winning), second probable change end condition (probable change end condition that is established based on the number of times the special symbol is changed), and third probable change end condition (based on the small win The game state is shifted from the certainty change state to the latent state when any one of the end conditions is satisfied.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115 (a), a display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the first probability change end condition is satisfied before the above-described second probability change end condition is satisfied. The contents will be explained. FIG. 115A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of display contents executed during the third special figure change when the third special figure change is a large hit after the big hit (after setting the probable change state). FIG.

  In the third embodiment, when the first probable change end condition (winning of the special symbol jackpot) is established, the special symbol for indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot is stopped and displayed. The latent state is set during the period (symbol confirmation period) until the stop display ends. Therefore, since the probable change state is continuously set during the variable display period of the special figure 1 (during the change of the special figure), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is specially displayed in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. A display mode indicating that FIG. 1 is performing variable display is displayed, and “left-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, "4" is displayed in the lottery result 821, and the bingo card 820 is displayed in a display mode indicating that one line of lines has been established.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment, when the above-described first probable change end condition is satisfied and the latent state is set during the symbol determination period of the special symbol, the third embodiment is a target. A different number is displayed as the bingo game lottery result 821 multiple times during the special symbol change display period, and information for indicating the final result of the current bingo game is notified to the player in a stepwise manner. It is configured to be.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 115 (a), while the special figure 1 is in the variable display, a state is shown in which one line of lines is established. If the period (for example, 300 seconds) is the jackpot type (for example, the jackpot C) to be set, a different number is displayed as the bingo game lottery result 821 during the remaining period until the variable display of the special figure 1 ends. (For example, “5”) is newly displayed, and an effect is finally executed in which the result of the bingo game is “two lines formed”.

  As described above, the result (the number of established lines) of the bingo game is varied a plurality of times during the special symbol change display. As a result, the contents of the privilege (RUSH game, jackpot game) to be given to the player at the end of this special figure change can be grasped as the special symbol change display period elapses. The effect contents displayed on the display screen of the three-symbol display device 81 can be continuously watched.

  In addition, if the type of the jackpot won this time is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) for which a short symbol determination period (for example, 5 seconds) is set, the result of the bingo game (the number of established lines) does not change. A number (for example, “3”) may be displayed, and the result of the bingo game may be “one line formed”.

  With this configuration, while the number of lottery results 821 displayed in the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) is unified, the result of the bingo game (the number of established lines) and the special symbol Can be associated with the contents of the privilege (amount of privilege) provided after the end of the variable display. Therefore, since the player can watch the content and the result of the bingo game, the effect can be enhanced.

  In the third embodiment, the number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) is unified regardless of the special symbol lottery result, and the bingo game result is obtained. The effect that makes the player throb as to whether the (number of established lines) increases or not has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) may be associated with each other. This makes it possible to display a large number of numbers as the lottery result 821 during the bingo game, so that a benefit that is more advantageous to the player can be given, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115 (b), the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the third probability change ending condition is satisfied will be described. FIG. 115 (b) schematically shows an example of display contents executed during the second special figure change when the second special figure change is a small hit after the big hit (after setting the probable change state). It is a schematic diagram.

  The third embodiment is configured such that the timing at which the latent state is set differs depending on the type of the established probability change end condition. Specifically, when the first probable change end condition is satisfied, a period (from the time when the stop display of the corresponding special symbol is started to the time when the stop display ends (until the big hit game is started)) (the target symbol). Is set as a latent state, and when the second probability change end condition is satisfied, the time from when the corresponding special symbol change display is started to when the stop display of the corresponding special symbol ends. The period (the variable display period of the target symbol and the symbol determination period) is set as the latent state. That is, the latent state is set within the special symbol 1 fluctuation period regardless of whether the first probable change end condition or the second probable change end condition is satisfied.

  On the other hand, when the third probability change end condition is satisfied, when a small hit is won in any of a plurality of (four) special figure 1 fluctuations that can be executed within the period in which the probability change state is set. The latent state is set in a period from the time when the special symbol stop display indicating that the lottery result is a small hit is started to the time when the stop display of the special symbol which is the final variation of the probability change state ends. . That is, in the case of winning a small hit in a special figure lottery executed immediately after the probability change state is set (the first special figure lottery), the special symbol indicating the result (small hit) of the first special lottery is stopped. After being displayed, a special symbol lottery period (variable display period and symbol confirmation period) is passed through the second to fourth times until a special symbol stop display indicating the result of the fourth special figure lottery ends (a plurality of times). The latent state is set.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (b), when the third probability change end condition is satisfied, “ALL” for all numbers is displayed in the lottery result 821, and eight lines (all lines) are satisfied. Is displayed in a display mode indicating. Then, "341" indicating that the small hit has been won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, and "right" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to indicate that the latent state game (RUSH game) has started. ”Is displayed.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in the third embodiment, the presence / absence of the first probability variation end condition or the second probability variation end condition is determined by the special figure variation (the special figure lottery) in which each probability variation end condition is satisfied. ) Is determined before execution (predetermination), whereas the third probability-change ending condition is configured not to perform preliminary determination.

  With this configuration, the progress of the suggestion effect (bingo game) displayed over a plurality of changes in the special symbol executed during the period in which the probable change state is set is displayed as the first probable change end. Since it can be set in accordance with whether or not the condition or the second probable change end condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect without a sense of incongruity for the player, and when the third end condition is satisfied. Since the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 115 (b) is executed, an unexpected effect can be provided.

  In the third embodiment, it is configured to determine in advance whether or not the first probable change end condition and the second probable change end condition are satisfied, and not to determine in advance whether the third probable change end condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the preliminary determination is performed only on the second probable change end condition that is satisfied based on the number of times the special symbol changes.

  In addition, as the above-described preliminary determination, at the end of the jackpot (during the ending period of the jackpot game), a preliminary determination is made for the special figure 1 stored and retained, and the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 stored and stored. It is configured to determine whether or not information corresponding to the lottery result is included, and to change the combination of numbers displayed on the bingo card 820 based on the determination result.

  With this configuration, a suggestion effect (bingo) that does not cause a sense of incongruity with respect to the number of special figure changes executed until the jackpot is won and the amount of privilege given to the player by winning the jackpot. Game). In addition, by having the player grasp the numbers displayed on the bingo card 820, it is possible to provide a pleasure of predicting future game results in advance.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The third embodiment differs from the second embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. It is different in that it is. The other points are the same as those of the second embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, instead of the first random number table 202a, the first random number 3 table 202ba is replaced with the small random number table 202b, and the small random number 3 table 202bb is replaced with the large hit type selection 2 table 202aa. The small hit type selection 3 table 202bc is replaced with the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, and the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is replaced with the variation pattern selection 2 table 202ac, and the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be is provided. This is different from the second embodiment.

  The first random number per 3 table 202ba is different from the first random number table 202a in the second embodiment described above (similar to the first embodiment, see FIG. 15A) in the low probability state of the special symbol. The difference is that the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined as “1” and the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined as the big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol are changed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 117A, the contents defined in the first random number 3 table 202ba will be described. FIG. 117A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 117 (a), when the gaming state is the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol, the first special symbol or the first special symbol acquired in the lottery of the second special symbol is obtained. It is determined whether the value of the hit random number counter C1 is any of “0 to 9”, and if any of the values is “0 to 9”, it is determined that the hit is a big hit.

  Also, when the special state is a high probability state (probable state, latent state) of the special symbol as a gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 per first acquired in the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery is determined. It is determined whether it is within the range of "0-99", and if it is within the range of "0-99", it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, out of the 480 random number counters, in the low probability state of the special symbol, ten values are defined as values to be determined as big hits. The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/48. On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1 / 4.8.

  The small hit random number 3 table 202bb is different from the small hit random number table 202b of the second embodiment described above (similar to the first embodiment, see FIG. 15B) in the first special symbol (special figure 1). The difference is that the lottery is changed to win the small win. Here, with reference to FIG. 117 (b), the content specified in the small hit random number 3 table 202bb will be described. FIG. 117 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number 3 table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is any one of “10 to 14”, If it is any of "10 to 14", it is determined that it is a small hit.

  In the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), since the same contents as those in the above-described small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B) are defined, detailed description thereof will be omitted. That is, the third embodiment is different from the above-described second embodiment in that the third special embodiment is configured to be able to win a small hit in the first special symbol lottery. In the third embodiment, when a probability change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set and a small hit is won in a lottery of the first special symbol, the normal It is configured to execute a process of shifting the symbol high-probability state to the low-probability state, that is, a process of shifting the game state from the probable state to the latent state.

  With this configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of shifting the gaming state to the latent state during the probable state, so that the player who is executing the game during the probable state is willing to play the game. Can be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the third embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of winning the jackpot of the first special symbol (1/48 (refer to FIG. 117 (a))) is higher. , The probability of winning a small hit of the first special symbol (1/32 (see FIG. 117 (b))) is configured to be higher, so that the jackpot of the special figure 1 during the probability change state is increased. Since the latent state is set based on the small hit winning with a higher probability than when the latent state is set based on winning, a player who is performing a game in the probable state On the other hand, both a latent state game (RUSH game) and a jackpot game are executed, but a game aiming for a jackpot win that is difficult to win is executed, and a latent state game (RUSH game) is executed. Aim for small wins that are easy to win It can be performed and skill, both.

  In the third embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 1 is configured to be higher than the big hit winning probability of the special figure 1 in the high probability state of the special symbol, but is not limited thereto. Instead, it may be configured to be lower than the jackpot winning probability of the special figure 1 in the high probability state. For example, the probability of winning the small hit of the special figure 1 may be set to a low probability such as 1/480. good. With such a configuration, in a state where the probability change state is set, if a small hit is won before a big hit is won, a latent state game (RUSH game) in which the big hit game is not executed is performed. Since the game can be executed, an unexpected game can be provided to the player.

  The jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is different from the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the above-described second embodiment in that the type of the jackpot type is changed and various counters set after the end of the jackpot (hour reduction counter 203f, probability change counter 203aa and the fixed time counters 203ad and 203ae) are different from each other in that the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each big hit type is changed. Here, the big hit type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 118 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is the jackpot operation content of each jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16 (a)) of the first embodiment described above. For each jackpot type, the time-saving counter 203f, the probability change counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 fixed time are defined for each jackpot type. The value of the counter 203ae is defined.

  Specifically, the jackpot A whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is obtained when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is “0 to 49”. The jackpot operation content in which the round game for releasing the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) is performed for two rounds (2R), and the value of “4” is set in the time-saving counter 203f, It is defined that a value of “4” is set in the probability change counter 203aa and a value indicating “5 seconds” is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

  For the jackpot B whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is defined in the range of “50 to 96”. The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) is opened for two rounds (2R), the value of “4” is stored in the time-saving counter 203f, and the value of “4” is stored in the probability variable counter 203aa. The value “4” specifies that a value indicating “100 seconds” is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

  The jackpot C whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is defined such that the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is in the range of "96 to 99". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed in two rounds (2R), the value of “4” is stored in the time-saving counter 203f, and the value of “4” is stored in the probability change counter 203aa. The value “4” specifies that a value indicating “300 seconds” is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

  The jackpot D whose symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is defined such that the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is in the range of “0 to 64”. The big hit operation in which the round game for opening the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of “4” is stored in the time-saving counter 203f, and the probability variable counter 203aa And the value indicating “0.5 seconds” is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

  The jackpot E whose symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is defined such that the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is in the range of "65 to 99". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed in two rounds (2R), the value of “4” is stored in the time-saving counter 203f, and the value of “4” is stored in the probability change counter 203aa. The value "4" specifies that a value indicating "1 second" is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set higher than in the above-described second embodiment, so that it is easy to win the jackpot, and the bonus ( Prize balls). With this configuration, the amount of privilege (prize ball) given to the player depends on the result of whether or not the latent state is set and the length of the period in which the latent state is continuously set. ) Can be greatly varied, so that a novel playability can be provided to the player.

  The small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is different from the small hit type selection table 202e of the first embodiment (see FIG. 16B) in the details of the small hit type set when the special figure 1 is won. Is different in that it is added and specified. Here, the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 118 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118 (b), the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is different from the small hit type selection table 202e of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. Is different from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) in that a small hit D is added as a small hit type corresponding to "." 16 (b)). Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  The small hit type selection 3 table 202bd indicates that when a small hit is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1), the first attacker (the first variable prize) regardless of the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. A small hit game in which an opening operation for opening the device 65) for 0.02 seconds is performed once is defined. That is, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 1, the small hit game in which it is difficult for the player to obtain the prize ball in the small hit game is executed.

  In other words, in the third embodiment, the winning of the small hit in the special map 1 is not a purpose of giving a privilege (prize ball) to the player by the small hitting game, but an opportunity to set a latent state as a gaming state. It is an object. Accordingly, when the small hit is won in the special figure 1 in the state where the probable change state is set, the right-handed game is executed immediately after the effect to notify the effect (see FIG. 115 (b)) is executed. Even if you do, the small hit game has already ended (because the time required for the ball fired by the right-handed game to reach the right area is longer than the small hit game period), the smooth latent state A game (RUSH game) can be executed.

  Further, when the small hit in the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, the small hit game can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity. In the present embodiment, since the opening time of the first variable winning device 65 for the small hitting game is set to be as short as 0.02 seconds, when the small hitting of the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, the winning is performed. Even if the game method is changed from the left-handed game to the right-handed game at the point in time when the special symbol indicating the small hit winning is stopped and displayed, the ball is changed to the first variable winning device 65 during the small hitting game. Since it is difficult to make a prize, an effect or guidance that emphasizes that the small hit is won on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the small hit is won in the special figure 1 in the normal state. The display area Dm3 is configured so that the display of "right-handed" for guiding the right-handed game is not executed.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from performing a troublesome game operation. It should be noted that a notification means for notifying that the small hit of the special figure 1 has been won in the normal state may be provided, and a right-handed display is also provided when the small figure is being played based on the special figure 1 small hit in the normal state. May be configured to be executed.

  The variation pattern selection 3 table 202be is different from the variation pattern selection table 202f of the above-described first embodiment in that the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 referred to when the probability variation state is set is replaced with the probability variation 3 table 202be1. Is different from the first embodiment in that a third latent-confidence table 203be2 is provided in place of the latent-confidence table 202f3 referred to when the latent state is set.

  Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. FIG. 119A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be. As shown in FIG. 119 (a), in the third embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the same normal table 202f1 as in the above-described first embodiment is referred to, and the probability change state is changed. When it is set, it is stipulated that the probability changing three table 202be1 is referred to, and when the latent state is set, the latent probability 3 table 202be2 is referred to.

  In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), since the value of the time-saving counter 203f and the value of the positive variable counter 203aa are the same after the end of the big hit, the positive variable counter Since the gaming state in which the value of 203aa becomes 0 and the value of the time reduction counter 203f becomes larger than 0 (that is, the time reduction state) is not set, the fluctuation referred to when the time reduction state is set is not set. It does not have a pattern selection table.

  Next, the contents of the third table for belief change 202be1 will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (b). FIG. 119 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability-change three table 202be1. As described above with reference to FIG. 118 (a), the third embodiment is configured such that the probable change state is always set to the special symbol 4 fluctuations when a jackpot is won. Then, in the state in which the probable change state is set, a change pattern (refer to a different change pattern table) depending on the number of special symbol changes (the number of special figure changes) from the end of the big hit and the lottery result of the special symbol. (Variation time) is selected.

  With this configuration, the latent state is set in accordance with the timing (the number of times of the special figure change) at which the condition for setting the latent state as the gaming state (big hit winning or small hit winning in FIG. 1) is satisfied. Can be made different from each other in the period in which is set. Therefore, not only the result of the lottery of the special symbol but also the number of times the special figure changes can be watched by the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Specifically, when the symbol type of the special symbol is special figure 1 and the lottery result is "big hit", when the number of special figure changes after the end of the big hit is "1-2 times", , "Probable change A table 202bea (probable change A)", "3 times" refers to "probable change B table 202beb (probable change B)", and "four times" refers to "probable change C". Table 202bec (probable change C) "is defined to be referred to. If the lottery result is “small hit, miss”, and if the number of special figure changes after the end of the big hit is “1 to 3”, refer to “probable change A table 202bea (probable change A)”. In the case of “four times”, it is defined that the “probable change C table 202bec (probable change C)” is referred to.

  Further, when the symbol type of the special symbol is the special symbol 2, the “probable variation D table 202bed (probable variation D)” is referred to regardless of the lottery result and the number of times the special symbol has changed since the end of the big hit. Stipulated.

  Next, the contents defined in various probability change tables (probability change A table 202bea to probability change D table 202bed) referred to in the probability change three table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 (c) to 120. . FIG. 119 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probable variable A table 202bea, and FIG. 120 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the probable variable B table 202beb. FIG. 120B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probable variable C table 202bec, and FIG. 120C is defined in the probable variable D table 202bed. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content typically.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (c), in the probability variation A table 202bea, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set to “0” as a variation pattern determined when a jackpot has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). ~ 100 "is associated with a jackpot variation 1 (1 second)," 100-197 "is associated with a jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds), and a value of" 198 "is a jackpot variation 3 (300 seconds). ) Is associated. Also, when a small hit or a miss is won in the lottery of the special figure 1, the small hit variation 1 (1 second) or the miss variation 1 (1 second) is associated regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Have been.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (a), in the probability change B table 202beb, the value of the change type counter CS1 is set to "0" as a change pattern determined when a jackpot has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). A large hit variation 1 (1 second) is associated with a range of “-99”, a large hit variation 2 (2 seconds) is associated with a range of “100-149”, and a large hit variation 3 (2) is assigned to a range of “150-198”. (300 seconds).

  As shown in FIG. 120 (b), in the probability change C table 202bec, the value of the change type counter CS1 is set to “0” as a change pattern determined when a jackpot has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). ”Is associated with a jackpot variation 1 (1 second), a value of“ 1 ”is associated with a jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds), and a jackpot variation 3 (300 seconds) is in the range of“ 2-198 ”. Are associated. Further, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 1, the small hit variation 2 (240 seconds) is associated irrespective of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Deviating fluctuation 1 (1 second) is associated regardless of the value of CS1.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (c), in the probability change D table 202bed, as a change pattern determined when a jackpot has been won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. Big hit variation 1 (1 second) is associated, and if a small hit is won, small hit variation 4 (0.5 second) is associated regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. , Regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation 4 (0.5 seconds).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the contents specified in the third table for latent image 202be2 will be described. FIG. 121 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the third table for latent image 202be2. As shown in FIG. 121, in the third embodiment, in a state where the latent state is set, a fluctuation pattern in which a long fluctuation time is set when the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed is selected. It is configured so that:

  Here, in the third embodiment, in the state where the probability change state is set, the latent state is set when the small hit is won in the special drawing 1 lottery. In order to select a variation pattern by referring to the third table 202be2, it is necessary to win a small hit by a lottery of the special figure 1 during the certain variation state.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a variation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to a different table according to the number of special symbol variations in a state in which the probable variation state is set. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to watch both the special symbol lottery result and the special symbol variation count (the variation count after the probable variation state is set) as the lottery result.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 shows the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. FIG. As shown in FIG. 122, the RAM 203 of the third embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the second embodiment in that a special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba and a special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb are added. They differ in the point. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is a flag for indicating that a small hit has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and when set to ON, the special figure 1 lottery Indicates that the small hit was won. The special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to be on during a period from the winning of the small hit in the lottery of the special figure 1 to the execution of the small hit game.

  The special figure 1 small hit middle flag 203bb is a flag for indicating that the small hit game is executed based on the small hit winning of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and is set to ON. This indicates that the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the special map 1 is being executed. In the third embodiment, in a state where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, when the small hitting game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1 is started, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is changed to the low probability state. It is configured to execute processing for shifting to.

  The special figure 1 small hitting flag 203bb is determined when the special figure 1 small hitting flag 203ba is set to ON in the special figure 1 departure stop process (see S871 in FIG. 128) (S3201 in FIG. 128). : Yes), set to ON (S3207 in FIG. 128), and when it is determined in the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129) that it is the timing to start the small hit (see S2503 in FIG. 129), refer to (S2551 in FIG. 129).

  Next, in the process of S2551 in FIG. 129, when it is determined that the setting is set to ON (S2551 in FIG. 129: Yes), that is, the small hit game of this time is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 When it is determined that the small hit is executed based on the above, the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to 0. Then, when it is determined in the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129) that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511 in FIG. 129: Yes), it is set to OFF.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (a). FIG. 123 (a) illustrates the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM 222 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 123 (a), the ROM 222 of the third embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the above-described second embodiment (first embodiment) in that the probability change effect selection table 222ba is replaced with the additional effect selection table 222c. The difference is provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the probability change effect selection table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability change effect selection table 222ba. The probability change effect selection table 222ba is a data table for selecting the final mode of the suggestion effect (bingo game) described with reference to FIGS. 113 (b) to 115 (a), and wins a jackpot. The final mode is defined based on the number of changes (the number of changes in the special figure after the end of the jackpot) and the type of jackpot that can be won.

  More specifically, when the number of jackpot winning changes is “2”, that is, when the special jackpot is re-winned for the second time after the end of the jackpot, the jackpot types to be won are “jackpot A” and “jackpot B”. ", The effect is set such that one line (line) is established with bingo, and if" big hit C ", the effect is established with three lines (line) established with bingo.

  If the number of jackpot winning changes is "3", that is, if the jackpot is won on the third special symbol change after the end of the jackpot, if the jackpot type to be won is "jackpot A" or "jackpot B", In addition, an effect mode in which two lines (lines) are established with bingo is set, and in the case of "big hit C", an effect mode in which three lines (lines) are established with bingo is set.

  Finally, when the number of jackpot winning changes is “4”, that is, when the special symbol is changed for the fourth time after the end of the jackpot (the special figure final change in which the probable change state is set), the jackpot type to be won is determined. Is "big hit A", an effect mode in which two rows (lines) are established with bingo is set, and if "big hit B", an effect mode in which three rows (lines) are established with bingo is set, and "big hit C" is set. If so, it is defined that an effect mode in which all rows (lines) are established in bingo is set.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in the third embodiment, when a jackpot is won by the first special symbol change after the jackpot, a display screen at the end of the jackpot (a bingo card is usually used). A special display screen is displayed on the screen where 820 is displayed (see FIG. 113) to guide that the latent state is set after the jackpot.

  On this special display screen, an image congratulating the player is displayed in the main display area Dm, and "right-handed" for guiding a right-handed game is displayed in the guide display area Dm3. Thereby, at the end of the jackpot game, a game (right-handed game) suitable for the game state (latency state) after the end of the jackpot game can be performed. The lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed by utilizing.

  In the third embodiment, the display screen at the end of the jackpot is configured to display the special display screen in the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol change after the end of the jackpot, as described above. The timing for displaying the special display screen may be any timing during the big hit game, and may be a timing at which the big hit game is started or a timing at which a predetermined round game in the big hit game is executed. In this case, in the case where the jackpot is won in the normal state, it corresponds to the special symbol change executed next among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b before the round game of the jackpot game is started. Prior determination means for determining in advance whether the winning information (winning information corresponding to the first special symbol change after the end of the jackpot) includes information indicating that the jackpot is won, and the preliminary determination by the prior determination means is provided. As a result, when information indicating that the jackpot is won is included, "right-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 and the right-handed game is performed in order to cause the jackpot game to be performed in a right-handed game. It is configured to execute a rendering mode in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and does not include information indicating that a jackpot is won. In this case, it may be configured to display a "left-handed" in the guidance display area Dm3.

  With such a configuration, when a jackpot is won in a normal state (a gaming state in which a left-handed game is performed), the jackpot game is displayed according to the display mode of the guide display area Dm3 for guiding a game method during the jackpot game. The game content after the end can be predicted. Note that, in the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 similar to that of the first embodiment is used, a left-handed game is performed when a jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is executed. It is configured such that the ratio of the ball winning the second variable winning device 650 does not change between the case and the case where the right-handed game is performed. Therefore, even if a configuration in which the gaming method (right-handed or left-handed) during the jackpot game is changed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is used, it is disadvantageous for the player during the jackpot game. It does not provide a simple situation.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot termination process (see S4651 in FIG. 133) executed when it is determined that the ending command has been received in the jackpot-related process 3 (see S4552 in FIG. 132) (Yes in S4605 in FIG. 132). , It is determined whether or not the winning information (winning information in FIG. 1) stored in the winning information storage area 223b includes winning information for winning a jackpot (see S5605 in FIG. 133). The newly generated winning information is also targeted for determination, and it is configured so that more winning information can be determined. However, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b (the winning information of FIG. 1) is determined. A timing other than the present embodiment may be set as a timing for determining whether or not there is winning information for winning a jackpot, for example, The timing at which a winning game is started, the timing at which a specific number of rounds (for example, two rounds) is reached, or the timing at which a specific round game (the first round game) is completed may be used as the timing for performing the determination. good.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). FIG. 123 (b) illustrates the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM 223 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the RAM 223 according to the third embodiment is different from the ROM 222 according to the above-described second embodiment in that a remaining probability change count area 223ba, a prefetch hit flag 223bb, and a remaining change count counter 223bc are provided. They differ in the point. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The remaining probability change count area 223ba is a storage area for storing a change count in which new winning information can be set as a special symbol change that can be executed during the probability change state. A value obtained by subtracting the number of winning information already stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the jackpot end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133) is set in the remaining probability change number area 223ba (S5604 in FIG. 133). . Then, in the winning information related processing (see S4271 in FIG. 131), the set value is referred to (see S5504 in FIG. 131), and when the set value is larger than 0, that is, during the probable change state. When the winning information corresponding to the executable special symbol change is newly receivable (S5504 in FIG. 131; Yes), the pre-reading process is performed as the special symbol change executed during the probable change state (the winning information is hit). A process of determining whether or not it is included is performed (S5505 in FIG. 131), and then the set value is subtracted by 1 (S5507 in FIG. 131).

  As described above, the probability change state is set by determining whether or not new winning information can be set as a special symbol change that can be executed during the probability change state using the remaining probability change count area 223ba. It is possible to determine whether or not the winning information newly received in the state corresponds to a special symbol change executed during the probability change state. Therefore, the stochastic effect performed during the probable change state can be set based only on the winning information corresponding to the special symbol change performed during the probable change state, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  The pre-reading hit flag 223bb is a flag for indicating that there is winning information that has been won in the special symbol jackpot, and when set to ON, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is hit. This indicates that there is winning information indicating that the winning has been achieved.

  This prefetch hit flag 223bb determines that the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b includes the winning information indicating that the big hit has been won in the big hit end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133). If this is done (S5605 in FIG. 133: Yes), it is set to ON (S5606 in FIG. 133). In the winning information-related processing (see S4271 in FIG. 131), it is determined that the winning information received this time corresponds to the special symbol change executed during the probable change state (S5504 in FIG. 131: Yes). Also when it is determined that the winning information includes the winning information indicating that the jackpot is won (S5505 in FIG. 131: Yes), it is set to ON (see S5506 in FIG. 131).

  It is referred to in the variable display setting process for probable change (see S5151 in FIG. 135), and when the pre-reading hit flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702 in FIG. 135: No), when it is set to ON (S5702 in FIG. 135). The processing is executed so that different rendering modes can be set in S5702: Yes in FIG. 135.

  The remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special figure until the big hit is won, and is stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the big hit end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133). When the winning information includes the winning information for winning the jackpot (S5605 in FIG. 133: Yes), the value corresponding to the number of times of the special symbol change until the special symbol corresponding to the winning information for winning the jackpot changes. Is set (see S5607 in FIG. 133). Then, when it is determined in the fluctuation display setting process 3 (see S4173 in FIG. 134) that the fluctuation display in the probable change state is to be set (see S5103 in FIG. 134), the fluctuation display setting process for probabilistic change (S5151 in FIG. 135) (See S5703: Yes in FIG. 135) when it is determined that the special symbol for which the fluctuation display is set this time is the previous fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information that wins the jackpot. ), An effect mode using the probability change effect selection table 222ba is set.

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Third Embodiment>
Next, various control processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment described above in that the first special symbol big hit determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) is performed. 1 Special symbol big hit determination process 3 (see S376 in FIG. 125), first special symbol change stop process 3 (see S277 in FIG. 127) instead of first special symbol change stop process 2 (see FIG. 99), and small hit control The difference is that a small hit control process 3 (see FIG. 129) is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 55). Otherwise, the same processing is executed. In the above-described second embodiment, the same processing as that of the first embodiment is performed, and therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, portions where the same processes as those of the above-described second embodiment are executed are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the content of the first special symbol big hit determination process 3 (S376). Since the third embodiment is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the special figure 1, the first special symbol big hit determination processing 3 (S376) is the first special symbol big hit determination processing in the above-described second embodiment. It differs from the symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) in that the content of the process executed when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is not a jackpot is different. are doing. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) is executed, the same process as the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) is executed. If not (S406: No), the special figure 1 departure variation processing (S471) is executed, and this processing ends. The special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S471) is executed when it is determined that the lottery result of the special figure 1 is other than the big hit, and it is determined whether or not the small hit is won, and the determination is made. The processing corresponding to the result is executed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 126, the special figure 1 departure variation processing (S471), which is one of the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. ) Will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 departure variation process (S471). This special figure 1 departure variation processing (S471) is for executing processing for displaying a small hit symbol or a deviated symbol on the first symbol display device 37, and is intended for the second special symbol (special symbol 2). This processing differs from the processing of the special figure 2 departure variation processing (S1011 in FIG. 41) in that the target special symbol is changed from special figure 2 to special figure 1.

  In the special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S471), first, it is determined whether or not the execution data acquired from the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a small hit (S3101). When it is determined that the execution data is a small hit (S3101: Yes), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3102), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the small hit (S3103). ). Next, a small hit symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S3104), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3101 that the execution data is not a small hit (is a miss) (S3101: No), a miss symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set. (S3105), this process ends as it is.

  Next, a first special symbol change stop process 3 (S277) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change stop process 3 (S277). The first special symbol variation stop process 3 (S277) is different from the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) in the above-described second embodiment when the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit. That is, in the processing of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is off (S801: No), the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S871) is executed. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 128, the process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. The special figure 1 departure stop processing (S871), which is one of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S277), will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S871). In the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S871), when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, a processing for starting a small hitting game is executed.

  In the special figure 1 departure stop processing (see S871 in FIG. 128), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3201). When it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3201: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation during the fluctuation is forcibly stopped and displayed with the lottery result indicating the deviation. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S3202).

  Then, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating ON of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set (S3203), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is disengaged and stopped and displayed (S3204). Next, a small hitting scenario based on the selected small hitting type is set (S3205), the special figure 1 small hitting flag 203ba is set to off (S3206), and the special figure 1 small hitting flag 203bb is turned on. This is set (S3207), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is not set to ON (that is, the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order) (S3201: No), the process proceeds to S3201. The process ends.

  By configuring in this way, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is possible to forcibly stop the change of the special figure 2 during the change, so that the small hit game is performed. During the latent state set at the start timing, it is possible to easily execute a new special figure 2 change. In the third embodiment, the process of forcibly stopping the running of the special figure 2 in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won is used. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation is interrupted so that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation does not progress during the period in which the small hit game is being executed. You may.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. The small hit control process 3 (S2255) will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit control process 3 (S2255). The small hit control process 3 (S2255) is different from the small hit control process (S2205) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S2551 and S2552 are added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the small hit control process 3 (S2255), when it is determined in the process of S2503 that it is the timing of starting the small hit (S2503: Yes), the small hit scenario updated by the process of S2502 starts the small hit. If the content indicates that the flag is not open, an opening command is set (S2504), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit middle flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551). When it is determined that the special figure 1 small hitting flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551: Yes), the time reduction counter 203f is set to 0 (S2552), and this processing ends.

  The third embodiment is configured to be able to win a small hit in both the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2). The value of the time-saving counter 203f is set (cleared) to 0 only when winning.

  In other words, as a condition for terminating the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (the state in which the value of the time reduction counter 203f is larger than 0), the small hit winning of the special figure 1 (the start of the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1) Is set. With this configuration, it is possible to end the high probability state of the ordinary symbol by a predetermined number of times under conditions other than the case where the special symbol is changed. Therefore, in the state in which the probable change state (special symbol high probability state, ordinary symbol high probability state) is set, at any timing (any special symbol lottery), a latent state (game state advantageous to the player) is obtained. (A high probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol), so that the player can always be motivated to play the game.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is configured so that the lottery (change) of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (four times). Therefore, the shorter the period from the setting of the probability change state to the winning of the small hit in the lottery of the special figure 1, the more times the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the latent state can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game more ambitious.

  In addition, in the third embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is not ended. As a result, even if the probability of winning a small hit in the drawing of Toku-zu 2 is set higher than the probability of winning a small hit in the drawing of Toku-zu 1 A situation in which a right-handed game is performed to execute the lottery can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2551, if it is determined that the special figure 1 small hitting flag 203bb is not set to ON (S2551: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when a jackpot is won by lottery of a special symbol, a certainty change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is required after the end of the jackpot game. Are set for a predetermined period (for four special symbol fluctuations), and various transition conditions (latency state transition state) for transitioning the high-probability latent state of the ordinary symbol to the low-probability state during the probable change state Is established, a latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set.

  In the third embodiment, as the latent state transition condition, a first latent transition condition that is satisfied when a jackpot is won during the probability change state, and a predetermined period during which the probability change state is set (special symbol variation 4). 2) when the final change of the second change is executed, and when a small win is achieved in the lottery of a specific special symbol (first special symbol (special symbol 1)) during the probability change state. A third latent shift condition that is satisfied. In this way, by configuring such that the latent state is set under various conditions, it is possible to provide the player with an enjoyable game performance.

  Further, the plurality of latent transfer conditions described above are configured such that the period during which the latent state is set after the condition is established is different, and when the first latent transfer condition is satisfied, a large hit is indicated. The latent state is set during the symbol confirmation period in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the second latent transition condition is satisfied, the latent symbol is hidden during the fluctuation period of the target special symbol change and during the symbol confirmation period. When the certain state is set and the third latent transfer condition is satisfied, the certain state is changed from the timing at which the target small hit game is executed (the timing at which the first variable winning device 65 is opened as the small hit game). Is configured to be set until the timing at which the symbol fixing period of the special symbol corresponding to the final variation of the symbol ends.

  With such a configuration, in performing a game for setting the latent state during the probable change state, the game is not merely aimed at the latent state, but also performed when the latent state is set. Since the player can be watched closely, it is possible to play the game more enthusiastically.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the symbol fixing period of the special symbol is made different according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol. Further, the variable display period (variation time) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is changed according to the number of times the special symbol has changed since the probability change state is set.

  Specifically, the lottery result of the special symbol that satisfies the first latent transition condition, that is, when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the symbol confirmation period is 5 seconds to 300 seconds according to the lottery result. It is configured to be set within the range. With this configuration, even if the player determines that the first latent transition condition has been satisfied (even if the special symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed), the symbol determination period set thereafter is set. Since it is not possible to easily determine the length of the game, the game can be played while expecting that a long period is set as the period in which the latent state is continuously set.

  In addition, when the above-described second latent transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is set based on a lottery result of a special symbol variation (final variation in the positive variation state) corresponding to the establishment of the second latent transition condition. The length of the period set as the latent state is configured such that the length of the period set as the latent state is, for example, in the final fluctuation in the probable state, the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place. It is configured so as to be less than (including the same as) the variation time of the special figure 2 variation executed during the latent state. With this configuration, when the final variation of the probable change state is out of range, the latent state is temporarily set internally. A disadvantage potential state that is disadvantageous to a player who makes it impossible (difficult) to obtain a winning game can be set.

  In the case where the above-described disadvantageous latent state is set, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is set so as not to execute the effect mode for notifying that the latent state game (RUSH game) is to be executed. It is better not to notify the player that the latent state is set.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the final variation of the probable state, the disadvantageous probability state is configured to be set. When a long symbol confirmation period (for example, 100 seconds that can be set when the lottery result is a big hit) is set, or when a special symbol lottery result is missing, May be set as 300 seconds, which can be set when the lottery result is a big hit, as the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) selected in (1).

  By configuring in this way, even if a big hit or a small hit is not won during the probable change state, a latent state that is advantageous to the player can be set. The game can be performed while playing. In addition, by setting the set symbol confirmation period and the fluctuation pattern to be the same as the period (time) that can be set when the jackpot is won, it is expected that the jackpot game will be executed after the completion of the latent state. be able to.

  In the above-described example, when the length of the symbol determination period is set to the same length as that in the case of winning the jackpot, when the latent state game (RUSH game) is performed, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed. A special symbol (third symbol) may be stopped and displayed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp. Thus, it is possible to suppress the determination of the result of the current lottery of the special symbol from being stopped at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and a decrease in the willingness to play a game during the latent state game.

  Furthermore, the third embodiment is configured such that the length of the period during which the latent state is set varies according to the timing at which the first latent transition condition is satisfied. Specifically, it is configured such that the more the number of times of the special symbol change in the probable change state increases, the more easily the latent probabilities are set. With this, as the number of special symbol changes in the probable change state increases, that is, as the number of special symbol fluctuations that can be executed during the probable change state decreases, the latent probability state that is advantageous to the player is more likely to be set. It is possible to make the player want to win the jackpot as soon as possible (want to satisfy the first latent transition condition) or to win the jackpot just before the end of the probable change state, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be done. In addition, when a jackpot is won in the final change of the probability change state, that is, when the first latent transition condition and the second latent transition condition are both satisfied in one special symbol variation (lottery). Since the latent state is set from the period when the jackpot fluctuation starts, the latent state can be provided for a longer period.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the longer the establishment of the first latent transition condition is delayed, the more easily the latent state is set for a long period of time. The longest potential state period may be set when the number of fluctuations is an even number or when the jackpot is won in the third time), or the first latent condition transition condition is established as soon as possible. The configuration may be such that the latent state is more likely to be set for a longer period of time.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment is different from the control process of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment in that the command determination process is replaced with the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 105). 3 (see FIG. 130), jackpot-related processing 3 (see FIG. 132) instead of the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 64), and variable display setting processing 3 (see FIG. 134) instead of the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 69). Is performed, and the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 131), the jackpot ending processing (see FIG. 133), and the probable variable display processing (see FIG. 135) are added. Be executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the command determination process 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the content of the command determination process 3 (S4172). The command determination process 3 (S4172) is different from the command determination process 2 (S4162) in the second embodiment in that the process of S4271 is executed instead of the process of S4214. Other processes are the same as the command determination process 2 (S4162) in the second embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a prize information related process (S4271), which is one of the command determination processes 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information-related processing (S4271).

  In the winning information-related processing (S4271), first, information indicating a gaming state stored in the state setting area 223j is read (S5501). Next, in the processing of S5501, it is determined whether or not the read gaming state (that is, the current gaming state) is undergoing a probable change (S5502). When it is determined that the read gaming state is in the changing state (S5502: Yes), the value of the remaining change count area 223ba is read (S5503). Next, in the processing of S5503, it is determined whether or not the value of the read remaining probability change count area 223ba is larger than 0 (S5504). When it is determined that the value of the remaining probability change number area 223ba is larger than 0 (S5504: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning information received this time has hit information (S5505). If it is determined that the winning information has hit information (S5505: Yes), the prefetching hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5506). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no hit information in the winning information (S5505: No), the process of S5506 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5507.

  Next, the value of the remaining probability change count area 223ba is decremented by 1 (S5507), and the information of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S5508), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5502 that the read gaming state is not in the changing state (S5502: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S5504 that the value of the remaining probability change count area 223ba is 0, (S5504: No), the display winning command corresponding to the received winning information is set (S5509), the process of S5508 described above is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, a jackpot-related process 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot-related process 3 (S4552). The jackpot-related processing 3 (S4552) executes the above-described processing of S4608 or S4611 with respect to the jackpot-related processing (S4502) in the above-described first embodiment, and then executes a jackpot end processing (S4651). Differs in that The other processes are the same, and a detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, a jackpot end process (S4651), which is one of the jackpot-related processes 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot end processing (S4651).

  In the big hit end processing (S4651), first, all information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read (S5601). Next, it is determined whether there is winning information (S5602). If it is determined that there is no winning information (S5602: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is winning information (S5602: Yes), the number of winning information determined in the processing of S5602 is subtracted from the number of times of probable change (n = 4) (S5603). Next, in the processing of S5603, the subtracted value is set in the remaining probability change count area 223ba (S5604).

  Next, it is determined whether the read information has hit information (S5605). If it is determined that the read information has the hit information (S5605: Yes), it is determined whether the winning information corresponding to the next change (that is, the first change executed after the end of the big hit game) includes the hit information. Is determined (S5606). In the processing of S5606, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next fluctuation includes the hit information (S5606: Yes), the player is notified that the latent state is set immediately after the end of the big hit. A special effect mode is set (S5607), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next fluctuation does not include the winning information (S5605: No), the pre-reading hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5608), and the winning information including the winning information changes. The number of times the special figure is changed is set in the remaining change number counter 223bc (S5609), a display ending command including a bingo game display mode is set (S5611), and the process ends.

  In the process of S5605, if it is determined that there is no information in the read state (S5605: No), the set number of probable changes (n = 4) is set in the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc (S5610), and the above-described S5611 is performed. Is performed, and this process ends.

  Next, a variable display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S4173). The variable display setting process 3 (S4173) is different from the variable display setting process (S4113) in the above-described first embodiment when it is determined in the process of S5103 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5103). : No), and the variable display setting process for probable change (S5151) is executed. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the variable display setting process for probable variation (S5151), which is one of the variable display setting processes 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. explain. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process for probabilistic change (S5151). In the variation display setting process for probable variation (S5151), when the current gaming state is the probable variation state, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is displayed based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Is set, and a process of transmitting to the display control device 114 is performed.

  In the variation display setting process for probable variation (S5151), first, it is determined whether or not the current variation is a small hit (S5701). If it is determined that the current fluctuation is a small hit (S5701: Yes), an effect mode such as all-bingo, that is, an effect mode as shown in FIG. 114 (b) is set (S5709). Move on to processing. On the other hand, in the process of S5701, if it is determined that the current fluctuation is not a small hit (S5701: No), it is determined whether the prefetch hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702). When it is determined that the pre-reading hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining fluctuation frequency counter 223bc is 2, that is, whether the remaining fluctuation frequency is 2. S5703). When it is determined that the value of the remaining change number counter 223bc is 2 (S5703: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the next change is read from the winning information storage area 223b (S5704).

  Next, based on the winning information read out in the processing of S5704 and the number of times of change, the effect mode is set from the probability-change effect selection table 222ba (S5705). Next, the pre-reading hit flag 223bb is set to off (S5706), the remaining probability change count area 223ba and the remaining change count counter 223bc are reset (S5707), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5710. On the other hand, in the process of S5702, when it is determined that the prefetch hit flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702: No), or in the process of S5703, it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation frequency counter 223bc is not 2. (S5703: No), an effect mode in which bingo cannot be established is set (S5708), the value of the remaining fluctuation counter 223bc is decremented by 1 (S5711), and the flow shifts to the process of S5710.

  Next, the extracted variation pattern command and the variation pattern command for display corresponding to the effect mode set in any of S5705, S5708, and S5709 are set (S5710), and the process ends.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In each of the above-described embodiments, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to change simultaneously (so-called simultaneous change type), and the game state is invisible. A lot of small hit games (RUSH games) are executed by executing the lottery (fluctuating) of special figure 2 during the period in which the state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) is set. It was configured to be possible.

  Then, the once set latent state is the first latent end condition that is established based on the start of the jackpot game, or the number of times the special symbol has changed since the normal symbol high probability state was set. It is configured to end when any of the second latent end conditions that are satisfied based on the conditions is satisfied.

  In the above-described first to third embodiments configured as described above, for example, when the first latent-probability termination condition is satisfied, the latent-probable game state (the first advantageous game that is advantageous to the player) ( RUSH game) is executed until immediately before the jackpot game that is the second advantageous game is started, so that the player can continuously execute a plurality of different advantageous games, Was able to give satisfaction.

  However, in each of the above-described embodiments, the probable state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the normal symbol) is set after the probable state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set. Although a plurality of types of probable change end conditions for transitioning to the probable state can be set, only two of the above-described probable end conditions for terminating the latent state are used. There has been a problem that a period in which the certain state continues is easily predicted.

  To deal with such a problem, in the fourth embodiment, each time a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is executed, a lottery for shifting (falling) the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state. (Hereinafter, referred to as a fall lottery), and a special symbol low probability state is set when the fall lottery is won.

  With this configuration, it is possible to solve a problem that a player can easily predict a period in which a high probability state of a special symbol is continuously set, and this is an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player. The game can be performed while expecting the latent state game (RUSH game) to continue for a long time.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, during the period during which the variable display (special figure variable display) for displaying that one of the special symbols has won a jackpot (special figure variable display period), the other special symbol is displayed. Even if the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result of the falling lottery is invalidated.

  Accordingly, when the latent state is set by satisfying the first probability changing end condition (the probability changing end condition that is satisfied based on the jackpot winning), the latent state game (RUSH) executed during the latent state is set. In the game, since the drop lottery can be invalidated, the latent state game (RUSH game) can be made an advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game) that can be executed for a long period of time.

  On the other hand, when the second certainty change end condition (the certainty change end condition that is satisfied based on the number of times of the change of the special symbol) is satisfied, and the latent state is set, the drop lottery is performed during the latent state. Therefore, there is a possibility that the latent state may be terminated early based on the winning of the drop lottery. Therefore, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed is the above-described advantageous latent probability. It can be a normal latent state game that is likely to be shorter than the state game.

  Here, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 during the probable change state in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a method of shifting the four game states set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the method of shifting the gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 used in the above-described first embodiment, the content of shifting the gaming state when the player wins the falling lottery is added. The difference is that the element until the condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied is different from the change of the transfer ratio at the time of winning the jackpot, and the other is the same. Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 136, in the fourth embodiment, a fall lottery for shifting the special symbol high-probability state to the low-probability state is configured to be executed. If a win is made, the state shifts to the time saving state, and if the drop lottery is won during the latent state, the state shifts to a normal state.

  With such a configuration, in order to set a latent state which is a game state advantageous to the player, a probable change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set. In the state, the condition for shifting the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low-probability state (for example, time-saving time digestion) is lower than the condition for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state (winning of the drop lottery). It must be established first.

  Therefore, whether or not the latent state is set is determined according to the timing of establishment of the transition condition of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol), so that the player can watch the game content, It can improve the interest of people. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the game method to be executed is the same (left-handed game) in the probability change state and the time saving state, and the effect content displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Are also configured to be similar. Therefore, even if the falling symbol is won before the transition condition of the ordinary symbol (the condition for shifting the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low-probability state) is satisfied, it is difficult for the player to grasp that fact. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137, a flow of setting a latent state in the fourth embodiment and a flow of a game in the latent state will be described. FIG. 137 (a) is a timing chart schematically showing a flow when a special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probability change state (when the first probability change end condition is satisfied), and FIG. 137 (b) is a timing chart. 14 is a timing chart schematically showing a flow when the number of time savings becomes 0 during the probable change state (when the second probable change end condition is satisfied).

  As shown in FIG. 137 (a), in the fourth embodiment, in the state where the special symbol high-probability state (probable state or latent state) is set, the special symbol high-probability state is set to the low-probability state. The lottery (falling lottery) for shifting to is performed every time a special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed, and when a jackpot is won during the probable change state (first probable change end condition) ) Is set as a falling lottery invalid period in which the falling lottery is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the latent state is set based on the satisfaction of the second probability change end condition, as shown in FIG. 137 (b), the falling lottery is effectively performed during the latent state game (RUSH game). Since the execution is performed, the latent state is shifted to the normal state based on winning in the drop lottery before the end of the special figure 1 change. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first probability change end condition is satisfied, a latent state game (RUSH game) that is more advantageous than when the second probability change end condition is satisfied can be executed.

<About the effect display contents in the fourth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the effect contents executed in the above-described first embodiment, the effect contents set during the probable state are suggested (notified) to the player as to the opportunity for setting the latent state. And an effect for indicating (notifying) that the player has won the falling lottery during the latent state game (RUSH game).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 138 to FIG. 140, description will be given of the effect contents added by the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 138 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect contents for suggesting that a latent state game (RUSH game) is set when the second probability change end condition (reduction of the number of time savings) is satisfied. FIG. 138 (b) schematically shows the effect contents for suggesting that the latent state game (RUSH game) is set when the first probability change end condition (big hit winning) is satisfied. It is a schematic diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (a) and FIG. 138 (b), in the present embodiment, the trigger for setting the latent state according to the display mode of the effect symbol 813 displayed when the treasure box 812 is opened. When the display mode of "444" is displayed as the effect symbol 813, it is notified that the second probable change end condition (reduction of the number of hours saved) has been established, and " When the display mode of "Super RUSH" is displayed, it is configured to notify that the first probable change end condition (big hit win) is satisfied.

  In the fourth embodiment, the display mode of the effect symbol 813 displayed as the result of the effect in the probable change state is configured to notify the player of the opportunity to set the latent state. A configuration other than the above may be used. For example, a configuration may be provided in which a plurality of display modes having different selection ratios are provided according to the type of the probability change end condition that is established as the display mode of the effect symbol 813 to be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of predicting which probable change end condition has been satisfied.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 139 (a), a description will be given of a display content when a drop lottery is won during a latent state game (RUSH game). FIG. 139 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents when a fall lottery is won during a latent state game (RUSH game). In the fourth embodiment, each time a special figure lottery start condition for executing a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is established, a falling lottery is executed, and the special figure lottery start condition is satisfied. Then, during the period until the jackpot lottery is executed, that is, before the jackpot lottery is performed, the fall lottery is executed.

  Therefore, in the case of winning the falling lottery, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), while the special symbol (special figure 1) corresponding to the winning of the falling lottery is variably displayed, a latent state game (RUSH game) Is performed, and a new special figure 2 change is prevented from being executed after the falling lottery winning (after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state). In addition, by changing the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 from “right-handed” to “left-handed” while the special symbol (special figure 1) corresponding to the winning of the falling lottery is displayed in a variable manner, After the falling lottery winning (after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state), the execution of a new special figure 2 change is suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139 (b), a description will be given of the effect content executed when a jackpot is won during a latent state game (RUSH game). FIG. 139 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect content executed when a jackpot is won during the latent state game (RUSH game).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 140, description will be given of the contents of the effect during the advantageous latent probability state game (super RUSH game) which is advantageous to the player in the latent state game (RUSH game). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the latent probability state is set based on the first probability change end condition being satisfied, the falling lottery is invalidated during the setting period of the latent state. The lottery ineffective period is configured to be set, and the treasure chest 812 displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 indicates that the game is in an advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game). The number of displays is increased, and a comment “during super RUSH” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, indicating that the game is in the advantageous latent probability state game.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 146. First, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 83. This embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that a fall lottery counter C6 used to determine the lottery result of the fall lottery is added.

  The falling lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in a range of “0 to 239”, and is updated at, for example, a 2 millisecond interval that is an execution interval of a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). Some of the counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 52), and the updated values are stored in a counter buffer (falling lottery counter buffer) set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

  The value of the falling lottery counter C6 is referred to in the falling lottery executed when the special symbol high-probability state is set (when the probability change flag 203g is set to ON), and is acquired. When it is determined that the value of the falling lottery counter C6 is the determination value prescribed in the falling lottery table 202cb, the special symbol high probability state shifts to the low probability state (falls).

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 142, the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment in that a jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202d. The difference is that a table 202cb is provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the big hit type selection 4 table 202ca will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the big hit type selection 4 table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 143, in the fourth embodiment, when a jackpot is won and a jackpot game is executed, an operation content (operation scenario) for always releasing the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is included. It differs from the first embodiment described above in that it is set. In addition, the first embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the operation content (operation scenario) is set so that at least five or more rounds of the jackpot game are executed when the jackpot is won. Is different.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first embodiment, in order to make it difficult for the player to know whether the special symbol has been won or the small hit, the operation content to be executed during the small hit game is difficult. A jackpot game in which the same operation content as the (operation scenario) (a concept including a difference that makes it difficult for the player to determine) is defined, and a latent state, which is a game state in which the player has an advantage, is set. In contrast to the timing and the end timing, which are difficult to understand, the fourth embodiment allows the player to easily determine whether a big hit or a small hit has been won (the big hit game By making the operation content different from the operation content of the small hitting game, the player can easily determine the operation content).

  In this way, by allowing the player to easily determine whether the big hit game has been executed or the small hit game, the number of small hit games executed during the latent state game (RUSH game) can be easily determined. Can be grasped.

  Next, the falling lottery table 202cb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the falling lottery table 202cb. The falling lottery table 202cb is a data table in which the determination value of the above-mentioned falling lottery counter C6 is stored. The value of the fall lottery counter C6 acquired when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (at the time of starting winning) is one of the values specified in the fall lottery table 202cb. Is set so as to shift to the special symbol low-probability state (fall down) when the judgment value matches the judgment value.

  More specifically, four determination values “43, 107, 195, 222” are defined as the determination values for determining a fall in the special symbol high probability state. Here, the falling lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of “0 to 239”. Of the 240 possible values of the falling lottery counter C6, there are four determination values determined to be falling, and therefore, the probability of falling (transition to the low probability state of the special symbol) in the probable change state of the special symbol. Is 1/60 (4/240).

  In the fourth embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 6/480 (see FIG. 15A), and the small jackpot is won in the drawing of the special figure 2. The probability is set to be 221/480 (see FIG. 15B). That is, the probability of winning in the drop lottery is slightly higher than the probability of winning in the jackpot. That is, in the fourth embodiment, in the state in which the latent state is set, it is configured such that it is easy to win in the order of small hit, fall, and big hit.

  The winning rates of the big hit, the small hit and the fall in the special symbol high-probability state are not limited to those shown in the present embodiment, and the easiness of winning may be changed. For example, the fall probability (the probability of winning the fall lottery) is set to be lower than the jackpot probability, and in the latent state, the big hit game and the small hit game are repeatedly enjoyed until the fall is won. It is also possible to set the small hit probability and the fall probability to be almost the same (for example, the small hit probability 1/3, the fall probability 1/4), and the special symbol lottery is performed during the latent state. Each time the player is played, the player may be made to play the game. In addition, the falling probability is set to be high (for example, ２), and the special symbol lottery can be executed in the state where the latent state is set only when the falling has not occurred in the first falling lottery. good.

  In the present embodiment, only the determination value for determining whether or not a special symbol has a high probability in the high probability state is specified in the falling lottery table 202cb, and the determination value for the low probability state of the special symbol is specified. It has not been. This is because it is useless to determine whether or not to shift to the special symbol low-probability state when the special symbol is already in the low-probability state.

  In the fourth embodiment, the falling lottery table 202cb is compared with a periodically updated falling lottery counter C6 to shift from the special symbol high probability state to the special symbol low probability state (falling). ) Is determined. That is, the timing of transition from the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) to normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) can be made random. . Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the latent state ends during the latent state game (RUSH game) performed during the period in which the latent state is set.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not to shift (fall) from the special symbol high-probability state to the special symbol low-probability state is determined by lottery (determination). ). For example, whether or not to shift from the high probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low probability state of the ordinary symbol may be determined by a lottery executed each time the special symbol changes (special figure lottery). This makes it possible to randomize how long the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol lasts, so that the probable state (the high-probability state of the special symbol, the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol) changes to the latent state (the high-probability state of the special symbol) , The timing of shifting to the normal symbol low probability state) can be made difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, during the period in which the probable state is set, the player can always play a game while expecting the latent state to be set. Also, for example, it may be configured to be able to determine whether or not to shift from the low probability state of the special symbol to the high probability state of the special symbol.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 shows the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. As shown in FIG. 144, the RAM 203 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 according to the first embodiment in that a state update restriction flag 203ca is provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The state update restriction flag 203ca is a flag for indicating that the update of various parameters corresponding to various conditions for shifting the game state is restricted, and when the state is set to ON, various types are set. This indicates that the update of the parameter is restricted. In the fourth embodiment, when the status update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, the process of updating the value of the time reduction counter 203f is skipped.

  This state update restriction flag 203ca is determined when the first special symbol big hit determination processing 4 (see S386 in FIG. 147) determines that the first special symbol (special figure 1) has been won in the lottery (S406 in FIG. 147). : Yes), or when it is determined in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S975 in FIG. 150) that the jackpot has been won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (S1006 in FIG. 150: Yes) ) Is set to ON (S487 in FIG. 147, S1077 in FIG. 150).

  Further, it is referred to in the game state update processing 4 (refer to S388 in FIG. 149) (refer to S651 in FIG. 149), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S651: Yes in FIG. 149), the time saving counter 203f The process of updating (subtracting) the value, that is, the process of updating a parameter (number of times reduced) corresponding to the condition for shifting the gaming state is skipped. Then, when it is determined in the first special symbol change stop processing 4 (see S287 in FIG. 148) that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S801: YES in FIG. 148), it is set to OFF. (See S871 in FIG. 148). Similarly, in the second special symbol change stop process 4 (see S293 in FIG. 151), if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to on (S1501: Yes in FIG. 151), the process is also turned off. This is set (S1571 in FIG. 151).

  That is, in the fourth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in any of a plurality of special symbols (special figures 1 and 2), the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, and the special symbol that has won the jackpot is set. During the period in which the variable display is executed, the game state is not shifted.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 145 (a). FIG. 145 (a) shows the audio ramp control device of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM 222 of an MPU 113 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 145 (a), the ROM 222 of the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the first embodiment in that a latent mode selection table 222ca and a fall notification selection table 222cb are provided. are doing. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The latent mode selection table 222ca is a data table that is referred to when selecting an effect mode (latent mode) of an effect (latent operation) for notifying the player that the latent state has been set. . In the latent mode selection table 222ca, a plurality of rendering modes (corresponding to a timing of setting a latent status (a timing of winning a jackpot, a timing of reaching a number of time savings (missing a time saving)) and a mode setting rendering counter 223ca described later are associated. An effect mode) is defined, and it is possible to suggest to the player an opportunity to set a latent state according to the effect mode of the selected latent effect.

  Next, detailed contents defined in the latent mode selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (b). FIG. 146 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the latent mode selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 146 (b), when the information included in the status command received from the main controller 110 indicates that the current latent state is the jackpot latent state, the acquired value of the mode setting effect counter 223ca is obtained. Is defined as “invincible mode” in the range of “0 to 49”, “normal mode B” is defined in the range of “50 to 89”, and “normal mode A” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”. ing.

  When the information included in the status command received from main controller 110 indicates that the current latency state is the latency reduction latency state, the acquired value of mode setting effect counter 223ca is “0-49”. “Normal mode A” is defined in the range, “Normal mode B” is defined in the range of “50 to 89”, and “Normal mode B” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”.

  The falling notification selection table 222cb is a data table for selecting a notification mode for notifying (suggesting) to the player that the player has won the falling lottery, and the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) continues. The notification mode is configured to be selected based on the value of the remaining short time count area 223k indicating the remaining period set in advance and the value of the effect counter 223cf for falling notification.

  In the fourth embodiment, the game method (left-handed game) and the third symbol display device 81 are executed depending on whether the probable change state is set as the game state or the time saving state is set. And the various display modes are the same. With this configuration, it is configured such that the player cannot easily determine whether the current state is the probable state or the time saving state. Further, since the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment performs the falling lottery, the pachinko machine 10 saves time at random timing in the state where the probable change state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set. The state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set.

  When the high probability state of the ordinary symbol shifts to the low probability state in the state where the probability change state is set, the game state shifts from the probability change state to the latent state, and the latent state advantageous to the player is provided. While the certain state game (RUSH game) is executed, if the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol shifts to the low-probability state in the state where the time-saving state is set, the gaming state is changed from the time-saving state to the normal state. Transition to state.

  Here, the specific contents of the fall notification selection table 222cb will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (c). FIG. 146 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall notification selection table 222cb. As shown in FIG. 146 (c), the fall notification selection table 222cb is associated with the number of remaining short-time counts (information of the remaining short-time count area 223k) at the time of the fall winning, and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf. Thus, a notification mode is defined.

  Specifically, when the timing of winning the fall is 0 in the remaining working hours (the information stored in the remaining working hours area 223k indicates 0 in the remaining working hours); In the case where the lottery is won due to the fluctuation in which the state ends, “confirmed notification” is defined regardless of the value of the obtained fall notification effect counter 223cf. Then, when the timing of the winning of the fall is 1 to 49 in the number of remaining working hours, that is, when the period in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol has been set has passed by half or more, the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf of the acquired fall notification is displayed. “Information notification” is defined in the range of values “0 to 49” or “90 to 99”, and “confirmation notification” is defined in the range of “50 to 89”. When the number of remaining working hours is 50 to 98, that is, when the period in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set is half or more, the value of the obtained fall notification effect counter 223cf is “0 to 89”. "Information notification" is defined in the range "", and "Fixed notification" is defined in the range "90-99".

  Here, when “confirmation notification” is selected as the notification mode, the player has easily fallen to the falling lottery, for example, the notification mode has fallen to the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, for example. Informing mode (for example, display of “Sorry”) indicating the fact, or notification of winning in the drop lottery is set by voice or emission color of the decorative member.

  In addition, when “suggested notification” is selected as the notification mode, a notification mode (for example, “pinch” display) for notifying the player that there is a possibility that the falling lottery has been won is set. . Although the detailed description is omitted, the “suggestion notification” is configured to be set when the notification condition is satisfied even when the falling lottery is not won. With this configuration, the “information notification” is executed both when the player has actually won the falling lottery and when the player has not won the falling lottery.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the mode of the notification (suggestion) production of whether or not the drop lottery has been won is determined by the remaining period (remaining time reduction) in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is continuously set. Period), and the longer the remaining short time period, the more difficult it is to set “confirmation notification”. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player knows that the player has won the falling lottery in a state where the remaining time is short, and the willingness to play during the remaining time is reduced.

  In addition, the setting frequency of the “suggestion notification” that is set when the drop lottery is not won may be configured to be variable based on the length of the remaining short time. It is preferable that the "suggestion notification" is easily set in a state where the lottery has not been won. This makes it possible to vary the possibility of actually winning the falling lottery when the “suggestion notification” is executed based on the length of the remaining short time, so the “suggestion notification” is executed It is possible to make the player play a game during the remaining short time period while letting the player predict whether or not a drop lottery will be won while discriminating between the frequency (number of times) and the number of remaining time saving times, thereby improving the interest of the game. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 145 (b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 145 (b) shows the sound lamp control device of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM 223 of an MPU 213. As shown in FIG. 145 (b), the RAM 223 of the fourth embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the first embodiment in that the mode setting effect counter 223ca, the latent mode storage area 223cb, and the number of small hits The difference is that a counter 223 cc, a fall flag 223 cd, a time saving notification flag 223 ce, and a fall notification effect counter 223 cf are provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The mode setting effect counter 223ca is a counter used when selecting a latent mode using the latent mode selection table 222ca. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

  The latent mode storage area 223cb is a storage area for storing the currently set latent mode. The latent mode determined in the latent mode setting process (see S4451 in FIG. 154) is stored (set). (See S5804 in FIG. 154). Then, it is referred to in the special figure 1 variable display setting process 4 (see S5171 in FIG. 159) (see S5251 in FIG. 159), and a display variable pattern command is set (see S5252 in FIG. 159). Similarly, it is referred to in the special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (see S5175 in FIG. 160) (S5351 in FIG. 160), and a display variable pattern command is set (S5352 in FIG. 160). The information (latent mode information) stored (set) in the latent mode storage area 223cb is the state command processing 4 (see S4281 in FIG. 153) when it is determined that the gaming state has shifted to the normal state. (See S4454 in FIG. 153).

  The small hit number counter 223 cc is a counter for measuring the number of small hits that have been won during the latent state. Upon receipt, the value is incremented by 1 (see S4752 in FIG. 156). Then, it is referred to when determining the number of small hits won during the latent state (S4753 in FIG. 156). In the present embodiment, the small hit count display 825 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the small hit count counter 223 cc, and the small hit count is set during the period in which the latent state is set. When the number of wins reaches a predetermined number (a multiple of 10), the remaining time of the latent state is displayed.

  The falling flag 223cd is a flag for indicating that the player has won the falling lottery during the probable change state, and is set to ON to indicate that the player has won the falling lottery.

  The time saving notification flag 223ce wins the drop lottery during the probable change state (special symbol high probability state, ordinary symbol high probability state), and shifts to the time reduction state (special symbol high probability state, ordinary symbol low probability state). And a flag for indicating that a fall notification effect (an effect executed when the fixed notification is selected in the fall notification selection table 222cb) for notifying the player of the transition has been executed, When set to ON, a fall notification effect is set.

  The fall notification effect counter 223cf is a counter used when selecting a fall lottery notification mode using the fall notification selection table 222cb. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 according to the above-described first embodiment in that the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is replaced by a first process. Special symbol big hit determination process 4 (see FIG. 147), first special symbol change stop process 4 (see FIG. 148) instead of first special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 38), and game state update process (see FIG. 36) Instead of the game state update process 4 (see FIG. 149), the second special symbol big hit determination process 4 (see FIG. 40) instead of the second special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 150), and the second special symbol change stop process. The difference is that a second special symbol change stop process 4 (see FIG. 151) is executed instead of (see FIG. 45). Otherwise, the same processing is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the content of the first special symbol big hit determination process 4 (S386). The first special symbol big hit determination process 4 (S386) is different from the first special symbol big hit determination process (S306) in the above-described first embodiment in that the special symbol is changed from the probable change state to the special symbol low probability state ( The difference is that a process of executing a lottery to determine whether or not to fall is added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), first, data of the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is on (S481). When it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is ON (S481: Yes), the big hit of the second special symbol is being executed, and thus this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is off (S481: No), it is determined whether the probable change flag 203g is on, that is, whether the probable change is in progress (S482). If it is determined that the probable change flag 203g is off, that is, it is not during the probable change (S482: No), the process proceeds to S404.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S482, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is ON, that is, when it is determined that the probability change is being performed (S482: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the falling lottery table 202m. (S483). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the falling lottery counter C5 matches any of the determination values (random numbers) specified in the falling lottery table 202m (that is, a value corresponding to the falling) (S484). ), When it is determined that the value does not correspond to the fall (S484: No), the process proceeds to S403.

  On the other hand, in the process of S484, when it is determined that the value of the falling lottery counter C5 matches one of the determination values (random number values) specified in the falling lottery table 202m (a value corresponding to the falling) ( (S484: Yes), the probable change flag 203g is set to off to shift (fall) from the probable change state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (S485). Then, a fall command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the special symbol has shifted (falled) from the probable state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol is set (S486), and the process proceeds to S404. Transition. Further, in the present embodiment, in the process of S406, when it is determined that the data of the current execution area is a big hit (S406: Yes), the processes of S407 to S411 are executed, and then the state update restriction flag 203ca is set. Is set to ON (S487), and this processing ends.

  By executing the special symbol change start process 4 (S386), a lottery for shifting (falling) to the low probability state of the special symbol and a lottery for determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit are easily executed. be able to. In the present embodiment, as the order of processing in the special symbol probable change state, a lottery (falling lottery) is first performed to determine whether or not to shift to the special symbol low probability state, and then to the special symbol jackpot. Although it is configured to execute a lottery to determine whether or not the processing will be performed, the processing order is not limited to this. The jackpot lottery may be performed first, and then the falling lottery may be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 148, a first special symbol change stop process 4 (S287) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change stop process 4 (S287). In the first special symbol change stop process 4 (S287), after performing the processes of S801 to S805 in the first special symbol change stop process (S207) in the above-described first embodiment, the state update restriction flag 203ca is set. The difference is that a process of turning off (S871) is added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 149, a game state update process 4 (S388) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the content of the game state update processing 4 (S388). The gaming state update processing 4 (S388) differs from the gaming state update processing (S308) in the first embodiment in that processing (S651) for determining whether the state update restriction flag 203ca is on is added. Different. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the game state update processing 4 (S388), first, it is determined whether or not the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S651). If it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S651: Yes), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S651 that the state update restriction flag 203ca is not on (S651: No), the process proceeds to step S601.

  After executing the processing of S601 to S604, it is determined in the processing of S605 whether the probable change flag 203g is on (that is, whether the probable change is being performed) (S605). When it is determined that the probable change flag 203g is on (S605: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is on (S652). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is ON (S652: Yes), a state command indicating a big hit latent state is set (S653), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S652, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is not on (S652: No), a status command indicating the time saving missing latency state is set (S654), and this process ends. .

  Next, a second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the content of the second special symbol big hit determination process 4 (S975). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) is different from the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) in the first embodiment described above in that the special symbol is changed from the probable change state to the special symbol low probability state ( The difference is that a process of executing a lottery to determine whether or not to fall is added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Also, referring to FIG. 147, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) described above, a process of changing the target of the symbol from the first special symbol to the second special symbol is changed. Since it is only executed, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 151, a description will be given of a second special symbol change stop process 4 (S293) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change stop processing 4 (S293). In the second special symbol change stop process 4 (S293), after executing S1501, S1503 to S1506 with respect to the first special symbol change stop process (S213) in the first embodiment, the state update restriction flag 203ca is set. The difference is that a process (S1571) for turning off is added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160. The control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment is different from the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment in that a command judgment process 4 (see FIG. 60) is used instead of the command judgment process. (Refer to FIG. 152). The difference is that a variable display setting process 4 (refer to FIG. 157) is performed instead of the variable display setting process (refer to FIG. 69), and the other processes are the same. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the command determination process 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4 (S4182). The command determination process 4 (S4182) is different from the command determination process (S4112) in the above-described first embodiment when it is determined in the process of S4203 that a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4203: No), in that a status command process 4 (S4281) is executed instead of the status command process (S4204). Other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 153, a state command process 4 (S4281), which is one of the command determination processes 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the status command processing 4 (S4281). The status command process 4 (S4281) determines whether a latent mode setting process (S4451) is added to the status command process (S4112) in the above-described first embodiment and whether a command related to a fall has been received. The difference is that processing is added. Other processes are the same as the status command process (S4112) in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  In state command processing 4 (S4281), when it is determined that the command received this time is a state command indicating transition to the latent state (S4403: Yes), latent mode setting processing (S4451) is performed. Details of the latent mode setting process (S4451) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area (S4405), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4452. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4403 that the command received from the main control device 110 this time is not a status command indicating transition to a latent state (S4403: No), the main control device 110 issues a fall command. It is determined whether it has been received (S4452). If it is determined that the fall command has been received (S4452: Yes), a fall effect setting process is executed (S4453). Details of the fall effect setting process (S4453) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4452 that a fall command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S4452: No), the process of S4453 is skipped and the process of S4406 is executed. Next, after executing the processing of S4406-S4411, the latent mode storage area 223cb, the small hit count counter 223cc, the fall flag 223cd, and the time saving notification flag 223ce are cleared (S4454), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 154, a latent mode setting process (S4451), which is one of the status command processes 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the contents of the latent mode setting process (S4451).

  In the latent mode setting process (S4451), first, the type of the status command received this time from the main controller 110 is read (S5801). Next, based on the received state command and the value of the mode setting effect counter 223ca, the latent mode is determined using the latent mode selection table 222ca (see FIG. 146 (b)) (S5802). Next, in the process of S5802, a display latent mode command corresponding to the determined latent mode is set (S5803), and the determined latent mode is set in the latent mode storage area 223cb (S5804). Next, a latent-confidence-notifying effect for notifying entry of the latent state is set (S5805), a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5806), and this processing ends. I do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 155, a description will be given of a fall effect setting process (S4453), which is one of the status command processes 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall effect setting process (S4453).

  In the fall effect setting process (S4453), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a latent state (S5901). When it is determined that the current game state is the latent state (S5901: Yes), a latent state notification effect for notifying the end of the latent state is set (S5902), and the state command received from the main control device 110 is set. Is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5903), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5901, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5901: No), then the remaining working hours is 99 or more, that is, the remaining working hours area 223k. It is determined whether the value stored in is equal to or greater than 99 (S5904). When it is determined that the number of remaining working hours is 99 or more (S5904: Yes), a working hours notification effect for notifying entry of the working hours is set (S5905), and the working hours notification flag 223ce is set to ON (S5908). . On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5904 that the number of remaining working hours is not 99 or more (S5904: No), the processing of S5905 and S5906 is skipped, and the processing shifts to the processing of S5907. Next, the fall flag 223cd is set to ON (S5907), the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5908), and the process ends. I do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 156, a small hit-related process 4 (S4574) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit-related process 4 (S4574). The small hit related process 4 (S4574) is different from the small hit related process (S4504) in the first embodiment in that a process for displaying remaining time information is added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description will be omitted.

  In the small hit-related process 4 (S4574), first, when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the latent state. (S4751). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S4751: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the small hit counter 223cc (S4752). Next, it is determined whether the value of the small hit counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753). When it is determined that the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753: Yes), the information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is read (S4754). A display time information command indicating the remaining time information is set (S4755), and then a display small hit start command is set (S4702), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4751 that the latent state is not present (S4751: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S4753 that the value of the small hit counter 223cc is not a multiple of 10, ( S4753: No), the process of S4702 is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, a variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the content of the variable display setting process 4 (S4183). The variable display setting process 4 (S4183) is different from the variable display setting process (S4113) in the first embodiment in that the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) is used instead of the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104). 4 (S5171), a variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (S5175) is executed instead of the variable display setting processing for special figure 2 (S5109), and a fall notification process (S5173) is added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description will be omitted.

  In the variation display setting process 4 (S4183), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is on (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 change start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 change start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a latent state (S5103). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103: Yes), the special figure 1 variable display setting process 4 (S5171) is executed, and the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is displayed. The corresponding data is shifted (S5106). Details of the special figure 1 variable display setting process 4 (S5171) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5103: No), it is determined whether the falling flag 223cd is on (S5172). If it is determined that the fall flag 223cd is ON (S5172: Yes), a fall notification process (S5173) is executed. Details of the fall notification process (S5173) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set (S5105), and the flow shifts to the process of S5106 described above. Next, the processing executed for the special figure 1 in S5171 to S5173 is changed to the special figure 2 for the target.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 158, a fall notification process (S5173), which is one process in the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall notification process (S5173).

  In the fall notification process (S5173), first, it is determined whether or not the time saving notification flag 223ce is on (S8001). When it is determined that the time-saving notification flag 223ce is ON (S8001: Yes), a display latent variation pattern command for the first special symbol is set based on the extracted variation pattern (S8009), and this processing is performed. To end. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time-saving notification flag 223ce is off (S8001: No), the reading of the information on the remaining working hours area 223k is executed (S8002). Next, a fall notification mode is determined using the fall notification selection table 222cb based on the remaining working hours read out in the processing of S8002 and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223ca (S8003). Next, in the process of S8003, it is determined whether the determined notification mode is the determined notification mode (S8004). If it is determined that the notification mode is the fixed notification mode (S8004: Yes), the time saving notification flag 223ce is set to off (S8005), and the falling flag 223cd is set to off (S8006). Next, a time-saving notification effect for notifying entry of the time-saving state is set (S8007), the above-described processing of S8009 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S8004, when it is determined that the determined notification mode is not the final notification mode (S8004: No), a display fall notification command corresponding to the fall notification mode determined in the process of S8003 is set ( S8008), the above-described processing of S8009 is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 1 (S4183), which is one of the variable display setting processes 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. S5171) will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 variable display setting process 4 (S5171). The special figure 1 variable display setting processing 4 (S5171) is different from the special figure 1 variable display setting processing (S5104) in the first embodiment in that the processing of S5201 to S5205 is executed, and then the processing of S5206 is performed. Instead, the reading of the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cb is executed (S5251), and based on the extracted variation pattern and the latent mode, the display latent variation pattern command for the first special symbol is displayed. Is performed in that a process (S5252) for setting is performed. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 160, the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (S4183), which is one of the variable display setting processes 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. S5175) will be described. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (S5175). The special figure 2 variable display setting processing 4 (S5175) is different from the special figure 2 variable display setting processing (S5109) in the first embodiment in that the processing of steps S5301 to S5308 is performed, and then the processing of step S5206 is performed. Instead, the reading of the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cb is executed (S5351), and based on the extracted variation pattern and the latent mode, the display latent variation pattern command for the second special symbol is displayed. Is different in that a process (S5352) for setting is performed. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description will be omitted.

  As described above, the fourth embodiment has a configuration in which a drop lottery for shifting the special symbol high-probability state to the low-probability state based on the lottery result is provided in the first embodiment described above. When a probable change state (special symbol high-probability state, normal symbol high-probability state) is set, the time-saving state (special symbol low-probability state, normal symbol high-probability state) It can be difficult for the player to predict whether or not to shift to.

  Also, if the player wins the drop lottery during the probability change state and shifts to the time saving state, the player enters the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) which is a game state advantageous to the player. It is difficult to shift (it is more difficult to shift than the probability change state), so once the probability change state is set, the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set It is also possible to play the game while pounding so as not to win the falling lottery before.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the same game method (left-handed game) is performed in the case where the probable change state is set and in the case where the time reduction state is set. It is possible to make it more difficult to grasp whether the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, immediately after the probable change state is set (for example, the first special symbol change), when a drop lottery is won, the player is notified that the probable change state is set. Without delay, since the effect is to be executed from the beginning (after the end of the jackpot), the effect of making the time saving state appear to have been set (time saving notification effect), there is a possibility that the latent state may be set. It is possible to suppress giving the player an unpleasant feeling that the probable change state higher than the game state ends in a short period of time.

  In addition, in the fourth embodiment, an effect that suggests to the player the possibility of winning in the falling lottery during the probable change state (suggestion notification), and an effect that notifies the player that the player has won the falling lottery (final notification) ) Can be executed, and the selection ratio between the suggestion notification and the definite notification is made different based on the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol that can be set continuously in the probable change state. Specifically, it is configured such that the more the number of remaining fluctuations in the probable change state is, the more difficult it is to execute the confirmation notification. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the state has changed from the probable change state to the time saving state in a state where the number of remaining fluctuations is large, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. In addition, the effect of performing the suggestion notification is configured to be executed even when the drop lottery has not been won.

  In the present embodiment, the suggestion notification described above or the confirmation notification is configured to allow the player to determine whether the current game state is the probable change state or the time saving state. Other configurations may be used. For example, a special symbol variation pattern (variation time) that can only be selected during the probable change state or a special symbol variation pattern (variation time) that can be selected only during the time saving state The present invention may be configured so that the player can predict the current game state based on the special pattern variation pattern to be provided and executed. In this case, the variation pattern dedicated to the probable change state and the variation pattern dedicated to the time saving state do not differ greatly in their contents, but may be provided, for example, with an error whose variation time is different by one second. This allows the player to be notified of the current game state based on an error in the fluctuation display time of a degree of slight discomfort, so that the player can pay close attention to the fluctuation display of the special symbol to be executed. Further, in this case, one second of the error may be used, for example, in a period until the fluctuation of the third symbol is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, whereby the fluctuation start timing of the third symbol is obtained. Can be notified to the player of the current game state by a slight discomfort that is slower or faster than usual, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In the fourth embodiment, the lottery result of the falling lottery associated with the other special symbol change (lottery) is invalidated during the period in which the jackpot change is executed in one special symbol. . Accordingly, for example, during the period in which the latent state is set due to the first latent transition condition that is established based on the jackpot winning of the special map 1 being established, the second special is selected without winning the falling lottery. It becomes possible to continue receiving the lottery of the symbol (special figure 2). Therefore, it is possible to set a latent state that is more advantageous (it is easy to continue for a long time) than a latent state that is set when other latent transition conditions are satisfied.

  In the fourth embodiment, when a special symbol change (lottery) is executed, a fall lottery is also executed. In other words, the fall lottery is configured to be executed when the condition for executing the special symbol change (lottery) is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific entrance (for example, first entrance) That the ball has entered the ball opening 64, the second entrance 640, the general winning opening 63), that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, that the conditions for executing the ordinary symbol change (lottery) have been satisfied, , A special symbol or a normal symbol may be stopped and displayed, or the elapsed timing of the symbol confirmation period may be used as an opportunity for executing the drop lottery. If the execution condition of the special symbol change (lottery) is satisfied, the falling lottery is executed. A determination may be made as to whether or not to execute, and a fall lottery may be performed based on the determination result. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at which timing the falling lottery is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily being informed of the timing of winning in the drop lottery.

  In the fourth embodiment, it is configured to determine the presence / absence of a fall with the same probability every time a fall lottery is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. An easy) high-probability state and a low-probability state that is hard to fall (hard to win) may be provided. In this case, for example, based on the jackpot type, a high-probability state and a low-probability state are provided as the probable states set after the end of the jackpot, and in the high-probability state, a low-probability state of a drop lottery is set. In the state, the high probability state of the drop lottery may be set. Further, the state of the falling lottery (high-probability state, low-probability state) may be changed based on the number of special symbol changes (lottery) executed after the probability change state is set. The predetermined number of times of change (for example, 10 times) after the state is set is such that a high probability state of a falling lottery that is easy to win a falling lottery is set, and then a low probability state of a falling lottery is set. May be.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to set a period in which the player is likely to fall down from the probable change state and a period in which it is difficult to perform the game, so that it is possible to provide the player with sharp playability. Further, in the present embodiment, when a winning lottery is won, a process of shifting the special symbol high-probability state to the low-probability state is executed. Processing for shifting the high probability state to the low probability state may be executed. Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, when the falling lottery is won, the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state. For example, the special symbol is changed from the high probability state to the medium probability state (the jackpot probability is high). (A state lower than the probability state and higher than the low probability state), and the medium probability state may not be shifted unless a fall lottery is won.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described fourth embodiment, a fall lottery for shifting (falling) the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state has been configured. With such a configuration, the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues can be varied according to the lottery result of the drop lottery. It was possible to play the game while expecting to continue.

  However, in the configuration of the above-described fourth embodiment, the falling lottery is configured to be executed each time the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed. It was not possible to make a selection, and there was a risk that the willingness to play would be reduced. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, a prize winning device (variable prize for small hitting) in which a ball can be won during a small hitting game executed when the special symbol lottery result is a predetermined lottery result (small hitting). Device) 2650, and when it is detected that a ball has passed in an area (flow path) through which a ball that has won the variable winning prize device for small hit 2650 can pass, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state. And a falling gate 2650e3 (see FIG. 164) for shifting to the above is provided.

  With this configuration, as in each of the above-described embodiments, the latent state in which the small hitting game is frequently executed based on the special drawing 2 lottery (the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability In the state), it is possible to select whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol falls depending on whether or not the player fires during the small hitting game.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the operation content (opening operation pattern) of the small hit game to be executed is configured to be different depending on the type (small hit type) when the small hit is won. Depending on the opening operation pattern that is performed, the ratio of the balls that have won the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 during the small winning game passing through the falling gate 2650e3 is configured to be different.

  With this configuration, the content of the small hit game to be executed is predicted in order to prevent the special symbol high-probability state from falling down and to perform the game aiming to acquire the privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game. This allows the player to select a game.

  In addition, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, in a latent state set during a period in which one special symbol is performing a large hit change, a small hit is won in the other special symbol change (lottery). Even if a ball passes through the falling gate 2650e3, the high probability state of the special symbol does not shift to the low probability state.

  As a result, in the state in which the latent state is set, the special symbol high probability state in which the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (it is difficult to fall), and the special symbol high probability state in which the special symbol high probability state falls more easily than the advantageous latent probability state Disadvantageous state and the like can be set.

<About the structure of the game board in the fifth embodiment>
Next, a configuration of the game board 13 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the right side area of the gaming board 13 is different from the configuration of the gaming board 13 of the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 2). In addition, a point where a variable winning prize device 2650 is provided, and a prize device which is opened during a small hit game (variable winning device 2650 for a small hit) is provided upstream of the second ball entrance 640. Is different.

  Here, the configuration of the game board 13 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the right area of the game board 13, a small winning variable prize device 2650 is provided. The variable winning prize device for small hits 2650 includes a plurality of flow paths through which the winning ball flows down (a flow path for causing a high probability state of a special symbol to fall to a low probability state, and a high probability state of a special symbol to a low probability state). The winning prize ball flows down a different flow path in accordance with the timing at which the ball wins the variable winning prize device 2650 for small hits.

  The internal structure of the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 will be described with reference to FIGS. Next, the structure of the variable winning device for small hits 2650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the small winning variable winning device 2650.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the variable winning prize device 2650 for small hits is combined with the opening forming member 2650b protruding from the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 2650b to form a small hit. Base member 2650c for screwing the variable prize device 2650 to the game board 13, and an LED is lit on the back side of the base member 2650c and on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 2650c. LED substrate 2650d on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 2650e that sandwiches the LED substrate 2650d with a base member 2650c, and a small jackpot winning hole (small jackpot) formed in the opening forming member 2650b. Opening and closing unit 2650f having an opening and closing door 2650f1 for opening and closing the winning opening 2650a; A flow path cover body 2650g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 2650e to form a flow path, and switches the flow path of the game ball by projecting into the flow path formed by the back cover body 2650e and the flow path cover body 2650g. A switching member 2650h, a link member 2650i locked with the switching member 2650h, a back cover body 2650j disposed on the back side of the flow path cover body 2650g, and fixed to the back side of the back cover body 2650j. It is composed of a flow path solenoid 2650k for operating the link member 2650i, and a fixing cover 2650m for covering the flow path solenoid 2650k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 2650j with screws.

  FIG. 163 is a sectional view of the variable winning prize device 2650 for small hits. FIG. 163 (c) is a top view of the small winning variable prize apparatus 2650, and FIG. 163 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the small winning variable prize apparatus 2650 along Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 163 (b), the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 has a small winning prize opening (small winning prize opening) 2650a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The small winning opening (small winning opening) 2650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 163 (b). A bottom surface inclined downward and to the left is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 2650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 2650a1 is guided to a distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 2650e shown in FIG. 163 (b).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), the opening of the small winning prize port (small winning prize port) 2650a allows a ball to enter by an opening / closing door 2650f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism which can be protruded and retracted from the gaming board 13 side. The open state and the closed state where the ball cannot be entered (difficult to enter the ball) are changed. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 2650f1, and the ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 2650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the base member 2650c (inside the gaming board 13) so as to be retracted from the inside of the small jackpot winning opening (small jackpot winning opening) 2650a. ing.

  With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device for small hits 2650 is closed, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 2650f1 of the variable winning device for small hits 2650, and the second ball is entered. It is configured to be guided to the mouth 640 side, and during the right-handed game (during the latent state), it is possible to make the ball enter the second entrance 640 while the right-handed game is performed. This makes it possible to reduce the trouble of changing the game method to the left-handed game during the latent state where small hit games are frequently executed. Therefore, a game can be played more easily.

  In the open state, a surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the small hit variable prize winning device 2650, so that more game balls can be efficiently used for the small hit prize port (small win). (Winning prize port) 2650a. Therefore, during the small hit game, the ball can be reliably won by the small hit variable winning device 2650, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 163 (a) is a La-La sectional view shown in FIG. 163 (b). As shown in FIG. 163 (a), the magnetic sensor 2650c1 having the detection port 2650a1 is fixed to the base member 2650c so that the detection port 2650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 2650e.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a configuration in which the sphere guided to the distribution channel of the back cover body 2650e is distributed to a normal discharge channel 2650e1 and a special discharge channel 2650e2 described below.

  FIG. 164 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 2650e showing a state in which the switching member 2650h has been operated so that the ball is distributed to the special discharge channel 2650e2. As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted, and a guiding piece 2650h2 for guiding the ball. It is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover 2650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 2650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 2650h is rotated into the distribution channel from the back side of the flow path cover 2650g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the sphere guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 2650h2 disposed diagonally below left and guided to the special discharge channel 2650e2. . The special discharge flow path 2650e2 flows down a falling route through which the inflowing ball passes through a fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3, and a second normal discharge flow path 2650e5 branched from the special discharge flow path 2650e2. 2 normal switch) 2650e6, and a fall switch 2650e3 or a second normal switch 2650e6 that can detect the passage of a sphere flowing into the special discharge channel 2650e2. It is detected and then discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned falling switch 2650e3 detects a ball during the small hitting game, that is, when the ball passes the falling route, a special symbol is displayed. Is configured to transition (fall) to the low probability state. That is, the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for shifting the special symbol from the high probability state to the low probability state. Further, the switching member 2650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 2650e2) or a flow path that can pass through a falling gate (falling switch) 2650e3 as a flow path of a ball that has won the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 during a small hit. This is for setting any one of the flow paths (normal discharge flow path 2650e1) that cannot (difficultly) pass through the gate (falling switch) 2650e3, and is set by turning on the flow path solenoid 2650k. The flow path is switched so that the ball that has won the small prize variable winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 164 (a)).

  In the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment, the channel solenoid 2650k is set to off during a normal game, and the ball that has won the small winning variable prize device 2650 has the special discharge channel 2650e2. It is configured to flow down. Therefore, even when the small hitting game is not being executed, if an illegal state where the opening / closing door 2650f1 of the small hitting variable prize device 2650 is opened and the ball is won is detected, the illegally winning ball is dropped. It is configured to pass through 2650e3.

  In this manner, the state in which the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to off is set to a state that is maintained for a long time in the pachinko machine 10, and further, the flow path configuration disadvantageous to the player (the variable winning prize apparatus 2650 for small hits). By adopting a flow path configuration in which a winning ball can pass through the falling switch 2650e3), the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed, and a penalty can be imposed on a game in which an illegal game is played.

  In this manner, it is determined whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is ended by the flowing route in which the ball that has won the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 flows down during the small hitting game. Can enhance the interest of the elderly. It should be noted that passing through the entrance of the special discharge flow passage 2650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 2650h2 of the switching member 2650h) from the small winning prize port (small winning prize port) 2650a of the small prize variable prize apparatus 2650. The required time consists of at least one second.

  At the end of the normal discharge channel 2650e1, a discharge confirmation switch (normal switch) 2650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided. Thus, it is possible to determine whether all the winning balls have been ejected into the small winning variable prize device 2650 based on the total number of detected balls of the normal switch 2650e4, the second falling switch 2650e6, and the falling switch 2650e3. That is, the number of balls detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1 (the number of balls winning the variable winning device for small hits 2650) and various switches (normal switch 2650e4, second falling switch 2650e6, falling switch) provided in the three discharge areas. 2650e3) is compared with the number of balls detected (the number of balls ejected from the small winning variable prize device 2650) to determine whether or not the ball remains in the small winning variable prize device 2650. can do.

  In addition, the end timing of the small hitting game (the end condition of the small hitting game (when a predetermined number (10) of prizes are won in the variable winning prize device 2650 for small hitting, or when the opening scenario of the variable prize winning device 2650 for small hitting is changed) At the timing when the small hit ending period executed after the completion of the small hitting ending period is completed), if all of the game balls that have entered the small hitting variable prize winning device 2650 are not discharged, the small hitting variable It is preferable to determine the abnormality inside the winning device 2650, notify the abnormality to the outside, or stop the game so that the big hit game or the normal game is not started. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game progresses in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10, and a secondary abnormality can be prevented from occurring.

  As described above, the ball that has won the small winning prize port (small winning prize port) 2650a of the small prize variable prize device 2650 is detected by the ball prize switch 2650c1, and based on the detected ball, the prize ball (book In the embodiment, ten prize balls are paid out for one ball prize, and whether the ball passes the fall switch 2650e3 using the detected ball (passed the ball prize switch 2650c1). By being configured to be able to sort whether or not the special symbol high probability state ends during the small hit game, it can be determined. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated area for shifting the special symbol high-probability state to the low-probability state separately from the small hit variable winning device 2650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Next, the flow of a game in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. First, with reference to FIG. 165, a description will be given of a flow of a game when a jackpot of a first special symbol (special figure 1) is won in a state where a probable change state is set as a game state. FIG. 165 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 big hit is won in the probable change state.

  As shown in FIG. 165, in the fifth embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special drawing 1 in the state where the probable change state is set as in the fourth embodiment described above, the latent The state is configured to be set (see FIG. 165 (a)). Then, during the period in which the latent state is set (during the change of the special figure 1 big hit), the small hitting game is performed by performing the right-handed game to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (the special figure 2). Frequently executed latent state games (RUSH games) are configured to be executed.

  Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, the special symbol 1) (the jackpot is won by lottery of the special symbol, and the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result). ) Is configured so that a jackpot is not won in the lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special figure 2). Thereby, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special figure 1), a jackpot is won by lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special figure 2), and it is based on the jackpot winning of the other special symbol. By starting the big hit game, it is possible to suppress a period in which the latent state is set from being shortened. That is, in the fifth embodiment, when the latent state is set, the latent state game (RUSH game) is surely performed during the preset latent state setting period (for example, the jackpot fluctuation time in Toku-zu). ) Can be executed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one of the special symbols (for example, the special symbol 1) (after the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery) In the period until the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result), even if the ball passes through the fall switch 2650e3 in the variable winning device for small hits 2650, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state. And a period in which the transition does not occur (falling invalid period).

  Therefore, if the latent state is set during the change of the special figure 1 that has won the jackpot, the special figure 1 fluctuation period is the fall invalid period, and the high probability state of the special symbol ends. It is possible to execute the latent state game (RUSH game) without worrying about this. It should be noted that, although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the latent state is set based on the jackpot winning in the special figure 1 (the latent state is set based on the establishment of the first latent transition condition). Is performed), and it is determined whether or not to execute an invincible effect (see FIG. 169) that informs the player.

  By configuring to execute this invincible effect (see FIG. 169), it is possible to easily recognize that the fall ineffective period is set in the currently set latent state, so that the player It is possible to perform a latent state game (RUSH game) with peace of mind. Further, in the fifth embodiment, even in the latent state in which the fall invalid period is set, the above-described invincible effect may not be executed. With such a configuration, in the latent state game in which the invincible effect (see FIG. 169) is not executed, the fall invalidation period may actually be set, so that the ball is reduced during the small hit game. When the winning variable prize device 2650 wins, the falling rate can be reduced.

  Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation elapses (see FIG. 165 (b)), the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state. If the small hit game is not executed at this timing, the big hit game is started. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165, when the small hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit change elapses, the start of the big hit game is postponed until the small hit game ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a big hit game is started during execution of the small hit game, thereby providing a game that is difficult for the player to understand.

  The same playing state (normal state) as during the big hit game is set for the interruption period from the elapse of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit change shown in FIG. 165 to the start of the big hit game. In the fifth embodiment, if the small hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit change elapses, the start of the big hit game is interrupted until the small hit game ends (postponed) ), But it may be controlled so that the small hit game and the big hit game are not executed at the same time. For example, the small hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit change elapses. In such a case, the small hit game being executed may be forcibly terminated.

  In addition, although detailed description is omitted in the drawings, in this embodiment, as in each of the above-described embodiments, a small hit is won in one special symbol (special figure 2), and a small hit game is executed. During this period, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the latent state (advantageous latent probability state) set based on the jackpot winning in the special figure 1 is set as the falling invalid period, the special symbol is provided to the player. It is possible to entertain the latent state game (RUSH game) without having to worry that the high probability state ends. Further, the small hit game started during the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed to the end.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 166, a description will be given of the flow of a game when a predetermined number of time savings is exhausted in a state in which the probable change state is set as the game state. FIG. 166 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when all the time savings are exhausted during the probable change state.

  As shown in FIG. 166, in the fifth embodiment, since the reduction of the number of time savings is performed at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the value of the counter (hours saving counter 203f) for continuously setting the time savings state is reduced. When it becomes 0, the latent state is set from the executed special figure 1 fluctuation (see FIG. 166 (a)). As shown in FIG. 166, the latent state set by exhausting the predetermined number of working hours is configured so that the drop lottery during the latent state period is effectively determined. Therefore, in the small hitting game executed during the latent state game (RUSH), the ball won by the variable winning device (variable winning device for small hitting 2650) may end the high probability state of the special symbol. There is a certain disadvantage potential state.

<Production contents performed in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, description will be made on the characteristic effect contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment. In addition, the mode of the effect performed during the probable change state in order to indicate whether or not the latent state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the effect described in each embodiment described above. Since this is the same as the embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 167 (a), a description will be given of the effect contents displayed when a small hit is won in a state where the latent state is set. FIG. 167 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents when a small hit is won in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167 (a), in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, a display mode indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in a variable manner is displayed, and in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. Indicates a display mode ("341") indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) has won a small hit. In the guidance display area Dm3, "right-handed" for guiding the game method in the latent state is displayed.

  The main display area Dm is displayed in a display mode for notifying that the character 811 has won a small hit, and the character “GET” is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment that "small win game starts" indicating that a small win game is started is displayed.

  When the small hit game is started, the display screen of FIG. 167 (b) is displayed. FIG. 167 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents during the small hit game. According to the diagram shown in FIG. 167 (b), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 has the same display mode as that of FIG. 167 (a) described above, that is, a display indicating that the special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner. Although the mode is displayed, actually, during the small hit game, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted. Note that, unlike the display mode shown in FIG. 167 (b), the state in which the special figure 1 is appropriately fluctuating (the state in which the fluctuation time is subtracted) and the state in which the fluctuating display of the special figure 1 is interrupted The display mode displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm <b> 1 may be different from the state in which the change is performed (the state in which the fluctuation time is not subtracted).

  Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect mode in which the character 811 sprints from the left to the right and the treasure chest 812 appears from the traveling direction is displayed. In the present embodiment, during the small hit game, an effect of opening the treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the display mode of the effect symbol 813 appearing from the treasure box 812 changes the current small event. The result of the winning game is configured to be notified to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 168 (a) and FIG. 168 (b), display contents for showing the game result of the small hit game in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 168 (a) shows the display contents when the falling switch 2650e3 detects a ball as a result of causing the variable winning device for small hitting 2650 to win a ball during the small hitting game and the special symbol high probability state ends. FIG. 168 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example. FIG. 168 (b) shows the display content when the falling switch 2650e3 does not detect a ball as a result of causing the variable winning device for small hitting 2650 to win a ball during a small hit game. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the above.

  FIG. 168 (a) shows that the effect symbol 813 indicating the "cross" is displayed from the treasure chest 812, and that the character 811 has shifted from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state during the small hitting game. It is displayed in the failure display mode shown. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment indicating that the latent state game (RUSH game) is completed and the game method returns to the left-handed game is displayed. In other words, during the latent state in which the RUSH game is performed (the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol), the game state is changed to the low probability state by shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state. In order to shift from the state to the normal state (a special symbol low probability state, a normal symbol low probability state), a comment for executing the left-handed game is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 168 (b), a staging pattern 813 indicating “V” is displayed from the treasure chest 812, and a display mode for informing the player that the RUSH game is continuously executed (that is, the display mode (that is, the left The character 811 is displayed in a display mode in which the character 811 runs to the right.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect corresponding to the game result during the small hit game executed during the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed by the third symbol display device 81, The player can easily grasp the progress of the latent state game (RUSH game) only by grasping the contents of the effect performed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the ball that has won the small hit variable prize device 2650 during the small hit game is changed to the positive change switch 2650e3 according to the type of the small hit game executed during the latent state game (RUSH game). Are different from each other in the ratio (possibility) of flowing down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 provided with.

  Therefore, for example, on the display screen at the time of the small hit winning shown in FIG. 167 (a), the player selects whether or not to make the small winning variable prize device 2650 win a ball in the current small hit game. A comment (for example, "RUSH ends with bad luck due to small wins", "stop launching when uneasy") is displayed, and a character displayed at the time of winning a small win The display mode of 811 may be configured to be variable depending on whether or not the small hit type that has been won this time is a small hit in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is easily ended.

  With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to select whether or not to make the small winning variable prize device 2650 win a ball during the small hitting game. Further, in the fifth embodiment in which the latent state is set only for a predetermined period (special figure 1 fluctuation time), the number of small hit games that can be executed during the latent state is limited. , A game can be performed while considering whether to obtain a privilege (prize ball) during a small hit game or to avoid the end of a latent state game (RUSH game). Sex can be provided.

  Further, according to the display mode of the treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen during the small hitting game shown in FIG. 167 (b), the type of the small hitting game being executed is notified to the player. For example, for example, it is preferable that the smaller the hit type being executed is the smaller hit type in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is easily ended, the older and tattered treasure chest 812 is displayed. It is preferable to display a comment corresponding to the display mode of the treasure box 812. Further, the display mode displayed during the small hit game is more specific than the content suggesting the small hit type (RUSH game continuation expectation degree) which has been won this time to the player when the small hit is won. It is preferable to inform the player of the contents (with high reliability).

  With this configuration, the player who has selected whether or not to allow the variable hitting prize device 2650 to win a ball in the current small hitting game based on the display screen displayed at the time of the small hitting winning is Since it is possible to indicate a more specific RUSH continuation expectation degree, the player himself / herself can be predicted whether or not the selected game content is correct.

  In this case, in particular, it is emphasized that the player who has chosen not to win the ball in the variable winning device for small hits 2650 is a small hit type in which the RUSH game is difficult to end even if the ball is won. It should be configured to be able to notify. Specifically, a small hit type discriminating means for discriminating the type of the small hit game this time, and whether or not the ball has won the small hit variable prize winning device 2650 during a predetermined period from the start of the small hit game. (Or a means for determining that a right-handed game has been executed after a small hit is won), and the result of the determination by the small hit type determining means is a small hit type in which the RUSH game is difficult to end. In this case, if it is determined that the ball has not won the small hit variable prize winning device 2650 during a predetermined period after the small hit game is started, it is more advantageous to fire the ball in the present small hit game. It is preferable to provide a display means for displaying a fantastic comment (for example, "should have fired a ball", "weakling") indicating that the game has been obtained.

  As a result, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the player has lost the ball by not allowing the variable winning prize device 2650 to win the ball. The variable winning device 2650 can be prompted to win the ball. In other words, if the RUSH game is ended by causing the variable winning prize device for small hits 2650 to win a ball, it is determined that the current selection has failed based on the game result even if the fanning by the effect is not performed. Although the player can be aware, the player who has made a selection not to win the ball in the variable winning device for small hits 2650 cannot be aware whether or not the result of this selection is advantageous. Is displayed, the player can easily understand whether or not the current selection is successful.

  Furthermore, a display mode for notifying a player who has selected not to win a ball to the variable winning device for small hits 2650 that the current small hit type is a small hit type in which the RUSH game is likely to be completed. (E.g., "Stop firing and have a good answer", "I feel good") may be displayed, and even if the small hit type this time is a small hit type in which the RUSH game is likely to end, The small hit game may display a fantastic comment (for example, "should have fired a ball", "wimpy") indicating that the person who fired the ball gained the privilege.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the display contents of the effect for notifying that the vehicle is in a latent state (advantageous latent probability state) in which the falling invalid period is set will be described. FIG. 169 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of display contents displayed at the end of the small hit in the advantageous latent probability state. As shown in FIG. 169, when the currently set latent state is the advantageous latent state in which the falling invalid period is set, the same latent mode setting processing as in the above-described fourth embodiment (FIG. 154) When the invincibility mode is set as the current latent mode in S4451), an effect mode (“invincible mode”) indicating that the currently set latent state for the player is the advantageous latent state. Is displayed.

  When entering the invincible mode, the display mode of the character 811 becomes a display mode dedicated to the invincible mode (a display mode in which an aura is surrounded around the mode). Then, “Lucky point × 0” is displayed as the cumulative display mode 819 with the number of balls passing through the fall gate 2650e3 during the invincible mode. The accumulated display mode 819 corresponds to a command indicating the number of balls detected by the falling switch 2650e3 output from the main control device 110 (or a command indicating the number of times of falling if the falling invalid period is not set). Numbers are displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily inform the player of the situation in which the invincible mode worked favorably for the player.

  Although not shown in FIG. 169, the small hit count display 825 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the above-described fourth embodiment may be displayed. And the cumulative display mode 819 may be displayed together. In addition, a non-game number measuring means for counting the number of small hit games in which the player does not win the ball in the small hit variable winning device 2650, and the number of times measured by the non-game number counting means are displayed on the display means. May be configured.

  With this configuration, for example, for all the small hit games executed during the latent state game (RUSH game), the number of small hit games in which the player executes the game and the player Since the number of small hit games that have not been executed can be easily grasped, it can be used as a reference for future RUSH games.

<Electrical Configuration of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 170, the ROM 202 of the fifth embodiment differs from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment in that a small hit type selection 5 table 202da is provided instead of the small hit type selection table 202e. The difference is that an operation scenario storage area 202db is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 5 table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 5 table 202da. The fifth embodiment is configured such that only the second special symbol (special figure 2) wins the small hit. If the small hit is won by the lottery of the special figure 2, the small hit type selection five table The small hit type is selected with reference to 202da.

  In the small hit type selection 5 table 202da, the corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of the value of the small hit type counter C5, and as shown in FIG. 171 (a), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is set. Is defined in association with “small hit A” in the range of “0 to 14”. The "small hit A" is a small hit type in which the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state for 1.5 seconds after the opening period of 1.5 seconds elapses during the small hit game. After the open state for 1.5 seconds has elapsed, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set. Since the ending period is the same for all small hit types, FIG. Omitted.

  In addition, "small hit B" is associated with the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "15 to 59". This "small hit B" is set after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state for 0.1 second (first open setting) after the elapse of the opening period 0.5 second during the small hit game. This is a small hit type for setting an open state for 1.4 seconds (second open setting) after an interval of 1 second. After the second release setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

  “Small hit C” is associated with the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of “60 to 79”. The “small hit C” is set after the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state for 0.5 second (first open setting) after the opening period of 0.1 second elapses during the small hit game. This is a small hit type in which an open state for 0.1 second is set (second open setting) after an interval of 1 second. After the second release setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

  “Small hit D” is associated with the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of “80 to 99”. This "small hit D" is set after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state for 0.5 second (first open setting) after the opening period of 0.1 second elapses during the small hit game. , A small hit type for setting an open state for one second (second open setting) after an interval of 0.3 second. After the second release setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

  The operation scenario storage area 202db is a data area in which an operation scenario of the flow path solenoid 2650h during the small hitting game is stored in advance, and the flow path solenoid 2650h performs the same operation regardless of the type of the small hitting executed. One operation scenario is set to execute.

  Here, the contents of the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 202db will be described with reference to FIG. 171 (b). FIG. 171 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario defined in the operation scenario storage area 202db. As shown in FIG. 171 (b), the operation scenario set in accordance with the start timing of the small hit game is defined in the operation scenario storage area 202db.

  Specifically, it is defined that the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to be turned off until 1.4 seconds elapse from the small hit start timing, and from 1.4 seconds after the small hit start to the end of the small hit. , The flow path solenoid 2650h is set to ON. An operation scenario in which the operation content of the flow path solenoid 2650h is defined is a loop counter in which a value is incremented by one every time main processing of the main control device 110 is executed every 4 milliseconds. It is managed by a counter (not shown).

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, whether or not a ball that has won the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge channel 2650e2 is determined by a selected small hitting type and a channel solenoid. It is configured to be variably set according to the operation scenario of 2650h. Furthermore, the ball that has flowed down the special discharge channel 2650e2 is branched into a ball that passes through the falling gate 2650e3 and a ball that does not pass (the second normal switch 2650e6) by the internal structure of the variable winning device 2650 for small hits. It is composed.

  Specifically, in the small hitting game in which “small hitting A” is set as the small hitting type, the opening period (1.5 seconds) corresponds to the period in which the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to off (1 from the start of the small hitting). .4 seconds), the ball does not pass through the falling route, and the small hit game most advantageous to the player whose opening period is set long is executed.

  In the small hit game in which “small hit B” to “small hit D” is set as the small hit type, the first opening period is the timing at which the winning ball can pass through the falling route. Further, the opening period of “small hit C” and “small hit D” is as short as 0.1 second (shorter than “small hit B”), and Since the first open period is 0.5 seconds long (because it is longer than "small hit B"), a small hit game in which the ball easily passes through the falling route is provided.

  In addition, the “small hit C” is the shortest time period in which the first attacker (first variable winning device) 65 is opened in one opening operation, which is 0.6 seconds, which is the smallest disadvantage for the player. It becomes a winning game. In the fifth embodiment, it takes about 0.5 seconds until the ball fired by the right-handed game wins the variable hitting prize device 2650 and reaches the distribution channel distributed by the channel solenoid 2650h. The special symbol design period at the time of winning a small win is 0.5 seconds.

  Therefore, immediately after the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 167 (a)), the right hitting game is stopped to start the small hitting game. At this point, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball shot before stopping the right-handed game wins the small hit variable winning device 2650.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 172, the RAM 203 of the fifth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment in that a small hit prize counter 203da, a fall passage counter 203db, and a passage flag 203dc are added. are doing. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The small hit prize counter 203da is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the small prize variable prize device 2650 during the small hit game. In the small hit entrance passage process (see S171 in FIG. 174), the ball passing is performed. If the timing at which the sensor (ball detection switch 2650c1) is determined to be on is determined to be during the opening period of the winning port for small hits 2650a (S3302 in FIG. 174: Yes), the value is incremented by 1 and Is set (S3305 in FIG. 174). Then, in the small hit control process 5 (see S2271 in FIG. 176), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit game (S2511 in FIG. 176: Yes), the value of the counter is cleared (FIG. 176). S2571).

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in the fifth embodiment, based on the winning number command set corresponding to the value of the small hit winning counter 203da, the sound lamp control device 113 keeps the latent state in the sound lamp control device 113 side. During the set period, the number of balls won in the variable winning device for small hits 2650 is accumulated. Thus, the number of winning balls in one latent state game (RUSH game) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, as described above, during the small hitting game, the player has a game property for selecting whether or not to make the ball win the small hitting variable prize winning device 2650. Depending on the selection content of the player, the accumulated value of the number of balls won by the small hit variable prize device 2650 may greatly differ even for the same small hitting game number. Therefore, a detailed game result can be provided by displaying the number of winning balls on the variable winning device for small hits 2650 instead of the number of times the small hit game is executed.

  It should be noted that both the number of balls that have won the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 described above and the number of times the small hitting game has been executed are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or a single small hitting game has been won. The average value of the number of balls may be displayed, or the number of winnings may be displayed as a winning history for each small hitting type of the executed small hitting game.

  The fall passage counter 203db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the fall gate 2650e3 during the small hit game, and the fall switch 2650e3 detects a ball in the fall gate passage process (see S172 in FIG. 175). In this case (S3402 in FIG. 175: Yes), the value is incremented by 1 (S3403 in FIG. 175), and the pass number command is set with information corresponding to the value after the addition (S3404 in FIG. 175). Then, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hitting game (S2511: Yes in FIG. 176), the value of the counter is cleared (S2571 in FIG. 176).

  In the present embodiment, when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, that is, when the advantageous latent state is set, the number of balls that have passed the falling route is always counted. . As a result, when the “invincible mode” is set as the latent mode, the route passes through a route (falling route) where the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state when there is no advantageous latent state The number of balls played can be notified to the player (see the cumulative display mode 819 in FIG. 169).

  The passing flag 203dc indicates that the falling switch 2650e3 has detected a ball when the falling switch 2650e3 has effectively detected that a ball has been detected (when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to off). The flag is set to ON to indicate that the falling switch 2650e3 has detected a ball.

  This passage flag 203dc is determined when the ball has passed the fall gate 2650e3 and the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to off in the fall gate passage process (see S172 in FIG. 175) (S3405 in FIG. 175). : No) Set to ON. Then, when the passage flag 203dc is set to ON, the process of determining whether or not a new ball has passed the fall gate 2650e3 in the fall gate passage process (see S172 in FIG. 175) is skipped. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process for falling down the high probability state of the special symbol is executed a plurality of times during one small hitting game.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 173, the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment in that a winning number counter 223da and a passing number counter 223db are provided. And are the same in other points. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The winning number counter 223da is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the variable winning device for small hits 2650 during the small hitting game. In the ball passing related processing (see S4582 in FIG. 179), the main control device 110 When it is determined that the winning number command has been received from the user (S8101: Yes in FIG. 179), the value is incremented by one, and information corresponding to the value after the addition is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for display. A number command is set (see S8106 in FIG. 179).

  Then, when the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, the value of the counter is cleared. In other words, once the latent state is set, the winning number counter 223da displays the ball that has won the small winning variable prize device 2650 in a plurality of small winning games executed until the latent state ends. It is configured so that the number can be accumulated and measured.

  The pass number counter 223db is a counter for measuring the number of balls passing through the fall gate 2650e3, and determines that a pass number command has been received from the main controller 110 in the ball pass related processing (see S4582 in FIG. 179). In this case (S8107 in FIG. 179: Yes), the value is incremented by 1 when the current latent state is the advantageous latent state (see S8110 in FIG. 179).

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the above-described first embodiment in that a small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 55) is performed. (See FIG. 176) is different from the small hit entrance passing process (see FIG. 174) and the falling gate passing process (see FIG. 175). Otherwise, the same processing is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 174, a small hit entrance passage process (S171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit entrance passage process (S171).

  In the small hit entrance passage process (S171), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passage sensor is on (S3301). When it is determined that the ball passage sensor is not on (S3301: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball passing sensor is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is during the opening period of the winning hole for small hits (S3302). If it is determined that it is during the opening period of the winning port for small hits (S3302: Yes), a small hit entry pass command is set (S3303). The small-pass entrance entrance command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the sound ramp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. Sent. One is added to the value of the small hit prize counter 203da (S3304). Next, in the processing of S3304, a winning number command is set based on the value of the small hit winning counter 203da after the addition (S3305), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, when it is determined that the small winning opening is not in the open period (S3302: No), an error command is set (S3306), and the flow path solenoid is turned off (S3307). Then, the present process ends.

  Next, a fall gate passing process (S172) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the content of the fall gate passing process (S172).

  In the fall gate passing process (S172), first, it is determined whether or not the passing flag 203dc is on (S3401). If it is determined that the passage flag 203dc is on (S3401: Yes), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the passage flag 203dc is not on (S3401: No), it is determined whether or not the fall gate has passed (S3402). If it is determined that there is no passage through the fall gate (S3402: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a passage at the fall gate (S3402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fall passage counter 203db (S3403), and the number of passages is determined based on the value of the fall passage counter 203db after the addition. The command is set (S3404). Next, it is determined whether the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405). If it is determined that the status update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405: Yes), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state update restriction flag is not on (S3405: No), it is determined whether or not the fall gate passage valid period is in progress (S3406). If it is determined that it is during the fall gate pass valid period (S3406: Yes), the probability change flag 203g is set to off (S3407), and the pass flag 203dc is set to on (S3408). Next, a fall command is set (S3409), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3406, if it is determined that it is not during the falling gate passage valid period (S3406: No), an error command is set (S3410), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 176, the small hit control process 5 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit control process 5 (S2271). The small hit control process 5 (S2271) is different from the small hit control process (S2205) in the above-described first embodiment when it is determined in the process of S2511 that it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S2511: No). The difference is that the values of the small hit prize counter 203da and the fall pass counter 203db are cleared (S2571), and the pass flag 203dc is set to off (S2572). The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179. The control process of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment is different from the control process of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment in that a status command process is performed instead of the status command process (see FIG. 62). 5 (see FIG. 177), a hit-related process 5 (see FIG. 178) is executed instead of the hit-related process (see FIG. 63), and the ball passing-related process (see FIG. 179) is different. Is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the state command processing 5 (S4291) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of state command processing 5 (S4291). State command processing 5 (S4291) is the same as state command processing 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment described above, after executing the processing of S4411, and then replacing the processing of S4454 with the winning number counter 223da and the passing number counter 223db. Is added in that a process (S4471) for clearing is added. The other processes are the same as the status command process 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the hit-related process 5 (S4292) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the content of the hit-related process 5 (S4292). The hit-related process 5 (S4292) is different from the hit-related process (S4216) in the above-described fourth embodiment in that a process related to ball passing is added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description will be omitted.

  In the hit-related processing 5 (S4292), when it is determined in the processing of S4505 that the prize-ball command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S4505: No), it is determined whether or not a ball-passing-related command has been received. (S4581). If it is determined that the ball passing related command has been received (S4581: Yes), the ball passing related process (S4582) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball passing related command has not been received (S4581: No), the present process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the ball passing-related process (S4582), which is one of the hit-related processes 5 (S4292) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the details of the ball passing related processing (S4582).

  In the ball passing-related process (S4582), first, it is determined whether or not a winning number command has been received from the main controller 110 this time (S8101). If it is determined that the winning number command has been received (S8101: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 223da (S8102), and the reading of the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cb is performed. It is executed (S8103). Next, it is determined whether the latent mode read in the process of S8103 is the invincible mode (S8104). If it is determined that the mode is not the invincible mode (S8104: No), a suggestive effect indicating the end of the latent state is set (S8105), a winning number command for display is set (S8106), and this processing is ended. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8104 that the read-out latent mode is the invincible mode (S8104: Yes), the process of S8105 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S8106.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8101 that the winning number command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S8101: No), it is determined whether or not the passing number command has been received (S8107). If it is determined that the pass number command has been received (S8107: Yes), the value stored in the state setting area 223j is read (S8108). Next, in the process of S8108, it is determined whether or not the read value is a value indicating the time saving missing latency (S8109). If it is determined that the read value is not a value indicating the time saving missing latency (S8109: No), 1 is added to the value of the passage number counter 223db (S8110). On the other hand, in the process of S8109, if it is determined that the read value is not the value indicating the time saving latency probability (S8109: Yes), the process of S8110 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S8111.

  Next, the reading of the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cb is executed (S8111). Next, it is determined whether the latent mode read in the process of S8111 is the invincible mode (S8112). If it is determined that the mode is not the invincible mode (S8112: No), a suggestive effect indicating the end of the latent state is set (S8113), a display pass number command is set (S8114), and the process ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8112 that the read-out latent mode is the invincible mode (S8112: Yes), the process of S8113 is skipped, the process of S8114 is executed, and the present process ends.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the operation content (opening operation pattern) of the small hit game to be executed differs according to the type (small hit type) when the small hit is won. According to the opening operation pattern to be executed, the ratio of the balls that have won the small hitting variable prize device 2650 during the small hitting game passing through the fall gate 2650e3 is different.

  With this configuration, the content of the small hit game to be executed is predicted in order to prevent the special symbol high-probability state from falling down and to perform the game aiming to acquire the privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game. This allows the player to select a game.

  In addition, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, in a latent state set during a period in which one special symbol is performing a large hit change, a small hit is won in the other special symbol change (lottery). Even if a ball passes through the falling gate 2650e3, the high probability state of the special symbol does not shift to the low probability state.

  As a result, in the state in which the latent state is set, the special symbol high probability state in which the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (it is difficult to fall), and the special symbol high probability state in which the special symbol high probability state falls more easily than the advantageous latent probability state Disadvantageous state and the like can be set.

  In the above embodiments, the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f (the process of subtracting the number of time savings) is performed at the timing of starting the change of the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol change start process (see S208 in FIG. 33)). ), The variation of the first special symbol (lottery) and the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) can be executed simultaneously by a predetermined number of times. The time saving game (a game in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set) is configured to be executed. For example, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 100 (when the number of time savings is set to 100) ), There is a problem that the period from the start of the 100th special symbol change to the start of the 101st special symbol change is in a non-time saving state (low probability state of a normal symbol). Was Tsu.

  During the period in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the lottery (fluctuation) which is advantageous to the player can be executed even in the lottery (fluctuation) of the ordinary symbol different from the special symbol, The period from the start of the 100th special symbol change to the start of the 101st special symbol change, that is, the period from the execution of the special symbol change for the number of times exceeding a predetermined number of time savings In this case, there is a problem that the non-time saving state is set, thereby giving a player an unpleasant feeling.

  However, if the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f (the process of subtracting the number of time savings) is configured to be updated at the timing when the special symbol change display ends (timing when the symbol determination period ends), In a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the change of the first special symbol (lottery) and the change of the second special symbol (lottery), the special symbol change (lottery) of a predetermined number of times reduced is set to the time reduction state. There is a problem that it is executed in the state where it is performed.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, a time-saving termination condition is applied to a special symbol (for example, a first special symbol) corresponding to a special symbol lottery (100th time-saving) executed when the value of the time-saving counter 203f becomes 0. (1st time reduction end condition) is set, the time reduction end condition (second time reduction end condition) is set for the other special symbol (for example, the second special symbol), and the two set time reduction end conditions are set. Of these, the time saving state may be ended based on the time saving end condition established earlier.

  Specifically, when a predetermined period (for example, 100 time savings) is set as a period in which the time saving state is set, the special symbol change corresponding to the final change of the time saving state (for example, the 100th time saving time) ends. The first time-saving ending condition that is satisfied by this and the second time-saving ending condition that is satisfied when a condition to start a new special symbol change (for example, the 101st special symbol change) that is newly executed after a predetermined period has elapsed is satisfied. When the first time reduction end condition is satisfied first, that is, the 100th special symbol change period (or the symbol confirmation period) is completed before the 101st special symbol change is started. In such a case, the time reduction state is terminated at that time.

  On the other hand, if the second time reduction end condition is satisfied before the first time reduction end condition is satisfied, that is, before the 100th special symbol change period (or symbol confirmation period) ends (special time period). If the start condition of the 101st special symbol change is satisfied during the symbol change, the time saving state may be ended at a time before the 101st special symbol lottery is executed.

  With this configuration, in a state where the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the maximum symbol period is prevented while preventing the special symbol change (lottery) being performed a predetermined number of times or more. It can be set as a time saving state. Therefore, the state advantageous to the player can be set as long as possible as the normal symbol lottery (fluctuation).

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, there is a probability change counter 203aa for measuring a period in which the special symbol high-probability state is set, and a time-saving counter 203f for measuring the period in which the normal symbol high-probability state is set. Although the value of each counter is decremented and interrupted, in each of the above embodiments, the time reduction counter is replaced with the process of interrupting the decrement of the probable variable counter 203aa (the process of interrupting (skipping) the measurement). Processing for interrupting the subtraction of 203f may be applied, or the opposite processing may be executed.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described second embodiment, the so-called simultaneous variation type pachinko machine 10 is capable of executing the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol at the same time. The game state is configured to be variable during a symbol determination period (a period in which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) for displaying a special symbol lottery result. In other words, when a win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the state where the probability change state is set, the start timing of the symbol determination period in which the lottery result is displayed (the first symbol showing the big hit) At the timing when the game is stopped), the game state is shifted from the probable state to the latent state.

  With this configuration, during the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 (the period from when the first symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed until the big hit game is executed), the second special symbol in the latent state is set. (Tokuzu 2) The game can be executed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment described above, the jackpot game and the lottery game of the special symbol are performed at the same time, so that a situation in which the player cannot concentrate on the jackpot game is suppressed. Is executed (from the time when the jackpot game opening period is set to the time when the jackpot game ending period ends), the special symbol change (lottery) is not executed. In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, since the special symbol lottery (change) is not executed during the big hit game, the player can concentrate on the big hit game. However, since the special symbol lottery (variation) is not performed in all periods during the jackpot game, the period for executing the special symbol lottery is limited, and the game efficiency (the number of special symbol lottery executed per unit time) is reduced. There was a problem of doing it.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, even during the period from the execution of the jackpot game to the start of the round game (opening period of the jackpot game), the special symbol change on the side not winning the jackpot does not occur. It is configured to be executed. Specifically, for example, when a jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol and a jackpot game corresponding to the won jackpot is started (when an opening period of the jackpot game is set), during the opening period , A lottery (change) of the second special symbol is executed.

  In other words, even during the jackpot game, the round game in which the ball can enter by the jackpot game (the period during which the first variable prize device 65 or the second variable prize device 650 is in the open state in which the ball can easily enter the ball) In a period other than the game, for example, an opening period, an interval period, and an ending period, the special symbol lottery can be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the jackpot game during the round game in the jackpot game and to pay attention to the special symbol change during the other periods, so that an efficient game can be provided to the player.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, a configuration is made such that a jackpot is not won in a special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game. Thus, it is possible to suppress providing an excessive jackpot game to the player. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is off (other than the big hit), a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be won for the small hit that can be given to the player. ing. Therefore, the player can watch the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the big hit game.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the probability of winning a small hit is made different. Therefore, the degree of advantage between the second special symbol lottery executed during the first special symbol jackpot game and the first special symbol lottery executed during the second special symbol jackpot game can be made different.

<Electrical Configuration in Sixth Embodiment>
Here, the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 180 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 180, the ROM 202 according to the sixth embodiment differs from the ROM 202 according to the second embodiment in that an open scenario table 202ea is added, and the other elements are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The open scenario table 202ea is a data table in which game contents during a big hit game or a small hit game (hereinafter, referred to as a hit game) are stored, and a scenario of the hit game to be executed depends on the hit type. It is remembered. Specifically, the length of the period (opening period) from the start of the winning game to the start of the first round game, the length of the round game period, and the variable prize that is opened in the round game The type of the device, the number of times the round game is executed, the length between round games (interval period), and the length of the ending period set after all round games are completed are stored.

  Note that the information (winning game content) read out to execute the winning game corresponding to the winning big hit or the small hit may be determined in advance, and using the open scenario table 202ea as in the present embodiment. The information may be stored, or the method used in each of the above embodiments may be adopted.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of main controller 110 RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 181, the RAM 203 of the sixth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the second embodiment in that the big hit state flag 203ea, the small hit state flag 203eb, the special figure variable flag 203ec, and the big hit stop flag 203ed And a special figure change prohibition flag 203ee is added.

  The jackpot status flag 203ea is for indicating the state of the jackpot game, and the type of the special symbol that has won the jackpot and the current jackpot game status (during the opening period, during the round game, during the interval period, during the ending period) This flag is referred to when it is determined which of the two is middle. Here, the content of the big hit state flag 203ea will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (a). FIG. 182 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit state flag 203ea. As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the big hit state flag 203ea is configured by a 1-byte storage area, and is configured to be able to specify the gaming state by the state of the lower 4 bits.

  Specifically, the special symbol that has won the jackpot this time is the first special symbol (special figure 1), and during the opening period (OP) of the jackpot game, the lower 4 bits are “0001” (FIG. 182 (a)). )), The lower 4 bits become "0010" (described as "02" in FIG. 182 (a)) during the round game (round), and the lower 4 bits during the round game (interval). Four bits become “0011” (described as “03” in FIG. 182 (a)), and during the ending period (ED). The lower 4 bits are “0100” (described as “04” in FIG. 182 (a)).

  The special symbol that has won the jackpot this time is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and during the opening period (OP) of the jackpot game, the lower 4 bits are “0101” (in FIG. 182 (a), “0101”). 05), and during the round game (round), the lower 4 bits become “0110” (described as “06” in FIG. 182 (a)), and during the round-to-round game (interval), the lower 4 bits become It becomes "0111" (described as "07" in FIG. 182 (a)), and during the ending period (ED), the lower 4 bits become "1000" (described as "08" in FIG. 182 (a)).

  When the big hit game is not executed (when the big hit flag 203o is set to off), the lower 4 bits are “0000” as an initial state. The jackpot status flag 203ea is configured so that its value is updated according to the jackpot scenario updated in the jackpot control process 6 (see S2272 in FIG. 188) executed during the jackpot game, and the winning state The jackpot status flag 203ea is updated based on the information stored in the storage area 203j, that is, the type of the special symbol that has won the jackpot and the content (jackpot gaming state) indicated by the updated jackpot scenario.

  As described above, since the value of the jackpot status flag 203ea is configured to be updated based on the jackpot scenario, for example, means for storing the updated content of the jackpot status flag 203ea, and the stored content A means for determining (past history) may be provided, and the presence or absence of an abnormality in the jackpot game may be determined based on the determination result of the past history of the jackpot state flag 203ea. Specifically, for example, from the value that can be set when the jackpot is won by the drawing of Toku-zu (the values of “01” to “04” shown in FIG. If it is determined that the value has been updated to a value that can be set when winning (“05” to “08” shown in FIG. 182 (a)), it is determined that the jackpot game is in an abnormal state, It is preferable to configure so as to perform abnormality notification. This makes it possible to accurately determine that the player has played an illegal game during the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot status flag 203ea is changed in accordance with the execution content of the jackpot control process 6 (see S2272 in FIG. 188). However, the current jackpot gaming state can be determined. For example, a means for determining whether or not the present is a big hit, a means for detecting an open state of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650), May be provided to set the value of the jackpot state flag 203ea based on the determination (detection) result of each unit, or to determine the content of the image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Means may be provided to determine the current jackpot gaming status based on the determination result of the means.

  Then, when the value set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is updated, a status command for indicating that is updated is output to the audio lamp control device 113. The sound ramp control device 113 receives the status command for indicating that the value set in the jackpot status flag 203ea has been updated, thereby determining the current jackpot gaming status, and various effects according to the jackpot gaming status. Is set.

  In the sixth embodiment, the special symbol type that has won the jackpot is determined as the jackpot gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol type may not be determined. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of types for classifying the jackpot game situation.

  The small hit state flag 203eb is for indicating the state of the small hit game, and indicates the current small hit game state (during the opening period, during the round game, during the interval period, during the ending period). Is a flag that is referred to when determining “. Here, the content of the small hit state flag 203eb will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b). FIG. 182 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit state flag 203eb. As shown in FIG. 182 (b), the small hit state flag 203eb is configured with a 1-byte storage area, and is configured to be able to specify the gaming state by the state of the lower two bits.

  Specifically, during the opening period (OP) of the small hit game, the lower two bits are “01” (described as “01” in FIG. 182 (b)), and during the round game (round), the lower two bits are Becomes "10" (described as "02" in FIG. 182 (b)), and during the ending period (ED). The lower two bits are "11" (described as "03" in FIG. 182 (b)). Then, when the small hitting game is not executed (when the small hitting flag 203p is set to off), the lower two bits are “00” (described as “00” in FIG. 182 (b)). .

  In the present embodiment, since the round game is executed only once as the small hit game, the value for indicating the interval period is deleted from the big hit state flag 203ea described above, and Since it is configured not to win the small hit in the lottery of one special symbol, the value for determining the type of the special symbol that has won the small hit is also deleted. The value of the small hit state flag 203eb is set in the small hit control processing 6 (see S2273 in FIG. 193) in accordance with the updated content of the small hit scenario to be updated. When the value of 203eb is updated, a status command for indicating the updated value of the small hit status flag 203eb is set and output to the sound lamp control device 113.

  The sound ramp control device 113 receives the status command including the information for indicating the value of the small hit state flag 203eb, thereby grasping the current small hitting game situation, and performing the effect mode according to the current situation. Set.

  The special figure change possible flag 203ec is a flag for indicating whether the current situation is a state in which a new special pattern change can be executed, and is turned on when a new special pattern change can be executed. It is set.

  The jackpot interruption flag 203ed is a flag for interrupting the update of the jackpot scenario during the jackpot game, and is set to ON when interrupting the update of the jackpot scenario. The big hit interruption flag 203ed is set to ON, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the opening period of the big hit game becomes a small hit and the small hit game is executed.

  In the sixth embodiment, a new special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is configured to be executed in a part of the state of the jackpot game (a state in which the round game is not executed), and the special symbol lottery is executed. When a small hit is won, a small hit game is executed. During the small hit game, the big hit interrupt flag 203ed is set to ON, so that the big hit scenario is not updated.

  With this configuration, even if, for example, a small hit is won during the opening period of the big hit game, the small hit game can be reliably executed without starting the big hit round game. In addition, even if a small hit is won within a predetermined period such as a jackpot opening period, the small jackpot opening period is not subtracted (the big hit scenario is updated). It can be made to play games eagerly.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the small hit game is executed during the big hit game, the update of the big hit scenario is interrupted, and the small hit game is surely executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Without, for example, without interrupting the update of the jackpot scenario, the small jackpot game is forcibly terminated based on the timing at which the jackpot round game is executed, or the small jackpot game until the jackpot round game ends. May be temporarily interrupted.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, since the big hit interruption flag 203ed is set to ON based on the timing at which the small hit game is executed, the big hit scenario is updated during the fluctuation time of the special symbol that has won the small hit. Is done. This allows the player to play the game while expecting a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set as short as possible, in addition to winning the small hit during the big hit game. On the other hand, it is possible to watch the details of the special symbol lottery (change).

  In this case, it is preferable to execute a fluctuating time suggestion indicating the set fluctuating time regardless of the result of the lottery of the special symbol fluctuating executed at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started. Thereby, it is possible to indicate to the player whether or not the short fluctuation time is set, so that it is possible to enhance the effect. Further, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the next special symbol lottery can be immediately executed by setting the short fluctuation time. In other words, the fluctuating time suggestion notification is a notification indicating whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a lottery result that is advantageous to the player, without indicating whether the lottery result is a hit or a loss (whether or not the result of the determination).

  Note that, other than the configuration of the sixth embodiment, for example, the big hit interruption flag 203ed may be set to ON based on the timing at which the special symbol change that has been won for the small hit is executed. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem that the big hit round game is executed during the execution of the special symbol change having won the small hit, thereby providing a game that is difficult to understand for the player.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, a means for determining the remaining period of the opening period of the jackpot game and a means for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol are provided. If it is determined that the special symbol lottery will be completed within the opening period, the effect mode is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (result determination result), and if it is determined that the current special symbol lottery (fluctuation) does not end within the opening period Alternatively, a configuration may be made so that an effect mode corresponding to a case where the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the special symbol lottery is out of range. With this configuration, even if the lottery result of the special symbol change forcibly terminated by executing the big hit round game is a small hit, the special symbol change without giving a sense of incongruity to the player. Can be stopped.

<Control processing of main controller in sixth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 194. The control process of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the above-described second embodiment in that the special symbol change stop process 2 (see FIG. 97) is stopped. Instead of the process 6 (see FIG. 183) and the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 33), the first special symbol change start process 6 (see FIG. 185) and the second special symbol change start process (see FIG. 39) Instead, the second special symbol change start processing 6 (see FIG. 186), the big hit control processing 6 (see FIG. 53) instead of the big hit control processing (see FIG. 53), and the big hit end instead of the big hit end processing (see FIG. 54) Processing 6 (see FIG. 192), small hit control processing 6 (see FIG. 193) in place of the small hit control processing (see FIG. 55), variation condition determination processing (see FIG. 184), and round execution processing (see FIG. 192) 89 reference), with the difference that adds a small prize end processing (see FIG. 194). Otherwise, the same processing is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 183, a special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 6 (S181). In the special symbol variation process 6 (S181), a variation condition determination process (S291) is added to the special symbol variation stop process 2 (see FIG. 97) of the above-described second embodiment, and the first special symbol variation start. A first special symbol change start process 6 (see FIG. 185) instead of the process (see FIG. 33), and a second special symbol change start process 6 (see FIG. 186) instead of the second special symbol change start process (see FIG. 39) ). The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the special symbol variation process 6 (S181), a variation condition determination process (S291) is first performed. Details of the fluctuation condition determination processing (S291) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure variable flag 203ec is on (S292). When it is determined that the special figure variable flag 203ec is not on (S292: No), the process proceeds to S202. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure variable flag 203ec is ON (S292: No), the process proceeds to S204.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 184, a description will be given of a variation condition determination process (S291), which is one of the special symbol variation processes 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation condition determination processing (S291).

  In the fluctuation condition determination processing (S291), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is turned on (S3501). When it is determined that the special figure change prohibition flag 203ee is on (S3501: Yes), the special figure change enable flag 203ec is set to off (S3506), and the processing shifts to S3507. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure change prohibition flag 203ee is not on (S3501: Yes), it is determined whether the big hit flag 203o is on (S3502). When it is determined that the big hit flag 203o is ON (S3502: Yes), the information set in the big hit state flag 203ea is read (S3503). Next, in the process of S3503, it is determined whether the information of the read big hit state flag 203ea is “01” or “05”. That is, it is determined whether it is a jackpot opening period (S3504). If it is determined that the read information is “01” or “05”, the special figure changeable flag 203ec is set to ON (S3505), and the process shifts to S3507. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3504 that the read information is not “01” or “05” (S3504: No), the special figure variable flag 203ec is set to off (S3506), and the processing of S3507 is performed. Move to

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203o is not on (S3502: No), it is determined whether the small hit flag 203p is on (S3507). If it is determined that the small hitting flag 203p is ON (S3507: Yes), the present process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hitting flag 203p is not on (S3507: No), the information set in the small hitting state flag 203eb is read (S3508). Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the small hit state flag 203eb read in the processing of S3508 is “01” (S3509). If it is determined that the information is “01” (S3509: Yes), the special figure variable flag 203ec is set to ON (S3510), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read information is not “01” (S3509: No), the special figure variable flag 203ec is set to off (S3511), and this processing ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 185, a first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293), which is one of the special symbol variation processes 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change start process 6 (S293). The first special symbol change start process 6 (S293) is different from the first special symbol change start process (S208 in FIG. 33) in that the information of the big hit state flag 203ea is read. . The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first special symbol change start process 6 (S293), first, the information set in the big hit state flag 203ea is read (S391). Next, it is determined whether the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is “00” or “05”. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot opening period (S392). If it is determined that the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is “00” or “05” (S392: Yes), the process proceeds to S301. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is not “00” or “05” (S392: No), this processing ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 186, a second special symbol change start process 6 (S294), which is one of the special symbol change processes 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start process 6 (S294). In the second special symbol change start process 6 (S294), the information of the big hit state flag 203ea is read out from the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 39) in the second embodiment, and the big hit of the first special symbol is performed. A process for determining whether the current period is the opening period or the round period is added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the second special symbol change start process 6 (S294), first, the information set in the big hit state flag 203ea is read (S971). Next, it is determined whether or not the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is “00” or “01”. That is, it is determined whether the first special symbol is a jackpot opening period or a round period (S972). If it is determined that the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is “00” or “01” (S972: Yes), the process proceeds to S901. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is not “00” or “01” (S972: No), the processing of S902 is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 187, a description will be given of the electric auditors product opening and closing process 6 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the contents of the electric accessory opening / closing process 6 (S2271).

  In the electric accessory opening / closing process 6 (S2271), first, it is determined whether or not there is an opening setting (S3601). If it is determined that the release is set (S3601: Yes), the solenoid of the corresponding attacker is set to ON (S3602), the jackpot status flag 203ea is set to the corresponding value (S3606), and the process ends. I do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3601 that there is no setting for opening (S3601: No), it is determined whether there is a setting for closing (S3603). If it is determined that there is a setting for closing (S3603: Yes), the solenoid of the corresponding attacker is turned off (S3604), the process of S3606 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3603 that there is no setting for closing (S3603: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the closing scenario (S3605). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the closing scenario (S3605: Yes), the process of S3606 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3605, if it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the closed scenario (S3605: No), the process ends.

  Next, the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot control process 6 (S2272).

  In the jackpot control process 6 (S2272), first, in the process of S2301, when it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S2301: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is on (S2351). . If it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is ON (S2351: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is not turned on (S2351: No), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302).

  Next, it is determined whether it is a jackpot start timing (S2302). If it is determined that it is the time to start the jackpot (S2303: Yes), an opening command is set (S2304), a value corresponding to the jackpot status flag 203ea is set (S2352), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2303, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the start of the big hit (S2303: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S2305). If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2305: Yes), a round execution process (S2353) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, the round execution process (S2353), which is one of the jackpot control processes 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the content of the round execution processing (S2353).

  In the round execution process (S2353), first, it is determined whether or not the present time is the start timing of the first round (S3701). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the first round (S3701: No), the big hit interruption process is executed (S3702), and the flow shifts to the process of S3703. The details of the jackpot interruption process (S3702) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3701 that it is not the start timing of the first round (S3701: No), a value corresponding to the jackpot status flag 203ea is set (S3703), and the processing corresponding to the jackpot scenario is set. (S3704), and terminates this process.

  Here, the jackpot interruption process (S3702), which is one of the round execution processes (S2353) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot interruption process (S3702).

  In the big hit interruption processing (S3702), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203p is on (S3801). If it is determined that the small hitting flag 203p is on (S3801: Yes), the big hit suspending flag 203ed is set on (S3802), a big hit suspending command is set (S3803), and the process shifts to S3805. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3801 that the small hit flag 203p is not on, an opening command indicating the start of the small hit is set (S3804), and the flow shifts to the processing of S3805.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m or the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0, that is, whether the special symbol is changing (S3805). If it is determined that the special symbol is fluctuating (S3805: Yes), the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed with a deviated symbol (S3806), and the special symbol change prohibition flag 203ee is set to ON (S3807). The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3805 that the special symbol is not fluctuating (S3805: No), the present processing is terminated as it is.

  Returning to FIG. 188, the description will be continued. On the other hand, in the process of S2305, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2305: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the round (S2307). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the round (S2307: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening is set (S2308), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2307, when it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the round (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of ending the operation of the special power (S2354). If it is determined that it is time to end the operation of the special power (S2354: Yes), the ending execution process (S2355) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, the ending execution process (S2355), which is one of the jackpot control processes 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending execution process (S2355).

  In the ending execution process (S2355), first, a value corresponding to the jackpot status flag 203ea is set (S3901), an ending command is set (S3902), and this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 188, the description will be continued. In the process of S2354, when it is determined that it is not the operation end timing of the special power (S2354: No), it is determined whether it is the operation end timing of the combination operating device (S2356). If it is determined that it is the operation end timing of the winning combination operating device (S2356: Yes), the big hit end process 6 (S2357) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2356, when it is determined that it is not the operation end timing of the combination actuation device (S2356: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, a jackpot end process 6 (S2357) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 183 is a flowchart illustrating the content of the jackpot end process 6 (S2357). In the big hit end processing 6 (S2357), after setting the state command (S2406) with respect to the big hit end processing (S2312 in FIG. 54) of the above-described second embodiment, “00” is set to the big hit state flag 203ea. The difference is that a process (S2451) is added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 193, the small hit control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit control process 6 (S2272). In the small hit control process 6 (S2272), a process of ending the value corresponding to the small hit status flag 203eb is added to the small hit control process of the second embodiment (S2205 in FIG. 55). The difference is that a small hit end process (S2584) is executed instead of the process of S2512. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the small hit control process 6 (S2272), when it is determined in the process of S2503 that it is the timing of starting the small hit (S2503), an opening command is set (S2504), and the small hit state flag 203eb is set. A value to be set is set (S2581), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2503 that the timing is not the small hitting start timing (S2503: No), it is determined whether it is the small hitting round start timing (S2505). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit round (S2505: Yes), a small hit operation setting process (S2506) is executed, a value corresponding to the small hit status flag 203eb is set (S2582), and the present process is performed. To end.

  Then, in the present embodiment, if it is determined in the processing of S2509 that it is the ending timing (S2509: Yes), an ending command is set (S2510), and a value corresponding to the small hit state flag 203eb is set ( (S2583), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2509, when it is determined that the timing is not the ending timing (S2509: No), it is determined whether or not the timing is the end timing of the small hit (S2511). If it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S2511), the small hit end processing (S2584) is executed, and this processing ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 194, a small hit end process (S2584) which is one of the small hit control processes 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit end processing (S2584).

  In the small hit end processing (S2584), first, it is determined whether the big hit interrupt flag 203ed is on (S2591). If it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is on (S2591: Yes), the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set off (S2592), and the special figure change prohibition flag 203ee is set on (S2593). Next, the updated value of the big hit scenario is decremented by 1 (S2594), the small hit flag 203p is set to off (S2595), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2501 that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is not on (S2591: No), the processes of S2592 to S2594 are skipped, the process of S2595 is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, even during the period from the execution of the jackpot game to the start of the round game (opening period of the jackpot game), the special symbol fluctuation on the side not winning the jackpot. Is configured to be executed. Specifically, for example, when a jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol and a jackpot game corresponding to the won jackpot is started (when an opening period of the jackpot game is set), during the opening period , A lottery (change) of the second special symbol is executed.

  In other words, even during the jackpot game, the round game in which the ball can enter by the jackpot game (the period during which the first variable prize device 65 or the second variable prize device 650 is in the open state in which the ball can easily enter the ball) In a period other than the game, for example, an opening period, an interval period, and an ending period, the special symbol lottery can be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the jackpot game during the round game in the jackpot game and to pay attention to the special symbol change during the other periods, so that an efficient game can be provided to the player.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, a configuration is made such that a jackpot is not won in a special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game. Thus, it is possible to suppress providing an excessive jackpot game to the player. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is off (other than the big hit), a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be won for the small hit that can be given to the player. ing. Therefore, the player can watch the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the big hit game.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the probability of winning a small hit is made different. Therefore, the degree of advantage between the second special symbol lottery executed during the first special symbol jackpot game and the first special symbol lottery executed during the second special symbol jackpot game can be made different.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In each of the above-described embodiments, the jackpot game is executed only when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the specific area 650V is provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 opened during the small hit game, and the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hit game. , A big hit (so-called two kinds) game is executed.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail, as a path for the ball to flow down to the second variable prize device (V prize device) 650 opened during the small hit game, the first flow in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area 650V The configuration is such that a path ta (see FIG. 196) and a second flow path tb (see FIG. 196) through which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V are provided. This allows the player to closely watch which flow path the ball flows down during the small hitting game. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the movement of the ball flowing down on the game board 13, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the ball is distributed to the above-described first flow path ta or the second flow path tb by the opening and closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a, the operation of the electric accessory 3640a is performed. Can also interest the player. Further, when the ball flows down the second flow path tb, which easily passes through the specific area 650V, the ease of winning of the ball to the V winning device 650 is made different according to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. ing.

  Further, the variation time of the special symbol to be set is made different depending on the set gaming state and the winning small hit type. With such a configuration, when a small hit corresponding to a big hit to which a time-saving state is given after the big hit game is won, a gaming state (advantageous time saving) for facilitating a ball to pass through the specific area 650V, and a big hit end A game state (unfavorable time reduction) can be set to make it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V when a small hit corresponding to a big hit to which a time saving state is given later is won.

  Then, in the present embodiment, by using the above-described configuration of the advantageous time reduction and the disadvantageous time reduction, when the jackpot is once won (initial hit), a total of three jackpots including at least the first hit are executed. It is configured such that a gaming state advantageous to the player continues. In this way, by enabling the setting of the game state in which it is guaranteed that the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In addition, although a detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198, in the seventh embodiment, the second special symbol is configured to be won in a small win by lottery, and the second special symbol is selected. The motorized accessory 3640a operates so that the ball easily enters the second entrance 3640, which is a trigger for executing the lottery. Then, based on the fact that the ball that has flowed down on the electric accessory 3640a has entered the second entrance 3640, the electric accessory 3640a shifts to the closed state, and at that time, the electric accessory 3640a flows down on the electric accessory 3640a. It is configured such that the dropped ball is distributed to the first flow path ta and the second flow path tb according to the position (upstream side, downstream side) where the ball has flowed.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the ball located on the downstream side of the ball flow path on the electric accessory 3640a is configured to be distributed to the second flow path tb which is advantageous to the player, and is continuously operated. When the ball is fired, the ball is configured to easily flow into the second flow path tb.

  Therefore, in order for the ball to flow into the second flow path tb during the execution of the second special symbol lottery, it is necessary to continuously fire the ball toward the game area of the game board 13. . Therefore, the act of trying to obtain advantageous results by firing the ball at a predetermined timing can be suppressed.

  Here, the configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 195, the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the above-described first embodiment in that the configuration of the right region of the game board 13 is greatly different.

  Specifically, a point that a flow path unit 660 is provided in the right area of the game board 13, a point that a second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is provided below the flow path unit 660, A point where a specific area 650V that can provide a jackpot game based on the passage of a ball is provided in a prize device (V prize device) 650, and a first variable prize device provided in a lower center portion of the game board 13 650, the second entrance 640, and the point that the electric entry 64 a is additionally provided and the first entrance 64 b 1 is deleted. Other configurations are the same as those of the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the above-described first embodiment, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the configuration of the channel unit 660 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 196 is an enlarged view in which the vicinity of the flow path unit 660 is enlarged, and FIG. 197 (a) is a plan view schematically showing a ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in a closed state (buried state). FIG. 197 (b) is a perspective view schematically showing a ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in a closed state (buried state). FIG. 198 (a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in an open state (projecting state). FIG. 198 (b) is a plan view of the electric accessory 3640a. It is the perspective view which showed typically the ball flow at the time of an open state (projection state).

  The term indicating the variable state of the electric accessory 3640a used in the seventh embodiment will be described. The closed state of the electric accessory 3640a is defined as a flow path for allowing the ball to enter the second ball entrance 3640. This is a term used to indicate a state in which (the flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a) is closed, that is, a state in which the electric accessory 3640a is embedded in the game board 13, and is a functional expression. The term “restricted state” (a state in which the ball is restricted from entering the second entrance 3640) may be used.

  In addition, the open state of the electric accessory 3640a refers to a state in which a channel (a channel formed on the electric accessory 3640a) for allowing a ball to enter the second ball entrance 3640 is open, that is, an electric motor. It is a term used to indicate a state in which the accessory 3640a protrudes from the game board 13, and as a functional expression, a term of an allowable state (a state in which a ball is allowed to enter the second entrance 3640). May be used.

  As shown in FIG. 196, the channel unit 660 forms a first channel 660a that forms the first channel ta and a second channel tb as ball channels that cause the ball to flow down toward the V winning device 650. A second passage 660b, and further, a first inflow port 661 into which a ball flowing down in a substantially central portion of the right region flows, and a ball flowing from the first inflow port 661 flows down toward the electric accessory 3640a. The first guiding path 661a (see FIG. 197 (b)) to be passed, the second inlet 662 into which the ball flowing down the left side of the right area flows, and the ball flowing through the second inlet 662 pass through the through gate 67. A third passage 660c for causing the ball to flow down toward the lower area of the game board 13, a third inlet 663 into which the ball flowing down the right side of the right area flows, and a ball flowing from the third inlet 663 to the game board 13 Out for discharging outside A mouth 66, and a.

  The sphere flowing down the right side region is formed by a plurality of nails (for example, nails 660k (see FIG. 195), which is a variable flow path member) disposed above the flow path unit 660 while changing the flow path. 660, about 55% of the spheres flowing down the right area flow into the first inlet 661, about 40% flow into the second inlet 662, and about 5% flow into the third inlet 662. It is configured to flow into the inflow port 663. In addition, the above-mentioned distribution ratio indicates an average value in the case of performing a right-handed game, and, for example, among the firing intensities capable of a right-handed game, the ball is continuously fired with the weakest firing intensity. In this case, the ratio of the sphere flowing into the second inlet 662 increases. As described above, by controlling the firing intensity in the right-handed game by the player, it is possible to change the inflow ratio to each of the inlets provided in the flow channel unit 660, thereby providing the player with It is possible to provide a pleasure of varying the firing intensity so that an advantageous game is executed.

  Further, the sphere flowing down the second inlet 662 is configured to be distributed to two flow paths formed in the depth direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the sphere distributed to the front flow path (about 90 %) Flows down the third passage 660c provided with the through gate 67, and the sphere (about 10%) distributed to the flow path (not shown) on the back side flows into the out port 66, and the pachinko machine 10 It is configured to be discharged outside. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, a position close to both ends of the electric accessory 3640a which is opened when the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit (formed when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state). Out ports 66 are provided at positions (close to the upstream end and the downstream end, respectively) of the formed spherical flow path (a partition wall for partitioning the space from the out ports 66).

  With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand the movable range of the electric accessory 3640a operated when the hit game of the normal symbol is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the opening operation of.

  In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 196, the partition wall for partitioning the space between the out port 66 and the movable area of the electric accessory 3640a is in contact with the electric accessory 3640a. , And a gap less than half a sphere is formed. Thus, even if the opening operation of the electric accessory 3640a is performed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the electric accessory 3640a or the partition wall from being damaged by friction. Further, since the size of the gap is less than half a ball, it is possible to suppress the ball from spilling downward from the gap.

  Next, the ball flow of a right-handed game when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (buried state) will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. As shown in FIG. 196, the ball flowing from the first inflow port 661 flows down toward the electric accessory 3640a, but when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (buried state), the ball comes in on the electric accessory 3640a. Without flowing down to the first passage 660a provided below the first guide path 661a (see FIG. 197 (b)). The first passage 660a is a passage in which the first passage ta is formed. The first flow path ta is configured so that the time required for the ball to pass therethrough is about 0.5 seconds, and the ball wins the V in a shorter time than a ball flowing down the second flow path tb described later. The device 650 can be reached.

  Most (about 90%) of the ball that has flowed into the second inflow port 662 passes through the through gate 67 irrespective of the state of the electric accessory 3640a, and is closer to the front than the second passage 660b described later. The pachinko machine 10 flows down the third passage 660c formed on the front side (from the viewpoint of the player who views the pachinko machine 10 in front) and is discharged to the lower area of the game board 13. In addition, a part (about 10%) of the sphere that has flowed into the second inlet 662 flows through the fourth passage (not shown) provided on the inner side of the third passage 660c and flows into the outlet 66.

  In this way, by forming a plurality of ball passages using the space in the depth direction of the game board 13, the flow path through which the ball flows can be formed three-dimensionally. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of forming a larger number of ball passages within a limited range and realizing a ball flow that does not tire the player.

  Similarly to the above-described second inflow port 662, the ball that has entered the third inflow port is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the out port 66 without regard to the state of the electric accessory 3640a. . Here, with reference to FIG. 196 and FIG. 197 (a), the structure of the upper surface (the lower surface of the spherical flow) of the electric accessory 3640a will be described. As shown in FIG. 196, the electric accessory 3640a is configured such that a downward slope is formed from the upper right direction to the lower left direction from the viewpoint when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is formed. Is configured to flow down the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a from the upstream side (upper right side) to the downstream side (lower left side) by its own weight.

  A delay member is provided on the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a to delay the flow speed at which the ball flows down the upper surface. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 197 (a), a first delay member 3641 and a second delay member 3642 are provided, and a sphere flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is a first delay member 3641, While contacting the second delay member 3642, the ball enters the second entrance 640 provided at the lower end of the electric accessory 3640a. In the present embodiment, an installation member 3643 is provided as a delay member for delaying the flow speed of a ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a.

  The installation member 3643 is directly attached to the flow path unit 660, not to the electric accessory 3640a. Therefore, the electric accessory 3640a is always disposed at a fixed position regardless of the operation of the electric accessory 3640a. As described above, the delay member for delaying the flow speed of the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is provided to the first delay member 3641, the second delay member 3642 attached to the electric accessory 3640a, and the flow path unit 660. When the electric accessory 3640a is in an open state (projected state) (see FIG. 198 (a)), the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a is meandered by being configured with the attached installation member 3643. When the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (embedded state) (see FIG. 197 (a)), the ball cannot flow down on the electric accessory 3640a. (Difficult) can be made to function as a flow-down suppressing means.

  Here, the above-mentioned flow-down suppressing means will be specifically described. In the case where the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (see FIG. 197 (a)), that is, in the state where it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance. Since the electric accessory 3640a is buried in the back of the game board 13 as shown in FIG. 197 (a), the first delay member 3641 on the electric accessory 3640a is connected to the game board 13 side. Will be located. Thereby, the distance tc between the first delay member 3641 and the installation member 3643 is reduced (an interval (about 5 mm) such that a ball cannot pass between the first delay member 3641 and the installation member 3643. Become). Similarly, the distance td between the second delay member 3642 and the installation member 3643 is also an interval (about 7 mm) at which a ball cannot pass.

  Thereby, even if an act of improperly placing a ball on electric accessory 3640a is performed in a state where electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state, the ball enters second entrance 3640. Can be suppressed. Further, when the electric accessory 3640a is opened (projected), it is not necessary to embed each delay member on the electric accessory 3640a inside the game board 13, so that the electric accessory 3640a is embedded. The opening of the game board 13 provided can be narrowed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where dust and dirt enter the inside of the pachinko machine 10 from the opening of the game board 13.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, even when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state, the electric accessory 3640a is not completely embedded in the game board 13 but is partially (the first delay member 3641, the first The state where the second delay member 3642) is exposed is the closed state of the electric accessory 3640a. This allows the player to easily know where the electric accessory 3640a is located even when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state. In addition, since each delay member provided on electric accessory 3640a is exposed, when electric accessory 3640a is opened (projected state), how the ball flows down electric accessory 3640a. It is possible to make the player know whether to do so.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, the movement of a sphere (a ball flow on the electric accessory 3640a) that can be executed when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state is a state in which the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the state in which the electric accessory 3640a is actually opened and the ball flows down on the electric accessory 3640a.

  On the other hand, when the motorized accessory 3640a is in the open state (projected state), as shown in FIG. 198, the ball that has flowed into the first inlet 661 and has flowed down the first guide path 661a is on the motorized accessory 3640a. To reach. Then, the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a flows down toward the second entrance 3640 while meandering along the inclination and the shape of each delay member.

  Here, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (projected state), a spherical flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a will be described with reference to FIG. 198 (a). A meandering spherical flow path is formed until the ball discharged from the first guiding path 661a reaches the second ball inlet 3640. The time for the sphere to pass through the meandering spherical flow path is about 2 seconds, and the sphere passes through the flow path (flow path upstream portion ZA) from the discharge port of the first guide path 661a to the far side of the first delay member 3641. Is about 0.8 seconds, and the time required to pass through the flow path (flow path downstream portion ZB) from the back side of the first delay member 3641 to the second entrance 3640 is about 1.2 seconds. It is configured to be seconds.

  In the present embodiment, as the operation termination condition of the electric accessory 3640a, a first general power termination condition that is satisfied when the elapsed time from the operation to the open state (projection state) is 3 seconds, and a second general power termination condition. A second general power ending condition that is satisfied when one ball enters the entrance 3640 is set, and when any of the general power ending conditions is satisfied, the electric accessory 3640a is in a closed state. (Buried state).

  When the electric accessory 3640a operates from the open state (projected state) to the closed state (embedded state), the ball staying on the electric accessory 3640a forms a first passage 660a below the electric accessory 3640a, Alternatively, it is configured to fall into any of the second passages 660b. That is, the moving distance (moving distance in the depth direction) when the electric accessory 3640a operates from the open state (projected state) to the closed state (embedded state) is at least equal to or more than one ball (11 mm). In this embodiment, the moving distance of the electric accessory 3640a is larger than one ball (11 mm) and 15 mm smaller than two balls (22 mm).

  With this configuration, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state, the ball positioned on the electric accessory 3640a can be reliably dropped downward, and the two balls are pachinko. Since there is no continuous drop in the depth direction of the machine 10, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging inside the first passage 660 a and the second passage 660 b.

  The sphere staying in the flow path upstream portion ZA (see FIG. 198 (a)) of the meandering spherical flow channel stays in the first passage 660a and in the flow path downstream portion ZB (see FIG. 198 (a)). The sphere is configured to fall into the second passage 660b. In the present embodiment, the ball moves from the open state (projected state) to the closed state (buried state) at a speed enough to cause the ball to fall directly below due to inertia acting on the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a. It is configured as follows.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (projecting state) and the ball is located between the second delay member 3642 and the second ball entrance 3640, the electric accessory 3640a When the ball moves to the closed state (embedded state), the ball collides with the second delay member 3642 moving toward the second ball entrance 3640, and enters the second ball entrance 3640. Make up. As described above, depending on the position of the ball on the electric accessory 3640a, the operation of moving the electric accessory 3640a from the open state to the closed state is a guiding operation for guiding the ball to the second ball entrance. be able to.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to fire 100 balls per minute, and when 100 balls are fired per minute in a right-handed game, approximately one ball per two balls is fired. The ball flows into the first inlet 661. In other words, since the balls fired at 0.6 second intervals flow into the first inlet 661 at a rate of one ball per two balls, the interval at which the balls flow into the first inlet 661 is about 1.2 on average. Seconds.

  And, as described above, since the flow path downstream portion ZB is configured to require 1.2 seconds for the passage of the sphere, when the above-described second ordinary power ending condition is satisfied, that is, the second entrance port In the case where the electric accessory 3640a operates in the closed state (embedded state) due to the entry of the ball into the 3640, if the ball is continuously shot to the right-handed area, the second entrance 3640 Since the electric accessory 3640a operates in the closed state in a state where the ball that has flown into the first inflow port 661 next to the ball that has entered the ball is located in the flow path downstream portion ZB, the ball is moved into the second passage 660b. Falling can be facilitated.

  On the other hand, when the game is performed with the timing of intentionally firing the ball, it is difficult to cause another ball to fall into the second passage 660b with the ball inserted into the second entrance 3640. can do. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to continuously fire the ball in order to make the ball enter the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 which is advantageous for the player.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, 3 seconds is set as the first ordinary power ending condition of the electric accessory 3640a as described above, but the gaming state is the normal state. In such a case, the first general power ending condition is set to 0.2 seconds. This 0.2 second is set to be shorter than the time (0.8 second) required to flow down the upstream part of the meandering spherical flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a. However, even if a right-handed game is performed during the normal state, the ball is not made to enter the second entrance 3640. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who plays an inappropriate game such as playing a right-handed game during the normal state from receiving an advantageous privilege.

  In addition, since it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down to the second passage 660b, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down to the second passage 660b in a state where the V winning device 650 is opened by any method, so that the specific region 650V is formed. It is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of passing a ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball passes through the second passage 660b, which is advantageous to the player, for a right-handed game during the normal state and a player who does not continuously perform the right-handed game during the time reduction state. Although the second passage 660b is provided on the downstream side of the electric accessory 3640a in order to make it difficult to perform the operation, the second passage 660b may be provided on the upstream side of the electric accessory 3640a without being limited to this. In addition, three or more passages for receiving a ball that has fallen from the electrically-powered accessory 3640a may be provided, or a plurality of receiving holes for balls that have been dropped from the electrically-powered accessory 3640a may be provided. You may comprise so that the probability of passing through the specific area | region 650V may differ. Further, a plurality of passages through which the ball falling from the electric accessory 3640a can pass through the specific region 650V are provided, and the time required for each passage to reach the specific region 650V (the time required for winning the V prize device 650). May be configured to be different.

  Returning to FIG. 195, the description will be continued. Below the channel unit 660, a first variable winning device 65 is provided. The first variable winning device 65 is opened when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, as in the first embodiment described above. In addition, 90% of the balls fired by the right-handed game during the jackpot game (the ball (50%) flowing into the first inlet 661 and the ball (40%) flowing into the second inlet 662) are: Since both are configured to win the first variable winning device 65, even if the flow path unit 660 is provided on the upstream side (upper side) of the first variable winning device 65, it is possible to smoothly execute the big hit game. Can be. In addition, the sphere flowing into the first inlet 661 and the sphere flowing into the second inlet 662 flow down different flow paths and reach the first variable winning device 65, so that a plurality of spheres are simultaneously drawn. It is possible to make it easier for one variable winning device 65 to win.

<Production contents in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 199 to 202, before describing the characteristic effects performed in the seventh embodiment, a brief description will be given of the playability of the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, when a big hit is won by a special symbol lottery or a small hit is won by a special symbol lottery, the ball is passed through a specific area (specific area 650 V) during the small hit game. In such a case, a jackpot game is configured to be executed (a so-called one-type and two-type mixed type).

  In the lottery of the first special symbol, the small hit is not won, but only in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is won. The second entrance 3640, which is a trigger for executing the lottery of the second special symbol, is configured so that the ball can enter only in a state where the time reduction state is set as the gaming state. Then, when the big hit game is executed, the time saving state is set at a predetermined rate after the big hit is finished.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 195) is configured to be opened in the small hitting game, and the ball passes through a specific area 650V provided in the V winning device 650. It has a difficult first flow path (first passage 660a) and a second flow path (second passage 660b) that is easy to pass, and makes it possible to change which flow path the ball flows down according to the game content. It is configured to be able to.

  Further, the seventh embodiment has an advantageous small hit in which the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit game set correspondingly, and a disadvantageous small hit in which the time saving state is not set. It is configured to vary the variable time set in accordance with it. In addition, an advantageous time-saving state in which a ball can easily enter the specific area 650V when a winning time is won as a time saving state, and a disadvantage in which a ball easily enters the specific area 650V when the winning time is won. The time saving state can be set.

  In the present embodiment, based on the start of the change of the second special symbol, the second flow path (second passage 660b) that allows the ball to flow toward the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 is set. It is configured to set a state in which the ball can flow down, and is configured to vary the fluctuation time of the special symbol set at the time of the small win in the advantageous time reduction state and the disadvantageous time reduction state. Then, in the state where the advantageous time saving state is set, the ball flowing down the second flow path wins in the V winning device 650 when the small win is won and the second flow path is won when the small win is won. The variable time of the special symbol corresponding to each small hit type is set so that the ball flowing down does not win the V winning device 650.

  With this configuration, when the advantageous time-saving state is set, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V even if the player wins at the disadvantage small hit, so the time-saving state is set across the big hit game. be able to. In other words, in the case of winning the big hit (first hit) in which the advantageous time-saving state is set after the end of the big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, at least two (three times including the first hit) big hit game is executed. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 199 (a), a description will be given of an effect that is executed when a normal symbol (a second symbol) is won in a time-saving state. FIG. 199 (a) is a display screen showing an example of an effect executed when a normal symbol (a second symbol) is won in a time saving state. As shown in FIG. 199 (a), while the time reduction state is set, the character “Right” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to make the player perform a right-handed game. A symbol for indicating the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is displayed in the fluctuation area Dm5.

  The symbol displayed in the ordinary symbol variation region Dm5 is displayed in a variable manner in response to a lottery (variation) of a normal symbol (second symbol) executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (see FIG. 195). The normal symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating the result of the current lottery in synchronization with the timing at which the fluctuation of the symbol (second symbol) stops. FIG. 199 (a) shows a display mode “display mode imitating two circles” indicating that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is a hit. In the embodiment, when the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is out of order, the “display mode imitating two crosses” is stopped and displayed in the ordinary symbol changing area Dm5, and the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is displayed. During the variable display of (), a “display mode in which a circle and a cross are variably displayed alternately” is displayed in the ordinary figure variable area Dm5.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 199 (a), in the case where the winning is won in the general drawing lottery, an effect is performed in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit crosses the bridge 851 and goes to the race venue 852. In this effect, the ball is made to flow down onto the electric accessory 3640a that has been operated to the closed state (projected state) based on the winning in the regular drawing lottery, and the ball is made to enter the second entrance 3640. This indicates a game, in which the operation status of the electric accessory 3640a is expressed using the bridge state of the bridge 851 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a ball enters the second entrance 3640. The display content is set so as to express whether or not the ball is to be played based on whether or not the character 811 reaches the race venue 852.

  In this way, by executing an effect that is reminiscent of the actual playability using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily inform the player of the complicated playability.

  In the state of FIG. 199 (a), neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol has started to change, and the special figure 1 display area Dm1 and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 are not displayed. A display mode indicating that the special symbol change is not performed is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the character "preparing for race" is displayed, suggesting the contents of the future effect.

  Here, a brief description will be given of the flow of the effect contents executed during the time reduction state in the present embodiment. The flow is performed based on passing a ball through the through gate 67 in a state where the time reduction state is set. When a hit is made in a normal symbol lottery (general figure lottery), as shown in FIG. 199 (a), the ball is made to flow down on the electric accessory 3640a which is in an open state (projection state), and the ball is dropped into the second entrance 3640 An effect corresponding to a game in which a ball is entered (effect toward a race venue) is executed.

  Then, when a ball enters the second entrance 3640 and the change of the second special symbol is started, the character 811 reaches the race venue, and a race effect shown in FIG. 199 (b) described later is executed. You. The content of the race effect depends on the lottery result of the second special symbol being executed (the result of the determination of the success / failure, the fluctuation time) and the state of the ball flowing into the second passage 660b where the ball easily enters the specific area 650V. Is set.

  Thereafter, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V in the small hitting game, an effect in which the character 811 is placed first as a race result is executed (see FIG. 201 (b)). In this way, each game executed during the time saving state, that is, a game to win a hit in a normal symbol, a game to throw a ball into the second entrance 3640, and a small hit in a lottery of a second special symbol It is possible to notify the player of the game result of the game for passing the ball to the specific area 650 V during the game to be played and the small hit game, using a series of effects. Therefore, since the player can grasp the game result by watching the effect (race effect) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. .

  Here, the display screen during the race effect will be described by returning to FIG. 199 (b). In the state where the display shown in FIG. 199 (a) is executed, that is, during the time-saving state, the player wins the normal symbol (the second symbol) and the electric accessory 3640a is variably operated to the open state (permissible state). In this state, when the ball flows down on the electric accessory 3640a and enters the second entrance 3640, the race start screen shown in FIG. 199 (b) is displayed.

  On the race start screen, a display mode in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit executes a race with a rival 860 imitating a turtle is displayed. The state shown in FIG. 199 (b) is a state in which the first second special symbol change has been executed since the time saving state was set, and the second special symbol (special) is shown in the special figure 2 change area Dm2. (FIG. 2) is displayed in a dynamic display mode indicating that the variable display is being performed, and the character "Race entry remaining 9 times" is displayed in the remaining short time notification area Dm6 as the remaining time reduction. . Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the character “go first goal” is displayed in order to guide the presentation result of the race presentation corresponding to the game result that is advantageous to the player.

  Next, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed during the time saving state, and if the lottery result is out of the range, the screen shown in FIG. 200 (a) is displayed. In FIG. 200 (a), the stop display mode of “3.4.6” indicating that the lottery result of the special figure 2 is out of order is displayed in the special figure 2 variable area Dm2, and the main display area Dm is displayed. In addition, an effect mode (a display mode in which the character 811 falls into the river and cannot make a goal) indicating that the race effect has ended is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "expected next time" are displayed to indicate that the current special figure 2 change is not a game result advantageous to the player and that the time saving state is continued. .

  On the other hand, when the lottery of the special figure 2 is a hit, the screen shown in FIG. 200 (b) or FIG. 201 (a) is displayed. As described above with reference to FIG. 196, in the present embodiment, the ball passage is configured such that two flow paths for flowing the ball toward the V prize device 650 that is opened at the time of the small win are formed. The time required to reach the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small hit game is made different depending on which flow path the ball passes through. Further, it is configured such that the ease of passage of the ball to the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 varies depending on the flow path through which the ball passes.

  Therefore, during the special symbol change in the case of winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the flow path where the ball flows down toward the V winning device 650 is detected, and the detection result is obtained. It is configured to make the production mode different based on the Specifically, when the ball flows down the second passage (delay passage) 660b that is advantageous to the player during the small hit change in the special map 2, the effect mode shown in FIG. 200 (b) is displayed. When the ball flows down the first passage (normal passage) 660a which is disadvantageous to the player during the small hit change in FIG. 2 (when the ball does not flow down the second passage 660b), FIG. The effect mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 200 (b), the main display is used as a race effect to indicate that the ball is likely to pass through the specific area 650V in the small hitting game executed after the running special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed. An effect in which the character 811 runs ahead of the rival 860 in the area Dm is executed. Then, the display mode of the character 811 is changed to a display mode different from the normal mode (a display mode in which the aura is put together), and the player is notified that the character 811 is likely to be in the first place in the current race effect. To do so, the letters "Speed UP" are displayed. In addition, the character "Large Chance" is also displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a comment indicating that the character 811 is likely to be first in the current race effect.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 201 (a), as the race effect, an effect mode in which the character 811 and the rival 860 aim at the goal while performing a dead heat is displayed. In this way, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is of the same small hit type, the lottery is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 depending on the flow path through which the ball flows. It is possible to make the player predict whether or not a game result that is advantageous to the player by making the effect mode different from that of the third embodiment is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A player can be interested in the contents of a series of effects (race effects).

  Then, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hit game, that is, when it is determined that the big hit game is executed after the small hit game ends, the effect mode shown in FIG. 201 (b) is displayed. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the ball does not pass through the specific area 650 V during the small hit game, the rival 860 scores the goal before the character 811 in the effect mode shown in FIG. Is displayed.

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, a first time-saving state (time-saving state A) which is advantageous to the player as a time-saving state, and a second time-saving state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first time-saving state. The state (time-saving state B) is configured to be settable. When the time-saving state A (first time-saving state) is set, the small hit of the small hit type corresponding to the big hit game to which the time-saving state is given is set. Is configured so that the ball passes to the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 only when the player wins.

  In other words, in the state where the time saving state A is set, when the big hit game is executed based on the small hit winning, the time saving state which is advantageous to the player after the big hit game is finished is surely set. are doing.

  Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the effect form shown in FIG. 202 (b) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in order to suggest (notify) to the player that the time saving state A has been set. It is configured to be displayed. FIG. 202B is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving state A is set.

  As shown in FIG. 202 (b), when the time reduction state A is set, an effect mode in which a submarine race in which a background indicating the seabed is set is executed is set. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Luxury prize confirmed if winning the race !?" is displayed indicating that the time saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot game. By suggesting that the time-saving state A is set by changing the background when the race is executed in this way, it is possible to set an effect mode that is easy for the player to understand, and to set the effect mode during the actual race. Since the effect can be shared, the capacity of image data used for setting the effect mode can be reduced.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, as the background of the effect during the race, a plurality of background images can be set in addition to the normal background and the above-described undersea background. , A background imitating the sea of trees, a background imitating a city, etc. can be set. Each background has a different ratio set according to the currently set time saving state (time saving state A, time saving state B). Thus, it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of predicting the currently set time saving state based on the background type set as the background of the effect during the race.

  Further, a measuring means for measuring the number of times the time saving state A is continuously set is provided, and a special setting which can be set only when the number of times the time saving state A is continuously set reaches a predetermined number (for example, three times). A background may be provided. Thus, it is possible to provide a sense of security that a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set, and to provide a sense of superiority by informing surrounding players of a special game result. .

  As described above, the characteristic presentation mode executed in the seventh embodiment has been described. However, the above description is merely an example, and another presentation mode may be displayed. For example, in the effect examples described with reference to FIG. 199 to FIG. 202, an effect example in which an effect mode corresponding to a game result is set is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect mode that is easily set according to the game result. May be configured to be different.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the state where the effect mode of FIG. 199 (b) is displayed, that is, in the state where the ball enters the second entrance 3640 during the time saving state (the special figure 2 starts to change). , The display mode of the rival 860 may be variably set based on the lottery result of this special figure 2 lottery. For example, the advantage small hit (small hit A) which is advantageous to the player in the special figure 2 lottery Display of rivals 860 in the case of winning, in the case of winning in a disadvantageous small hit (small hit C) which is more disadvantageous to the player than in the advantageous small hit, and in the case of non-winning (slack) in small hit The type of the character set as the mode may be configured to be different.

  With this configuration, when the special figure 2 change is started, the game contents in the future, that is, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery and the information that can predict the winning small hit type are provided to the player. Can be provided.

  In addition, when the effect mode (display mode) indicating the lottery result of the current special map 2 fluctuation is displayed (set) at the time when the special figure 2 fluctuation is started, the contents of the displayed effect mode are grasped. Then, there occurs a problem that the act of continuing the game is performed only when a lottery result that is advantageous to the player is obtained. However, in the present embodiment, when the ball is thrown into the second entrance 3640, the game is continuously performed. If the ball is not fired, it is difficult to pass the ball to the specific area 650V during the small hit game.

  Accordingly, even when the effect mode (display mode) indicating the lottery result of the current special figure 2 fluctuation is displayed (set) at the time when the special figure 2 fluctuation starts, after confirming the display mode, Since it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether or not to win the ball in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game, the above-described problem can be solved.

  In addition, since the race shown in FIG. 199 (b) can be started from the timing when the variation of the special figure 2 is started, the period during which the race is executed (the production execution period during the race) can be lengthened, The effect can be enhanced. Specifically, since the fluctuation period of the special symbol can be included in the production execution period during the race, for example, it is longer to win a winning (big hit, small hit) by lottery of the special symbol than to lose the lottery. By configuring so that the fluctuation period can be easily set, the longer the production execution period during the race, the more likely it is to make the player think that the winning has been won, and the longer the production execution period In addition, the effect of the effect that indicates that the winning has been won (the winning suggestion effect) can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the discrimination by the discriminating means (special fig. 2) is performed during the period from the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation to the end of the small hitting game, and the discrimination result is the predetermined discrimination result The character 811 is configured to execute an effect of performing a race (see FIGS. 199 (b) to 202 (a)) by using a specific game (small hit game) executed in the case of (small hit). At the start of the race (see FIG. 199 (b)), the value (information) for indicating the number of remaining hours reduced (the number of remaining times excluding the special figure variation currently being executed) displayed in the remaining number of times reduced notification area Dm6 is raced. The display is continued until the end (FIG. 202 (a)), that is, until the small hit game executed after the end of the special figure change (special figure 2 change) ends.

  As described above, even if the special map change is completed and the small hit game is executed, the display mode of the remaining short-time number notification area Dm6 is not changed so that the player can understand the effect during the race. It can be easily notified.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the race is performed using one special figure change (lottery) and a period until the small hitting game when the small hit is won in the special figure lottery. Since the medium production is configured to be executed, there is a problem that the production execution period during the race is greatly different based on the special figure lottery result. In other words, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, since the small hit game is not executed, the period in which the small hit game is executed cannot be included in the in-race effect execution period, and the in-race effect There was a problem that the period was shortened.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since at least the special symbol lottery result and the small hit game result are provided as elements for branching the production mode of the production during the race, the production during the race is performed unless the small hit is won. 200 (b) and 201 (a) cannot be provided to the player, and the player is bored with the game before having the player enjoy various effects. There was a possibility that the problem that it would occur.

  In order to solve such a problem, for example, in a case where a special symbol lottery result is out of order, a fluctuation time longer than a case where the special symbol lottery result is a small hit, specifically, , The fluctuation time set when the fluctuation time set when the small hit is won and the fluctuation time similar to (same as) the sum of the small hit game time are set. If this fluctuating pattern is set, it is possible to win during the race as if it were a special pattern change and the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game. It may be configured to set an effect mode (see FIG. 202 (a)) that indicates that the event has occurred. Thereby, even when the small hit is not won in the special drawing lottery, the player can experience the effect mode set at the end of the effect during the race.

  In addition, when a special jackpot is won in a jackpot, the same fluctuating time that is set when a small hit is won is set, and the first round of the jackpot game and the small hit It is preferable to set the jackpot game opening operation so that the game and the game have the same opening operation mode. As a result, even when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the effect during the race can be executed, so that the effect of the effect of the effect during the race can be provided to the player in an advantageous manner. Can be made easier.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, during the race, the effect during the race is executed using a period (special figure change period, small hit execution period) set based on one special symbol lottery. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effect during the race may be executed using a period set based on a plurality of special symbol lotteries. With this configuration, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is continuously out of order, it is possible to execute the effect during the race using the continuous special figure fluctuation period.

  Therefore, even if it is configured that the fluctuation time set when the special symbol lottery result is out of order is shorter than the case where the special symbol lottery result is a hit, it is set at the end of the production during the race. The effect mode can be provided to the player. In addition, in order to set one rendering mode using a plurality of deviation fluctuations, the rendering mode for indicating to the player that the special symbol lottery has been deviated corresponds to each special figure lottery. As compared with the case where the setting is made, the number of times of performing the effect for notifying the player that the special figure lottery has been missed can be reduced.

  The effect contents in the case where the time saving state is set have been described above. In addition, for example, by the lottery of the first special symbol, after the jackpot game is over, the big hit type in which the time saving state A is set is won. In such a case, a special suggestion effect for notifying the user may be executed. For example, instead of the display pattern of the third symbol that is normally stopped and displayed, the special display pattern of “VVV” may be used. The three symbols may be stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can be notified of the fact that a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, so that the player can play the game for a long period of time.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Here, an electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 203A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203 (a), the ROM 202 of the seventh embodiment includes a first random number 7 table 202fa, a first type selection 7 table 202fb, a second random number 7 table 202fc, a variation pattern 7 table 202fd, The small hit type selection 7 table 202fe and the release scenario 7 table 202ff are provided. The configuration (table having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the embodiments described above (the same name except for “7” added to make it possible to identify the electrical configuration used in the seventh embodiment)) ) Is used in the same manner as in the above-described embodiments, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The first random number 7 table 202fa is a data table used for the same purpose as the first random number table 202a used in each of the above-described embodiments, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is equal to the first random number counter C1. If the value matches the value of the random number which is a jackpot set by the random number 7 table 202fa, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. The first random number 7 per table 202fa includes two types of special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 for the first special symbol and special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 for the second special symbol. Although the number of random numbers is the same, the value of the random number with a small hit is set only in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 for the second special symbol (see FIG. 204). In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be small hits different (only one is set), the bonus (big hit or small hit) to the player can be obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. ) The degree of expectation for giving can be made different.

  Here, the contents of the first random number 7 table 202fa will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 7 table 202fa, and FIG. 204 (b) is the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1. FIG. 204 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2. In the first random number 7 table 202fa, a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a large hit and a random value (judgment value) determined to be a small hit are set in the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery. It is a table.

  Specifically, when performing the lottery of the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 204 (b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1, “0 to 4” among the values of the random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, and the other values are other than the jackpot (ie, Out). Then, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined, and when the value is any one of “0 to 4”, it is determined that the big hit is made.

  When performing the lottery of the second special symbol, the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 204 (c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2, among the values of the random number counter C1, “0 to 4” is defined as the big hit determination value, and “5 to 504” is the small hit determination value. And “505 to 999” are defined as other (ie, out of range) determination values. Then, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined, and when the value is any one of “0 to 4”, it is determined to be a big hit, and the value is determined to be one of “5 to 504”. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit.

  The first hit type selection 7 table 202fb is a data table used for the same purpose as the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and is a value of the first hit type counter C2. Is used to determine the big hit type when the big hit is won by referring to the first hit type selection 7 table 202fb. Here, the contents of the first hit type selection 7 table 202fb will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 205A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first hit type selection 7 table 202fb. As shown in FIG. 205 (a), in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 big hit type used when determining the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 at the time of drawing the first special symbol (special figure 1). It has a selection table 202fb1 and a special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202fb2 used when determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of drawing the second special symbol (special figure 2). . Thereby, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the drawing of Toku-zu 1 and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the drawing of Toku-zu 2 are made different, or each of a plurality of types of jackpots is selected. To provide the player with different game characteristics between the game using the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special figure 2). Can improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202fb1 used in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described with reference to FIG. 205 (b). FIG. 205 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202fb1. As shown in FIG. 205 (b), in the first hit type counter C2, if the random number value is any one of “0 to 9”, the big hit type becomes “big hit A” and any of “10 to 49” The jackpot type in the case of a hit is "big hit B", and the hit type in the case of any of "50 to 99" is "big hit C".

  The "big hit A" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds as a big hit game is 15 rounds (R), and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a time-saving state (actual number of times 10). Then, “time saving A” that is advantageous to the player is set as the time saving state set after the end of the big hit. Since the "big hit A" has a large number of rounds of the big hit game, and the game state after the big hit is set to "time saving A" which is more advantageous even in the time saving state advantageous to the player, the "big hit A" is Is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 10 random numbers for which "big hit A" is selected. In this case, the rate at which "big hit A" is selected is 10%.

  In the present embodiment, when the time saving state is set, when the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery), The second entrance 3640 is configured so that a ball can easily enter the second entrance 3640. In the time-saving state, the number of lotteries (the number of fluctuations) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of second special symbols (special figure) are reduced. When the number of lotteries (number of fluctuations) of 2) and the number of times of totaling (number of times of totaling) have reached 100 times, or the number of lotteries (number of times of fluctuations) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) has reached 10 times In this case, the time saving state is terminated.

  With this configuration, even if the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) disadvantageous to the player is executed immediately after the time saving state is set, the lottery of the special figure 2 is performed a specified number of times ( (10 times), so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Thereby, for example, when the total number of times of the change of the special figure 1 and the change of the special figure 2 in the time reduction state reaches the specified number (10 times), the time reduction state is configured to end. In order to prevent the special figure 1 fluctuation (lottery) from being executed when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, a game in which the reservation of the special figure 1 is not secured (a game in which the ball is not continuously fired) (So-called hitting game)) can be prevented from being executed, and the operation of the game can be improved.

  The "big hit B" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds (R) as the big hit game, and the game state after the big hit end is set to the time reduction state (10 time reductions). Then, as the time saving state set after the end of the big hit, “time saving B” which is disadvantageous to the player is set. The “big hit B” has a smaller number of rounds of the big hit game than the above “big hit A”, but the game state after the big hit is set to a time saving state that is advantageous to the player. However, "time saving B" which is disadvantageous to the player is set as compared with the time saving state "hour saving A" set when the "big hit A" is won.

  In other words, the jackpot B is an advantageous jackpot in which the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the type of the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot are greater than the above-mentioned "jackpot A". Disadvantaged to the elderly. That is, the “big hit B” is a big hit type that is more disadvantageous than the above “big hit A”. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 40 random numbers for which "big hit B" is selected. In this case, the rate at which "big hit B" is selected is 40%.

  “Big hit C” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds (R) as a big hit game, and the game state after the big hit end is set to a normal state (non-time saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the big hit, the “big hit C” is a big hit type that is disadvantageous for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 random numbers from which the "big hit C" is selected. In this case, the rate at which "big hit C" is selected is 50%.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, 15 rounds (R) of jackpot games (jackpots) are performed at a rate of 10% of the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). After the end, the time saving A) is selected, and a jackpot game of 5 rounds (R) (hour saving B after the end of the jackpot) is selected at a rate of 40%. In addition, a jackpot in which the game state after the end of the jackpot game shifts to the time saving state at a rate of 50% is selected.

  In the present embodiment, as a jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game is the largest (15 rounds (R)), and a time-saving state (hour saving A) that is advantageous after the end of the jackpot. ) Is set, the number of rounds (5 rounds (R)) to be executed during the jackpot as a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player next, the type of the time saving state set after the jackpot is completed, Are set to the jackpot type “Big hit B”, which is more disadvantageous to the player than “Big hit A”, and the jackpot type “Big hit C”, which is the most disadvantageous to the player because the time saving state is not set after the end of the jackpot. Although it is configured so that it is possible to set other jackpot types, for example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is the largest (15 rounds (R)), The jackpot type in which “hour saving B” is set and the number of rounds of the jackpot game are small (5 rounds (R)), but the jackpot type in which “hour saving A” is set as the time saving type and the number of rounds of the jackpot game May be the largest (15 rounds (R)) and the jackpot type for which the time reduction state is not set may be settable.

  In addition, as a concept of whether the set jackpot type is advantageous to the player, the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the game state set after the end of the jackpot as in this embodiment are comprehensively described. Considering the concept of the advantage and disadvantage, the concept of the advantage or disadvantage may be defined based only on the number of rounds of the jackpot game, or the advantage or disadvantage based only on the game state set after the end of the jackpot. The concept may be specified.

  Next, the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202fb2 used in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described with reference to FIG. 205 (c). FIG. 205 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202fb2. As shown in FIG. 205 (c), in the first hit type counter C2, if the random number value is any of “0 to 89”, the jackpot type is “big hit D” and the random number value is “90 to 99”. Is set to be "big hit E".

  The "big hit D" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds as a big hit game is 15 rounds (R), and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time reduction state (substantial number of times 10). Then, “time saving A” that is advantageous to the player is set as the time saving state set after the end of the big hit. That is, the "big hit D" is a big hit type having the same content as the "big hit A" described above, and is a big hit type most advantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 90 random numbers are selected for "big hit D". If it does, the rate at which "big hit D" is selected is 90%.

  "Big hit E" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds (R) as a big hit game, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a time-saving state (substantial number of times 10). Then, as the time saving state set after the end of the big hit, “time saving B” which is more disadvantageous to the player than “time saving A” is set. That is, the “big hit E” is a big hit type that is more disadvantageous than the “big hit D” described above. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 10 random numbers for which the "big hit E" is selected. If it does, the rate at which "big hit E" is selected is 10%.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, a jackpot game of 15 rounds (R) is executed, and the time saving state is always set after the end of the jackpot. ing. As a result, a jackpot game which is more advantageous to the player is provided by winning the jackpot by the special figure 2 lottery than by winning the jackpot by the special figure 1 lottery. The lottery of 2 special symbols is more advantageous for the player.

  In the present embodiment, five types of jackpots are used. However, the number of types is not limited thereto, and four or less types may be provided, or six or more types may be provided. In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same value of the first hit type counter C2, different big hit types may be selected. With this configuration, for example, in the case of a big hit with the second special symbol, by setting a big hit type in which the number of rounds is executed more, the hit with the second special symbol is more given to the player. Can be expected. Therefore, it is possible to make the winning in the high-probability game state more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high-probability state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel strongly that he wants to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer time.

  Also, the type of the jackpot type selected in the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is set. You may comprise so that only a range may differ. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value from being executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The second random number per table 202fc is a data table used for the same purpose as the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and is a value of the second random number counter C4. , The presence or absence of a winning is determined by referring to the second random number 7 table 202fc.

  In the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described embodiments, when a normal symbol has a low probability (a period in which the symbol is in a normal state), and when the symbol has a high probability that the probability of hitting the symbol is higher than the low probability (a normal symbol) And the number of values corresponding to the hit are set differently for each of the symbols. In this manner, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the winning probability is changed between a low probability of the ordinary symbol and a high probability of the ordinary symbol.

  In addition, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of operation patterns (opening operation patterns) of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a that are executed when the player wins the ordinary symbol (second symbol) can be set. This makes it possible to vary the timing of opening the ordinary electric accessory 3640a based on the hit of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol), so that the timing at which the ordinary electric accessory 3640a opens (the ball enters the second entrance 3640). (A timing at which it is possible to enter the ball) to suppress the game in which the ball is fired.

  Here, the contents of the second random number 7 table 202fc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number 7 table 202fc. As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the second random number 7 table 202fc is configured to be able to set “per-figure-per-A”, “per-figure-per-B”, and “out-of-range” as the second perimeter. In addition, the second hit type is defined based on the gaming state (normally high probability state of the symbol or the low probability state) and the acquired value of the second random number counter C4.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to “0”, “A per ordinary figure”, and “1”. "B per day" is specified, and "out of range" is specified in the range of "2-99". When the gaming state is a normal symbol high probability state (time saving state), the value of the second random number counter C4 is defined as “A per ordinary symbol” in the range of “0 to 79”, and “80 per ordinary symbol” is defined. In the range of "~ 98", "B per ordinary figure" is specified, and in "99", "out of range" is specified.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set as the gaming state, the probability of winning in the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is 2% (2/100). In a case where a winning is won, the system is configured such that “Private figure A” and “Public figure B” are selected at a rate of 50%.

  When the game state is the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is 99% (99/100), and the winning is achieved. In such a case, the configuration is such that “A per ordinary figure” is selected at a rate of about 80% (80/99) and “B per ordinary figure” is selected at a rate of about 20% (20/99). are doing.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is configured to have a higher probability of winning in the win than the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. The configuration is such that “hit A” is easily selected. In this way, by making the winning probability and the winning type of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) different according to the playing state, the player plays a game while expecting a more advantageous playing state to be set for the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3640 at the time of the second symbol winning is configured to be different depending on the gaming state and the hit type, and in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. An operation pattern that is more advantageous to the player when the player wins the second symbol in a high probability state of the normal symbol than in the case where the player wins the second symbol, that is, a ball enters the second entrance 3640. It is configured such that an action pattern that makes it easy to make a ball is set. As a result, winning in a high probability state of a normal symbol is set as a condition for giving a privilege advantageous to the player.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 206 (a), the contents of the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3640 executed during the high probability state of the ordinary symbol will be described. In the seventh embodiment, different operation patterns are set according to the winning type that has been won. If “A per ordinary figure” is set in the high probability state, the opening period is set to 0. When an operation pattern of 1 second (S), an opening period of 2 seconds (S), and an ending period of 3.5 seconds (S) is executed, and “B per ordinary figure” is set, the opening period is 0.1. An operation pattern of seconds (S), an open period of 2.5 seconds (S), and an ending period of 3 seconds (S) is executed.

  Regardless of which operation pattern is executed, if one ball enters the second entrance 3640 during the opening operation of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a (during the opening period setting), the closing condition Holds, and the closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a is executed. That is, in the seventh embodiment, as the conditions for terminating the open state of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a, a condition that is satisfied when a predetermined open period has been reached and a predetermined number of balls Conditions that are satisfied when a ball enters the mouth 3640 are set. As a result, when a lottery is won in the lottery of the second symbol (normal symbol), a large number of balls enter the second entrance 3640, and a bonus (prize ball) is excessively given to the player. Can be suppressed.

  Also, regardless of which operation pattern is executed, an ending period longer than a period (3 seconds) during which the ball flows down the second passage (delay passage) 660b is set. Therefore, even if a win is made consecutively per the regular figure, if the small figure is won by the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the previous regular figure, during the small win game, the next The situation in which the ball flowing down the second passage 660b based on the ordinary drawing wins the V winning device 650 can be reliably suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, by using the above-described configuration, based on a plurality of consecutive game results (general-purpose lottery results), the ball is prevented from passing through the specific area 650V during the small hit game at an unintended timing. It is configured so that an appropriate game is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the ball is continuously won per ordinary figure, the ball passes through the specific area 650 V during the small hit game. You may comprise so that it may become easy. In this case, for example, the opening type (0.1 seconds), the opening period (2 seconds), and the ending period (0.1 seconds) are set as the second type (common figure). (C per figure) can be set, and when the winning is won again at the next regular figure change that has won the regular figure C, the flow has flown into the second passage 660b during the hit game corresponding to the next regular figure change. The ball may pass through the specific area 650V during the small hitting game won in the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the ordinary drawing hit C.

  With such a configuration, a surprising game can be provided to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when such a playability is adopted, an effect during the race (FIG. 200 (b)) is executed in correspondence with C per ordinary figure, and thereafter, an effect that temporarily loses the race (FIG. 202 (a)). ), After the delay passage entrance switch 660e1 detects that a ball has flowed into the second passage 660b based on the next ordinary figure, a revival effect after losing the race is executed. It is good to configure as follows. As a result, it is possible to execute a surprising effect corresponding to an unexpected game for the player.

  Furthermore, there is provided a general figure pre-determination means capable of preliminarily determining the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained when passing through the through gate 67, and as a preliminary determination result corresponding to the reserved general figure winning information stored and stored, When it is determined that the regular drawing winning information that wins the regular drawing C and the regular drawing winning information that is won the regular drawing are continuously stored on a continuous basis, a plurality of consecutive regular drawing winnings are handled. An effect (continuous effect) may be configured to be executed. As described above, by performing the pre-reading process of the general drawing winning information, it is possible to set the production in a state where the lottery result of the general drawing lottery (the second symbol lottery) is determined in advance, so that the production effect is high. Can be performed.

  Note that, in the seventh embodiment, as a hit game executed when a winning is made per ordinary figure, the electric powered object 3640a is opened during a period in which a ball can enter the second entrance 3640. Although it is configured so that only the hit game is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is not possible to make the ball enter the second entrance 3640, but the ball flows into the second passage 660b. (For example, 1 second), the electric accessory 3640a may be set to the open state.

  The variation pattern 7 table 202fd is a data table used for the same purpose as the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments. In accordance with the result of the lottery and the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1, a variation pattern in which different variation times are set is defined.

  Here, the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd, and FIG. 208 (a) is defined by the first time reduction variation pattern table 202fd2 defined by the variation pattern 7 table 202fd. FIG. 208 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3 defined by the variation pattern 7 table 202fd. FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 208A, the contents of the first time-saving variation pattern table 202fd2 will be described. The first time-saving variation pattern table 202fd2 is a variation pattern table referred to when the time-saving state A (time-saving A) is set as the gaming state, and is a second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3 (time saving When the player wins a small win (for example, a small win C) that is disadvantageous to the player than the state B (the fluctuation pattern table referred to when the state B (hour saving B) is set), the V winning device 650 has The variation time is defined so that the variation time that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific region 650V is likely to be set.

  Here, the contents defined in the first time-saving variation pattern table 202fd2 will be specifically described. When the type of the special symbol is the special figure 1 and the lottery result is out of order, the acquired variation type counter CS1 Irrespective of the value of the fluctuation type, “extremely short out” (the fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern, and when the lottery result is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is "Ultra short hit" (variation time 0.5 second) is defined. That is, when the time reduction state A (time reduction A) is set, that is, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in a state where the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, the time is always 0.5 seconds. It is configured such that a fluctuation pattern is set.

  When the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the lottery result is out of order, regardless of the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern is “ultra short out” (variation time 0.5 seconds). ) Is specified, and if the lottery result is small hit A or small hit B, “long / small hit” (variation time of 3 seconds) is specified as a fluctuation pattern. (Variation time: 0.5 seconds) ". In addition, when the lottery result is a big hit, when the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 149”, “small jackpot (variation time of 1 second)” is defined as a variation pattern, In the case of the range of “150 to 198”, “middle and large hits (fluctuation time of 30 seconds)” is defined as the fluctuation pattern.

  With this configuration, when the first time-saving variation pattern table 202fd2 is referred to, that is, in a state in which the time saving A is set as the gaming state, a variation pattern in which the variation time is 3 seconds is set. When the win A or the small win B is won, the ball is configured to easily pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650. On the other hand, when the small hit C in which the fluctuation pattern with the fluctuation time of 0.5 second is set is won, immediately after the ball enters the second entrance 3640 (the lottery of the second special symbol is executed). Shortly after), the opening operation of the V prize device 650 ends before the ball flowing down the second flow path tb is discharged from the second flow path tb. Can hardly pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, after the big hit game executed based on the fact that the ball has passed the specific area 650V during the small hit game corresponding to the small hit C, the game state is set to the player as the game state. The disadvantageous normal state is configured to be set, and after the big hit game executed based on winning of other small hits (small hit A, small hit B), the game state is set as the game state. The time-saving state (time-saving A or time-saving B) that is advantageous to the player is set.

  As described above, when the time saving A is set as the gaming state, the fluctuation pattern is set with reference to the first time reduction fluctuation pattern table 202fd2, and the small hit that is advantageous to the player by the set fluctuation pattern is set. When a winner is won by type, a jackpot game via a small jackpot game is easily executed, so that an advantageous gaming state is easily set even after the next big jackpot game ends, and the player can play the game with confidence. Can be.

  Next, the contents of the second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208B is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3. The second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when the time-saving B is set as the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 208 (b), the second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is set to the above-mentioned first time-saving variation pattern table 202fd2 when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. The difference is that the variation pattern (variation time) is different, and the other elements are the same.

  Specifically, when the lottery result is small hit A, “long / small hit” (variation time of 3 seconds) is defined as a fluctuation pattern, and when the lottery result is small hit B, “short / small hit” (variation time) 0.5 seconds), and in the case of the small hit C, if the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 169”, the variation pattern is “long and small hits” (variation time of 3 seconds). ) Is defined, and when the value is in the range of “170 to 198”, “short / small hit” (variation time 0.5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern.

  That is, when the second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is referred to, that is, when the time-saving B is set as the gaming state, the lottery of the second special symbol is more easily executed than in the normal state. Since the variation pattern of the variation time of 3 seconds is set when the player wins C, the normal state is set as the gaming state after the end of the next big hit game, compared to the state in which the time saving A is set. Become.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, in the case where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the lottery of the second special symbol in which the jackpot game is more easily executed based on the lottery result than the first special symbol is set. A time-saving state that is easier to execute, and a game state (time-saving state) in which a gaming state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player after the next big-hit is easily set as the time-saving state, and a next big-hit end A game state (time saving B) in which a game state (time saving state) which is later advantageous to the player is harder to be set than the time saving A can be set.

  With this configuration, when the gaming state (time saving A) that is most advantageous to the player is set, the gaming state shifts to the normal state only by executing one big hit game. Since this can be suppressed, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Further, even when the time saving B, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving A, is set, the probability that the time saving A is set after the end of the big hit game is increased as compared with the case where the normal state is set. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of setting the time saving A.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 208 (b), in the seventh embodiment, even if the small hit C in which the normal state is set as the game state after the big hit game is won, the ball is the V winning device 650. It is configured to select a fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds) that is difficult to pass through the specific area 650V within the area. Can also interest the player. In this case, for example, it may be configured to notify the player that the small hit C has been won, and then execute an effect to inspire whether the ball passes through the specific area 650V. With such a configuration, a situation in which a game state disadvantageous to the player is set because the ball did not pass through the specific area 650V despite the fact that the small win was a disadvantage for the player. Can be realized by the player, and satisfaction can be provided.

  Further, a means is provided for measuring the number of times of winning a small hit that is disadvantageous to the player (the number of times the small hit C is won), and the number of times of avoiding the execution of the big hit game based on the small hit C (the small hit of the small hit C) (The number of times the ball did not pass through the specific area 650V during the game) may be displayed. This allows the player to more specifically understand that a situation in which a disadvantageous gaming state is set for the player can be avoided, and determines whether the currently set gaming state is time-saving A. It is possible to make it easier for the player to predict whether the time is B or not.

  In the seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 208 (a) and (b), a data table (variation pattern) referred to when a variation pattern of a special symbol is selected according to the set time saving state. By changing the table), a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V (time saving A) and a game state in which the ball is difficult to pass (time saving B) in the case of winning a small hit which is advantageous to the player are shown. It is configured to be settable. In other words, a game state where the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V (time saving B) and a game state where the ball is hard to pass (time saving A) can be set when a small win that is disadvantageous to the player is won. ing.

  In addition, in the seventh embodiment, a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V at the time of winning a small hit, and a game state in which the ball is difficult to pass according to the set time saving state type (hour saving A, time saving B). The state and are settable. More specifically, when the time saving A is set as the gaming state, the first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2 is referred to when the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected. When selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the first time reduction variation pattern table 202fd2, 90% at the time of the small hit win (100% at the time of the small hit A win and 100% at the time of the small hit B win). %), The variation time in which the ball can pass through the specific region 650V is set.

  On the other hand, when the time saving B is set as the gaming state, the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is referred to when the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected. When a variation pattern of a special symbol is selected with reference to the second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3, approximately 28.5% at the time of the small hit winning (100% at the time of the small hitting A winning and the small hitting C winning). (Approximately 85% of the time), the variation time during which the ball can pass through the specific region 650V is set.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, the variation pattern (fluctuation time) set at the time of the small hitting win is configured to be different according to the type of the set time saving state, and at the time of the small hitting win. It is configured such that the rate at which the variation pattern that allows the sphere to pass through the region 650V is selected. Therefore, the probability of executing the big hit game based on the small hit winning during the time saving state can be varied depending on the type of the set time saving state.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, as the transition condition for transitioning the time saving state to the normal state (time saving end condition), the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 10 times is set as the transition condition. When the time saving B is set as the state type, the shift condition can be more easily established when the time saving B is set than when the small hitting is won because the big hit game is hardly executed.

  In the seventh embodiment, as described above, the ball can easily pass through the specific area 650V at the time of the small hit win, which is advantageous to the player, and the ball can easily pass through the specific area 650V at the time of the small hit win. The time-saving time A, which is a state, and the time-saving time B, which is a time-saving state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650 V at the time of the small hit win, which is disadvantageous to the player, and the ball hardly passes through the specific area 650 V at the time of the small hit win. Is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a small hitting type is set to one, and a variation pattern that allows a ball to pass through a specific area 650V when a small hitting is won is simply set. The variation pattern table to be referred to may be varied according to the type of the set time saving state so that only the ratio is varied.

  Further, depending on the type of the time reduction state to be set, a transition condition (time reduction termination condition) for transitioning the time reduction state to the normal state may be set differently, for example, a time reduction state advantageous to the player. A time-saving termination condition (for example, a time-saving termination condition that is satisfied with a small number of special symbol changes) is easier to be established when the time-saving time (A) is set than in a time-saving state (for example, time-saving B) that is disadvantageous to the player. May be set. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the degree of expectation that the jackpot game is executed during the period in which the time saving state is set, from being greatly different depending on the type of the set time saving state. Even if is set, a game can be enthusiastically performed for a jackpot game.

  Furthermore, since the game content expected during the time reduction period can be made different according to the type of the time reduction state set, specifically, the time reduction end condition is easily established, and the specific area 650 V is set at the time of the small hit winning. When the time saving state in which the ball easily passes is set, the player is expected to win the small hit during the time saving state, the condition for ending the time saving is difficult to be satisfied, and the specific area 650V is set to the ball when the small hit is won. Is set in a time-saving state where it is difficult to pass, it is possible to expect that the ball will pass through the specific area 650 V in the small hits won during the time-saving state, so that the player can get tired of the game early. Can be suppressed.

  The small hit type selection 7 table 202fe is a data table used for the same purpose as the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments. It is referred to when selecting a small hit type, and is configured such that a different small hit type is selected according to the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5.

  Here, the content of the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe will be described with reference to FIG. 206 (b). FIG. 206B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection seven table 202fe. As shown in FIG. 206B, in the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe, three types of small hits A to C are selected as the small hit types of the second special symbol according to the value of the small hit type counter C5. It is stipulated as follows. Specifically, when the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 is any one of “0 to 19”, the small hit type is “small hit A (10R during V passing, 10 times with a time saving of 10 times big hit)”. And the small hit type in the case of any one of “20 to 89” is “small hit B (10R in the time of passing V, 10 times in real time) and in the case of any of“ 90 to 99 ” Is "small hit C (10R when passing V, real time-saving big hit)".

  When the big hit based on the winning of "small hit A" ends, "time saving A" is set as the gaming state, and when the big hit based on the winning of "small hit B" ends, "hour saving B" is set as the gaming state. Then, when the big hit based on the winning of the "small hit C" ends, the "normal state" is set as the gaming state.

  Here, in each of the small hit types (small hit A to small hit C), when a ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the small hit game, the game is executed after the small hit game ends. The type of the jackpot game is set. In the case of “small hit A”, a 10R real time saving 10 times big hit is set, and after the small hit A is executed, a big hit in which the variable prize device 65 is set to the 10 round (R) open state is executed, Thereafter, the time saving state is configured so that 10 time saving games (a period until the change of the special symbol is 100 times in total or the change of the second special symbol is executed 10 times) are set.

  In the case of “small hit B”, a 10-round (R) real time saving 10 times big hit is set, and after executing the small hit B, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 10 round (R) open state. A jackpot is executed, and thereafter, 10 time saving games (a period until the special symbol changes 100 times in total or the second special symbol changes 10 times) are set as the time saving state. Is configured. In the case of “small hit C”, a 10R time-saving no-big hit is set, and after the small hit C is executed, a big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 10 round (R) open state is executed. After the jackpot game, the time saving state is not set, and the normal state is set.

  As described above, the content of the big hit game executed after the small hit game ends and the game state set after the big hit game can be varied depending on the selected small hit type.

  More specifically, the "small hit A" is set to a time saving state (time saving A) in which the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is large (10R) and the player is most advantageous after the big hit game ends. The small hit B is set to be the same as the small hit A described above, although the small hit B has a large number of rounds executed in the big hit game (10R) and is set to be the same as the small hit A described above. Since the time saving state set later is set to “time saving B” in which the time saving A is more disadvantageous to the player, it is set as a small hit that is more disadvantageous than the small hit A. The "small hit C" is set as the most unfavorable small hit for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is large (10R), but the time saving state is not set after the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, regardless of the type of the winning small hit, the big hit game executed when the ball passes the specific area 650V during the small hit game is a round game of 10 rounds (R). In this way, during the jackpot game executed at the occasion of the small hit, by grasping the number of round games (the number of rounds) executed as the big hit game, the player can easily grasp the type of the small hit which has been won this time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to set a different number of rounds of big hit games for each small hit type. As a result, the degree of advantage with respect to each small hit type can be greatly different, so that a game can be played while expecting the player to win the most advantageous small hit type.

  In the present embodiment, as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of times of change of the second special symbol is 10 (first end condition) or the number of times of change of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is A total of 100 times (second end condition) are set. With this configuration, the jackpot is won in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is one or more, and when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, the first special symbol (special figure 1) Even if the fluctuation of ()) is executed, the time saving state does not end. Further, when the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed, the second end condition described above is satisfied and the time saving state can be ended. (Special symbol) can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times.

  Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. 196, of a winning type that has been won during the time saving state (during a high probability state of a normal symbol) and a ball flow to the second entrance 3640. As described above with reference to FIG. 196, in the seventh embodiment, a win is made per ordinary drawing, and the ordinary electric auditors hand 3640 a is changed to a protruding state (see FIG. 198), so that it is displayed on the ordinary electric auditors hand 3640 a. When the ball flows down, a state where the ball easily enters the second entrance 3640 is established.

  Then, when the closing condition of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a is satisfied, the ordinary electric accessory 3640a performs the closing operation, and the ball flowing down on the ordinary electric accessory 3640a at that time is immediately below the ordinary electric accessory 3640a. It flows into the provided first flow path ta or the second flow path tb. Here, the sphere that has flowed down the first flow path ta reaches the V winning device 650 provided below the flow path unit 660 through a flow-down period of 0.5 second, and has flowed down the second flow path tb. Arrives at the V winning device 650 after a three-second flow period.

  Next, a case where a ball enters the second entrance 3640 as a closing condition of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a will be described. When the ball enters the second entrance 3640 and the closing condition of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a is satisfied, the closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a is executed and the second special symbol lottery is executed. Is done. Then, the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol is determined according to the result of the lottery of the second special symbol. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 208, in the present embodiment, an advantageous time saving (hour saving A) which is advantageous to the player as the time saving state, and an unfavorable time saving (hour saving B) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous time saving ) Can be set, and different fluctuation patterns are set according to the set time saving state.

  The opening scenario 7 table 202ff indicates that the game content (opening scenario) of the hit game (big hit game, small hit game) to be executed when the winning (big hit, small hit) is won in the special symbol lottery, In the data table defined in correspondence with the above, when a win is won, an open scenario corresponding to the set hit type is read and a hit game is executed.

  Here, the contents of the release scenario 7 table 202ff will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the release scenario 7 table 202ff. The open scenario 7 table 202ff is a prize device (variable prize device) in which a ball can enter in a bonus game (big hit game, small hit game) executed when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit or a small hit. 65, operation data (opening scenario) for differentiating the opening operation of the V winning device 650) according to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type).

  As described above, the prize device (variable prize device 65, V prize device 650) and the opening operation content (open scenario) that are opened according to the winning result (big hit or small hit) and the hit type (big hit type, small hit type). ) Makes it possible to set the benefit game in multiple stages, so that even after winning a big hit or a small hit, it is possible for the player to enjoy the type of hit that has been won. it can.

  The opening scenario 7 table 202ff includes a start interval period during the hit game (a period from the start of the hit game to the first opening operation of the prize device) corresponding to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type) that has been won. ), The opening operation mode of the winning device (the type of the opening device to be opened, the number of seconds of one opening operation (round game), the total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), and the interval period between rounds (round game) And the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (until the start of a new special symbol change). Period)) are specified.

  More specifically, the winning type corresponds to “big hit A, D, E”, “2 seconds” as the start interval period, and “variable winning device 65” as the opening operation mode of the winning device for “15 rounds”. In the opening operation mode in which one round game is continuously released for “29 seconds”, “1 second” is defined as an inter-round interval period and “4 seconds” is defined as an end interval period. Therefore, when the jackpot type wins the jackpot of the jackpots A, D, and E, the jackpot game in which the variable prize device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and many prize balls are paid out to the player. It will be a jackpot game. Further, when the jackpot types are the jackpots A and D, the jackpots A and D are the most advantageous for the player because the time-saving state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game, is set. It will be a jackpot where a certain privilege is given.

  Next, corresponding to the hit types B and C, "2 seconds" is set as the start interval period, and "variable prize device 65" is set as "5 rounds" as the opening operation mode of the prize device as one round game. In the opening operation mode in which “continuously 29 seconds” is opened, “1 second” is defined as the interval period between rounds, and “4 seconds” is defined as the end interval period. Therefore, when the jackpot type wins the jackpots B and C, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for five rounds is executed, and the jackpots A, D, and E are given to the player. A jackpot game in which approximately one third of the prize ball of the corresponding jackpot game is paid out.

  Next, corresponding to the small hits A to C, the start interval period is "0.1 seconds", and the opening operation of the winning device is to open the "V winning device 650" in the "first round". If the ball passes through the specific area 650V (V passing) during the opening operation of the first round (including 0.5 seconds set as the ball clearance time after the opening operation is completed), the “variable The opening operation of the prize device 65 is performed in the second to eleventh rounds, and as a single round game, the first round is continuously opened for 1.5 seconds, and the second to eleventh rounds is continuously opened for 29 seconds. The opening operation mode to be performed is defined as “5 seconds” after the end of the first round, “1 second” otherwise, and “4 seconds” as the end interval period. That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hit game, the big hit game for 10 rounds is thereafter executed.

  In the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, the big hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened from the first round is configured to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A jackpot type (for example, jackpot Z) in which the same open scenario as the hits A to C may be set may be provided. With this configuration, when the big hit Z is set, the V winning device 650 is operated in the same opening operation mode as the small hit in the first round. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the symbol has been won in a big hit or a small hit.

  In this case, since the jackpot game has already been executed, even if the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the opening operation of the V winning device 650 in the first round of the jackpot Z. In this case, the second and subsequent round games are executed. Therefore, when the big hit game in which the opening operation mode similar to the small hit game is set is executed, the effect shown in FIG. 201 (b) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is good to configure. Thereby, the game result of this time can make the player think that the big hit game is executed by the ball passing through the specific area 650V during the small hit game.

  In addition, the effect shown in FIG. 201 (b) can be executed when the specific area 650V is actually passed during the small hit game and when the big hit Z is won. As a result, it is possible to increase the ratio at which the effect result (see FIG. 201 (b)) that is advantageous to the player is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the effect during the race.

  It should be noted that, in the case of winning a big hit type (for example, big hit Z) in which the opening operation mode similar to the small hit game is set, and in the case of winning various small hits, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In order to make the same effect mode be executed as the variable display (variable effect), and to make it difficult for the player to identify the lottery result by the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b showing the special symbol lottery result. In addition, the stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are made different, or the stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol are synchronized. In order to make the display of the third symbol more difficult for the player to identify in the stop display timing or in the period before and after the stop display timing than in other periods, the display mode and the display area are set. At the variable display or at the stop display timing of the special symbol, the effect symbol displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is changed from the third symbol to an ordinary symbol for effect corresponding to the variable display of the ordinary symbol. It is good to switch. Thus, it is possible to prevent the lottery result from being easily grasped in the stop display mode of the third symbol as to whether the lottery result is a small hit or a big hit.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the main control device 110 RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203 (b), the RAM 203 according to the seventh embodiment includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, a time saving total counter 203fa, a big hit start flag 203fb, It has a big hit flag 203o, a small hit start flag 203fc, a small hit middle flag 203p, a V passing big hit type storage area 203fd, a V flag 203fe, a time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff, a V passing flag 203fg, and another memory area 203z. . The configuration (flag) of the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name except for “7” added to make it possible to identify the electrical configuration used in the seventh embodiment) , Counters, and areas) are the same as those in the above-described embodiments with respect to their uses, and thus detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  The time reduction total counter 203fa is a counter for counting the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed during the time reduction state and counting up to 100 times. In this case, the time saving medium-sum counter 203fa is set to 0, which is an initial value, when a jackpot is won (see S10018 in FIG. 215), and is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot (see S10614 in FIG. 222). Then, every time the change of the special symbol ends during the time saving state, 1 is subtracted (see S10202 of FIG. 217). The value of the total time reduction counter 203fa is referred to when determining whether or not the end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied. When it is determined that the counter value has been reduced to 0 (S10207 in FIG. 217). : Yes), the normal state is set as the game state (S10208 in FIG. 217).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the time reduction state reaches 100 (first termination condition), or the second special symbol during the time reduction state. The time saving state is configured to end when any of the conditions that the number of times the symbol has changed reaches 10 times (the second end condition) is satisfied, and whether the first end condition is satisfied is satisfied. In order to judge the number, the total counter 203fa during time reduction is used. It should be noted that the value of the total time reduction counter 203fa is notified to the sound ramp control device 113 by a remaining time reduction command (see S10205 in FIG. 217). The remaining time reduction command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113 every time the value of the total number of hours reduced counter 203fa is changed.

  Each time the value of the total number of hours reduction counter 203fa is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 uses the remaining time reduction number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to execute the remaining fluctuation times until the first end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied. Can be obtained. As a result, the number of remaining working hours managed by the gaming state storage area 223fe of the sound ramp control device 113 is shifted from the actual remaining variation number counted by the total saving time counter 203fa of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it has, the shift can be corrected by the remaining time reduction command received next.

  The sound ramp control device 113 manages the number of remaining working hours based on the remaining working hours command, but the remaining working hours command corresponding to the value of the above-described total hours saving counter 203fa, that is, the first working hours state, The information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied is not transmitted to the display control device 114. This is because, when a normal game is being played, the time-saving state is shifted to the normal state by satisfying the second time-saving state second ending condition. The situation in which the second end condition is satisfied in a state where the number of remaining fluctuations until the condition is satisfied is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the time-saving state ends is suppressed.

  The jackpot start flag 203fb is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the jackpot game. When the fluctuation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a big hit stops, the big hit start flag 203fb is set to ON (S10017 in FIG. 215). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203fb is on and it is determined that the jackpot start timing has been reached, it is set to off (S10603 in FIG. 222). The jackpot start flag 203fb is set to OFF in an initial state, and is configured to be backed up and to maintain a state immediately before the power is turned off when a power loss or the like occurs.

  The big hit flag 203o is a flag indicating that a big hit game is being played. It is set to ON at the timing when the change of the special symbol whose determination result is the big hit is stopped (S10017 in FIG. 215). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (when it is determined that the game of the round number corresponding to the set jackpot type has ended), it is set to OFF (S10617 in FIG. 222). The big hit flag 203o is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like is backed up and held. It is configured to: The big hit flag 203o has the same function as the big hit flag 203o used in the first embodiment.

  The small hit start flag 203fc is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is the small hit is stopped (S10304 in FIG. 218). It is determined that the small hitting flag 203fc is on, and if it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hitting game, it is set to off (S10703 in FIG. 223). The small hit start flag 203fc is a flag which is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear or the like. When a power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the power failure or the like is backed up and held. It is configured to be.

  The small hit flag 203p is a flag indicating that a small hit game is being played. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is the small hit is stopped (see S10304 in FIG. 218). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), the game is set to off (see S10717 of FIG. 223). The small hit flag 203p is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as a RAM clear state. When a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. It is configured to be.

  The V-passage jackpot type storage area 203fd indicates that when the small hitting game is being executed, the ball that has won the V prize device 650 passes through the specific area 650V (the detection switch (when the ball passes through the specific area 650V is detected). (Not shown)) is a storage area in which data for determining the jackpot type set in the case of detection) is stored. The V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd stores a data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined small hit type when the change of the special symbol whose determination result is the small hit stops (FIG. 218). S10302). When the ball flows down the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 and the ball is detected by the detection switch, the V flag 203fe corresponding to the big hit type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing big hit type storage area 203fd. Is set to ON. At the end of the small hitting game, the data value stored in the V passing big hit type storage area 203fd is cleared. The V-passage jackpot type storage area 203fd is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as a RAM clear state. When a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. It is configured to be held by.

  The V flag 203fe is set to the big hit type corresponding to the type of the small hit game being executed when the ball flows down the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game and the ball is detected by the detection switch. The corresponding flag is set to ON. At the end of the small hitting game, it is determined whether or not the V flag 203fe is on (see S10712 in FIG. 223), and if it is determined that the V flag 203fe is on (S10712 in FIG. 223: Yes), it is turned on. The jackpot type to be executed is determined based on the set flag, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game (open scenario based on the jackpot type) is set (S10713 in FIG. 223). The V flag 203fe is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. It is configured as follows.

  The time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is a counter for counting the number of times the second special symbol changes executed during the time saving state up to 10 times. This time saving medium / low special 2 counter 203ff is set to 0 which is an initial value when a big hit is won (see S10018 in FIG. 215), and is set to 10 at the end of the big hit (see S10614 in FIG. 222). Then, when the change of the second special symbol ends during the time saving state, 1 is subtracted (see S10204 of FIG. 217). The value of the time saving medium time special 2 counter 203ff is referred to when it is determined whether or not the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. When it is determined that the counter value has been reduced to 0 (see FIG. 217). S10206: Yes), the normal state is set as the gaming state (S10208 in FIG. 217).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the time reduction state reaches 100 (first termination condition), or the second special symbol during the time reduction state. The time-saving state is configured to end when any of the conditions that the number of times the symbol has changed reaches 10 times (second end condition) is satisfied, and whether the second end condition is satisfied is determined. In order to judge the time, the special counter 2ff 203m is used. It should be noted that the value of the time reduction medium time special counter 203ff is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a remaining time reduction number command (see S10205 in FIG. 217). The remaining time reduction command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 each time the value of the time reduction special time 2 counter 203ff is changed.

  Note that the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of remaining working hours based on the remaining working hours command, however, the remaining working hours command corresponding to the value of the above-mentioned time saving medium 2 counter 203ff, that is, the number of remaining working hours, (2) Information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied is transmitted to the display control device 114. This is because, when a normal game is being played, the time saving state is shifted to the normal state when the second end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. This is for displaying the number of remaining fluctuations until the time saving state ends on the third symbol display device 81 to provide an easy-to-understand game.

  The V passing flag 203fg is a flag used to determine a state in which the V flag 203fe is set to ON during the small hitting game, and is set to ON when the V flag 203fe is set to ON. Is done. In the present embodiment, it is set to ON in the V passage process (see FIG. 221) corresponding to the ball that first passed the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game (S10507 in FIG. 221).

  Then, in the V passage processing (see FIG. 221), it is determined whether the V passage flag 203fg is set to ON (S10501 in FIG. 221). If it is determined that the V passage flag 203fg is set to ON (S10501 in FIG. 221: Yes). ), V10 processing (see FIG. 221) is skipped from S10501 to S10508. Thereby, when a plurality of balls pass through the specific area 650V during one small hitting game (a detection switch (not shown) capable of detecting a ball passing through the specific area 650V) detects a plurality of balls. ), Only the V passing process corresponding to the ball detected first is executed. Therefore, the processing executed during the small hit game can be simplified, and the V-pass command is transmitted to the voice ramp control device 113 a plurality of times, so that the V-pass management on the voice ramp control device 113 side is complicated. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 210 and FIG. 211, a description will be given of the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 210 is a transition diagram schematically showing a flow of a game state performed based on a lottery result of a special symbol, and FIG. 211 is a schematic diagram showing a flow of operations of various devices executed during the small hit game. 5 is a timing chart schematically shown.

  In the seventh embodiment, a normal state in which a left-hitting game in which a ball is fired aiming at the left area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 195) and a lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed, and a game board 13 is a right-handed game in which a ball is fired aiming at the right side area, and a time-saving state in which a lottery of a second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed can be set. The lottery of two special symbols is configured to make it easier to execute the jackpot game.

  Further, the time-saving state is set to one of a time-saving state A (time-saving A) that is advantageous to the player and a time-saving state B (time-saving B) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving state A. ing. Here, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed in a state in which the time saving state A (hour saving A) is set, the normal state is not set (is difficult to be set) after the end of the jackpot game. I have. With this configuration, once the time-saving state A (time-saving A) is set, the normal state is not set as the game state unless at least two jackpot games are executed, so that a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is provided. Can be built.

  As shown in FIG. 210, in a state where the normal state is set, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed, and when the special figure 1 lottery is won, the big hit is won. If the jackpot is "big jackpot A" (10% of big jackpot), after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state A (hour jackpot A) is set as the game state, and it is "big jackpot B" (40% of jackpot). In this case, the time saving state B (time saving B) is set as the gaming state after the big hit game, and the normal state is set as the gaming state after the big hit game is finished if the big hit C (50% of the big hit) is set. You.

  In addition, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed during the normal state and the big hit is won or the big hit game is executed based on the small hit win, the normal state is set after the big hit game ends. Make up. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally executing the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the normal state.

  In the state where the time saving state A (hour saving A) is set, the special drawing 2 lottery is mainly executed. In this special drawing 2 lottery, as described with reference to FIG. 205 (c), if a jackpot is won, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends, so the time saving state A (time saving A) If a jackpot is won during the game, the normal state is not set after the jackpot game ends.

  In addition, even when the small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, the fluctuation pattern defined in the first time reduction fluctuation pattern table 202fd2 referred to during the time reduction state A (hour reduction A) is set. When the small hit type “small hit C” in which the normal state is set after the big hit game ends, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650. Therefore, when the time reduction state A (time reduction A) is set, a plurality of jackpot games can be executed before the game state is set to the normal state again. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the advantageous game state ends immediately even though the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. it can.

  In the state where the time saving state A is set, if the time saving ending condition is satisfied (if the special figure 2 is changed ten times), the time saving state is ended and the normal state is set. However, in the time saving state, a small hit is won with a probability of about 1/2, and a small hit game in which a ball can pass through a specific area 650V is executed in 80% of the time, so that the game is continued. As long as the normal game in which the right-handed game is performed is performed, the jackpot game can be executed before the time saving end condition is satisfied. On the other hand, in the case of executing a game in which the right-handed game is not continuously performed in order to pass the ball to the specific area 650V when the specific small hit type is won, the special figure 2 change frequency is increased to 10 times. By reaching, the state can be shifted to the normal state. As a result, a penalty can be imposed on a player who has performed an inappropriate game during the reduced working hours.

  When the time-saving state A (time-saving A) is set and the small hit A (20%) is won, after the big hit game based on the small-hit winning is executed, the time-saving state A (time-saving A) is again executed. Is set, and when the small hit B (70%) is won, the time saving state B (time saving B) is set after the big hit game based on the small hit winning is executed. When the small hit C (10%) is won, a short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is set as shown in FIG. 208A, so that the specific area 650V is set during the small hit game. The ball does not pass.

  Further, when a jackpot is won in a state where the time saving state B (hour saving B) is set, the big jackpot D (90%) and the large jackpot E (10%), as in the above-described time saving state A (hour saving A). Is set. When a small win is won, the second time reduction variation pattern table 202fd3 (see FIG. 208 (b)) is referred to, so that the ball passes through the specific area 650V at the small hit A or the small hit C. ing.

  Therefore, when the small hit A (20%) is won, the time saving state A (hour saving A) is set after the big hit game based on the small hit winning is executed, and when the small hit C is won, After the big hit game based on the small hit winning is executed, the normal state is set. Further, similarly to the time saving state A (time saving A), when the time saving end condition is satisfied (when the special figure 2 is changed ten times), the time saving state ends and the normal state is set. Make up.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the operation flow of various devices during the small hit game will be described. FIGS. 211 (a) to (f) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of various components during the small hit game. As shown in FIGS. 211 (a) to (f), when the special figure variation display in which the small hit is won by the control processing of the main control device 110 is executed, the display control device 114 displays the third symbol display device 81. The effect during the race (see FIGS. 199 (b) to 202 (a)) is executed on the screen. Then, when t1 (0.1 second) has elapsed after the start of the small hitting game, the V winning opening solenoid (not shown) is driven for 1.5 seconds according to a predetermined scenario (see FIG. 209).

  The ball that has flowed down the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 is detected by a detection switch (not shown), and is detected for 4 seconds (V valid period t5) 1 second after the small hitting game is started. When the switch detects the ball, the big hit game is executed after the small hit game ends, and when the opening period t6 (2 seconds) elapses after the big hit game is started, the first round game is started and the specific winning opening is started. 65a is opened.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the normal state, the time-saving state A, and the time-saving state B can be set as the gaming state, and the case where the time-saving state A is set and the time-saving state B are set. The configuration is such that the data table to be referred to when setting the special symbol change pattern is different from the case where the change is made.

  Then, when the time saving state A is set, when a small hit (small hit C) which is disadvantageous for the player is won, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650 V during the small hit game. It is configured such that a fluctuation pattern is set. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 196, when the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed during the time saving state, the flow path (second flow) that can pass through the specific area 650V is used. The fluctuation time (0.5 second) set when the small hit C is won is shorter than the period (3 seconds) required for the ball to flow down the path tb) and the ball passes through the second flow path tb. ) And the time (1.6 seconds) from the start of the small hitting game to the end of the opening period of the V winning device 650 is configured to be shorter.

  Further, when the time saving state B is set, when a small hit (small hit C) which is disadvantageous for the player is won, the ball is changed so that the ball can pass through the specific area 650 V during the small hit game. It is configured so that a pattern is set. With this configuration, even when the time-saving state is set as the gaming state, if the data table referred to when setting the fluctuation pattern is different, the degree of advantage to the player is greatly different. Can be made.

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 212 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 212, the RAM 223 of the seventh embodiment has a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, a change start flag 223fa, a stop type selection flag 223fb, an effect counter 223h, and a SW valid time. It has a storage area 223fd, a fluctuation time counter 223fd, a game state storage area 223fe, a delay path state flag 223ff, a length fluctuation flag 223fg, a second ball entry flag 223fh, a normal drawing hit flag 223fi, and a memory area 223z. The configuration (flag, counter, area) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments is the same as that in each of the above-described embodiments in terms of its application, and thus detailed description is omitted. .

  The change start flag 223fa is a flag for indicating that information (change pattern command) indicating that the change of the special symbol is started is set, and is set to ON when the change of the special symbol is started. Things. The variation start flag 223fa is based on information included in the variation pattern command received by the voice lamp control device 113, and indicates whether the current special symbol variation is a variation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or a second special symbol. It is configured to be able to determine whether the fluctuation is (special figure 2).

  Specifically, the fluctuation start flag 223fa receives a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223fa1 which is set to ON when a fluctuation pattern command indicating the special figure 1 fluctuation is received, and a fluctuation pattern command indicating the special figure 2 fluctuation. And the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa2 which is set to ON in the event of the above.

  Then, when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S12001 in FIG. 226: Yes), the variation start flag 223fa corresponding to the symbol type information included in the received variation pattern command is set to ON. (Refer to S12002 of FIG. 226), it is turned off when the variable display is set on the third symbol display device 81 (refer to S5102 or S5108 of FIG. 231). When any of the variation start flags 223fa is set to ON, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is used in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 225) of the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221. Inside, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223fb is a flag for indicating that a command (stop type command) including information for indicating the stop type of the current special symbol change has been received from the main control device 110, and the main control device 110 Is set to ON when a stop type command transmitted from is received (see S12005 in FIG. 226), and is turned off when a stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 231). . When the stop type selection flag 223fb is set to ON, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The game state storage area 223fe is an area for storing a game state corresponding to the state command when a state command related to the game state is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (game state) stored in the game state storage area 223fe, the sound game controller 113 can identify the current game state. In the present embodiment, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores data in the gaming state storage area 223i when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off because the data is deleted when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. The information indicating the current game state is also deleted. However, in the present embodiment, since the state command is set in the start-up process of the main control device (see FIG. 51) executed after the power is turned on (S2115 in FIG. 51), the game state storage area 223fe immediately after the power is restored. Is stored with information indicating the game state set before the power was turned off. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the audio lamp control device 113 can always identify the gaming state.

  The status command output from main controller 110 is determined by command determination processing 7 (see S4182 in FIG. 226) of voice lamp controller 113 to determine whether or not the command has been received. Although the processing in which the gaming state included in the state command is stored in the gaming state storage area 223fe is executed, in FIG. 226, the processing is performed according to another command (S12019 in FIG. 226). ), And a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The delay passage state flag 223ff is a flag for determining the state of the sphere flowing down the second passage (delay passage) tb in the passage unit 660. Here, the contents of the delay path state flag 223ff will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the delay path state flag 223ff. As shown in FIG. 213, the delay path state flag 223ff is configured with a 1-byte storage area, and is configured to be able to specify the spherical flow state of the delay channel by the state of the lower 4 bits.

  Specifically, the delay passage entering ball switch 660e1 for detecting the ball flowing into the second passage (delay passage) 660b is set to OFF, and the delay passage discharge detecting the ball flowing from the second passage (delay passage) 660b. In a state where the switch 660e2 is set to off, that is, in a state where the ball does not pass through the second path (delay path) 660b, the lower 4 bits become “0001” (described as “00” in FIG. 213), In a state where the delay path entrance switch 660e1 is set to ON and the delay path discharge switch 660e2 is set to OFF, that is, in a state where the ball passes through the second path (delay path) 660b, the lower 4 bits Becomes “0010” (denoted as “01” in FIG. 213), the delay path entering switch 660e1 is set to off, and the delay path discharging switch 660e2 is turned on. Have been set state, i.e., in the state where the balls are discharged from the second passage (delay path) in 660b, the lower four bits is "0011" (in FIG. 213 as "02").

  Here, the delay passage entering ball switch 660e1 and the delay passage discharging switch 660e2 are both constituted by proximity sensors capable of detecting a ball flowing down the second flow path tb formed in the second passage 660b. It is configured to be turned on when an object is continuously detected for a predetermined period. Then, when the object is not detected for a predetermined period, it is configured to be turned off.

  Here, when the setting status of the lower 4 bits of the delay path state flag 223ff is “0001”, “0010”, or “0011”, the ball normally flows down the second path (delay path) 660. Is determined, the state is determined to be a normal ball flowing down state.

  On the other hand, the state in which the delay path entrance switch 660e1 is set to ON and the delay path discharge switch 660e2 is also set to ON, that is, the state in which the ball flows into the second path (delay path) 660b, and the state in which the ball is discharged. When the state is detected at the same time, the lower 4 bits become "0011" (described as "03" in FIG. 213), and the delay path entering ball switch 660e1 becomes abnormal (described as "-" in FIG. 213). In a state in which the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is set to ON, that is, in a state in which the sensor for detecting the ball flowing down state of the second passage (delay passage) 660b is out of order, the lower 4 bits are "0100" (FIG. In 213, it is described as “04”), and it is determined that the ball is in an abnormal falling state.

<Control Process Executed by Main Control Device 110 in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 to 224.

  FIG. 214 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment. This timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example, instead of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

  Of the timer interrupt processing in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 214), in the processing of S101 to S103, S105, S107, S110, and S111, the timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 31) is performed. The same processes as those of S101 to S103, S105, S107, S110, and S111 are executed.

  Further, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 214), when the processing of S103 is completed, next, the processing is for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and the third symbol display device 81 A special symbol variation process 7 for setting a variation pattern of three symbols is executed (S191), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S105. The details of the special symbol change process 7 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the process of S105, the normal symbol variation process 7, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S192), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S107. The details of the ordinary symbol variation process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S107, the V entrance passage process is executed in accordance with the ball entry into the V winning device 650 (S193). Thereafter, a V-pass process that is executed when the ball that has won the V-prize device 650 passes through the specific area 650V is executed (S194), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S110. The details of the V entrance passage process and the V passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V provided in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game, the process (2) for executing the big hit game after the small hit game ends. As a per-species execution process), a point at which a V entrance passage process (S193 in FIG. 214) and a V passage process (S194 in FIG. 214) are provided, a process relating to a change in the first symbol (special symbol), and a second symbol ( This is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the detailed contents of the process related to the fluctuation of the (normal symbol) are different.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 215, a special symbol variation process 7 (S191) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 7 (S191). This special symbol change process 7 (S191) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment, and the change of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. This is a process for controlling the display and the variable display of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation process 7 (refer to S191 in FIG. 215) in the seventh embodiment, the same contents as those in the special symbol variation process (refer to S104 in FIG. 32) according to the first embodiment described above may be executed. However, for convenience of explanation, different reference numerals are given to processes having the same contents. It is to be noted that, with respect to the elements having the same processing contents, the respective modified contents described in the above-described embodiments can naturally be applied.

  In the special symbol variation process 7 (S191 in FIG. 215) in the seventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a special symbol jackpot (S10001). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game is included. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S10001: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S10001: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S10002), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is performed. If it is determined that the mode is not changing (S10002: No), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second entrance 3640 (S10003).

  When it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance 3640 (S10003: Yes), a second entry command is set (S10004), a first random number counter C1, a first type counter C2, and a stop. The values of the type selection counter C3 and the small hit type counter C5 are stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (S10005). Next, a special symbol variation start process 7 for starting variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (S10011). The special symbol change start process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10003, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the second entrance 3640 (S10003: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed. It is acquired (S10006). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S10007). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (not greater than 0) (S10007: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (not 0) (S10007: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is determined. ) Is subtracted by 1 (S10008), and a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10009). Here, the set reserved ball number command is configured to include information indicating that it is a command for indicating the reserved ball number of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the main control is performed. The number-of-retained-balls command set by the external output process (see S2201 in FIG. 52) executed in the main process of the device 110 (see FIG. 52) is output to the sound lamp control device 113. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp the current number of reserved balls for each type of special symbol.

  After the special figure 1 reserved ball count command is set by the processing of S10009, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S10010). After that, the process of S10011 is performed.

  Also, in the processing of S10002, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S10002: Yes), the variable display executed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is displayed. It is determined whether the fluctuation time has elapsed (S10012). The variation time of the variation display performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If it is determined that the fluctuating time has not elapsed (S10012: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10012, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S10012: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b is set (S10013). . The display pattern of the stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol change start process 7 (S10011) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start processing 7 is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. More specifically, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit or a missing one according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the first hit type counter is determined. The jackpot types (jackpots A to C) are determined according to the value of C2.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. When the small hit is made, the red LED is turned on, and when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the stop of the change.

  After the process of S10013 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is started, the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the special symbol variation start process 7 (the current lottery result) ) Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S10014). If the result of this lottery is a special symbol jackpot (S10014: Yes), a special winning opening opening scenario is set based on the jackpot type (S10015), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S10016). Next, the big hit start flag 203fb and the big hit flag 203o are set to ON (S10017), the value of the total number of hourly saving time counter 203fa and the value of the hourly special time counter 2ff 203ff are set to 0 (S10018), and the process of S10019 is started. Move on to processing. In the processing of S10019, a stop command is set (S10019), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10014, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S10014: No), a time saving number update process (S10020) is executed to determine whether the current lottery result is a small hit. (S10021). The details of the time saving update process (S10020) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S10021, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S10021: Yes), a small hit start setting process is executed (S10022). Next, the processing of S10019 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S10021, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S10021: No), the small hit start setting process (see S10022) is skipped, the process of S10019 is executed, and this process ends. I do.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed and it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit, the time saving number update process (S10020) is executed, and thereafter, the current lottery result is displayed. Although it is configured to determine whether it is a small hit, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after executing the small hit start setting process (S10022), the time saving number update process (S10020) is executed. You may. Further, for example, when the time saving frequency update process is executed and it is determined that the time saving frequency is ended by the current special symbol variation process, if the result of the lottery of the special symbol this time is out, the execution timing of the time saving frequency updating process is performed. The time-saving state may be ended at (special symbol stop timing), and if the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit, the time-saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hitting game ends. . Thus, the time-saving state can be set until immediately before the next special symbol change is started. Further, even if a small hit is won in the final change of the time saving state, the small hitting game can be executed in a state where the time saving state is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 216, a special symbol change start process 7 (S10011) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process 7 (S10011). The special symbol change start process 7 (S10011) is a process executed in the special symbol change process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area 203a, a lottery of "special symbol big hit", "special symbol small hit" or "special symbol departure" is performed, and a first symbol is determined. This is a process executed when information necessary for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of a variable effect performed by the display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  In the special symbol change start process 7 (S10011), first, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, Then, each value of the small hit type counter C5 is obtained (S10101). Next, the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number 7 table 202fa corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S10102). Specifically, in the case of the lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first entrance opening 64, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 (see FIG. 204 (b)) Is determined by comparing the random number value stored in the second winning symbol, and if it is a lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second entrance 3640, the value of the first random number counter C1 And the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 (refer to FIG. 204 (c)) to compare the random number value with the random number value stored in the random number table 202fa2 (see FIG. 204C).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S10103). If it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S10103: Yes), the big hit type is acquired based on the first hit type selection 7 table 202fa corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S10104). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S10101 is compared with the random number stored in the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202fb1 or the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202fb2. Among the five special symbol jackpots (jackpots A to E), it is determined what the jackpot type is (see FIG. 205 (b) or (c)).

  In the seventh embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to have the same determination value as the jackpot, but are not limited thereto, and may have different random numbers. With such a configuration, the random number value determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, so that the bias of the big hit can be suppressed.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined that the first special symbol and the second special symbol determine a large jackpot. The number of random numbers to be performed may be set differently. With this configuration, the probability of the jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when a lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have the expectation of the jackpot.

  Then, the display mode at the time of the normal jackpot corresponding to the special symbol and the jackpot type is set (S10105). In the process of S10105, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hits A to E). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpots A to E) are set as the stop types.

  After that, a large hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S10106), and the process shifts to S10113. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S10106, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, among the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the variation game table among the variation pattern tables of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd, The value specified in the data table corresponding to the state is compared to determine the symbol variation time (see FIG. 207).

  In the process of S10113, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S10106 is set (S10113). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S10105 is set (S10114). These fluctuation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are used in an external output process (S2201) executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 52). Inside, it is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 113 can set the variation display mode (effect mode) of the third symbol in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) and the stop type of the special symbol. When the processing of S10114 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing 7 (S191).

  On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a big hit (S10103: No), then, it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (S10107). When it is determined that the lottery result is the small hit (S10107: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe (S10108). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the process of S10101 is compared with the random number value specified in the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe, and the small hit (small) Among the hits A to C), it is determined what the small hit type is (see FIG. 206 (b)).

  In the seventh embodiment, the first special symbol (special figure 1) is configured so as not to win a small hit in the lottery. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is won in the lottery. Does not execute the process of determining the type of the special symbol which has won the small hit because the lottery of the special symbol of this time is determined to be the lottery of the second special symbol. In the case of winning the small hit in any of the second special symbols, it is determined that the small hit has been won, and then the process of determining the type of the special symbol corresponding to the current lottery is performed. It is preferable to execute a process of selecting a small hit type according to the result. With this configuration, it is possible to set different small hit types depending on whether a small hit is won in the first special symbol or a small hit in the second special symbol. Can have a width. In addition, the type of the small hit that can be set when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are won for the small hit is not changed, and the selection ratio of each small hit type may be changed. good.

  Next, the display mode at the time of the small hit corresponding to the small hit type is set (S10109), and the small hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S10110). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the small hit symbol is determined. The processing executed in S10110 is different from the processing in S10106 described above in that the lottery result of the target special symbol is changed to a big hit and a small hit is made. Subsequent processing performed on the pattern (for example, processing to output to the audio ramp control device 113) is the same, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a small hit in the processing of S10107 (S10107: No), a display mode at the time of a loss corresponding to the special symbol is set (S10111). Thereafter, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S10112). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. Next, the processes of S10113 and S10114 described above are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process 7.

  In the present embodiment, in the special symbol change start process 7 (see S10011 in FIG. 216), the lottery result of the special symbol is determined in the order of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which “disconnection” is preferentially determined. Such a configuration is an effective configuration for reducing the number of determinations that are repeatedly performed in various processes of the main control device 110, since the lottery result most likely to appear as a special symbol lottery result is “missing”. Becomes

  In the seventh embodiment, in the special symbol change start process 7 (see S10011 in FIG. 216), the change pattern command and the stop type command are set in the same process. The configuration may be such that the pattern command and the stop type command are set at different timings. In addition, even when the settings are made within the same processing, the stop type command is output after a predetermined period of output of the fluctuation pattern command so that the output timings to the audio ramp control device 113 are not the same. You may.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 217, a description will be given of the time saving update process (S10020) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 217 is a flowchart illustrating the number-of-times-savings update process (S10020). This time saving number update processing (S10020) is executed in the special symbol change processing 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 214), updates the number of time savings, and sets the gaming state to the normal state. It is processing for.

  In the time saving number update process (S10020), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the total time saving counter 203fa is larger than 0 (S10201). If it is determined that the value of the total hours counter 203fa is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S10201: No), that is, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state, the number of times of saving is updated. Since there is no necessity, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the total hours reduction counter 203fa is larger than 0 (S10201: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the time reduction state, the number of times reduced is updated (subtracted). (S10202 to S10209) for executing the above processing.

  In the processing of S10202, the value of the total hours counter 203fa is subtracted by 1 (S10202), and it is determined whether or not the current special symbol variation is a variation of the second special symbol (Special 2) (S10203). If it is determined that the current fluctuation is the second special symbol (special 2) (S10203: Yes), the value of the time reduction medium special 2 counter 203ff is decremented by 1 (S10204), and the process proceeds to S10205. On the other hand, in the process of S10203, when it is determined that the current variation is not the second special symbol (the first special symbol) (S10203: No), the process of S10204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S10205.

  In the process of S10205, a remaining time reduction command indicating the value of the time reduction medium time counter (hour time reduction total counter 203fa and time reduction medium time count 2 counter 203ff) changed by the calculation is set (S10205). The command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the first embodiment. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction special 2 counter 203ff is 0 (S10206). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction special 2 counter 203ff is not 0 (S10206: No), then, It is determined whether the value of the sum counter 203fa is 0 (S10207). In the processing of S10207, when it is determined that the value of the total number of hours reduction counter 203fa is not 0 (S10206: No), the processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10206, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction medium time special counter 203ff is 0 (S10206: Yes), or in the process of S10207, it is determined that the value of the time reduction medium time total counter 203fa is 0. In this case (S10207: Yes), the gaming state is set to the normal state (S10208), the values of the special time counter 2 for mid-hours reduction 203ff, and the sum total counter 203fa for mid-hours reduction are both set to 0, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of time-saving termination conditions for terminating the time-saving state are set, and when any of the time-saving termination conditions is satisfied, the processing for terminating the time-saving state (normal state) Is set to be executed. Specifically, when the number of times of change of the first special symbol and the number of times of change of the second special symbol during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times, the number of times of the special symbol change (sum of the number of changes) reaches a predetermined number of times. The value (for example, 100) set in the total number-of-time-savings counter 203fa when the state is set is subtracted every time the special symbol change is executed, and the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the value becomes 0 When the number of times the second special symbol changes during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number, that is, when the time saving state is set, the value (for example, 10) set in the time saving medium time special 2 counter 203ff is set to 2 The special symbol (special 2) is decremented each time the variation is executed, and the time-saving state ends when any of the time-saving ending conditions that are satisfied when the value becomes 0 is satisfied. It is configured to be.

  With this configuration, the lottery of the second special symbol, in which the lottery more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) while the time saving state is set. ) It can be executed reliably. In the present embodiment, the configuration has the above-described two time-saving termination conditions. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which three or more time-saving termination conditions can be set may be adopted. In addition, in the special symbol jackpot winning that triggers the setting of the time saving state, the value for satisfying the time saving ending condition may be changed according to the type of the jackpot that has been won. Further, in the present embodiment, when any one of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions is satisfied, the time-saving state is terminated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. An end condition may be set in advance, and the time-saving state may be ended when two of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied. By setting the conditions for terminating the time-saving state in a complicated manner as described above, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the time-saving state (the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player) continues. A game with a sense of tension can be performed.

  Also, as described above, when setting a plurality of time-saving end conditions, a value corresponding to the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be satisfied is set as an effect that notifies the player of the period until the time-saving state ends. It is only necessary to execute the effect to inform. In this embodiment, when the time reduction state is set, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed by the right-handed game, so that the number of remaining time reductions executed during the time reduction state is notified. Is configured to notify a value until a time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the number of changes of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is satisfied among a plurality of time saving end conditions (FIG. 199 (b)). )) (See remaining time notification area Dm6).

  Next, the small hit start setting process (S10022) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S10022). The small hit start setting process (S10022) is a process executed in the special symbol change process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and includes a small hit type (small hits A to C). ) Is a process for setting the start of the small hitting game (the game content (operation scenario) of the small hitting game to be executed this time) based on the above.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, when the small hitting game is started, the V winning device 650 is changed to an open state in which a ball can be won (easily), and the ball winning the V winning device 650 is By passing through the specific area 650V, the big hit game is configured to be executed after the small hit game ends.

  That is, the gaming state in which the small hitting game is executed is an advantageous state in which a ball can be won in the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and the big hitting game is executed compared to the normal gaming state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state where the likelihood is high.

  In the small hit start setting process (S10022), first, an open scenario (operation scenario) corresponding to the small hit type is set (S10301). This operation scenario is set by referring to the open scenario 7 table 202ff based on the small hit type set with reference to the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe at the time of the small hit winning.

  Then, the big hit type according to the small hit type is set in the V passing big hit type storage area 203fd (S10302). More specifically, based on the small hit type and the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe, the big hit type at V passing (big hits D to E) is determined. As described above with reference to FIG. 205 (c), if the small hit type is the small hit A, it is determined that the big hit type at the time of passing V is "10 rounds, 10 time hits, a time saving A", and the small hit is determined. If the type is the small hit B, it is determined to be "10 rounds, 10 times big hit, time saving B", and if the small hit type is C, it is determined to be "10 rounds, no time saving big hit" (FIG. 206). (C)).

  Next, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S10303), and the small hit start flag 203fc and the small hit flag 203p are set to ON (S10304). After that, the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 219, a description will be given of a normal symbol variation process 7 (S192) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process 7 (S192). This ordinary symbol variation process 7 (S192) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the second entrance 3640. This is processing for controlling the opening time and the like of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a.

  In the seventh embodiment, a plurality of hit types can be set as the hit type of the ordinary symbol (second symbol), and the operation pattern (opening scenario) of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a is set according to the set hit type. ) Are configured to be different. With this, when the player wins the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 3640a can be opened and closed in a plurality of operation patterns, so that the player can predict the timing at which the ordinary electric accessory 3640a is operating. Can be difficult.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, the state in which the ordinary electric accessory 3640a is operating indicates that the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry opening 3640 (the ball is more likely to enter than the state in which the ordinary electric accessory 3640a is not operating). Spheres flowing down on the ordinary electric accessory 3640a at the timing when the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a ends, and different flow paths (first flow paths ta, It is configured to be discharged to the second flow path tb) (see FIGS. 195 to 198).

  Then, the ball flowing down the second flow path tb is configured to pass more easily through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game than the ball flowing down the first flow path ta. . In this manner, in the present embodiment, the ease of entry of the ball into the second entrance 3640 can be varied by making the opening operation of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a different (second entry). A first open state in which the ball easily enters the ball opening 3640, and a second open state in which the ball does not easily enter the second entrance 3640 than in the easy ball entry state), and the specific region 650V. (A first guiding state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V, and a second guiding state in which the ball does not easily pass through the specific area 650V than the first guiding state). , Can be set).

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of hit types can be set as the hit type of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol), and the operation pattern (open scenario) of the normal electric accessory 3640a is set according to the set hit type. ), It is possible to make it easier for each condition to be satisfied for each of a plurality of conditions for having a privilege for the player. The player can be more interested in the operation content of the (ordinary electric accessory 3640a).

  Note that a configuration other than the configuration of the seventh embodiment may be used as a configuration that makes it easier to establish a plurality of game conditions as described above. A winning device (for example, a variable winning device 65) in which an operation pattern is set at the time of a jackpot winning may be used instead of the electric accessory 3640a.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process 7 (S192), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S801). As the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the control for opening and closing the normal electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is performed during the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S801: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not a hit of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S801: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802). If the display mode is not fluctuating (S802: No), then it is determined whether or not data (the value of the second random number counter C4) is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (S803).

  In the process of S803, when it is determined that no data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball available area, that is, when it is determined that the condition for newly starting the change of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not satisfied (S803: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball possible area, that is, when it is determined that the condition for newly starting the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is satisfied (S803). : Yes), and then obtains the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (S804).

  Then, based on the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S804 and the second random number 7 table 202fc, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S805). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number 7 table 202fc. As described above, when the current gaming state is a high probability state (saving time) of a normal symbol, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 79”, it is A per ordinary figure. It is determined that there is, and if it is in the range of “80 to 98”, it is determined that the per-drawing is B, and if it is “99”, it is determined that it is out of place. Also, when the current gaming state is the low probability state (normal state) of the ordinary symbol, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is “0”, it is determined to be A per ordinary figure, If the value is “1”, it is determined that the number is B per ordinary figure, and if “2 to 99”, it is determined that the value is out of range (see FIG. 206A).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S805 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (A or B of the ordinary symbol) (S806), and is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol. If it is determined (S806: Yes), the display mode at the time of hitting is set (S807), and the process proceeds to S809. In the process of S807, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a symbol “O” is lit and displayed so that the hit type can be identified as a stop symbol (stop display mode) of the second symbol. Set as follows.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S806 that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S806: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S808). In the processing of S808, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol “x” is lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S809.

  When the processing of S807 or S808 ends, in the processing of S809, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a normal symbol (time saving state) (S809), and the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a normal symbol ( If it is a time saving state (S809: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S810), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of the ordinary symbol (S809: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S811), and this processing is performed. finish.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the time reduction state is set, a shorter fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the second symbol than when the time reduction state is not set (when the normal state is set). It is configured as follows. Thus, the number of lotteries of the second symbol per unit time can be increased in the time reduction state per unit time compared to the normal state, so that the time reduction game can be executed more efficiently.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is made higher than that in the ordinary state, and the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is set. By shortening the movement pattern and making the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 3640, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed as compared with the normal state. Although it is configured so that the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is more easily executed in the time reduction state than in the normal state, for example, the time reduction is shorter than in the normal state. The state shortens the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol), and may be the same in other cases, and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is higher in the time reduction state than in the ordinary state. May be the same or The are usually electric won game 3640a operation pattern towards the time-shortening conditions than a sphere to the second ball entrance opening 3640 so as to facilitate ball entrance, otherwise may be the same.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S802, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S812). Here, the fluctuation time is a time set beforehand in the second symbol display device by the processing of S810 or the processing of S811 before the fluctuation display is started.

  In the processing of S812, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S812: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S812, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S812: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S813). In the processing of S813, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the processing of S807, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped (displayed on the second symbol display device). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S808, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S813, next, when the second symbol display updating process (see S2208) of the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment is executed, the second symbol display is performed. The variable display in the apparatus ends, and the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S807 or S808.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S814). If the result of the current lottery is out of the ordinary symbol (S814: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the current lottery result is a hit with a normal symbol (S814: Yes), it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a normal symbol (time saving state) (S815).

  In the processing of S815, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of the ordinary symbol (S815: No), the open period of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is set to 0.2. In addition to the setting of seconds, the number of releases is set to one (S816), and the process proceeds to S818. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the ordinary symbol (S815: Yes), the command for the ordinary figure is set (S851), and the hit type set this time and the current game state are set. The operation pattern of the corresponding ordinary electric accessory 3640a is set (S817), and the flow shifts to the process of S818.

  In the processing of S818, the opening and closing control of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is set (S818), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a is set by the processing of S818, when the electric accessory opening / closing processing (see S2206) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110 is executed, the electric The opening and closing control of the accessory is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S816 or S817 are completed.

  Next, the V entrance passage process (S193) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process (S193). This V entrance passage processing (S193) is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage processing (S193) executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 214).

  In the V entrance passage process (S193), first, it is determined whether or not a ball passage sensor (not shown) for detecting that a ball has won the V winning device 650 is on (S10401). The ball passage sensor is a detection unit that is turned on when a ball passes. Specifically, it is constituted by a proximity sensor arranged close to the ball flow path such that a period required only for the ball to flow down the detection area of the ball passage sensor is a predetermined period (for example, 30 milliseconds). When the proximity sensor continuously detects an object for 30 milliseconds, it is turned on (outputs an ON signal). Thus, even if a state in which a ball is detected at intervals of less than 30 milliseconds appears due to noise generated in the pachinko machine 10, for example, it is possible to suppress a problem that the state is determined to be a state in which the ball has passed. can do.

  In the process of S10401, when it is determined that the ball passage sensor is not turned on (S10401: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S10401, when it is determined that the ball passing sensor is ON (S10401: Yes), it is determined whether the V winning device 650 is in the open period (S10402).

  In the process of S10402, when it is determined that the opening period of the V winning device 650 is being performed (S10402: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S10403), and the process ends. The V-entrance passage command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the V entrance passage command, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the balls that have passed the V entrance and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114. Thereby, the effect during the small hit game based on the ball entry into the V winning device 650 can be executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening period of the V winning device 650 is not during the opening period (S10402: No), an error command is set because a ball has won the V winning device 650 despite not being a small hit game. (S10404) Then, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 221, the V passing process (S194) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing the V passage processing (S194). This V passage process (S194) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment.

  In the V passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203fg is on (S10501). In the process of S10501, if it is determined that the V passing flag 203fg is ON (S10501: Yes), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S10501 that the V passage flag 203fg is not on (S10501: No), it is determined whether or not there is V passage (S10502). That is, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the V winning switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650. In the process of S10502, when it is determined that there is no V passing (S10502: No), this process ends as it is.

  In the process of S10502, if it is determined that there is V passing (S10502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V passing valid period is in progress (S10503). If it is determined that it is during the V pass effective period (S10503: Yes), the V pass jackpot type value stored in the V pass jackpot type storage area 203fd is acquired (S10504), and the acquired V pass jackpot is acquired. The V flag 203fe corresponding to the type is set to ON (S10505). Then, a V passing command is set (S10506).

  Next, the V passing flag 203fg is set to ON (S10507), and thereafter, the time saving total counter 203fa and the time saving medium special counter 203ff are set to 0 (S10508), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10503, if it is determined that the current time is not within the V passage validity period (S10503: No), an error command is set (S10509), and the process ends. When the ball passes through the V winning switch 650e3 when the V is not in the valid period, it is considered that the ball has been illegally won to the V winning switch 650e3. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S10505, an error is output and an illegal action can be found.

  Next, the jackpot control process 7 (S2282) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 7 (S2282). The jackpot control process 7 (S2282) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and corresponding prize winning are performed. This is a process for opening or closing a mouth (a specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or a V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

  In the big hit control process 7 (see FIG. 222, S2282), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol big hit is started (S10601). Specifically, if the big hit start flag 203fb is set to ON by the process of S10017 of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215), it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S10601, when a special symbol big hit is started (S10601: Yes), an opening command is set (S10602). Then, the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to off (S10603), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started in the processing of S10601 (S10601: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S10604). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of S10604, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S10604: No), the present processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10604 that the special symbol is being hit (S10604: Yes), the process of S10605 is executed. In the process of S10605, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S10605). If it is determined in the process of S10605 that it is the start timing of a new round (S10605: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the specific winning opening 65a) is determined based on the opening scenario 7 table 202ff. The V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened (S10606), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S10607). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Inside, it is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command corresponding to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  Although details will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, when a continuous jackpot is executed in the audio lamp control device 113, the display round number command according to the accumulated number of rounds is transmitted. Become. Therefore, the accumulated number of rounds in the continuous big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to recognize that the big hit has continued for a long time, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10605, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S10605: No), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is set. It is determined whether the closing condition is satisfied (S10608). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650), or When a predetermined number of balls (for example, a total of 10 balls) are won in the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S10608, if the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10608: Yes), the corresponding winning is established. The mouth (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S10608: No), the ending effect is started. It is determined whether it is the timing (S10610). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round is completed, and the standby time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball throwing time, has elapsed. Is determined.

  In the process of S10610, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S10610: Yes), the ending command is set (S10611), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S2201) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S10610 that it is not the ending effect start timing (S10610: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect end timing (S10612). In the process of S10612, when it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the ending effect (S10612: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S10612 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10612: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was the big hit C (S10613). In the process of S10613, if it is determined that it is not a big hit C (5R time savings no big hit) (S10613: No), 100 is set to the time saving medium time total counter 203fa and 10 is set to the time saving medium time special counter 203ff (S10614). The process moves to S10615. On the other hand, in the process of S10613, when it is determined that the hit is the big hit C (5R time short hit big hit) (S10613: Yes), the process of S10614 is skipped and the process proceeds to S10615.

  In the processing of S10615, a state command corresponding to the state after the jackpot is set (S10615). Then, the end of the big hit is set (S10616), the big hit flag 203o is turned off (S10617), and thereafter, the present process is ended.

  Next, the small hit control process 7 (S2283) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 223. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process 7 (S2283). The small hit control process 7 (S2283) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment, and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol small hit state, various types of small hits are determined. This is a process for performing an effect and opening or closing a corresponding winning opening (a specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or a V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

  In the small hit control process 7 (S2283 in FIG. 223), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S10701). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203fc is set to ON, it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S10701, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S10701: Yes), an opening command is set (S10702). Then, the small hit start flag 203fc is set to off (S10703), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10701, when the small hit of the special symbol is not started (S10701: No), it is determined whether the special symbol is a small hit (S10704). During the special symbol small hit, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol small hit (including a special symbol small hit game), and During the predetermined time after the end of the special symbol small hit game. In the processing of S10704, if it is not during the small win of the special symbol (S10704: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10704 that the special symbol is being hit (S10704: Yes), the process of S10705 is executed. In the processing of S10705, it is determined whether it is the V winning opening opening timing (S10705). In the processing of S10705, if it is determined that it is the V winning opening opening timing (S10705: Yes), the corresponding V winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario 7 table 202ff. Then (S10706), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not the V winning opening opening timing in the process of S10705 (S10705: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the corresponding V winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10707). . Specifically, when the opening scenario set corresponding to the small hit game ends, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, a total of 10 balls) are won in the V winning device 650, the closing condition is satisfied. Is determined.

  In the process of S10707, when it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10707: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning of the V winning device 650) is determined. The mouth 650a) is closed (S10708), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S10707: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S10709). In the process of S10709, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S10709: Yes), the ending command is set (S10710), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S2201) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the S10709 processing that it is not the ending effect start timing (S10709: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect end timing (S10711). In the process of S10711, if it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the ending effect (S10711: No), the process ends.

  In the process of S10711, if it is determined that the ending effect is the end timing (S10711: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set to ON (S10712), and the V flag 203fe is not set to ON. Is determined (S10712: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V flag 203fe is set to ON (S10712: Yes), an open scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 203fe is set (S10713), and the jackpot start flag 203fb and the jackpot are set. The middle flag 203o is set to on (S10714), the V flag 203fe is set to off (S10715), the V passing flag 203fg is set to off (S10716), and the small hitting flag 203p is set to off (S10717). Then, the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 224, a description will be given of the electric auditors product opening and closing process 7 (S2281) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory opening / closing process 7 (S2281). The electric accessory opening / closing process 7 (S2281) is a process executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment.

  In the electric accessory opening / closing process 7 (S2281), first, it is determined whether the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is being set (S10801). When it is determined that the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is not being set (S10801: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is being set (S10801: Yes), the opening timing of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is determined. It is determined whether or not there is (S10802). When it is determined that it is the opening timing of the motorized accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 (S10802: Yes), the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is opened (S10803), and An accessory release command is set (S10804), and then this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S10802 that it is not the opening timing of the motorized accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 (S10802: No), then the electric combination associated with the second entrance 3640 is determined. It is determined whether it is time to close the object 3640a (S10805). When it is determined that it is the closing timing of the motorized accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 (S10805: Yes), the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is closed (S10806) and An accessory close command is set (S10807), and then the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing is not the closing timing of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 (S10805: No), then, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is performed. It is determined whether it is the end timing of (S10809). If it is determined that it is the timing to end the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 (S10809: Yes), a general-drawing end command is set (S10810), and then this processing ends. I do. Also, in the process of S10809, when it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 (S10809: No), this process ends.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 225 to 233, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the main processing in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This main process is a process executed instead of the main process (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is the main process (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). 59)).

  Of the main processing in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 225), in the processing of S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118, respectively, the main processing (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is performed. The same processes as those of S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 are executed. In the main process (see FIG. 225) in the seventh embodiment, after performing the process of S4111, the effect update process is performed (S4181). The effect update processing (S4181) is for performing processing for changing the contents of the effect currently being executed (variable display that has already been set) during the effect execution.

  After executing the effect update process (S4181), a command determination process 7 for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S4182). Details of the command determination processing 7 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the flow shifts to the process of S4183. In the process of S4183, a variable display setting process 7 is executed (S4183). In the variation display setting process 7 (S4183), a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. . As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process 7 (S4183) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after performing the variable display setting process 7 (S4183), a ball passage monitoring process is performed (S4184). The details of the ball passage monitoring process (S4184) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  It is determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the start of the main process or the current process of S4101 (S4101), and if 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S4101: No). ), The process proceeds to S4182 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111, S4181.

  Next, a command determination process 7 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 7 (S4182). This command determination process 7 (S4182) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. I do. In addition, in this process, when the winning information command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous announcement effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process 7 (S4182), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and changed by the main controller 110. It is determined whether a pattern command has been received (S12001). When the variation pattern command is received (S12001: Yes), the variation start flag 223fa of the symbol type corresponding to the received variation pattern command is set to ON (S12002), and the variation pattern type is received from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S12003), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S12001: No), it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S12004). When the stop type command is received (S12004: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223fb of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S12005), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S12006). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S12004: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S12007). Then, when the reserved ball count command is received (S12007: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball count command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110 ( The number of times N1) of the fluctuation display in the special symbol is extracted and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 (S12008). In the process of S12008, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223d is set. After the end of the process in S12008, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol is drawn. Therefore, every time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the value of the main control device 110 by the processing of S12008. The value can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is shifted from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning is not achieved. At the time of detection or at the time of drawing a special symbol, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223d of the audio lamp control device 113 is corrected to match the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. it can. When the process of S12008 is executed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223d is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S12007, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S12007: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S12009). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S12009: Yes), winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223b (S12010), and thereafter, the process returns to the main processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12009 that the winning information command has not been received (S12009: No), it is next determined whether a winning-related command has been received (S12011) and the winning-related command has been received. If it is determined that the process has been performed (S12011: Yes), the hit-related process 7 is executed (S12012), and this process ends. The hit-related process 7 (S12012) causes the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game which is executed when the big hit or the small hit is won as a result of the special symbol lottery. The processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

  Here, the content of the hit-related process 7 (S12012) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the content of the hit-related process 7 in the seventh embodiment. When the hit-related processing (S12012) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit start command has been received (S12101). If it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S12101: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S12102), and this processing ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the seventh embodiment. ) Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S12101: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S12103). In the processing of S12103, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S12103: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S12104), and this processing ends. In the seventh embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 as the number-of-rounds command, the display round-number command is set based on the received round-number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the main control device 110, when the main control device 110 is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has been started as a round update command, an audio lamp is used. When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the control device 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the sound lamp control device 113 side determines the current value based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. Is configured to calculate the number of rounds and set the display round number command. And it may be.

  In the processing of S12103, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S12103: No), it is determined whether the jackpot end command has been received next (S12105). In the process of S12105, when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S12105: Yes), a jackpot end command for display is set (S12106), and this process ends.

  In the processing of S12105, when it is determined that the big hit end command has not been received (S12105: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit start command has been received (S12107).

  In the processing of S12107, if it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (S12107: Yes), the small hit start processing is executed (S12108), and this processing ends. The details of the small hit start process (S12108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, the content of the small hit start process (S12108) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit start process in the seventh embodiment. When the small hit start process (S12108) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the length variation flag 223fg provided in the RAM 223 is on (S12201), and it is determined that the length variation flag 223fg is on. In this case (S12201: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is read (S12202). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is “01” (S12203). In the process of S12203, if it is determined that the value of the delay place status flag 223ff is “01” (S12203: Yes), a display small hit start command indicating a small hit with a high V expectation is set (S12204). Then, the process returns to the hit-related process 7.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the length variation flag 223fg is not on in the process of S12201 (S12201: No), the process proceeds to S12205. Also, in the process of S12203, when it is determined that the value of the delay place status flag 223ff is not “01” (S12203: No), the process proceeds to S12205.

  In the process of S12205, a small hit start command for display indicating a normal small hit is set (S12205), and thereafter, the process returns to the hit-related process 7.

  Returning to FIG. 227, the description will be continued. In the process of S12107, when it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S12107: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received (S12109). In the processing of S12109, if it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (S12109: Yes), a small hit end command for display is set to execute an effect indicating the end of the small hit game (S12110). This processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S12109, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S12109: No), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage command has been received (S12111). In the process of S12111, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S12111: Yes), the display V entrance passage command is set (S12112), and this process ends. If it is determined in the processing of S12111 that the V entrance passage command has not been received (S12111: No), it is determined whether the V entrance command has been received next (S12113).

  In the processing of S12113, if it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S12113: Yes), a display V effect command for indicating an effect based on a ball entry to the V switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is set (S12113: Yes). S12114), and terminates this processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12113 that the V-pass command has not been received (S12113: No), this processing ends as it is.

  Returning to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S12011 that no hit-related command has been received (S12011: No), it is next determined whether a stop command has been received (S12013). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S12013: Yes), a stop display of the third symbol is set (S12014), and then it is determined whether or not the length variation flag 223fg is on (S12015). If it is determined that the length variation flag 223fg is on (S12015: Yes), the length variation flag 223fg is set to off (S12016), and thereafter, the process returns to the main process. In the process of S12015, when it is determined that the length variation flag 223fg is not on (S12015: No), the process returns to the main process without executing the process of S12016.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12013 that the stop command has not been received (S12013: No), then it is determined whether or not a time-saving effect-related command has been received (S12017). When it is determined that the time-saving effect-related command has been received (S12017: Yes), a time-saving effect-related process is executed (S12018), and thereafter, the process returns to the main process. The details of the time reduction effect-related processing (S12018) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12017 that the time-saving effect-related command has not been received (S12017: No), processing corresponding to other commands is executed (S12019), and thereafter, the process returns to the main processing.

  Next, the contents of the time reduction effect-related processing (S12018) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time reduction effect-related processing (S12018). The time reduction effect-related process (S12018) is a process executed in the command determination process 7 (see FIG. 226) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment.

  When the time reduction effect-related processing (S12018) is executed, first, the game state stored in the game state storage area 223fe is read (S12301), and then it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction state (S12302). ). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state (S1232: No), the present process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the command determination process 7 (S4182 in FIG. 226).

  On the other hand, in the process of S12302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S1302: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a command for a general symbol is received (S12303). When it is determined that the hit command has been received (S12303: Yes), the current time hit type is analyzed based on the received hit time command (S12304), and the time reduction effect corresponding to the hit time type is executed. A display time reduction effect start command for display is set (S12305), the ordinary hit flag 223fi is set to ON (S12306), and the process returns to the command determination process 7.

  On the other hand, in the process of S12303, if it is determined that the per-figure command has not been received (S12303: No), then it is determined whether or not the second ball entry command has been received (S12307). When it is determined that the second ball entry command has been received (S12307: Yes), the second ball entry flag 223fh is set to ON (S12308), and a display effect command for updating the time saving effect is set (S12309). Thereafter, the flow returns to the command determination processing 7.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12307 that the second ball entry command has not been received (S12307: No), then it is determined whether or not an end command per general drawing has been received (S12310). If it is determined that the general figure end command has been received (S12310: Yes), the general figure end processing is executed (S12311), and thereafter, the process returns to the command determination processing 7. If it is determined in the processing of S12310 that the end command for the ordinary figure has not been received (S12310: No), the process returns to the command determination processing 7 as it is. The details of the end-of-period end processing (S12311) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the contents of the end processing (S12311) per ordinary drawing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 230 is a flow chart showing the contents of the end processing (S12311) at the time of ordinary drawing. The end-of-daily-end-time process (S12311) is a process executed in the time-saving effect-related process (see FIG. 229) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment.

  When the end-of-normal-end processing (S12311) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the second ball entry flag 223fh is on (S12401). If it is determined that the second ball entry flag 223fh is on (S12401: Yes), the second ball entry flag 223fh is set to off (S12402), and the process shifts to S12404. If it is determined that the second ball entry flag 223fh is not on (S12401: No), a display effect command for ending the time-saving effect is set (S12403), and the process shifts to S12404.

  In the processing of S12404, the flag 223fi per day is set to OFF (S12404), and thereafter, this processing ends, and the process returns to the time-saving effect-related processing (S12018 in FIG. 229).

  Next, a variable display setting process 7 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 7 (S4183). The variable display setting process 7 (S4183) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and is changed in the third symbol display device 81. Is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process 7 (S4183), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation start flag 223fa1 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5101). If it is determined that the special figure 1 change start flag fa1 is not on (that is, it is off) (S5101: No), it is in a state where the change pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that it is determined in S5107. Move on to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 change start flag fa1 is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 change start flag fa1 is set to off (S5102), and then the display control device 114 is notified. A display variation pattern command is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S5181). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started. After the processing of S5181, the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5182), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5107.

  In the process of S5107, it is determined whether the special figure 2 change start flag fa2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5107). If it is determined that the special figure 2 change start flag fa2 is not on (that is, it is off) (S5107: No), it is in a state where the change pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110. Move on to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 change start flag fa2 is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 change start flag fa2 is set to off (S5108), and then, the special figure 2 change display setting process 7 is performed. Is executed (S5183). Details of the special figure 2 variable display setting processing 7 (S5183) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S5183 is completed, the data corresponding to the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5110), and the processing shifts to S5111.

  In the process of S5111, it is determined whether the special figure 1 change start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 change start flag fa2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5111). If it is determined that the special figure 1 change start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 change start flag fa2 is not on (that is, it is off) (S5111: No), a change pattern command has been received from the main control device 110. Since this state is not present, the present processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 change start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 change start flag fa2 is on (S5111: Yes), the special figure 1 change start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 change start flag fa2 is set to off. Then, the display special figure 1 or the special figure 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S5113), and thereafter, the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the special figure 2 variable display setting processing 7 (S5183) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 variable display setting processing 7 (S5183). The variable display setting process 7 for special figure 2 (S5183) is a process executed in the variable display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment. is there.

  In the special figure 2 variable display setting processing 7 (S5183), first, the game state stored in the game state storage area 223fe provided in the RAM 223 is read (S12501), and then the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state. Is determined (S12502). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time saving state (S12502: No), the corresponding display variation pattern command is set (S12510), and then the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S12502, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S12502: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S12503). If it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S12503: Yes), a display variation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot is set (S12504), and then the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12503 that the lottery result is not a big hit (S12503: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (S12505). If it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S12505: No), a fluctuation pattern command indicating the end of the time-saving effect is set (S12506), and then the present processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12505 that the lottery result is a small hit (S12505: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the small hit variation pattern is a long variation (S12507). If it is determined that the small hit variation pattern is the long variation (S12507: Yes), the long variation flag 223fg is set to ON (S12508), and the processing shifts to S12509. On the other hand, in the process of S12507, when it is determined that the small hit variation pattern is not the long variation (S12507: No), the process of S12508 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S12509.

  In the processing of S12509, the display variation pattern command corresponding to the small hit is set (S12509), and then this processing ends.

  Next, the ball passage monitoring process (S4184) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing this ball passage monitoring process (S4184). This ball passage monitoring process (S4184) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable effect. In order to execute the command, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the ball passage monitoring process (S4184), first, it is determined whether or not a delay passage entering ball switch (not shown) is turned on (S12601). If it is determined that the delay path entry switch is on (S12601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the ordinary figure hit flag 223fi provided in the RAM 223 is on (S12602). If it is determined that the ordinary drawing hit flag 223fi is not on (S12602: No), the process proceeds to S12611.

  In the process of S12602, when it is determined that the ordinary flag 223fi is not on (that is, it is off) (S12602: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is read (S12603), and then the delay path state It is determined whether the value of the flag 223ff is “00” (S12604). If it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is “00” (S12604: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is set to “01” (S12605), and the flow shifts to the processing of S12610. In the process of S12604, if it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is not 00 (S12604: No), the process of S12605 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S12610.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12601 that the delay path entrance switch is not on (that is, it is off) (S12601: No), then, it is determined whether the delay path discharge switch (not shown) is on. Is determined (S12606). If it is determined that the delay passage discharge switch is not on (that is, it is off) (S12606: No), the present process ends. If it is determined that the delay passage discharge switch is on (S12606: Yes), the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is read (S12607), and then, whether the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is “01” or not. Is determined (S12608). When it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is “01” (S12608: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is set to “02” (S12609), and thereafter, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12608 that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is not “01” (S12608: No), the flow shifts to step S12610. In the process of S12610, a value corresponding to the delay path state flag 223ff is set (S12610), an error command is set (S12611), and then the process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific area 650V is provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 opened during the small hitting game, and the ball has the specific area 650V during the small hitting game. It is configured such that a big hit (so-called two kinds) game is executed by passing.

  In addition, a first flow path ta (see FIG. 196) in which the ball hardly passes through the specific area 650V as a path for causing the ball to flow down to the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 opened during the small hit game. ) And a second flow path tb (see FIG. 196) through which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V. This allows the player to closely watch which flow path the ball flows down during the small hitting game. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the movement of the ball flowing down on the game board 13, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the ball is distributed to the above-described first flow path ta or the second flow path tb by the opening and closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a, the operation of the electric accessory 3640a is performed. Can also interest the player. Further, when the ball flows down the second flow path tb, which easily passes through the specific area 650V, the ease of winning of the ball to the V winning device 650 is made different according to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. ing.

  Further, the variation time of the special symbol to be set is made different depending on the set gaming state and the winning small hit type. With such a configuration, when a small hit corresponding to a big hit to which a time-saving state is given after the big hit game is won, a gaming state (advantageous time saving) for facilitating a ball to pass through the specific area 650V, and a big hit end A game state (unfavorable time reduction) can be set to make it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V when a small hit corresponding to a big hit to which a time saving state is given later is won.

  Then, in the present embodiment, by using the above-described configuration of the advantageous time reduction and the disadvantageous time reduction, when the jackpot is once won (initial hit), a total of three jackpots including at least the first hit are executed. It is configured such that a gaming state advantageous to the player continues. In this way, by enabling the setting of the game state in which it is guaranteed that the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In addition, in the seventh embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, and the ball is sent to the second entrance 3640 which is a trigger for executing the second special symbol lottery. The electric accessory 3640a is configured to operate so as to make it easy to enter the ball. Then, based on the fact that the ball that has flowed down on the electric accessory 3640a has entered the second entrance 3640, the electric accessory 3640a shifts to the closed state, and at that time, the electric accessory 3640a flows down on the electric accessory 3640a. It is configured such that the dropped ball is distributed to the first flow path ta and the second flow path tb according to the position (upstream side, downstream side) where the ball has flowed.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, the ball located on the downstream side of the ball flow path on the electric accessory 3640a is configured to be distributed to the second flow path tb which is advantageous to the player, and is continued. When the ball is fired, the ball is configured to easily flow into the second flow path tb.

  Therefore, in order for the ball to flow into the second flow path tb during the execution of the second special symbol lottery, it is necessary to continuously fire the ball toward the game area of the game board 13. . Therefore, the act of trying to obtain advantageous results by firing the ball at a predetermined timing can be suppressed.

  In the seventh embodiment, the ball that has flowed down the second flow path tb, that is, the ball that has been distributed to the flow path that is advantageous to the player by the opening operation of the electric accessory 3640a, is directed toward the V winning device 650. Although it is configured to flow down, it may be configured so that a ball flowing down a flow path that is advantageous to the player can enter the general ball entrance 63. Thereby, many prize balls can be provided to the player.

  Further, a valve member is provided in the V winning device 650 to change between a first state in which the ball can pass through the specific area 650V and a second state in which the ball is difficult to pass. The variable time for winning in the device 650 and the variable time for winning in the V winning device 650 in the second state may be varied according to the set time saving state.

  Also, instead of the V winning device 650, a V attacker that is opened during a jackpot game is provided, and a certain state (high probability state of a special symbol) is given by a ball passing through a specific area in the V attacker. May be applied to the pachinko machine 10.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol are configured to be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the gaming state is set. When the latent state (special symbol high probability state, ordinary symbol low probability state) is set, it is easy to execute the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) and based on the second special symbol lottery result. It is configured to generate small hit games frequently.

  In this manner, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, that is, in order to frequently perform the small hitting game by the lottery of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is similarly set. It is necessary to use a configuration in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily executed even in the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the ordinary symbol) in which is set. Further, in order to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being frequently executed in the normal state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol set during the normal state is long (for example, 10 minutes). It was necessary to set a fluctuation pattern.

  As described above, if a long variation time is executed in the second special symbol in which the lottery is easily executed, if the player mistakenly executes the second special symbol in the lottery, However, the lottery of the next special symbol is not executed until the variation pattern ends, which hinders the game. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the And the lottery (fluctuation) of two special symbols can be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

  On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, during the big hit game, or during the small hit game executed in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol, the second special symbol execution trigger It is configured so that a ball can enter (become easy to enter) the second entrance 640. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed unless the hit game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed, so that the lottery of the first special symbol is performed as in the first embodiment described above. (Variation) and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol are performed simultaneously (in parallel), without using a configuration for executing the small special lottery based on the lottery of the second special symbol only during the latent state. Can be generated frequently. Therefore, control processing of the gaming machine can be simplified.

  Furthermore, according to the type of the hit (big hit, small hit) that has been won, a hit type in which the ball easily enters the second entrance 640 and a hit type in which the ball is difficult to enter can be set. When a winning (big hit, small hit) is won, not only the size of the privilege (number of prize balls) that can be acquired during the hit game, but also the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the hit game. It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not.

  In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the ball enters the second entrance 640 in a case where the winning is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol and in a case where the winning is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured so that the rate at which the hit types that are easy to set are different. Specifically, it is easier to set a hitting type in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 by winning in the second special symbol than in the case of winning in the first special symbol. Make up.

  With this configuration, once the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is shifted to a state in which the lottery can be performed, the lottery of the special figure 2 can be continued and easily performed. Despite the fact that the advantageous game mode (mode in which the drawing of FIG. 2 can be executed) that is advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous game mode is immediately terminated, and the player is uncomfortable. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be more likely to win a win (big hit, small hit) than the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the first special symbol, only the big hit is won (1/400 at the low probability) without being won in the small hit, whereas in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big hit is won. The probability of (1/400 at the time of low probability) is the same as that of the first special symbol described above, but is set so that a small hit is also won (300/400). As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol is set so that the probability of winning a small hit is higher in the lottery of the second special symbol than in the lottery of the first special symbol. The lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be easier to win in a hit (big hit, small hit) than in the lottery of the second special symbol.

  Thereby, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, it is possible to win with a high probability of winning (big hit, small hit), The winning game based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be frequently executed in a short period of time.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, a winning game in which a ball is more likely to enter the second entrance 640 with a higher probability is executed when a small hit is won than when a large hit is won. are doing. This makes it easy to execute the second special symbol lottery again after the end of the winning game, when the small hit is won by the second special symbol lottery.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, a plurality (four) of the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reservation) can be stored (reserved storage). Thus, the opening operation pattern of the hit game is defined so that the number that can be held and stored during one hit game is different.

  With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game with one hit game to secure a larger number of hold memories. Here, in the eighth embodiment, the second opening / closing door 3650f attached to the second attacker 3650 that is opened in the hit game is opened (from a state where a ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). When the state is changed to a closed state (a state where the ball cannot be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a), a part of the ball spilled from the second opening / closing door 3650f can enter the second ball opening 640. Is configured to pass through. In this way, by configuring so that the ball that could not enter the second attacker 3650 that is opened during the hitting game can enter the second entrance 640, the second hitting game can be performed during the hitting game. The player can watch the movement of the ball entering the second specific winning opening 3650a and the movement of the ball entering the second entrance 640.

  Here, the configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 234, the eighth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 is greatly different.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 234, a point where a second attacker 3650 is provided at a substantially central position in a right region of the game board 13, and a point where a guide passage 3660 is provided below the second attacker 3650. The point where the outlet for the guide passage 3660 faces the second entrance 640 with the electric accessory 640 a and the position below the second entrance 640, and flowed down the induction passage 3660. A first attacker (variable winning device) 650 is provided at a position where a ball and a ball flowing down a game area formed on the right side of the guiding passage 3660 among the game areas provided on the game board 13 can win. The point is a big difference. Other configurations are the same as those of the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the above-described first embodiment, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 234, a brief description will be given of a ball flow during a right-handed game in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. In normal times (except during the hitting game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened), the ball fired toward the right region of the game board 13 by the right-handed game moves the open / close door 3650f in the closed state (buried state). After passing through the game area on the right side of the guidance passage 3660, it flows down so as to enter the general entrance 63.

  In this general entrance 63 (the general entrance 63 arranged on the right side of the second entrance 640), one prize ball is set as a privilege given when the ball enters. I have. Therefore, even if the right-handed game is performed in the normal state, the ball does not increase.

  On the other hand, during a hit game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened, the opening / closing door 3650f is in an open state (projecting state), that is, a state in which a ball can flow down on the opening / closing door 3650f toward the second specific winning opening 3650a. In the case of, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down on the opening / closing door 3650f and wins the second specific winning opening 3650a. Then, the closing condition of the second attacker 3650 (elapse of a predetermined opening period or the number of balls winning the second specific winning opening 3650a reaches a predetermined upper limit winning number) is satisfied, and the opening / closing door 3650f is opened. Is changed to a closed state (embedded state), the sphere flowing down the downstream side of the opening / closing door 3650f flows into the guiding passage 3660.

  That is, in the eighth embodiment, even if a right-handed game is performed during a normal time (other than a game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened), a ball flow path that can enter the second ball entrance 640. Is formed so that the sphere does not flow down in the guide passage 3660 where is formed. With this configuration, the ball flowing down the guidance passage 3660 does not enter the second entrance 640 unless the second attacker 3650 is opened by a hit game, so that the second special symbol lottery is performed. Can be limited.

  Further, a through gate 67 is provided between the opening / closing door 3650f and the inflow port of the guide passage 3660, so that the sphere flowing into the guide passage 3660 passes through the through gate 67 and then flows into the guide passage 3660. It is composed. The guide passage 3660 is configured such that the time required for the ball to flow down the guide flow path is about 2.5 seconds. In this manner, the sphere flowing down the flow path that can enter the second ball entrance 640 is configured to always pass through the through gate 67, and reaches the second ball entrance 640 from the through gate 67. Is set to be constant (approximately 2.5 seconds), so that the ball passing through the guidance passage 3660 enters the second entrance 640 depending on the set fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol. Can be easily changed.

  Here, in the eighth embodiment, the fluctuation time of the set ordinary symbol is varied according to the set game state. Specifically, the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of a normal symbol, and the fluctuation time of 0.1 second in the high probability state (time saving state, probability change state) of a normal symbol. Is configured to be set. Thereby, when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, when the ball passes through the guidance passage 3660, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is changed. When the ball is set, when the ball passes through the guidance passage 3660, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640.

  Next, the configuration of the open / close door 3650f of the second attacker 3650 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 235 (a) is a plan view schematically showing the open / close door 3650f in the open state (projected state), and FIG. 235 (b) is the open / closed state in the closed state (buried state). It is the top view which showed the door 3650f typically. As shown in FIG. 235 (a), the opening / closing door 3650f of the present embodiment extends from the right upper surface 3650y1 of the opening / closing door 3650f to the upper surface 3650f1 of the opening / closing door 3650f along the inclination of the opening / closing door 3650f (see FIG. 234). It is configured to flow out toward the second specific winning opening 3650a.

  Further, a first delay member 3650fa, a second delay member 3650fb, and a third delay member 3650fc are provided so that the ball meanders on the upper surface 3650f1 of the door 3650f, and a falling period in which the ball flows down the door 3650f is one. .2 seconds. This falling period (1.2 seconds) is shorter than the period (1.5 seconds) in which the second attacker 3650 maintains the open state when the opening operation is performed by the hitting game (big hit B, big hit C, small hit). It is configured to be. With this configuration, the ball can be made to win in the second specific winning opening 3650a in the hitting game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened.

  In the present embodiment, in the case where a winning game for opening the second attacker 3650 is executed, a scenario of the opening operation is set so that the ball can win the second specific winning opening 3650a in all the winning games. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as an opening operation scenario set during a hit game, an opening operation scenario in which a ball easily enters a second specific winning opening 3650a, and a ball flows into a guiding passage 3660 An easy opening operation scenario may be set.

  In this case, as an opening operation scenario of the second attacker 3650, for example, a period in which a ball flowing down the upper surface 3650f of the opening / closing door 3650f flows down to a position facing the guide passage 3660 (downstream position ZD of the upper surface 3650f) (for example, 0. The opening operation scenario may be defined so that “5 seconds” is a period in which the opening state of the opening door 3650f is maintained when the opening operation is performed. When the opening operation scenario defined in this manner is set, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 3650a during the hit game, and the ball flowing down the upper surface 3650f of the opening / closing door 3650f flows into the guidance passage 3660. Easier to do.

  Thus, for example, when the upper limit number of balls winning the second specific winning opening 3650a and the upper limit period of opening the opening / closing door 3650f are set as the end conditions of the winning game, the second specific winning opening 3650a is set. Since the opening operation in which the hemisphere is difficult to win is performed, the hit game can be continued for a long time. Therefore, the number of balls flowing into the guidance passage 3660 during one hit game can be increased, and more special figure 2 reservation memories can be obtained.

  Next, when the closing condition of the opening / closing door 3650f is satisfied, the state shown in FIG. 235 (a) is changed to the closed state (buried state) shown in FIG. 235 (b). In this state, the sphere located at the downstream position ZD passes through the through gate 67, and the sphere located at the upstream position ZC also passes through the guide path 3660 in the right region.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the time during which the upper surface ball of the opening / closing door 3650f flows down is 1.2 seconds (the upstream position ZC is 0.5 seconds, and the downstream position ZD is 0.7 seconds). The opening / closing door 3650f is opened for 1.5 seconds in one small hitting game. Accordingly, when the ball that has flowed down wins the second attacker 3650 and is detected by the detection switch 3650Z, the next ball can be positioned at the downstream position ZD. Therefore, when the small hitting game is executed, the ball can be reliably passed through the guidance passage 3660.

  The following configuration may be used instead of the configuration of the present embodiment. That is, the position of the detection switch 3650Z that detects the ball that has won the second attacker 3650 is located on the back side of the second attacker 3650 (the position of the modified example in FIG. 235), and from the opening of the second attacker 3650 to the detection switch 3650Z. Is preferably configured so that it takes 0.3 seconds for the sphere to pass. With this configuration, even if the distance of the opening / closing door 3650f is shortened, the next flowing ball can be reliably positioned at the downstream position ZD.

  Further, a plurality of opening patterns of the opening / closing door 3650f effective in the small hitting game are prepared, and the small hitting game in which the opening period in which the ball can pass through the through gate 67 is set without winning the second attacker 3650 can be executed. May be configured. That is, it is possible to execute a game for causing the second attacker 3650 to win a ball and a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 by using the small hitting game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237, a detailed description will be given of the ball flow in the right area of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 236 is a schematic diagram illustrating a sphere flow when the second attacker 3650 is in an open state (projecting state), and FIG. 237 is a sphere when the second attacker 3650 is in a closed state (embedded state). It is the schematic diagram which showed the flow.

  As shown in FIG. 236, when the door 3650f is in the open state (projecting state), all the balls fired by the right-handed game are received by the door 3650f (the right area of the game board 13). Door 3650f is disposed so as to shield the door. With such a configuration, when a hit game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened is executed, a ball can be easily won in the second specific winning opening 3650a simply by performing a right-handed game.

  When the door 3650f is in the open state (projected state), the inflow port of the guide passage 3660 is blocked by the door 3650f so that the ball cannot flow into the guide passage 3660 (difficult). It is composed. That is, in the eighth embodiment, a function for facilitating a ball to enter the second specific winning opening 3650a with the opening / closing door 3650f that is opened by the hitting game and restricts the ball from flowing down to the guidance passage 3660. And a function having the function.

  Next, when the opening / closing door 3650f is in the closed state (buried state), the ball shot in the right-handed area in the right-handed game flows down the area on the right side of the guidance passage 3660 (see the arrow in FIG. 237). . Here, in the eighth embodiment, the ball that has flowed down the right-handed area by the right-handed game executed when the opening / closing door 3650f is in the closed state (embedded state) is prevented from flowing into the guidance passage 3660 (difficulty). ).

  Specifically, in the right side area of the game board 13, the nail K1 implanted above the opening / closing door 3650f is implanted below the opening / closing door 3650f to form an inflow port of the guide passage 3660. It is configured to be located on the right side (right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 237) by a distance Kz (about 10 mm) from the nail K2 set. And the space | interval of the height direction of the nail K1 and the nail K2 is comprised so that it may correspond to one ball (about 15 mm). With this configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball that has flowed down the right side of the nail K1 by the right-handed game from flowing into the inflow port of the guide passage 3660 formed on the left side of the nail K2.

  Furthermore, the arrangement position of the second specific winning opening 3650a where the ball flowing down to the lower end of the opening and closing door 3650f can win a prize is shorter in the height direction than in the width direction with the nail K1. When the opening / closing door 3650f is in the closed state (embedded state), the ball is not won in the second specific winning opening 3650a. In the present embodiment, the state in which a ball can enter the second specific winning opening 3650a and the state in which a winning is impossible (difficult) can be changed by opening the opening / closing door 3650f. For example, a variable member that can be changed between an open position that opens the opening of the second specific winning opening 3650a and a closed position that closes the second specific winning opening 3650a may be used as the second specific winning opening 3650a and the opening / closing door 3650f. And the variable member may be variably controlled so as to be variable in synchronization with the opening operation of the door 3650f.

  In this case, for example, when the opening / closing door 3650f is in a closed state (embedded state), that is, in a state where a ball does not win in the second specific winning opening 3650a, the variable member is adjusted to be in the closed position. When the opening / closing door 3650f is in an open state (projecting state), that is, in a state in which a ball can enter the second specific winning opening 3650a, the variable portion is located at the open position. Variable control is recommended. Thus, it is possible to more reliably prevent a situation in which a ball wins the second specific winning opening 3650a at an unintended timing.

  Further, in the case of using the configuration of the above-described example, it is preferable to use a single drive source (for example, a motor or a solenoid) to drive the variable member and the door 3650f. Thus, the two members can be easily driven with regularity. Further, it is preferable that the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing door 3650f is delayed by a grace period in consideration of the time required for the ball to flow down so that the variable member can be changed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the ball flowing further down to the downstream end of the opening / closing door 3650f cannot be won in the second specific winning opening 3650a due to the variable operation of the variable member.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 237, a description will be given of a ball flow when the opening / closing door 3650f is changed to a closed state (embedded state) while the ball is flowing down the upper surface 3650f1 (see FIG. 235 (a)) of the opening / closing door 3650f. do. As shown in FIG. 237, a nail K2 is implanted below the opening / closing door 3650f and in the vicinity of the position on the downstream side of the opening / closing door 3650f, and is different from the right side and the left side of the nail K2. A road is formed. Therefore, a ball flowing down a range of ２ of the upstream side of the opening / closing door 3650f flows down an area on the right side of the ball passage 3660 when the opening / closing door 3650f is changed to a closed state (embedded state). On the other hand, a sphere flowing down a range of 1/3 on the downstream side of the door 3650f passes through the through gate 67 when the door 3650f is changed to a closed state (buried state), and a ball passage 3660. Flows into.

  The guide passage 3660 used in the eighth embodiment is formed in a meandering shape in order to lengthen the time (flowing time) until the ball reaches the second entrance 640, and the guide passage 3660 flows into the guide passage 3660. The time required for the ball to flow down the flow path ty from the position 3661a to the discharge position 3661b is configured to be about 2.5 seconds.

  Then, when the ball passing through the through gate 67 and flowing down the flow path ty reaches the second entrance 640, if the electric accessory 640a is open, the ball enters the second entrance 640, and If the accessory 640a is closed, it flows down to the out port 66 without entering the second ball entry port 640.

  In the present embodiment, the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a is provided above the right region, but is not limited thereto, and may be provided below the ball passage 3660. Thus, the spheres flowing down the plurality of flow paths can be made to enter the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a at the same timing.

  Furthermore, a delay member for delaying the flow speed of the ball may be provided on the lower surface of the ball flow of the guide passage 3660 used in the present embodiment.

<Production contents in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 238 to 241, a description will be given of a characteristic effect performed in the eighth embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, during the period in which a winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is being executed, the right to draw the second special symbol (special figure 2 hold storage) is easily acquired. The lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be easier to win in a small hit than the lottery of the first special symbol. In other words, in the state where the normal state is set, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by the left-handed game, the big hit is won, and when the big hit game is started, the right-handed game is executed, and the big hit game is opened. A game in which an activated attacker (first attacker 650a, second attacker 3650) wins a ball to acquire a prize ball (privilege) while acquiring the right to draw a second special symbol (special figure 2 hold storage). Is performed.

  If the special figure 2 reservation memory is acquired during the winning game, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed after the end of the winning game, and the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit. , The winning game is executed again. In the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be won with a high probability with a small probability, so once the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed, the lottery of the special figure 2 is repeatedly executed. It becomes a game state that is easily played.

  Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, an effect is performed to indicate to the player whether or not the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed (whether or not the state is shifted to a state where the lottery of the special figure 2 can be executed). It is configured to be. Thereby, the player can play the game while checking the contents of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

  As described above, the present embodiment is configured to be able to acquire the special figure 2 hold storage by executing the win game (the win operation in which the second attacker 3650 is opened), and therefore, first, FIG. As shown in (a), during the execution of the winning game (the hitting operation in which the second attacker 3650 is opened), an effect is executed to prompt the user to acquire the special figure 2 hold memory. FIG. 238 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a jackpot game when the second attacker 3650 has won a jackpot C which is a jackpot in which the opening operation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 238 (a), when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C is started, the guidance display area Dm3 displays "in order to guide the player to perform a right-handed game during the jackpot game. Right-handed "is displayed. Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect in which the character 811 collects the key 871 is executed. This key 871 is set in the effect mode so that the number corresponding to the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is collected. This is to suggest (notify) to the player that the number of reserved memories in FIG. 2 is large.

  Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment "Collect treasure keys" for explaining the game characteristics of the effect is displayed. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, during the jackpot game, the reservation memory of the special figure 2 is acquired (the key 871 is collected), and the lottery result of the special figure 2 executed after the big hit game is completed is collected. An effect of opening the treasure box 873 (see FIG. 239) using the 871 and informing the player of the contents of the treasure box 873 is executed.

  Further, below the main display area Dm, an acquisition display area Dm12a in which a value relating to the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is added and displayed, and a round number display area Dm12b indicating the current number of round games are formed. . In the example shown in FIG. 238 (a), since the big hit game has just started, “00000” is displayed in the acquisition display area Dm12a, and the prize ball has not been obtained during the big hit game. Is shown. "Round 1" is displayed in the round number display area Dm12b.

  In addition, in the performance during the jackpot game, acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d for notifying the player of the number of collected keys 871 are formed at the right position of the main display area Dm. In the effect performed in the present embodiment, since one key 871 is collected every time one reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired, the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d have a maximum size. The configuration is such that four keys 871 are displayed. It should be noted that the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d are also display areas for indicating the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2.

  Further, a comment is also displayed in the sub display area Ds to indicate to the player the content of the game, "Please keep right," and a second guidance display area formed below the guidance display area Dm3. A diagram schematically showing the configuration near the second entrance 640 is displayed on Dm11. As described above, in the present embodiment, since it is configured such that it is easier to obtain the hold memory of the special figure 2 by continuously firing the ball, other effects are provided so as not to provide a disadvantageous game to the player. The comment for indicating the game content is displayed in a display mode (display mode in which the size of characters is enlarged) that is more emphasized than the display mode used for (1). As described above, by using the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds to explain the details of the game aimed at during the jackpot game, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  Then, after the display of FIG. 238 (a) is executed, the jackpot game is executed, and when the hold memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is acquired, the effect contents shown in FIG. 238 (b) are obtained. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 238 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a part of the effect content displayed when a ball enters the second entrance 640 during the jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 238 (b), when a ball enters the second entrance 640 during the jackpot game, it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 in the main display area Dm. An effect indicating that the key 871 has been collected is executed as an effect for notifying the player that the holding memory of FIG. 2 has been acquired), and a comment “congratulations” is displayed.

  Further, a key 871 is displayed in the acquired display area Dm10a to indicate that one key 871 has been acquired. In the second guidance display area Dm11, a specific effect is displayed at a position imitating the second entrance 640 in order to visually inform the player that the ball has entered. Then, “00085” is displayed as the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game in the acquisition display area Dm12a, and “2” indicating that the current round is the second round is displayed in the round number display area Dm12b. I have.

  Then, when the big hit game ends, a screen shown in FIG. 239 (a) is displayed. FIG. 239 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game. During this ending period, a notification mode (a display mode 872 indicating that two keys have been collected) for notifying the player of the total number of reserved maps of the special figure 2 acquired during the current big hit game is the main display. In addition to being displayed in the area Dm, a comment of "continue right-handed" indicating that the right-handed game is continued even after the big hit game is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

  Furthermore, even if the jackpot game is over, the guide display area Dm3 is displayed as the guide display area Dm3 (see FIG. 238 (a A display mode is set that is more emphasized than ()). This makes it possible to reliably notify the player that the right-handed game must be continued after the end of the big hit game.

  After that, when the jackpot game ends and the lottery (change) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, as shown in FIG. 239 (b), the key 871 collected during the jackpot game is used. The effect of opening the treasure box 873 is executed. FIG. 239 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed when the special figure 2 change is executed after the end of the big hit game.

  FIG. 239 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 2 change is being executed, so that the change display indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is being displayed in the change state is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. The mode is displayed. Then, an effect using one of the two keys 871 (reserved in FIG. 2) collected during the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the number of keys 871 displayed in the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d is reduced from two at the end of the big hit to one.

  The acquisition display area Dm12a is always displayed while the continuous production is being performed during the jackpot game, and when the small hit is won by the special drawing 2 lottery, the second attacker 3650 wins the ball by winning. Information on the number of awarded spheres is also added and displayed. Thereby, the number of balls acquired during the period (advantageous period) in which the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, the round number display area Dm12b is continuously displayed in the same manner as the above-described acquisition display area Dm12a, and the character “Round Extra” is displayed while the game based on the special figure 2 change is being performed. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the advantageous state is set to be extended even after the big hit game is over, in a manner that is easy to understand.

  In the present embodiment, the character “Round Extra” is displayed for the game period in which the special figure 2 change can be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Summing means for summing up the number of prize balls acquired during a playable game period is provided, and the number of prize balls summed up by the summation means is set to a prize ball obtainable in one round game executed during the jackpot game. When it is determined that the number of rounds has been reached, the number of rounds displayed during the big hit game may be added by one, or the small hits won during the game period in which the special figure 2 fluctuation can be executed. The number of rounds displayed during the big hit game when the number of small hits measured by the small hit number measuring means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times) is provided. 1 It may be configured so as to be calculated.

  With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot game is being extended and executed. In this case, it is preferable that an effect of opening the treasure box 873 using the key 871 (see FIG. 239 (b)) is executed even during the execution of the jackpot game. This makes it difficult to determine whether or not the current jackpot game is being played based on the effect being executed, thereby making it possible to prevent the player from easily predicting the previous game.

  When a small hit is won in a state where the effect shown in FIG. 239 (b) is being executed, as shown in FIG. 240, an effect is performed in which the treasure box 873 is opened and the contents of the treasure box 873 are exposed. FIG. 240A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect contents displayed when a small win is won in a case where the normal state is set as the game state.

  In the present embodiment, a case in which a low probability state (normal state, latent state) of an ordinary symbol is set as compared with a case in which a high probability state (probable change state, time saving state) of an ordinary symbol is set as a game state. Is configured so as to easily acquire the special figure 2 hold memory during the small hit game. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 240 (a), since the small hit is won in the state where the normal state is set, the small hit game which can acquire the special figure 2 hold storage is executed. “V” is displayed as a display mode of the contents of the treasure box 873.

  In addition, there are a plurality of display modes indicating the contents of the treasure box 873 other than "V". For example, when the lottery result of Toku-zu 2 is out of order, "X" is displayed. If it is a small hit for which it is difficult to acquire a memory, a display mode imitating "?" Is set. In addition, a pre-determination process of preliminarily determining the winning information of the second special symbol stored on hold is performed, and the determination result of the pre-determination process includes a jackpot or a player in the stored on-hold information. If the determination result indicates that there is a small win that is advantageous to the other, the other special pattern (special figure 2) that is executed before the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) corresponding to the hold information is executed By using the display mode indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2, a display mode indicating that the big hit or the small hit that is advantageous to the player is included in the hold information stored in the hold mode is set. You may comprise.

  Here, as a result of the special figure 2 fluctuation, when a big hit which is disadvantageous to the player, that is, a big hit in which a high probability state (for example, a time saving state) of a normal symbol is set after the big hit game is won, FIG. As shown in (b), a display mode imitating "skull" is set as a display mode indicating the contents of the treasure box 873.

  Furthermore, the display mode of the key 871 and the display mode of the treasure box 873 may be changed based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 executed this time or the result of the preliminary determination on the hold information stored on the hold. For example, as shown in FIG. 241 (a), a display mode (a rusted key and a tattered treasure chest) indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order may be displayed. This allows the player to predict the result of the current lottery of the special symbol before opening the treasure box 873, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  After repeatedly performing the effects shown in FIGS. 238 (a) to 241 (a) described above, if the key 871 is lost (if the reserved storage of the special figure 2 is lost), the advantageous period which is advantageous to the player ends. To do so, the ending screen shown in FIG. 241 (b) is displayed. On the ending screen, a value indicating the number of prize balls acquired in the present advantageous period (a period in which the jackpot game period and the special figure 2 fluctuating period are integrated) (a value displayed in the acquisition display area dm12a) and a small hit And the number of wins are displayed. Then, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 for guiding the player to return the game method to the left-handed game is variably displayed as “left-handed”, and “Please return to left-handed” in the sub-display area Ds. "Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 is changed so that the game mode is switched from right-handed game to left-handed game at the timing when the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is lost, not at the timing of the game state transition. ing. In other words, in the state where the time saving state is set as the gaming state, if there is a special figure 2 reservation, the right-handed game is guided, and if there is no special figure 2 reservation, the left-handed game is guided. ing. This allows the player to execute an appropriate game without executing a disadvantageous game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 242, a flow of transition of each game state in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 242 is a transition diagram showing a flow of transition of each game state in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 244, there are five types of big hits (big hits A to E) set when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. There are three types of big hits (big hits F to H) set when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery.

  Then, the gaming state set after the jackpot game is configured to be different according to the jackpot type set at the time of the jackpot winning and the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot winning. With such a configuration, in the game executed by the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to shift each game state in a complicated manner, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  Further, by providing a game state (semi-advantageous game state) that is easy to shift to an advantageous game state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player and a game state that is difficult to shift, the semi-advantageous game state is set. In this case, the player can continue playing the game, so that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

  As shown in FIG. 242, at the time when the game is started in the pachinko machine 10, a game in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state is executed. When the jackpot of the special map 1 is won, a probability change state is set with a probability of 65% (jackpot A, B winning), a time saving state is set with a probability of 25% (jackpot E winning), and a probability of 10% is set. A normal state is set (big hit C, D winning).

  When the jackpot C is won (5%), the second attacker 3650 opens the part of the jackpot game, so that it is possible to acquire the reservation memory of the special figure 2 during the jackpot game. .

  Therefore, in the case of winning the jackpot in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot D (5%) executes the game for performing the lottery of the special figure 1 again, and the jackpot C (5%) A game for performing a lottery in Tokuzu 2 is executed. Then, the special figure 2 wins the small hit with a probability of about 75%, and in the small hit game executed in the low probability state (normal state) of the ordinary symbol, the special figure 2 is held and stored during the small hit game. Since it is configured to be able to be acquired, when the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed in the normal state, the game period in which the special figure 2 game can be continuously executed as long as the reserved memory of the special figure 2 does not disappear, Become.

  In the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, if the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 2 executed, the probability change state is set with a probability of 30% (the jackpot F winning) and the probability is 35%. The latent state is set (big hit G win), and the time saving state is set with a probability of 35% (big hit H win).

  Next, when the probable change state is set, since the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, it is assumed that the lottery of the special figure 2 executed based on the reservation storage of the special figure 2 wins the small hit. Also, it is configured such that it is not possible to obtain a new reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the small hit game (difficult). Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the probability change state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the time reduction state because the special symbol jackpot winning probability is high. Even if a small hit is won in the lottery shown in FIG. 2, a new hold state of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired, so that the game state is disadvantageous to the player.

  If the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 in the state where the probability change state is set, the probability change state is set again with a probability of 35% (big hit A win), and the latent state is set with a probability of 30% ( The jackpot B win), the normal state is set with a probability of 10% (the jackpot C and D win), and the time saving state is set with the probability of 25% (the jackpot E win). Then, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 2, the probability change state is set again with the probability of 30% (the jackpot F winning), the latent state is set with the probability of 35% (the jackpot G winning), and the 35% The time saving state is set with the probability (big hit H win).

  Next, when the latent state is set, since the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the small hit is won in the drawing of the special figure 2 executed based on the reservation storage of the special figure 2. In such a case, it is configured such that a new storage of the special figure 2 can be acquired during the small hit game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the latent state is a state in which the special symbol jackpot winning probability is high, and the special symbol 2 has the hold memory, and the special symbol 2 lottery has won the small hit. , A new reserved state of the special map 2 can be acquired, and the game state becomes the most advantageous for the player.

  In the state where the latent state is set, if the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1, the latent state is set again with the probability of 65% (the jackpot A, B win), and the normal state with the probability of 10%. It is set (big hit C, D winning), and the time saving state is set with a probability of 25% (big hit E winning). Then, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 2, a probability change state is set with a probability of 65% (big hit F, G win), a latent state is set with a probability of 35% (big hit G win), and 35% The time-saving state is set with the probability of (big hit H win).

  Lastly, when the time saving state is set, since the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, it is assumed that the lottery of the special figure 2 executed based on the reservation storage of the special figure 2 wins a small hit. Also, it is configured such that it is not possible to obtain a new reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the small hit game (difficult). Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, in the time reduction state, the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol is low, and in the state where the special figure 2 is retained, even if the small jackpot is won by the special figure 2 lottery, Since it is not possible to acquire the reservation memory of the special figure 2, the game state becomes the most disadvantageous to the player.

  In the state where the time saving state is set, if the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1, the probability change state is set with a probability of 65% (the jackpot A, B win), and the normal state is set with the probability of 10% ( The jackpots C and D are won), and the time saving state is set again with a probability of 25% (the jackpot E winning). Then, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special map 2, the probability change state is set with a probability of 30% (the jackpot F winning), the latent state is set with the probability of 35% (the jackpot G winning), and the probability of 35% , The time saving state is set again (big hit H win).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that a ball cannot be newly entered into the second entrance 640 regardless of the game state in a state where the special figure 2 is not stored. ing. Further, the first special symbol is configured so that the variation time does not change between the high probability state and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. Therefore, in the state where the special figure 2 is not stored, even if the state of the ordinary symbol is changed, the advantage to the player does not change.

  That is, in the state where the fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure 1 is executed, the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol has the same advantage, and the high probability state (probable change state, latent state) of the special symbol. The certain state) is a more advantageous gaming state than the low probability state of the special symbol, because the jackpot probability of the special symbol increases.

  In addition, in the state where the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is present, it is not possible to acquire a new reserved memory of the special figure 2 in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, and thus the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (probable change state, time saving state). Rather, the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the gaming state most advantageous to the player is the latent state, and the most disadvantageous gaming state is the time saving state.

  Furthermore, when the jackpot is won, the rate of transition to the most advantageous latent state for the player will be described. The rate at which the latent state is set based on the drawing of Toku-zu 1 is the most likely High (30%). Therefore, the probable change state is a quasi-advantageous game state in which the transition to the most advantageous advantageous game state (latent state) is easy.

<Electrical Configuration in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 243 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 243 (a), the ROM 202 according to the eighth embodiment includes a first random number 8 table 202ga, a first type selection 8 table 202gb, a second random number 8 table 202gc, and a variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. , An operation scenario 8 table 202ge. The configuration (table having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the embodiments described above (the same name except for “8” added to make it possible to identify the electrical configuration used in the eighth embodiment)) ) Is used in the same manner as in the above-described embodiments, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 243 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 243 (a), the ROM 202 according to the eighth embodiment includes a first random number 8 table 202ga, a first type selection 8 table 202gb, a second random number 8 table 202gc, and a variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. , An operation scenario 8 table 202ge. The configuration (table having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the embodiments described above (the same name except for “8” added to make it possible to identify the electrical configuration used in the eighth embodiment)) ) Is used in the same manner as in the above-described embodiments, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The first random number 8 table 202ga is a data table used for the same purpose as the first random number table 202a used in each of the above-described embodiments, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is equal to the first random number counter C1. If the value matches the value of the random number which is a jackpot set by the random number 8 table 202ga, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  In addition, the first random number 8 table 202ga defines the number of random numbers to be a big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the same manner, but the random number in which the lottery of the second special symbol is a small hit. (See FIG. 243 (b)). In this way, by making the number of random hits different from each other (set for only one special symbol), the bonus to the player can be obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. The degree of expectation for giving a big hit or a small hit can be made different.

  Here, the contents of the first random number 8 table 202ga will be described with reference to FIG. 243 (b). FIG. 243 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 8 table 202ga. In the first random number 8 table 202ga, a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a big hit and a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a small hit in a lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are defined. This data table is referred to when the lottery result is acquired in the special symbol change start process 8 (see FIG. 252) (see S11003 and S11004 in FIG. 252).

  The first random number per hit table 202a (see FIG. 243 (b)) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first random number per hit counter C1 and the lottery result is specified. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, “0 to 1” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202ga1 in FIG. 243 (b)), and it is determined that the first special symbol is deviated. The range of the judgment value to be performed is defined as “2 to 399” (see 202ga2 in FIG. 243 (b)).

  In addition, “2 to 99” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202ga2 in FIG. 243 (b)), and the determination value determined to be the small hit of the second special symbol is determined. “100 to 399” is defined as the range (see 202ga3 in FIG. 243 (b)). In the high probability state (probable change state) of the special symbol, “0 to 19” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202ga4 in FIG. 243 (b)). “20 to 399” is defined as a range of the determination value to be determined (see 202ga5 in FIG. 243 (b)). In addition, “20 to 99” is defined as the determination value for determining that the second special symbol has been removed (see 202ga5 in FIG. 243 (b)), and “100” is determined as the determination value for determining that the second special symbol is a small hit. To 399 ”(see 202ga6 in FIG. 243 (b)).

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the winning start matches one of the determination values corresponding to the big hit specified in the first random number 8 table 202ga (see FIG. 243 (b)). In the meantime, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, and when it matches any of the determination values corresponding to the small hits, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit.

  Next, the contents of the first hit type selection 8 table 202gb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 244 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first hit type selection 8 table 202gb. In the eighth embodiment, five types of jackpots (jackpot A to jackpot E) set when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2) There are three types of jackpots (jackpot F to jackpot H) set when a jackpot is won in the lottery, and an opening operation scenario (operation scenario) set during the jackpot game according to the jackpot type and The game state set after the end of the big hit game is different.

  Specifically, when the symbol type that has won the jackpot is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the obtained determination value of the first hit type counter CS1 is “0 to 34”, the jackpot type is “big hit A”. Is set. The “big hit A” is a 10-round positive change big hit, and the action A is set as an opening action scenario (action scenario). The specific contents defined in the operation scenario will be described later using the operation scenario 8 table 202ge described in FIG.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game is defined so as to differ according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Is in the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), probable state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), or time reduction state (low probability of special symbol) State, a normal symbol high probability state), the probability change state is set after the jackpot game, and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning is a latent state (a special symbol high probability state, a normal symbol low probability state). For example, it is defined that the latent state is set after the big hit game ends.

  When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is “35 to 64”, “big hit B” is set as the big hit type. The "big hit B" is a game in which the same big hit game as the "big hit A" is executed (a big hit game in which the operation A is set as the opening operation scenario (operation scenario) in the 10 round probability changing big hit), The game state set after the end of the big hit game is different.

  Specifically, when the "big hit B" is won, the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) or a time reduction state (a low probability of a special symbol). State, a normal symbol high-probability state), the probability change state is set after the jackpot game, and the game state at the time of the jackpot winning is a probability change state (a special symbol high-probability state, a normal symbol high-probability state), or In the case of a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), it is defined that the latent state is set after the end of the big hit game.

  In this way, by providing a jackpot type in which the game content (operation scenario) of the jackpot game is the same and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is different, a player executing the jackpot game can receive a jackpot game. It is possible to prevent the game state set after the game is completed from being grasped in advance (until the big hit game ends). Also, by making it difficult to predict the game state set after the jackpot game according to the game content of the jackpot game, for example, during the jackpot game, a suggestion effect for indicating to the player the game state set after the jackpot game is completed. It is preferable to provide a suggestion effect executing means for executing the instruction effect. With such a configuration, the player is gazing at the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in this case, a suggestion effect setting for setting the effect mode of the suggestion effect executed during the big hit game based on the game state set after the big hit game and the game content of the big hit game is provided. It is good to configure. Specifically, the game content of the jackpot game and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game are ranked in an order that is advantageous to the player, and the ranks corresponding to the jackpot type won this time are integrated ( It is preferable to configure one effect mode from among a plurality of effect modes based on the value (information) that has been added. As a result, as the jackpot game progresses (as the game content of the jackpot game becomes clearer), it becomes easier to predict the game state set after the jackpot game based on the effect mode of the suggested effect to be executed, It is possible to cause the player to watch the suggested effect for a long time during the jackpot game, and it is possible to further enhance the effect.

  When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is “65 to 69”, “big hit C” is set as the big hit type. The “big hit C” is a game in which a 10 round big hit game is executed in the same manner as the above “big hit A”, but the content of the operation scenario to be set is different, and the first attacker 650 and the second attacker This is a jackpot in which a scenario of an operation B in which a game content for opening both of the 3650 and the opening operation is defined is set. Then, it is a normal jackpot in which a low probability of a special symbol is set as a game state after the end of the jackpot game.

  Specifically, when the "big hit C" is won, the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), a probability change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, Normal symbol high probability state), time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), ie, jackpot Regardless of the game state at the time, it is defined that the normal state is set after the end of the big hit game.

  Next, when the acquired value of the first hit type counter c2 is “70 to 74”, “big hit D” is set. In the “big hit D”, the operation scenario of the operation A is set so that the game content of the big hit game is the same as the above “big hit A”. And like the above "big hit C", it is a normal big hit in which a low probability of a special symbol is set as a game state after the big hit game is over.

  Specifically, when the "big hit D" is won, the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), a probability change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, Normal symbol high probability state), time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), ie, jackpot Regardless of the game state at the time, it is defined that the normal state is set after the end of the big hit game.

  When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is “75 to 99”, “big hit E” is set. The “big hit E” is a game in which the same big hit game as the above “big hit D” is executed (a big hit game in which the round A is a 10-round normal big hit and the action A is set as an opening action scenario (action scenario)), Only the game state set after the end of the big hit game is different from “big hit D”.

  Specifically, when the "big hit E" is won, the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), a probability change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, Normal symbol high probability state), time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), ie, jackpot Regardless of the game state at the time, it is defined that the time reduction state is set after the big hit game is over.

  On the other hand, if the symbol type that has won the jackpot is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the obtained determination value of the first hit type counter CS1 is “0 to 29”, “big hit F” is set as the jackpot type. You. The “big hit F” is a big hit game having the same game content as the above “big hit A”, that is, a 10-round positive change big hit, and the action A is set as an opening action scenario (action scenario). The game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol), a probable change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol), time reduction state (special symbol) Low-probability state, normal symbol high-probability state) or latent state (special symbol high-probability state, normal symbol low-probability state), that is, after the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot win It specifies that the state is set.

  When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is “30 to 64”, “big hit G” is set. The “big hit G” is a two-round probability changing big hit in which a two-round big hit game is executed, and an operation scenario of an operation C in which a game content for opening the second attacker 3650 is specified is set. Then, when the "big hit G" is won, the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), a probable change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a normal symbol) If it is a high probability state) or a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol), the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) will be changed after the jackpot game. If the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning is set to the latent state, it is defined that the probability changing state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

  Finally, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is “65 to 99”, “big hit H” is set. The "big hit H" is a 10 round normal big hit in which the operation scenario of the operation A is set so that the big hit game having the same game content as the "big hit D" is executed. When the "big hit H" is won, the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), a probable change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a normal symbol) High probability state), time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol), or latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) Regardless of the state, it is stipulated that the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit game.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed (the state where the reserved storage of the special figure 2 is secured), the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (normal state, latent state) Is set so that a game more advantageous to the player can be provided than when a high probability state (probable change state, time saving state) of a normal symbol is set.

  Specifically, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit is won with a probability of about 75%, and when the small hit is won, the second attacker 3650 (open / close door 3650f) is won. ) Is configured to be opened. When the second attacker 3650 is opened by the small hitting game, a state is provided in which a ball easily flows through the through gate 67 into the guidance passage 3660 (see FIG. 243). When the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the variation time (2 seconds) of the ordinary symbol suitable for the time required for the ball passing through the through gate 67 to reach the second entrance 640 is set. For this reason, the configuration is such that the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 easily enters the second ball entrance 640.

  On the other hand, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the fluctuation time (0.1) of the ordinary symbol that is shorter than the time required for the ball passing through the through gate 67 to reach the second entrance 640 is set. Seconds), in detail, before the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640, the general per-game (electric powered 640a The opening time is set so short that the opening operation is completed. Therefore, it is configured such that a ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is unlikely to enter the second entrance 640.

  With this configuration, it is possible to vary the number of retained memories of the second special symbol during the small hit game according to the game state set when the small hit is won. In addition, when a special jackpot is won by a jackpot, the low probability state of the symbol is usually set during the jackpot game, so the second special is set regardless of the gaming state set when the jackpot is won. It is possible to make it easy to acquire the reserved memory of the symbol.

  The operation scenario 8 table 202ge is a table that defines the operations of the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 3650 when the gaming state is a big hit or a small hit. The operation scenario 8 table 202ge specifies, for each scenario type, the contents of the operation and whether the special figure 2 during the operation can be retained.

  Here, the contents of the operation scenario 8 table 202ge will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the operation scenario 8 table 202ge. The operation scenario 8 table 202ge defines a jackpot game in which the first attacker 650 is opened for 10 rounds when the scenario type is A and the jackpot is A. Therefore, when Scenario A is set, the second attacker 3650 is not released, and the hold storage of Toku-zu 2 cannot be newly acquired during the jackpot game. Next, in the case of a jackpot and the scenario type is B, a jackpot game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened for one to two rounds and the first attacker 650 is opened for three to ten rounds is defined. I have. Therefore, when the scenario B is set, the second attacker 3650 is opened, and the hold storage of the special map 2 can be newly acquired during the big hit game.

  Next, when the scenario type is C with a jackpot, a jackpot game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened for one or two rounds is defined. Therefore, when the scenario C is set, the second attacker 3650 is opened, and the hold storage of the special map 2 can be newly acquired during the big hit game. In the case of a small hit, the second attacker is opened for one round. Therefore, during the small hit game, the reserved memory of the special map 2 can be newly acquired.

  Here, the contents of each scenario specified in the operation scenario 8 table 202ge will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of each scenario. As shown in FIG. 245 (b), when Scenario A is set, 2 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and the first attacker 650 is set as the single round game for 30 seconds or It will be open until the winning number reaches 10 balls. When one round game is completed, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. Then, when the tenth round game ends, 4 seconds is set as an ending period (ED period), and when the ending period elapses, the big hit game ends.

  When Scenario B is set, 2 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and one round game opens the second attacker 3650 for 1.5 seconds three times, or It is set until the winning number becomes three balls. When one round game is completed, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. Then, when the interval period after the second round game elapses, the first attacker 650 is released as a third round game for 30 seconds or until the winning number reaches 10 balls. When the tenth round game ends, 4 seconds is set as an ending period (ED period), and the big hit game ends when the ending period elapses.

  When Scenario C is set, 0.5 seconds is set as an opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and one round game is performed by opening the second attacker 3650 for 1.5 seconds three times. Or, it is set until the winning number becomes three balls. When one round game is completed, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. When the second round game ends, 4 seconds is set as an ending period (ED period), and when the ending period elapses, the big hit game ends.

  In the scenario set during the small hit game, 0.5 second is set as the opening period (OP period) of the small hit game, and one round game opens the second attacker 3650 once for 1.5 seconds. It is executed or set until the winning number becomes three balls. When one round game ends, 4 seconds is set as an ending period (ED period), and the big hit game ends when the ending period elapses.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, a configuration in which a part of the big hit game (big hit B, big hit C) and a hit game for opening the second attacker 3650 in the small hit game are executed. I have. Therefore, the ball can be passed through the through gate 67 during the hit game, and the ball can be made to enter the second entrance 640. As shown in FIG. 245 (b), when the second attacker 3650 is opened in the big hit game, the number of times of opening the second attacker 3650 is smaller than in the case of opening the second attacker 3650 in the small hit game. Since it is set so as to increase, in one hit game, a larger hit game can make more balls enter the second entrance 640 than a small hit game.

  Further, as described above, in the eighth embodiment, when a high probability state (a time saving state, a probable change state) of an ordinary symbol is set, even if a ball is passed through the through gate 67, the guide path 3660 is provided. Is configured not to be able to enter (become difficult to) the second ball entrance 640, and when a jackpot game is executed, a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, and a small jackpot game is performed. When it is executed, the small hit game is configured to be executed with the gaming state at the time of the small hit winning. Therefore, the big hit game is a hit game in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 than the small hit game.

  The second random number 8 table 202gc is a data table used for the same application as the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and is a value of the second random number counter C4. , The presence or absence of a winning is determined by referring to the second random number 8 table 202gc.

  Here, the contents of the second random number 8 table 202gc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 246 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number 8 table 202gc. The second winning random number 8 table 202gc (see FIG. 246) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the ordinary symbol is defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “0 to 237” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202gc1 in FIG. 246). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “0 to 238” is defined as a determination value to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202gc3 in FIG. 246). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, refer to the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the second random number 8 table 202gc. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit.

  Further, in the normal state of the normal symbol, “238, 239” is defined as the judgment value for the departure of the normal symbol (see 202gc2 in FIG. 246). In addition, “239” is defined as a determination value indicating that a normal symbol comes off in the normal symbol high probability state.

  The variation pattern 8 table 202gd is a data table used for the same purpose as the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and includes the type of the special symbol for which the lottery is executed, In accordance with the result of the lottery and the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1, a variation pattern in which different variation times are set is defined.

  Here, the contents of the fluctuation pattern 8 table 202gd will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 and 248. FIG. 247 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern 8 table 202gd. FIG. 248 (a) shows the contents of the normal / latent 8 table 202gd1 defined by the fluctuation pattern 8 table 202gd. FIG. 248 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving / probable variation 8 table 202gd2 defined by the fluctuation pattern 8 table 202gd. It is.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 248 (a), the contents of the normal / latent reliability 8 table 202gd1 will be described. The normal / latent probability 8 table 202gd1 is a variation pattern table referred to when the normal state / latent probability state is set as the game state, and is a time saving / probability changing 8 table 202gd2 (time saving state) described later. Or a variation pattern table referred to when the probability variation state is set), the variation time is set so that the ball easily passes through the second entrance 640 or the second attacker 3650. Is defined as follows.

  The contents defined in the normal / latent probability 8 table 202gd1 will be specifically described. When the type of the special symbol is the special figure 1 and the lottery result is out of order, the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is Regardless, “out-of-range fluctuation” (a fluctuation time of 30 to 120 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern, and if the lottery result is a big hit, if the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 99”, the fluctuation is As a pattern, a “hit normal fluctuation” (a fluctuation time of 30 seconds) is defined. In the case of “100 to 179”, “super-variation per hit” (variation time 60 seconds) is defined. In the case of “180 to 198”, “hit special fluctuation” (fluctuation time of 120 seconds) is defined as a fluctuation pattern.

  When the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the lottery result is out of order, “out-of-way fluctuation” (fluctuating time of 5 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1. In the case where the lottery result is a small hit, “small hit fluctuation” (variation time of 5 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired. Regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, the “hit variation” (variation time of 5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern. That is, in the special figure 2 game in the normal / latent state, the fluctuation time is set to 5 seconds regardless of the lottery result.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 248 (b), the contents defined in the time saving / probability change 8 table 202gd2 will be specifically described. When the type of the special symbol is the special figure 1 and the lottery result is out of order, “out-of-middle change” (a change time of 30 to 60 milliseconds) is used as the change pattern regardless of the value of the obtained change type counter CS1. When the lottery result is a big hit, when the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 39”, “variation per hit normal” (variation time 30 milliseconds) is defined as the variation pattern. . In the case of “40 to 119”, “winning super fluctuation” (fluctuation time: 60 milliseconds) is defined. In the case of “120 to 198”, “winning special fluctuation” (fluctuation time of 120 milliseconds) is defined as a fluctuation pattern.

  When the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the lottery result is out of order, regardless of the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern is "out short variation" (variation time 1 millisecond). Is specified, and if the lottery result is a small hit, "small hit short fluctuation" (variation time of 1 millisecond) is specified as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the lottery result is In this case, regardless of the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1, the "short hit variation" (variation time of 1 millisecond) is defined as the variation pattern. That is, in the special figure 2 game in the time saving state or the probable change state, the variation time is set to 1 millisecond regardless of the lottery result.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 249 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 249, the RAM 203 of the eighth embodiment has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, and a first special symbol holding ball. Number counter 203d, second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203gb, ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e, positive change flag 203g, variable time counter 203gc, big hit flag 203o, small hit flag 203p, round end flag 203gd, other memory area 203z. The configuration (flag, counter, area) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments is the same as that in each of the above-described embodiments in terms of its application, and thus detailed description is omitted. .

  The other memory area 203z of the present embodiment has a data area capable of storing the currently set game state, and has a high probability state, a low probability state of a special symbol, or a high probability state of a normal symbol. The state and the low-probability state can be stored, and the condition until each state ends (transition to another state) and the current state corresponding to the condition can be updated. The specific contents are the same as the control processing for the probability change flag, the probability change counter, and the time saving counter in each of the above-described embodiments, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga is different from the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol. More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the second entrance 640, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4th reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in main controller 110, each value of counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga is changed to execution area. Is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

  The second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203gb is a counter that counts the retaining balls based on winning in the second entrance 640, and the other configuration is the same as the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  The fluctuation time counter 203gc is a counter for counting the fluctuation time. A counter value corresponding to the variation time of the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd is set in the variation time counter 203gc (see S11011 in FIG. 252). Further, the fluctuation time counter 203q is decremented by one in the special symbol fluctuation processing 8 (see FIG. 251) (see S10914 in FIG. 251), and whether the fluctuation time has elapsed based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 203gc. Is determined.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 250A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 250A, the ROM 222 of the tenth embodiment has the same electrical configuration as that of the above-described first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 250 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 250 (b), the RAM 223 of the tenth embodiment includes a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga, a change start flag 223fa, It has a stop type selection flag 223fb, a fluctuation time counter 223fd, a game state storage area 223fe, a jackpot effect extension flag 223gb, and another memory area 223z. The configuration (flag, counter, area) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments is the same as that in each of the above-described embodiments in terms of its application, and thus detailed description is omitted. .

  The second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223ga is a counter that counts the retaining balls based on winning in the second entrance 640, and the other configuration is the same as the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  The jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is a flag for indicating that the effect during the jackpot game (see FIG. 238 (a)) is continuously executed even after the jackpot game ends, and is continued even after the jackpot game ends. It is set to ON when it is determined to execute (extend the jackpot effect). The jackpot effect extension flag 222gb is turned on when a command indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is received from the main control device 110 (S12806 in FIG. 257), and the received command indicates that the retained ball number is If it is determined that the command is 0, the command is turned off (S12906 in FIG. 258). If the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is turned on, the jackpot extension effect is executed after the jackpot game (see FIG. 239 (a)).

<Control Process of Main Controller in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 251, the special symbol variation process 8 (S9001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 8 (S9001). The special symbol change process 8 (S9001) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display and the third symbol display performed on the first symbol display device 37 are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed by the device 81.

  In the special symbol variation process 8, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a big hit or a small hit of the special symbol (S10901). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the big hit flag 203o and the small hit flag 203p is on. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special symbol is in a big hit or a small hit (S10901: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S10901, if it is determined that the special symbol is neither a big hit nor a small hit (S10901: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10902). If it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S10902: No), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb (the number of times N2 of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is held). Is acquired (S10903). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is larger than 0 (S10904). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203gb is not 0 (S10904: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203gb is subtracted by 1 (S10905) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the executed second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is set (S10906). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as a voice in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223 ga.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S10911, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga is shifted (S10907). In the process of S10907, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S10913.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10904, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is 0 (S10904: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the first special symbol The number of times the variable display is held based on the lottery N1) is acquired (S10908), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S10909).

  In the process of S10909, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S10909: No), the first special symbol and the second special symbol both start to change. Since this state cannot be performed, the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S10909, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S10909: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number is set. The value (N1) of the counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S10910), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10911). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as a voice in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S10911, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the processing of S10907 (S10909), and the processing proceeds to S10913. Transition. In the processing of S10907 or S10913 executed after the processing of S10912, the special symbol change start processing 8 for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S10913), and this processing ends. The details of the special symbol change start process 8 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S10902, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10902: Yes), the value of the change time counter 203gc is updated by subtracting 1 (S10914), and the updated change time counter is updated. Based on the value of 203gc, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S10915). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time counter 203gc updated in the process of S10914 has become 0. The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and the variation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S10915: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S10916), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10915, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S10915: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10917). The display pattern of the stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol change start process 8 (S10913) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process 8 (S10913) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Any of the jackpots A to H is determined.

  After the process of S10916 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process 8 is displayed. It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S10918). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S10918: Yes), the probability change flag 203g is set to off (S10919), the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S10920), and the process proceeds to S10921. I do. When the start of the special symbol big hit is set by the processing of S10919, when the big hit control processing (S1004) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes and the opening command is set. Is performed (S1102). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big hit effect is started.

  In the processing of S10918, if the result of the current lottery is out of the special symbol (S10918: No), the processing of S10919 and S10920 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S10921.

  In the special symbol variation process 8 (see S9001 in FIG. 251) in the tenth embodiment, as in the above-described second embodiment, the technical concept and the control content for stopping and displaying the special symbol for a predetermined period are described. You may comprise so that it may be added. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the result of the lottery of the specific symbol in an easily understandable manner.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 252, the special symbol change start process 8 (S10913) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process 8 (S10913). The special symbol change start process 8 (S10913) is a process executed in the special symbol change process 8 (see FIG. 251) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga, a lottery of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol departure” is performed (whether or not), and This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol change start processing 8, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga. Each value of C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S11001).

  Next, the probability change flag 203g is read to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state (S11002). In the process of S11002, if the probable change flag 203g is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in the probable change state, and if the probable change flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in the low probability state (not the probable change state). In the process of S11002, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable change state (S11002: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S11001 and the first value for the high probability case are determined. Based on the winning random number 8 table 202ga, a lottery result is obtained as to whether or not a special symbol is a big hit (S11003). When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the flow shifts to S11005.

  On the other hand, in the process of S11002, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probable change state (in the low probability state of the special symbol) (S11002: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S11001 and Then, based on the first random number 8 table for low probability (see FIG. 243 (b)), a lottery result as to whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S11004). When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the flow shifts to S11005.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of S11003 or S11004 is a special symbol jackpot (S11005). If it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is determined (S11005: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S11001, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S11006).

  In the process of S11006, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hits A to H). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpots A to H) are set as the stop types.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S11007). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S11007, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the third symbol display device 81 until it stops at the big hit symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd (see FIG. 247), and the variation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Time).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S11005 that the special symbol is out of the way (including a small hit) (S11005: No), a display mode when the special symbol is out (the small hit) is set (S11008). In the process of S11008, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-symbol (small-hit) symbol, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As the stop type to be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out-of-front-reach, reach other than back-and-forth-out, complete out-of-range, or small hit.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S11001 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete departure is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than departure before and after is set, and "98" , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. I do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete departure is set, and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than departure is set. , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of a miss (small hit) is determined (S11009). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off (small hit) symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S11007, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd, and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. (Fluctuation time) is determined.

  When the processing in S11007 or S11009 is completed, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing in S11007 or S11009 is set (S11010). Next, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter 203gc (S11011). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S11006 or S11008 is set (S11012). These fluctuation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 52). When the process of S11012 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process 8.

  In the special symbol change start process 8 (see S10913 in FIG. 252) of the eighth embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (S11005: Yes in FIG. 252), the special symbol is not a big hit (out of place or Although the processing content to be executed is different depending on the case of the small hit (S11005: No in FIG. 252), it is determined that the hit is not a big hit as used in any of the above-described embodiments. In such a case, the control process is executed for a miss, and the lottery result of this time is configured to determine whether it is a miss or a small hit. The processing contents to be executed may be made different from each other. Note that the detailed contents of the control processing executed in this case are the same as those in any of the above-described embodiments, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the start winning process 8 (S9002) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the start winning processing 8 (S9002). This start winning process 8 (S9002) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and determines whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. Then, when there is a winning start, this is a process for executing a hold process of the values indicated by the various counters.

  When the start winning process 8 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) the first ball opening 64 (S11101). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance opening 64 (S11101: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is obtained (S11101). S11102). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S11103).

  Then, whether the ball has won a prize in the first entrance 64 (S11101: No), or the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d even if the ball has a prize in the first entrance 64 If (N1) is not less than 4 (S11103: No), the process proceeds to S11107. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S11101: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S11103: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S11104). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S11105).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as a voice in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S11105, each of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31). The value is stored in the first area of the empty reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S11106), and the process proceeds to S11107. In the process of S11106, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S11107, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (started winning) the second entrance 640 (S11107). In this process, similarly to the process of S11101, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 640 (S11107: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the special symbol N2) is acquired ( (S11108), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203gb is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S11109).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S11107: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is not changed. If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S11109: No), the process proceeds to S11113. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the second entrance 640 (S11107: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is less than 4 (S11109: Yes), the second special One is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203gb (S11110). Then, a reserved ball count command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203gb changed by the calculation is set (S11111).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as a voice in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223 ga.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S11111, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing are set to It is stored in the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga of the RAM 203 (S11112), and the processing shifts to S11113. In the process of S11112, similarly to the process of S11106, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S11113, a pre-read process for pre-reading the success or failure is executed from various counter values acquired based on the winning start (S11113), and this process ends. Details of the prefetch processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the prefetch processing (S11113). In this pre-reading process (S11113), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entry to the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 has been detected in the current startup winning process 8 (see FIG. 252). If no new ball has been detected (S11201: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11201 that a new ball has been detected (S11201: Yes), then whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected ball has reached the upper limit (ie, 4)? It is determined whether or not this is the case (S11202), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit (S11202: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S11202, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S11202: No), it is determined whether the timing of starting the variable display based on the incoming ball is the special symbol change state. It is determined whether it is (S11203). In the process of S11203, it is determined whether or not the game state is the probable change state in accordance with the current game state and the result of the look-ahead of the reserved ball retained before the current ball entry. Specifically, if the jackpot is not included in the pending ball, the current game state matches the timing of starting the fluctuation display based on the ball detected this time, so that the current game state is in a probable change state. Is determined. In addition, when the retained ball includes a jackpot, the gaming state may be changed according to the type of the jackpot. Specifically, when the probability jackpot is suspended, the state shifts to the probability change state after the jackpot, and when the normal jackpot is suspended, the state transitions to the normal state after the jackpot. In consideration of these, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the fluctuation display based on the ball that has been detected this time is in a probable change state.

  In the processing of S11203, if it is determined that the start of the change based on the currently detected ball entry is the state of the special symbol being positively changed (S11203: Yes), the type of the entrance that detected the ball entry and the high probability The lottery result based on the current ball entry is obtained based on the first first random number 8 table 202ga for use (S11204), and the process proceeds to S11206. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start of the change is the low probability state of the special symbol (S11203: No), the type of the entrance that has detected the entrance and the first random number 8 table 202ga for the low probability are set. , A lottery result based on the current ball entry is acquired (S11205), and the process proceeds to S11206.

  In the processing of S11206 executed after the processing of S11204 or S11205, a winning information command is set based on the type of the entrance that has detected the current entrance and the lottery result obtained in the processing of S11204 or S11205. (S11206), this process ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 52) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the type of the entrance port notified by the winning information command and the lottery result in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the ordinary symbol variation process 8 (S9003) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process 8 (S9003). The normal symbol variation process 8 (S9003) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and is performed by the second symbol display device 83 to display the variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) and the second ball entry. This is a process for controlling the opening time and the like of the electric accessory 640a attached to the mouth 640.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process 8 (S9003), first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a winning of an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S11301). As for the hit during the normal symbol (second symbol), the control for opening and closing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S11301: Yes), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S11301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S11302), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S11030: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S11303). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S11304), and if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is 0 (S11304: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S11304: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S11305).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S11306). In the process of S11306, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S11307).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a high probability state (time saving state) (S11308). In the process of S11308, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is in the high probability state based on the information in the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203.

  In the process of S11308, when it is determined that the symbol is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (S11308: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S11307 and the second random number 8 for the high probability time are calculated. Based on the table 202gc (refer to FIG. 246), a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S11309). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number 8 table 202gc for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 238", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of "239", the normal symbol is out of the pattern. (See FIG. 246).

  In the process of S11308, when it is determined that the state is not the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (S11308: No), the process proceeds to S11310. In the processing of S11310, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot game or the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state (normal state) of the ordinary symbol, so the second random number counter acquired in the processing of S11307. Based on the value of C4 and the second random number 8 table 202gc for low probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S11310). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number 8 table 202gc for low probability. As described above, when the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 237”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and when the value is in the range of “238, 239”, the normal symbol is out of the normal symbol. Is determined (see FIG. 246).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S11309 or S11310 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S11311), and when it is determined that the lottery result is the hit of the ordinary symbol (S11311: Yes), A winning display mode is set (S11312). In the process of S11312, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol “O” is set to be lit on as a stopped symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time reduction state (high probability state) (S11314). If the normal symbol is in the time reduction state (high probability state) (S11314: Yes), the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is performed. Is set to 0.1 second (S11315), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (high probability state) (S11314: No), the variable display of the second symbol display device 83 is set to 2 seconds (S11316), and this processing is performed. finish.

  In addition, in the process of S11302, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S11302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is determined (S11317). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time set beforehand by the processing of S11315 or the processing of S11316 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S11317, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S11317: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S11317, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S11317: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S11318). In the process of S11318, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S11312, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighting). Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S11313, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S11318, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After finishing, the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S11313 or the process of S11318.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S11319). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S11319: Yes), then it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time reduction state (high probability state) (S11320), and is in the time reduction state (high probability state). If not (S11320: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are set to “0.9 seconds × 1 time” (S11321), and the process is S523. Move to. On the other hand, in the processing of S11320, when it is determined that it is during the time reduction of a normal symbol (during a high probability state) (S11320: Yes), the opening time and opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are determined. The number of times is set to “1 second × 1 time” (S11322), and the process shifts to S11323.

  In the processing of S11323, the opening time and the opening / closing control start of the number of times of opening determined in the processing of S11321 or S11322 are set (S11323), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S11323, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a is opened. The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S11321 or the processing of S11322 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S11319, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S11319: No), each process of S11320 to S11323 is skipped, and this process ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the eighth embodiment is different from the control process according to the seventh embodiment in that the content of the command determination process is changed. The other elements are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, for convenience of explanation, the same processes as those in the above-described embodiments may be denoted by different reference numerals, but processes having the same name are used for the same purpose.

  First, the command determination process 8 (S4191) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 8 (S4191). This command determination process 8 (S4191) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. This is the process to perform.

  In the command determination process 8, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 outputs a variation pattern command. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S12701). In the process of S12701, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S12701: Yes), the variation start flag 223fa provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S12702), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S12703), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 52) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12701 that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S12701: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S12704). When the stop type command is received (S12704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223fb of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S12705), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S12706). The process ends. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S12704, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S12704: No), it is next determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S12707). . Then, when it is determined that the command of the number of reserved balls has been received (S12707: Yes), the processing related to the number of reserved balls is executed (S12708), and this processing ends. Details of the reserved ball number-related processing (S12708) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is sent from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted, every time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 and the second special symbol are processed by the processing of S08. The value of the symbol holding ball number counter 223ga can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 and the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb. Therefore, the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c and the value of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223ga of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed by the influence of noise and the like to the first special symbol retaining ball number counter of the main control device 110. 203d and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 and the second The value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223ga can be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203gb of the main controller 110.

  When the process of S12708 is executed, the display reserved ball for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga. Several commands are set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S12707, if it is determined that the pending ball count command has not been received (S12707: No), then it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S12709). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S12709: Yes), the data of the gaming status storage area 223fe is updated according to the received command (S12710). Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the sound lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12709 that no status command has been received (S12709: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received (S12711). In the process of S12711, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S12711: Yes), information corresponding to the received winning information command is set in the winning information storage area 223b (S12712), and this process ends.

  In the process of S12711, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S12711: No), then, the command related to the winning (big hit, small hit) (opening command, round number command, ending command for each hit) ) Is determined (S12713). If it is determined that the command related to the hit has been received (S12713: Yes), the hit-related process 8 for executing the control corresponding to the type of the command related to the hit is executed (S12714), This processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S12713, when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S12713: No), a process according to another command is executed (S12715), and this process ends. In the process of S12715, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used in the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 257, a description will be given of the processing related to the number of retained balls (S12709), which is one of the command determination processing 8 (S4191) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number related processing (S12709).

  In the reserved ball count related processing (S12709), first, it is determined whether a special figure 2 related command, that is, a command related to the reserved ball count of the second special symbol (special figure 2) has been received (S12801). If it is determined that the special figure 2 related command has been received (S12801: Yes), it is determined whether the received special figure 2 related command is a command indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 (S12802). If it is determined that the command indicates an increase (S12802: Yes), the information of the gaming state storage area 223fe is read (S12803). Next, it is determined whether the read information of the gaming state storage area 223fe is a big hit or a small hit (S12804). If it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is being made (S12804: Yes), it is determined whether or not the big hit effect extension flag 223gb is on (S12805). If it is determined that the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is off (S12805: No), the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is set on to set the extension of the effect performed during the jackpot (S12806), A jackpot extension effect is set (S12807), and the flow shifts to the process of S12808. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12805 that the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is ON (S12805: Yes), it is not necessary to set the jackpot extension effect, so the processes of S12806 to S12807 are skipped and the process of S12808 is skipped. Move on to processing.

  With this configuration, if the special game 2 is retained while the winning game is being performed, the special figure 2 change (lottery) is executed after the big hit game is completed. You can set a jackpot extension effect. In other words, the effect to be executed after the end of the winning game is set based on whether or not the special game 2 is held and stored, instead of the gaming state set after the end of the winning game. Since an effect mode corresponding to the lottery (variation) of the special figure 2 that can be executed only under the condition can be easily set, an effect that can be easily understood by the player can be executed.

  In S12808, the key display mode (display mode of the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d) corresponding to the command received this time is set (S12808). Next, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga (S12810), and the flow shifts to the process of S12811. On the other hand, in the processing of S12804, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a big hit or a small hit (S12804: No), an error command is set (S12809), and the flow shifts to the processing of S12810. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S12802, when it is determined that the command received for the special figure 2 received this time is not the command indicating the increase (S12813), the process at the time of decrease is executed (S12813), and the process proceeds to S12811.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 258, a process at the time of decrease (S12813) which is one of the processes related to the number of retained balls (S12709) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the process at the time of reduction (S12813).

  In the process at the time of decrease (S12813), first, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the command received this time and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga (S12901). Next, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12902). In the processing of S12902, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12902), it is the timing of the end of the big hit, so the extra round A display effect command indicating the end of the process is set (S12903). Next, a display instruction command indicating left-handed is set (S12904). Next, the right strike command is set to off (S12905), the big hit effect extension flag 223gb is set to off (S12906), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12902 that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S12902: No), a key display mode corresponding to the number of reserved balls is set (S12907). This processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 257, the description will be continued. Upon completion of any of S12801, S12810, or S12813, the flow shifts to S12811. In the process of S12811, it is determined whether a special figure 1 related command has been received (S12811). In the process of S12811, it is determined whether a special figure 1 related command has been received (S12811). When it is determined that the special figure 1 related command has been received (S12811: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (S12812), and this processing ends. I do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 related command has not been received (S12811: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the content of the hit-related process 8 (S12714) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 259 is a flowchart schematically showing the content of the hit-related process 8 (S12714). The hit-related process 8 (S12714) is executed when a hit-related command (a command related to a big hit or a small hit) is received.

  When the hit-related processing 8 (S12714) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received this time is a big-hit-related command (S12151). If it is determined that the received hit-related command is a big-hit-related command (S12151: Yes). Then, the corresponding display command is set (S12152), and the process ends. The various display commands set in the processing of S12152 are set by the same processing as the processing executed when a jackpot-related command is received in the command determination processing executed in each of the above-described embodiments. , And a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, in the process of S12151, when it is determined that the hit related command received this time is not the big hit related command (S12151: No), it is next determined whether the hit related command received this time is the small hit start command. (S12107) If it is determined that the command is the small hit start command (S12107: Yes), the small hit start process 8 is executed (S12158), and this process ends.

  This small hit start process 8 (S12158) is a process for setting the content of the display command to be set in the small hit start process 7 (S12108) of the above-described seventh embodiment. The difference is that the display command executed when the probability state is set and the display command executed when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set are determined and set, Since the other parts are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  In the processing of S12107, if it is determined that the hit related command received this time is not the small hit start command (S12107: No), it is next determined whether a small hit end command is received (S12109), and the small hit end is performed. If it is determined that the command has not been received (S12109: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12109 that the small hit end command has been received (S12109: Yes), then the small hit flag 203p is set to off (S12153), and then the second special symbol holding ball It is determined whether the value of the number counter 223ga is larger than 0 (S12154). That is, in the processing of S12154, it is determined whether or not there is the reserved storage of the special figure 2 at the timing when the small hitting game ends.

  In the processing of S12154, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is larger than 0 (S12154: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed after the small hitting game is completed, so this processing is performed as it is. To end. On the other hand, in the process of S12154, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S12154: No), the big hit effect extension flag 223gb is turned on. Is determined (S12155). If it is determined that the flag is set to ON (S12155: Yes), the big hit effect extension flag 223gb is set to OFF (S12156), and the process ends.

  Thereby, if the special figure 2 change is not executed after the small hit game, that is, if the hold memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired during the small hit game, the big hit extended effect is executed after the small hit game ends. Can be prevented. Although a detailed description is omitted, in the hit-related processing 8, when the small hit end command is received (S12109: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 223ga is 0 (S12154: No), a big hit extended effect end screen (see FIG. 241 (b)) is displayed at the end of the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the end of the jackpot extension effect.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the execution of the second special symbol during the big hit game or the small hit game executed in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol It is configured such that a ball can enter (become easy to enter) the second entrance 640 serving as an opportunity. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed unless the hit game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed, so that the lottery of the first special symbol is performed as in the first embodiment described above. (Variation) and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol are performed simultaneously (in parallel), without using a configuration for executing the small special lottery based on the lottery of the second special symbol only during the latent state. Can be generated frequently. Therefore, control processing of the gaming machine can be simplified.

  Furthermore, according to the type of the hit (big hit, small hit) that has been won, a hit type in which the ball easily enters the second entrance 640 and a hit type in which the ball is difficult to enter can be set. When a winning (big hit, small hit) is won, not only the size of the privilege (number of prize balls) that can be acquired during the hit game, but also the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the hit game. It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not.

  In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the ball enters the second entrance 640 in a case where the winning is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol and in a case where the winning is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured so that the rate at which the hit types that are easy to set are different. Specifically, it is easier to set a hitting type in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 by winning in the second special symbol than in the case of winning in the first special symbol. Make up.

  With this configuration, once the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is shifted to a state in which the lottery can be performed, the lottery of the special figure 2 can be continued and easily performed. Despite the fact that the advantageous game mode (mode in which the drawing of FIG. 2 can be executed) that is advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous game mode is immediately terminated, and the player is uncomfortable. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be more likely to win a win (big hit, small hit) than the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the first special symbol, only the big hit is won (1/400 at the low probability) without being won in the small hit, whereas in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big hit is won. The probability of (1/400 at the time of low probability) is the same as that of the first special symbol described above, but is set so that a small hit is also won (300/400). As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol is set so that the probability of winning a small hit is higher in the lottery of the second special symbol than in the lottery of the first special symbol. The lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be easier to win in a hit (big hit, small hit) than in the lottery of the second special symbol.

  Thereby, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, it is possible to win with a high probability of winning (big hit, small hit), The winning game based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be frequently executed in a short period of time.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, a winning game in which a ball is more likely to enter the second entrance 640 with a higher probability is executed when a small hit is won than when a large hit is won. are doing. This makes it easy to execute the second special symbol lottery again after the end of the winning game, when the small hit is won by the second special symbol lottery.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, a plurality (four) of the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reservation) can be stored (reserved storage). Thus, the opening operation pattern of the hit game is defined so that the number that can be held and stored during one hit game is different.

  With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game with one hit game to secure a larger number of hold memories. Here, in the eighth embodiment, the second opening / closing door 3650f attached to the second attacker 3650 that is opened in the hit game is opened (from a state where a ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). When the state is changed to a closed state (a state where the ball cannot be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a), a part of the ball spilled from the second opening / closing door 3650f can enter the second ball opening 640. Is configured to pass through. In this way, by configuring so that the ball that could not enter the second attacker 3650 that is opened during the hitting game can enter the second entrance 640, the second hitting game can be performed during the hitting game. The player can watch the movement of the ball entering the second specific winning opening 3650a and the movement of the ball entering the second entrance 640.

  In addition, as in the above-described seventh embodiment, inflow detection means for detecting that a ball has flowed into a flow path (induction passage 3660) in which the ball can flow down when a specific condition is satisfied, and a sphere from the flow path. And discharge detection means for detecting that has been discharged, may be provided with effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode based on the detection result of each detection means, or based on the detection result of each detection means Operation restricting means for restricting the game operation by the game.

<Ninth embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to be able to be dynamically displayed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous Variation type). Furthermore, in order to efficiently execute the special symbol determination, it is possible to set a game state (normal symbol high probability state) in which the electric accessory 64a is easy to open, and the normal symbol high probability state (for example, time saving state). Is configured to continue for a predetermined period (for example, a period until the number of special symbol determinations (fluctuations) reaches 100 times after the end of the big hit).

  In the above-described first embodiment, since the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are configured to be able to execute the determination (change) at the same time (in parallel), the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is determined in advance as described above. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, it is referred to when determining the period in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is continued in order to prevent that the symbol is set longer than the predetermined period. The time saving information (for example, the time saving counter 203f) is updated (see FIG. 36).

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the time saving information is updated at the timing when the change of each special symbol is started. Therefore, in the simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine, the number of times the special symbol is determined (changed) is increased. Even if the number of time savings is set based on this, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from being set beyond the predetermined number of time savings.

  However, in the configuration of the first embodiment, in the simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine, the period in which the time saving state is set is shortened depending on the timing of determining (changing) each of the special symbols, which gives a player an unpleasant feeling. There was a problem.

  More specifically, for example, immediately after the 100th rotation (the last time of the number of time savings) as the determination (fluctuation) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is determined (fluctuation), that is, When the special figure change at the 101st rotation is executed, the time saving state can be ended at the timing when the 100th special figure change is executed (immediately before the special figure change at the 101st rotation). In the case where the special figure change of the 101st rotation is not executed in a state where the special figure change of the 100th rotation (the last time of the number of time savings) is performed, for example, the 100th rotation If the special figure change at the 101st rotation is started after the special figure change at the 100th rotation is completed, the time saving state ends at the timing when the special figure change at the 100th rotation is executed. The state of the ordinary symbol during the change of the special figure There is a problem that uncomfortable feeling to the player for.

  On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, when the number of special figure changes (for example, 100 times) is set as the time saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the time saving end condition is satisfied. Timing of the special figure fluctuation (for example, the special figure fluctuation at the 100th rotation) and the start timing of the special figure fluctuation (for example, the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation) executed after the time saving end condition is satisfied. Is determined, and the time saving state is ended based on the timing executed earlier among the timings.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the high probability state of the ordinary symbol for a longer time, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is uncomfortable.

  In the ninth embodiment, as the timing at which the special figure change at the 101st rotation is executed, it is possible to determine the timing at which the condition for executing the special figure change at the 101st rotation is satisfied. The time saving state is configured to end before the special symbol is determined. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably prevent the time reduction state from being set in a range exceeding the predetermined number of time reductions and executing the lottery of the special symbol in the time reduction state.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, among the end timing of the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the timing in which the special figure change is executed next to the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied, the condition is satisfied first. The time saving state is configured to end based on the timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time saving time may be reduced based on only the timing at which the special figure change is executed after the special figure change that satisfies the time saving end condition. The state may be terminated.

  With such a configuration, for example, if there is a vacant period before the execution of the special figure change of the 101st rotation after the completion of the special figure change of the 100th rotation, that is, the special figure of the 100th rotation In the case where the demo screen (standby screen) is displayed after the change is completed, the time saving state can be continued even during the idle time, so that the gaming state (normally high probability state of the symbol) which is advantageous to the player can be improved. Can be set longer.

  In this case, when a game for passing the ball through the through gate 67 for starting the change of the normal symbol is performed, the ball fired by the game enters the ball for starting the change of the special symbol. The game area of the game board 13 may be configured so that a ball can enter the mouth. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a game in which only the change of the normal symbol is started without starting the change of the special symbol.

  In addition, when a winning is determined in the normal symbol determination (lottery), the electric accessory 64a is opened, and the ball easily enters the ball entry means for starting the change of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game in which only the normal symbol determination (lottery) is performed from continuing for a long time.

  In the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, when a winning is made in a normal symbol lottery, the electric accessory 64a is opened, and a ball enters the lower first entrance port 64b2. Although it is configured to be easy (see FIG. 2), it is not a ball entry opening for starting the change of the special symbol as a ball entry opening for making it easy for the ball to enter by opening the electric accessory 64a. Alternatively, a predetermined number of prize balls may be provided based on the entry of a ball.

<Electrical Configuration in Ninth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The ninth embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the contents specified in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are changed, and the other electrical configurations are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents defined in the RAM 203 included in the main control device 110 according to the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 260, the RAM 203 of the ninth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment in that a time-saving end standby flag 203ha is added.

  The time-saving end standby flag 203ha is a flag for indicating that the time-saving state is to be ended, and is set to ON when the time-saving state is to be ended. In the ninth embodiment, a plurality of timings (time saving end timings) for terminating the time saving state are set based on the number of times of the special symbol change (number of times of special figure variation). When either of the timings is reached, the time saving state ends.

  Then, when a state (standby state) is established in which a plurality of time reduction end timings can be established, the time reduction end standby flag 203ha is set to ON. Specifically, in the game state update process 9 (see S396 in FIG. 263) executed in the special symbol change start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) in the main controller 110, the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0. Is determined (S604: Yes), it is set to ON (see S691).

  Next, the special symbol change stop processing (first special symbol change stop processing 9 (see S297 in FIG. 264), the second special symbol change stop processing 9 (see S298 in FIG. 266)) is executed, or When the special symbol determination is executed (first special symbol big hit determination processing 9 (see S395 in FIG. 261)), it is referred to in the second special symbol big hit determination processing 9 (see S991 in FIG. 265), and the time saving end standby is performed. When the flag 203ha is set to ON, the time saving end process (see S492 in FIG. 262) for terminating the time saving state is executed, and the time saving end standby flag 203ha is set to OFF (S11404).

  With this configuration, in a state where the time-saving end standby flag 203ha is set to ON (that is, in a standby state), if any of the time-saving end timings has arrived, it is ensured according to each timing. Can execute the time-saving ending process. In addition, when the time-saving termination process (see S492 in FIG. 262) is executed, the time-saving termination waiting flag 203ha is set to OFF, so that the time-saving termination process is prevented from being repeatedly executed at a plurality of timings. can do.

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Ninth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment differs from the control process of the main control device 110 in the above-described first embodiment in that the first special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 34) is replaced by a first special process. Instead of the symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261) and the game status update process (see FIG. 36), the game status update process 9 (see FIG. 263) and the first special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 38) The first special symbol change stop processing 9 (see FIG. 186) and the second special symbol big hit determination processing 9 (see FIG. 265) instead of the second special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 40), and the second special symbol change stop processing (see FIG. 265) The difference is that a second special symbol change stop process 9 (see FIG. 192) is executed instead of the process shown in FIG. 45, and a time saving end process (see FIG. 262) is added. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (S395) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S395). The ninth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the processes of S495 and S496 are added to the first special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 34). The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (S395), after the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401), the time saving end standby flag 203ha is turned on, that is, the current fluctuation start Is the timing of the end of the working hours (S495). If it is determined that it is time to end the time saving (S495: Yes), the time saving end process is executed (S496), and this process ends. The details of the time saving end process (S496) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S495, if it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203ha is not on, that is, it is determined that the current fluctuation start is not the timing of the time saving end (S495: No), the process proceeds to S402.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the working hours before acquiring the special symbol lottery result. By configuring before the lottery result is obtained, it is possible to set the time saving as the gaming state until the end of the fluctuation which is the timing of the end of the time saving.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 262, a description will be given of the time saving end process (S496) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing details of the time saving end process (S496). In the time saving end process (S496), a process for setting a game state after the time saving is completed is executed.

  In the time-saving ending process (S496), first, it is determined whether or not the probable change flag 203g is ON (S11401). When it is determined that the certainty change flag 203g is ON (S11401: Yes), a state command indicating a latent state is set (S11402), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S11401, when it is determined that the probable change flag 203g is not on (S11401: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S11403), and this processing ends.

  Next, the game state update process 9 (S396) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing details of the game state update process 9 (S396). In the ninth embodiment, when the value of the time-saving counter 203f is determined to be 0 after subtracting the value of the time-saving counter 203f from the game state updating process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment ( S604: Yes), and is different in that a process (S691) for setting the time-saving end standby flag 203ha to ON is added.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the first special symbol variation stop processing 9 (S297) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing details of the first special symbol change stop process 9 (S297). The ninth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the processes of S891 to S892 are added to the first special symbol variation stop process (S207). The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first special symbol variation stop process 9 (S297), after the variation of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device is stopped (S809), the time-saving end standby flag 203ha is on, that is, the current variation is not changed. It is determined whether or not the timing of the stop is the timing of the end of the working hours (S891).

  As described above, in the ninth embodiment, when the number of times of the special figure change (for example, 100 times) is set as the time saving termination condition for terminating the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the time saving termination condition is set. Of the special figure fluctuation (for example, the special figure fluctuation at the 100th rotation) and the special figure fluctuation (for example, the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation) that is executed first after the time saving end condition is satisfied. The start timing can be distinguished from the start timing, and the time-saving state is terminated based on the timing that is executed first among the timings.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the high probability state of the ordinary symbol for a longer time, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is uncomfortable.

  In the ninth embodiment, as the timing at which the special figure change at the 101st rotation is executed, it is possible to determine the timing at which the condition for executing the special figure change at the 101st rotation is satisfied. The time saving state is configured to end before the special symbol is determined. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably prevent the time reduction state from being set in a range exceeding the predetermined number of time reductions and executing the lottery of the special symbol in the time reduction state.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, among the end timing of the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the timing in which the special figure change is executed next to the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied, the condition is satisfied first. The time saving state is configured to end based on the timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time saving time may be reduced based on only the timing at which the special figure change is executed after the special figure change that satisfies the time saving end condition. The state may be terminated.

  With such a configuration, for example, if there is a vacant period before the execution of the special figure change of the 101st rotation after the completion of the special figure change of the 100th rotation, that is, the special figure of the 100th rotation In the case where the demo screen (standby screen) is displayed after the change is completed, the time saving state can be continued even during the idle time, so that the gaming state (normally high probability state of the symbol) which is advantageous to the player can be improved. Can be set longer.

  In this case, when a game for passing the ball through the through gate 67 for starting the change of the normal symbol is performed, the ball fired by the game enters the ball for starting the change of the special symbol. The game area of the game board 13 may be configured so that a ball can enter the mouth. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a game in which only the change of the normal symbol is started without starting the change of the special symbol.

  In addition, when a winning is determined in the normal symbol determination (lottery), the electric accessory 64a is opened, and the ball easily enters the ball entry means for starting the change of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game in which only the normal symbol determination (lottery) is performed from continuing for a long time.

  In the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, when a winning is made in a normal symbol lottery, the electric accessory 64a is opened, and a ball enters the lower first entrance port 64b2. Although it is configured to be easy (see FIG. 2), it is not a ball entry opening for starting the change of the special symbol as a ball entry opening for making it easy for the ball to enter by opening the electric accessory 64a. Alternatively, a predetermined number of prize balls may be provided based on the entry of a ball.

<Tenth embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each of the embodiments described above has two types of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), and when the lottery of each special symbol is a specific lottery result (for example, a big hit or a small hit). , A bonus game (big hit game, small hit game) for operating the variable winning device (for example, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650).

  As described above, when the bonus game is executed in response to the special symbol lottery, the bonus game is executed when the lottery result becomes the specific lottery result, and the lottery result becomes the specific lottery result. Although it was possible to give satisfaction to the player, even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed a plurality of times, the result of the lottery may not be a specific lottery result, and the lottery of the special symbol No privilege can be given to the player who has executed the game.

  On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, when it is determined that a ball has entered, a specific winning combination in which the variable winning device (for example, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650) is activated. Ball means (specific entrance 4640 (see FIG. 267)) is provided. In this way, by configuring the variable prize device to operate only by the ball entering the specific ball entry means, the privilege is directly given to the game content of the player (the ball firing result). This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

  Here, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above in that the second entrance 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are provided. The electric accessory 64a and the lower first entrance 64b2 are deleted, and the entrance 464 is provided instead of the upper first entrance 64b1, and a new specific entrance 4640 and the specific entrance are newly provided. It differs in that a special accessory 4640a attached to 4640 and a small attacker 4650 are provided. The other configuration is the same, and the detailed description of the same configuration will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 267, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, of the game area formed on the game board 13, a left area (an area on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view) and a left area thereof The devices related to the game are arranged in a concentrated manner in a lower area (a lower area in front view of the variable display unit 80) in which the ball fired on the ball flows down, and the player fires the ball in the left area. It is configured to play a left-handed game.

  Specifically, a through gate 67 is provided on the upstream side of the left region, and a ball entrance 640, a specific ball entrance 4640, a small attacker 4650, and a second variable prize device 650 are provided in the lower region in order from the top. Have been. Here, the flow of the game when the left-handed game is performed with the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

  Most of the balls fired by the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67 and flow down toward the lower region. When a ball passes through the through gate 67, a normal symbol is determined (lottery) based on the detection of the passage (detected by a detection switch (not shown)). In the present embodiment, when a normal symbol is won, a winning game in which a later-described specific accessory 4640a is opened is executed.

  The ball entry port 464 is provided such that one out of 20 balls reaching the lower region enters the ball entry port 464. When it is detected that a ball has entered the entrance 464 (detected by a detection switch (not shown)), a lottery of a special symbol (first special symbol) is executed based on the detection. In addition, four prize balls are awarded to the player for one entering ball. Then, the ball that has not entered the entrance 464 flows toward the specific entrance 4640, the small attacker 4650, and the second variable winning device 650 provided below the entrance 464.

  Here, the specific entry port 4640 is a special accessory that is a variable means that can be changed between a closed state that makes it difficult to enter the ball and an open state that makes it easier to enter the ball than the closed state. 4640a is provided so that the ease of entry of the ball differs depending on the variable condition of the special accessory 4640a. The special accessory 4640a is variably controlled by variable control means (normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) executed by the main controller 110) so that the state varies according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery. In a case where a winning is achieved in a lottery of a normal symbol executed based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the ball is set to an open state where the ball easily enters the specific entrance 4640. Variable control.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the specific character 4640a is likely to be in an open state as a gaming state (a high probability state of a normal symbol), and is in an open state than the high probability state of the normal symbol. It is configured to be able to set a difficult state (a low probability state of a normal symbol). However, even when the low probability state of a normal symbol is set, a ball enters the specific entrance 4640. Is configured to obtain.

  Returning to FIG. 267, the description will be continued. When the special character 4640a is in the open state at the timing when the ball that has not entered the entrance 464 reaches the specific entrance 4640, the ball enters the specific entrance 4640, and When the accessory 4640a is in the closed state, it flows over the specific accessory 4640a in the closed state and flows down to the small attacker 4650.

  When a ball enters the specific entrance 4640, a lottery of a special symbol (first special symbol) is executed and one prize ball is awarded for one winning. In this embodiment, up to four special symbol (first special symbol) lottery rights executed when a ball enters the specific entrance 4640 can be reserved.

  In the tenth embodiment, a plurality of nails are implanted on the game board 13 so that a ball flowing down the game area is guided by the plurality of nails to a position where various devices in the lower area are provided. Flow down to In the lower region, a device (for example, the second variable prize device 650) provided below the number of balls guided toward the device (for example, the entrance 464) provided on the upper side. ) Is configured so that the number of spheres guided to the sphere is larger.

  Specifically, of the balls fired by the left-handed game, approximately one in four balls is guided to a position where the ball can enter the entrance 464 (an upper position above the entrance 464), and five of them are located. Approximately one ball (that is, about one in twenty of the balls fired by the left-handed game) enters the entrance 464.

  Then, it is configured such that, out of the balls fired by the left-handed game, approximately one ball is guided to the specific entrance 4640 and the small attacker 4650. Despite being guided to a position where the ball can enter the entrance 464 (a position above the entrance 464), the specific entrance 4640 has flowed down without entering the entrance 464. A ball and a ball that could not be guided to the entrance 464 at the stage of flowing down the left region are included. Finally, almost all the balls fired by the left-handed game are guided to the second variable winning device 650.

  Further, in the tenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 267, it is possible to perform a right-handed game, and the ball fired by the right-handed game is larger than the ball fired by the left-handed game. , The specific ball entrance 4640, and the small attacker 4650, and are guided to the second variable winning device 650 at an equal ratio.

  In this way, by changing the ease of entering a ball into each entrance depending on the position at which the player fires the ball, it is possible to allow the player to play a game while competing for skill. Can be prevented from getting tired early.

  It should be noted that, without being limited to the configuration of the game board 13 provided in the tenth embodiment, for example, it is easier to guide the ball to the small attacker 4650 by playing the right-handed game than by playing the left-handed game. May be configured. This allows the player to perform a game in which the game method (left-handed or right-handed) can be changed according to the game result (whether the ball enters the specific entrance 4640). Can be motivated to play games.

  Returning to FIG. 267, the description will be continued. The small attacker 4650 is provided with a small opening / closing door 4650a, which is variable means that can be changed between a closed state where it is difficult to enter the ball and an open state where it is easier to enter the ball than the closed state. The configuration is such that the ease of entering a ball differs depending on the variable state of the small opening / closing door 4650a. The small opening / closing door 4650a is provided with a specific variable control unit (specific ball entry processing executed by the main controller 110 (see S196 in FIG. 278) so that the state changes when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640. )). Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a ball enters the specific entrance 4640, the value of a counter (first hit type counter C2) that is randomly updated and the set game Based on the state, the opening pattern of the small opening / closing door 4650a is made different.

  Specifically, the period from when the ball enters the specific entrance 4640 to when the small opening / closing door 4650a is opened (opening standby time) is configured to be different. Thereby, for example, in a gaming state (for example, a normal state) in which a period (opening standby time) from when the ball enters the specific entrance 4640 to when the small opening / closing door 4650a is opened is set to be long, the unit time is The number of winning balls in the small attacker 4650 per hit can be suppressed, and the period from the ball entering the specific entrance 4640 to the opening of the small opening / closing door 4650a is easily set to a short game state (for example, In the latent state), the number of winning balls in the small attacker 4650 per unit time can be increased.

  In the tenth embodiment, when a ball wins the small attacker 4650, ten winning balls are awarded for one winning ball. It is configured such that more prize balls are provided than the ball mouth 4640. Therefore, by changing the number of balls won to the small attacker 4650 per unit time according to the playing state, for example, the number of balls shot to the player by the ball winning to the small attacker 4650 is larger than the number of balls shot to the player. Can be given as the prize ball.

  With such a configuration, in addition to the game based on the lottery of the special symbol, it is possible to allow the player to perform a game based on the ball entering the specific ball entry means (specific ball entrance 4640). The interest of the game can be improved.

  Finally, the ball that did not win even the small attacker 4650 flows down to the second variable winning device 650 provided below the small attacker 4650. The second variable winning device 650 is a variable means that operates when a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery (operates during a big hit game), as in the first embodiment described above. Since the detailed contents are the same as those in the first embodiment, the detailed description is omitted. The ball that does not win the second variable winning device 650 flows into the out port 66 formed at the lowest position of the game area of the game board 13 and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a ball can be fired to the right area of the game area (a right-handed game can be played). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a game in which a ball is fired in the right pattern area of the game area The right-hand region may be completely eliminated so that (right-handed game) cannot be executed. In the tenth embodiment, all the games (from the game in the normal state) can be executed only by the left-handed game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the through gate 67 or the specific entrance 4640 may be provided in the right side region so that the game content can be changed according to the game state.

<Production contents in the tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 268, a description will be given of a characteristic effect performed in the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, as in the above-described second embodiment, the period (fixed period) from the stop display of the special symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won to the execution of the jackpot game is a jackpot type. It is defined to be different depending on

  In the tenth embodiment, the gaming state (the latent state) in which the small attacker 4650 is easily opened during the confirmation period is set. In other words, a game in which the small attacker 4650 is continuously opened (so-called small hit RUSH) can be executed by using the special symbol determination period for indicating that the big hit has been won.

  With this configuration, it is possible to execute the small hit RUSH before the big hit game is executed. Note that the technical concept of executing the small hit RUSH before the big hit game is executed is the same as that of the above-described second embodiment, and thus a detailed description thereof and a derivation that can be conceived based on the present technical idea. The plan and alternatives are the same as in the second embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the tenth embodiment, the same special symbol determination period as in the second embodiment is used as the period for executing the small hit RUSH. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A period used to frequently execute a winning game may be used. For example, as in the sixth embodiment described above, a period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the round game (opening period) may be used. Furthermore, based on the lottery results of special symbols. The gaming state may be configured such that a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set, and a small hit RUSH is executed in the latent state.

  Returning to FIG. 268, the description will be continued. FIG. 268 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, and FIG. 268 (b) is executed during the symbol fixing period of the special symbol. It is a figure showing an example of an effect screen to be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 268 (a), when a special symbol jackpot is won, “777” is stopped and displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and “left-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, since the left-handed game is configured to be executed in all game states, “left-handed” is always displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. In the case where the same game method (left-handed) is always executed as in the present embodiment, since the player does not need to change the game method, the guidance display area Dm3 is displayed. It may be configured not to do so.

  Then, in the main display area Dm, a character 811 is displayed, and a comment “Aim for RUSH” is displayed to indicate to the player that a game period in which the small attacker 4650 is frequently opened is started. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment of “entering a chance zone” indicating that a gaming state advantageous to the player has been set is displayed.

  In the tenth embodiment, similarly to the above-described second embodiment, when a special symbol is won in a probable state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol), the special symbol won in the jackpot is obtained. A latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set during the symbol determination period. Then, when the game state is set to the latent state, an operation pattern in which the period (opening standby time) from when the ball enters the specific entrance 4640 until the first attacker 4650 is opened is set. Since the game is configured to be easier, a game (RUSH game) in which the number of winning balls in the small attacker 4650 per unit time can be increased for the player, the special symbol determination period ends. Executed until

  Further, in the tenth embodiment, the special symbol determination period is configured to be different depending on the type of the winning jackpot. Therefore, a win in a jackpot type having a long special symbol determination period can lengthen a period in which a RUSH game can be executed, and thus a jackpot is advantageous to a player.

  Here, in each of the above-described embodiments, the stop display mode of the third symbol for indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit indicates whether or not the game content during the big hit is advantageous to the player ( It is configured to set according to whether a bonus (number of prize balls) that can be given to the player during the big hit game or a game state set after the big hit game is advantageous to the player. For example, when a jackpot that is advantageous to the player is won, the stop display mode of the third symbol is set to the same odd number (for example, “777”), which is not advantageous to the player (disadvantage). When a jackpot is won, the stop display mode of the third symbol is configured to be set with the same even number (for example, “222”).

  On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, as the stop display mode of the third symbol, it is determined whether or not the game content during the jackpot game described above is advantageous to the player (can be given to the player during the jackpot game). In addition to whether the benefits (the size of the number of prize balls) or the gaming state set after the jackpot game is advantageous to the player, whether the length of the symbol determination period is advantageous to the player or not. It is configured to be set according to.

  With this configuration, by grasping the stop display mode of the third symbol, the RUSH game executed before the jackpot game, the jackpot game, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, and the three game contents are set. The game can be played while predicting. In this case, for example, when the RUSH game is executed (symbol confirmation period), the game content of the big hit game, and the game state set after the big hit game are all advantageous to the player. It is preferable to provide a stop display mode (for example, “VVV”) of the third symbol that is set only for the third symbol. This allows the player to play the game while giving a sense of satisfaction.

  Further, the stop display mode of the third symbol may be configured to be variable at predetermined timings. For example, at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, it indicates that the current lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Among the stop display modes, a stop display mode (for example, “222”) indicating that the jackpot is disadvantageous to the player is set, and then “777” during the symbol determination period (RUSH game) and a jackpot game Alternatively, the stop display mode of the third symbol may be changed so as to indicate that "VVV" has been gradually won as a jackpot advantageous to the player.

  With this configuration, it is possible for the player to watch the effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while expecting the stop display mode of the third symbol to be variable. Further, in the present embodiment, the stop display mode of the third symbol is set by combining the sizes of a plurality of benefits to be given to the player based on the jackpot winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Large and small may be displayed in different modes.

  For example, the type of the stop display symbol (number) of the third symbol is set according to the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, and the size of the third symbol is set variably according to the game content during the jackpot game. Alternatively, the color of the third symbol may be varied and set according to the length of the symbol determination period. Thereby, the contents of the game to be executed in the future can be notified to the player in detail.

  Further, in the tenth embodiment, when the latent state is set as the game state during the symbol determination period, an efficient RUSH game is executed, but the normal state is set during the symbol determination period. In this case, in other words, if the jackpot is won when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the RUSH game with low efficiency is executed. Therefore, when the stop display mode is set based on the length of the symbol determination period as the stop display mode of the third symbol, the stop display mode of the third symbol set based on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot win is variable. It is good to configure so that Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the game content to be executed in a more easily understandable manner.

  After the display of FIG. 268 (a) is entered, when the symbol determination period is entered, the display screen shown in FIG. 268 (b) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 268 (b), “during the chance zone” is displayed in the main display area Dm while the RUSH game is being executed, and the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the symbol determination period. "30 seconds remaining" is displayed. This remaining period display mode is configured so that the number of seconds displayed is updated according to the elapsed time, and notifies the player of the remaining period of the chance zone (symbol confirmation period). In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment “Aim for a small attacker” is displayed to indicate the game content in the chance zone (during the symbol confirmation period).

  The number of seconds displayed in the remaining period display mode may be set to indicate all remaining remaining periods when entering the chance zone, or a period (seconds) shorter than the set symbol determination period. May be set so that a new number of seconds is added to the number of seconds of the remaining period display mode displayed as time elapses. In addition, it is set to indicate a period (the number of seconds) shorter than the set symbol determination period, and after the set period has elapsed, the remaining period display mode is set to “? Second”, and the remaining period is set by the player. You may not be able to understand.

  In the tenth embodiment, the remaining period display mode is set so that the remaining period of the symbol confirmation period is indicated by the number of seconds. However, it is possible to make the player know that the remaining period is decreasing. Any mode that can be used may be used. For example, an animation until the character 811 is caught by the enemy may be used to indicate the remaining period, or a period until the container containing the liquid becomes empty may be used. It may be configured to indicate the remaining period. As described above, by using the animation indicating the story process instead of the number of seconds, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the remaining period.

<Electrical Configuration in Tenth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The tenth embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the contents of the RAM 203 are different. The other electrical configurations are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 269 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 269, in the tenth embodiment, the small hit random number table 202b, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, and the miss type selection table 202ad are deleted from the ROM 202 in the above-described second embodiment. In addition, the second random number table 202c is replaced with the second random number 10 table 202ia, the big hit type selection 10 table 202ib is provided instead of the big hit type selection 2 table 202aa, and a specific entering ball motion pattern table 202ic is newly added. Is different.

  The second winning random number table 202ia is different from the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 15C) in that the second symbol determined to be a hit in the state where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. The difference is that the range of the random number counter C4 is different, and the rest is the same, so that the detailed description is omitted.

  Here, the contents defined in the second random number 10 table 202ia will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 270 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second random number 10 table 202ia. As shown in FIG. 270, in the second random number per 10 table 202ia, in the low probability state of the normal symbol (during the normal state and the latent state) as the gaming state, there are 231 random number values which are the hits of the normal symbol. , And its range is “0 to 230”. Since the total number of random numbers that can be obtained by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of random numbers that can be won is 231. Therefore, the probability of winning a symbol is normally “231/233”.

  On the other hand, in the high probability state (probable change state, time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, there are 232 random number values which are hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “0 to 231”. Since the total number of random numbers that can be obtained by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of random numbers that can be won is 232, so that the probability of winning a symbol is usually “232/233”. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, a random number value which is a hit for a normal symbol has a high probability (231/233) even in a low probability state of the normal symbol.

  With this configuration, even in the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the gaming state (probable state, time saving) in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. State), it is possible to make it easier to win a win in a normal symbol lottery. In addition, since the probability of winning in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is slightly higher than that of the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the high probability of the ordinary symbol is higher than the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. The state is configured to be more advantageous. Further, the opening pattern of the special accessory 4640a executed in the winning game executed when the winning is performed is more likely to occur in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol than in the case of winning in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. Since an open pattern in which a ball is more likely to enter the specific entrance 4640 when the winning is achieved is set, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is more advantageous than the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. I have. It should be noted that the opening pattern of the specific entrance 4640 executed in the normal symbol hit game is not a normal symbol state (high-probability state, low-probability state) when a normal symbol lottery is won, but a hit game. May be set according to the state of a normal symbol (high-probability state, low-probability state) at the time of executing.

  The jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib is a data table for selecting a jackpot type when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, and is similar to the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the second embodiment described above. A plurality of big hit types are defined in association with the value of the hit type counter C2.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 271, the contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib will be described in detail. FIG. 271 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib. Note that the same elements as those defined in the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa used in the above-described second embodiment (for example, the time saving counter 203f and the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad) are denoted by the same reference numerals. The detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 271, the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib defines a plurality of jackpot types in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2, and sets the time-saving counter 203f for each jackpot type. The value to be set, the setting status of the probability change flag 203g, and the value set in the fixed time counter 203ad are defined.

  Specifically, in the jackpot type (jackpot A1 to jackpot A3) of the jackpot A in which the 15 round games are executed, the time-saving counter 203f is displayed regardless of the game state selected (when the jackpot is won). It is stipulated that a value of "10000" is set, and that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON. In other words, when the big hit A (big hits A1 to A3) is selected as the big hit type, a probable change state (a special symbol high probability state, a normal symbol high probability state) is set until the next jackpot is won. Stipulates. In the tenth embodiment, "10000" is set as the value of the time reduction counter 203f in order to continue the high probability state of the ordinary symbol until the next jackpot is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, a flag that is set to ON until the next time a jackpot is won may be used.

  Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, the jackpot A1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot A2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot A3 is set to "150 seconds". The jackpot A1 is defined in the range of the counter C2 (0 to 99) in the range of “0 to 19”, the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of “20 to 23”, and the jackpot A3 is defined in the range of “24”. That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (jackpots A1 to A3) is executed in 25% of the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, and 80% (20/20) 25) is defined as jackpot A1, 16% (4/25) is jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is jackpot A3.

  In other words, in the tenth embodiment, even if the player wins the jackpot in which the jackpot game (the 15th round jackpot game) that is most advantageous to the player is executed, a period (symbol) for stopping and displaying the lottery result to the player. If a short symbol determination period is selected as the (determination period), the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed will be short. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention not only to the winning of the big hit but also to the length of the symbol determination period for the special symbol lottery, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In the tenth embodiment, the symbol determination period is defined in association with the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for selecting a jackpot operation content (jackpot type), The lottery for selecting the symbol confirmation period may be executed independently. In this case, since a plurality of symbol determination periods can be combined with a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide a gaming property that is difficult for the player to predict.

  Next, similarly to the jackpots A1 to A3 described above, jackpots B1 to B3, jackpots C1 to C3, and jackpots D1 to D3 are defined, respectively.

  Specifically, when the jackpot B (jackpot B1 to jackpot B3) in which the game content (five round game) of the jackpot game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot A is set, when it is selected (the jackpot is won). Stipulates that the value of "10000" is set to the time-saving counter 203f when the gaming state of (time) is the normal state (low-probability state of a normal symbol) and the value of "10" is set for the time-saving state or the probable change state. It is defined that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON.

  In other words, when the jackpot B is won, the jackpot game which is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A is executed. However, when the time-saving state or the probable change state is set as the game state, the player is notified after the jackpot game ends. It is defined so as to provide a state in which an advantageous game state can be set (a game state in which the special symbol has a high probability state until the next big hit and the normal symbol high probability state ends with ten special figure changes). I have. Thus, the jackpot A and the jackpot B are the jackpots in which the jackpot A is more advantageous as the jackpot game content, but the jackpot B may be more advantageous as the game state set after the jackpot.

  Further, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, the jackpot B1 is set to "30 seconds", the jackpot B2 is set to "90 seconds", and the jackpot B3 is set to "120 seconds". The jackpot B1 is defined in the range of the counter C2 (0 to 99) “25 to 29”, the jackpot B2 is defined in the range of “30 to 44”, and the jackpot B3 is defined in the range of “45 to 49”. I have.

  That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot B (jackpot B1 to B3) is executed at 25% of the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, and 20% (5 / 25) is defined as jackpot B1, 60% (15/25) is jackpot B2, and 20% (5/25) is jackpot B3. Here, the symbol determination period that can be set in the case of the jackpot A and the symbol determination period that can be set in the case of the jackpot B will be described. The maximum value of the symbol determination period in the jackpot A is larger than that in the jackpot B. Although it is specified to be longer, it is specified that the average value of the symbol determination period set in the big hit B is longer than that in the big hit A.

  As described above, the jackpot type in which the maximum value of the symbol determination period that can be set is large but the average value is small (high risk high return) and the jackpot type in which the maximum value of the symbol determination period that can be set is small but the average value is large are large (Low risk low return), and by setting the symbol determination period based on the selected jackpot type, the symbol determination period is set rather than completely randomly setting the symbol determination period. The player can be made to think that there is some rule. Therefore, the pleasure of predicting a game can be provided to the player.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the tendency of the symbol determination period that can be set according to the big hit type (big hit A to big hit C) is different, the present invention is not limited to this. The jackpot A to the jackpot C) may be configured to include a high-risk high-return symbol determination period selection group and a low-risk low-return symbol determination period selection group. In addition, even though the average value (expected value) of the settable symbol determination period is the same, from among a plurality of symbol fixed period selection groups in which the maximum value and the minimum value of the set symbol fixed period are different, A configuration may be adopted in which a player can select a desired symbol determination period selection group, and the symbol determination period is set using the symbol determination period selection group selected by the player.

  Returning to FIG. 271, the description will be continued. As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type (jackpot A1 to jackpot B3) in which the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot game is over, the rate at which the so-called probability change jackpot is selected is 50% (50/100) of the whole. For the remaining 50%, a jackpot type in which the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF after the jackpot game ends, that is, a so-called normal jackpot is selected.

  Specifically, the jackpot C (jackpot C1 to jackpot C3) in which the same jackpot game content (15 round game) as the jackpot A described above is set, is selected (when the jackpot is won). It is stipulated that the value of "50" is set in the time-saving counter 203f regardless of the gaming state, and that the probability change flag 203g is set to off.

  In other words, when the jackpot C is won, the jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed as in the case of the jackpot A, but the special symbol high probability state is not set after the jackpot game is completed, and the time-saving state of 50 times is set. Is set to be set. Therefore, the jackpot C is a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B described above, but the gaming state set after the jackpot ends is a jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A and the jackpot B described above. Type.

  Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, the jackpot C1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot C2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot C3 is set to "150 seconds". When the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is in the range of "50 to 54", the jackpot C1 is specified, in the range of "55 to 64", the jackpot C2 is specified, and in the range of "65 to 74", the jackpot C3 is specified. I have.

  That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot C (the jackpots C1 to C3) is executed at 25% of the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, and 20% (5 / 25) is defined as a jackpot C1, 40% (10/25) is a jackpot C2, and 40% (10/25) is a jackpot C3. Here, the jackpot C is the same as the jackpot A described above, and the type of the symbol confirmation period that can be set (5 seconds, 60 seconds, 150 seconds) is the same, but the selection ratio is defined so as to be different. The average value (expected value) of the symbol determination period that can be set to be larger than the jackpot A is defined to be higher. Thus, the jackpot C is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A in the jackpot game content and the game state set after the jackpot game ends, but the symbol determination time in which the RUSH game is executed is the jackpot. It becomes a jackpot type that is more advantageous than A.

  Finally, in the jackpot D (jackpot D1 to jackpot D3) in which the same jackpot game content (5 round game) as the jackpot B described above is set, the game state when selected (when the jackpot is won) Regardless of this, it is stipulated that the value of “50” is set in the time reduction counter 203f, and that the probability change flag 203g is set to off.

  In other words, when the jackpot D is won, the jackpot game disadvantageous to the player is executed similarly to the jackpot B, and after the jackpot game is completed, the gaming state disadvantageous to the player is set similarly to the jackpot C. Have been. Therefore, the jackpot D is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player among the above-described jackpot types.

  Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, the jackpot D1 is set to "30 seconds", the jackpot D2 is set to "90 seconds", and the jackpot D3 is set to "120 seconds". The jackpot D1 is defined in the range of the counter C2 (0 to 99) of “75 to 84”, the jackpot D2 is defined in the range of “85 to 94”, and the jackpot D3 is defined in the range of “95 to 99”. I have.

  That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot D (the jackpots D1 to D3) is executed in 25% of the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 40% (10 / 25) is a jackpot D1, 40% (10/25) is a jackpot D2, and 20% (8/25) is a jackpot D3. Here, the jackpot D is the same as the jackpot B described above, and the type of the symbol determination period that can be set (30 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds) is the same, but the selection ratio is defined so as to be different. The average value (expected value) of the symbol determination period which can be set to be larger than the jackpot B is defined to be lower.

  In this way, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player in any of the jackpot game contents, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, and the symbol determination time in which the RUSH game is executed.

  The specific ball entry operation pattern table 202ic is a data table in which the contents of the opening operation of the small attacker 4650 executed when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 are defined, and the small attacker 4650 is released. Time (opening standby time), the opening operation content of the small attacker 4650 is defined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the gaming state at the time the ball enters.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 272, the contents specified in the specific entering ball motion pattern table 202ic will be described. FIG. 272 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the specific entering ball motion pattern table 202ic. As shown in FIG. 272, in the tenth embodiment, the same operation content is defined regardless of the game state as the operation content of the small attacker 4650, and the small attacker 4650 has the same operation content as the game state and the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is defined that the opening waiting time differs depending on the condition.

  Specifically, as the operation content of the small attacker 4650, an opening operation in which the opening / closing door 4650a of the small attacker 4650 is opened once is set, and the opening operation is performed when the opening time reaches 1.5 seconds or It continues until the number of winning balls reaches ten. The ending period during which the opening operation is completed and the opening / closing door 4650a is closed is set to be set for 0.5 second.

  Next, when the gaming state is the normal state, the first hit type counter C2 is set to the range of “0 to 89”, the opening standby time is set to “normal 1” of 20 seconds, and the first hitting counter C2 is set to the range of “90 to 98”. "Normal 2" with an opening standby time of 2 seconds is defined, and "Normal 3" with an opening standby time of 0.5 seconds is defined as a value of "99". In addition, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a probable change state, the first hit type counter C2 is in a range of “0 to 39”, and “time saving 1” with an opening standby time of 10 seconds is defined. "," Time saving 2 "with an opening standby time of 5 seconds is defined, and a value of" 90 to 99 "defines" Time saving 3 "with an opening standby time of 2 seconds. Further, when the gaming state is the latent state, the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 89”, and the “latent 1” with the opening standby time of 0.5 second is defined, and the “90 to 97” , A "latency 2" with an opening standby time of 0.2 seconds is defined, and a value of "98 to 99" defines "latent 3" with an opening standby time of 2 seconds.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the opening standby time is configured to be greatly different depending on the game state, and when the normal state is set as the game state, the ball is placed on the small attacker 4650. Even if the player enters the ball, the ball possessed by the player does not increase. On the other hand, when the latent state is set as the game state, the small attacker 4650 opens frequently, so You can increase the sphere.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 273 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 273, the RAM 203 of the tenth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the above-described second embodiment (see FIG. 95) in that the second special symbol execution area 203b, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i, the small hit Flag 203k, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, ordinary figure short fluctuation flag 203t, winning counter 203u, probability change counter 203aa, special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac, special figure 2 fixing time counter 203ae Is deleted, and the certainty change flag 203g, the specific entering ball flag 203ia, and the specific entering invalid flag 203ib are added. The other elements are the same as those in the RAM 203 of the above-described second embodiment, and thus are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. The probable change flag 203g has the same contents as the RAM 203 (see FIG. 21) of the above-described first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The specific ball entry flag 203ia is a flag for indicating that a ball has entered the specific entrance 4640, and is set to ON when it is determined that a ball has entered the specific entrance 4640. Things. The specific ball entering flag 203ia indicates that the ball has entered the specific ball entry port 4640 in the specific ball entry process (see S196 in FIG. 278) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 274) of the main controller 110. If it is determined that it has been performed (S11501 in FIG. 278: Yes), it is set to ON (see S11505 in FIG. 278).

  Then, in the first special symbol big hit determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276), it is determined whether or not it is set to on (see S496 in FIG. 276), and when it is determined to be on (see FIG. 276). S496: Yes), a process of forcibly removing the lottery result of the first special symbol executed this time is executed (see S412 in FIG. 276). Next, it is set to off when the specific ball-entering operation is completed.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the small attacker 4650 is configured to be opened when the ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640, and the specific ball for opening the small attacker 4650 is configured. When the operation scenario is set, a process of forcibly removing the lottery result of the first special symbol so as not to be a big hit is executed. This eliminates the possibility of winning the jackpot of the first special symbol during the period in which the small attacker 4650 is open, so that the operation of opening the small attacker 4650 can be suppressed from being performed repeatedly. . Further, in order to make the variable ball entry means (small attacker 4650, second variable prize winning device 650) in a state where the ball is difficult to enter (closed state) in a normal state into a state where the ball easily enters (open state). Is performed simultaneously (overlapping).

  The specific ball invalid flag 203ib is for indicating a period (specific ball invalid period) in which the operation of opening the small attacker 4650 is not performed when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640. This is set to ON when the specific entry invalidation period is set.

  This specific entry invalid flag 203ib is determined in the first special symbol variation stop processing 10 (see S296 in FIG. 277) when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S801: Yes in FIG. 277). ) And set to ON (see S892 in FIG. 277). Then, in the specific ball entry process (S196 in FIG. 278), the setting status is determined (S11502 in FIG. 278), and when it is determined that the specific ball invalid flag 203ib is set to ON (S11502 in FIG. 278: Yes), the process of setting the specific entering ball motion scenario (S11504 in FIG. 278) is skipped. Thus, it is possible to suppress the small attacker 4650 from being opened based on the fact that a ball has entered the specific entrance 4640 during the period in which the big hit game is being executed.

<Regarding the control processing in the tenth embodiment>
Here, the control processing in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the tenth embodiment, since the configuration of the second special symbol is deleted and the configuration of the specific entrance 4640 is added to the above-described second embodiment, the content of the control process executed is also The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the control process relating to the lottery (determination) of the second special symbol is deleted, and a control process executed when a ball enters the specific entrance 4640 is added. In addition, the control processing according to the above-described difference in the control processing is different.

  Specifically, the timer interrupt process 10 (see FIG. 274) is replaced with the special symbol change process in place of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) in the control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment described above. 2 (S154 in FIG. 97) and a special symbol change process 10 (see S195 in FIG. 275) instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98). The first special symbol variation stop process 10 (see S296 in FIG. 277) is executed instead of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) (see S395 in FIG. 276). Sphere processing (S196 in FIG. 278) is different. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Note that, in addition to the contents described above, the specific contents of the control processing (for example, the processing contents regarding the second special symbol change) may be changed in accordance with the configuration of the tenth embodiment. Except for the places described above, the only difference is that the pertinent processing is simply deleted, and those skilled in the art can easily conceive. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the timer interrupt processing 10 executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing the details of the timer interrupt processing 10. In the tenth embodiment, the subroutine of the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is executed instead of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) in the second embodiment. The difference is that the subroutine of the specific ball entry process (S196) is executed. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the timer interrupt processing 10 is executed, the processing of S101 to S103 is executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt processing described above, and thereafter, the special symbol change processing 10 (S195) is executed. This special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is different from the above-described special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 97) in that the variation process relating to the second special symbol is deleted and a new special symbol variation is executed. The difference is that the content of processing for determining whether or not it is possible is changed. The details of the special symbol change process 10 (S195) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 274, the description will be continued. When the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is completed in the timer interrupt process 10, the same processes as those of the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 97) described above (S105 to S108) are executed, and then the specific ball is entered. After executing the process (S196), another process (S109) is executed, and the process ends.

  Here, the specific ball entry process (S196) is a process executed when a ball has entered the specific ball entry port 4640 (see FIG. 267). Based on the result, it is determined whether or not to release the small attacker 4650 or whether or not the current ball is to be handled effectively, and a process for performing setting based on the determination result is performed. Specifically, the specific content of the specific ball entry process (S196) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 275, the contents of the special symbol change processing 10 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) control in the tenth embodiment. When the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a big hit or a specific ball is entered (S295). In the process of S295, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203o is set to ON, it is determined that the present is a big hit, and when it is determined that the specific entering ball flag 203ia is set to ON. It is determined that the current ball is being entered.

  In the process of S295, when it is determined that the current game state is a big hit or a specific ball is entered (S295: Yes), the special figure variation process 2 of the second embodiment described above (see S154 of FIG. 97). Then, the same processing of S202 and S203 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S295, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not a big hit or a specific ball (S295: No), the special figure variation process 2 of the second embodiment described above (S154 in FIG. 97). (See S204, S205, S206, and S251).

  If it is determined in the process of S251 that the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is not set to ON (set to OFF), the first special symbol change start process 10 (S297) is executed. Then, the present process ends. The first special symbol change start process 10 (S297) is the first special symbol change start process (S208 in FIG. 33) executed in the special symbol change process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) in the second embodiment described above. The difference is that a first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276) is executed instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 34). About this 1st special symbol big hit determination processing 10 (refer to S395 of FIG. 276), since other than this is the same, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the processing of S206, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is 0 (S206: Yes), or in the processing of S251, the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to ON. If it is determined that there is a change (S251: Yes), the first special symbol change stop process 10 (S296) is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the content of the first special symbol big hit determination process 10 (S395). In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395), the high probability state of the special symbol is present compared to the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 of the second embodiment described above (see S356 of FIG. 98). When determining whether or not to execute the first special symbol lottery (judgment determination), it is necessary to refer to the probability change flag 203g instead of the probability change counter 203aa when determining whether the special change is performed. The difference is that the specific hitting flag 203ia is referred to instead of the big hit flag 203i. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be described later.

  When the first special symbol big hit determination process 10 (S395) is executed, first, the same process of S401 as the first special symbol big hit determination process 2 of the second embodiment (see S356 of FIG. 98) is performed. Then, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S495). If it is determined in the process of S495 that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, the current state is the high probability state of the special symbol, and the current lottery result based on the first random number table 202a for the high probability time is used. Is acquired (S403).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S495 that the probability change flag 203g is not set to ON, the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol, and the current time is based on the first random number table 202a for the low probability state. The lottery result is obtained (S404). Next, when the processing of S403 or S404 described above is completed, it is determined whether or not the specific entering flag 203ia is set to ON (S496). If it is determined that the specific entering flag 203ia is set to ON (S496: Yes), That is, when it is determined that a ball has entered the specific entrance 4640 and the specific ball entry operation is being performed, the processing (S407 to S410) based on the determination of the special symbol being executed (big hit determination) is skipped. Then, after executing the process of S412 which is the same as the first special symbol big hit determination process 2 of the second embodiment (see S356 of FIG. 98), the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S496, when it is determined that the specific entering ball flag 203ia is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S496: No), the first special symbol of the second embodiment described above. The same processing as S406 to S410 as the big hit determination processing 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 277, the contents of the first special symbol change stop processing 10 (S296) will be described. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change stop processing 10 (S296). The first special symbol change stop process 10 (S296) is different from the first special symbol change stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the above-described second embodiment in that the update process related to the probability change counter 203aa is deleted. Added a control to set a status command according to the setting status of the time saving counter 203f and the probable change flag 203g, and partially changed the content of processing executed when the first jackpot flag 203h is set to ON. It is different in that.

  Specifically, when the first special symbol change stop process 10 (S296) is executed, first, the same S851 as the first special symbol change stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above. To S854. Also, in the process of S853, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S853: No), the first special symbol fluctuation stop of the above-described second embodiment is also performed. The same fixed time processing (S860) as in processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) is executed.

  When the processing of S854 is completed, next, a status command according to the setting status of the time-saving counter 203f and the setting status of the probability change flag 203g is set (S891), and thereafter, it indicates that the finalization period of the first special symbol has ended. A special figure 1 confirmation period end command is set (S858). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S801), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S801: Yes), the specific entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON. (S892), a specific ball entry invalidation command for indicating that the specific ball entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON is set (S893). The command set here is output from the voice lamp control device by the external output process (S2201) of the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 52) in the same manner as the command set in other control processes of the main control device 110. 113 is output. By receiving the specific ball invalidation command, the sound lamp control device 113 determines a period during which the specific ball entry operation is not performed even if a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640, and based on the determination result, determines the third period. The display mode displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 can be variably set.

  When the process of S893 is completed, the same processes as those of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S257 of FIG. 99) of the second embodiment are executed, and the process is terminated. In the present embodiment, between the processing of S805 and the processing of S807, a processing (S894) for setting the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h and the probable change flag 203g to OFF is provided. In the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above, the target of the process executed on the probable variable counter 203aa is only changed to the probable variable flag 203g. Detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the contents of the specific ball entry process (S196) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing the content of the specific ball entry process (S196). The specific ball entry process (S196) is executed in the timer interrupt process 10 (see FIG. 274) repeatedly executed by the main controller 110 every 2 milliseconds. When it is determined that the ball has entered, various processes are executed.

  Specifically, when the specific ball entry process (S196) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is a prize (ball entry) of a ball to the specific ball entrance 4640 (S11501). In the process of S11501, a determination is made with reference to a detection result of a detection switch (not shown) for detecting that a ball has entered the specific entrance 4640. In the process of S11501, if it is determined that there is no winning (entering) of a ball in the specific entrance 4640 (S11501: No), this process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S11501 that the ball has won (entered) the specific entrance 4640 (S11501: Yes), then it is determined whether the specific entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON. (S11502), when it is determined that it is set to ON (S11502: No), that is, during a period during which the current specific ball entry operation based on the winning of the ball (entering the ball) into the specific ball entrance 4640 is not performed. If there is, the process is terminated as it is. In the process of S11502, if it is determined that the specific ball entry invalid flag 203ib is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S11502: No), then, based on the specific ball entry operation pattern table 202ic. Then, the current specific ball entry pattern is determined (S11503).

  Here, the contents executed in the process of S11503 will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 272, the specific pitching operation pattern table 202ic includes a plurality of specific pitching patterns (specific pitching) corresponding to the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 and the current game state. In the processing of S11503, the current game state is read from the game state information stored in the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is read in the process of S11503. By acquiring the information, the current specific ball entry pattern is determined.

  After the processing of S11503 is completed, a specific pitching operation scenario corresponding to the determined specific pitching pattern is set (S11504), and the specific pitching flag 203ia is set to ON (S11505). Then, a specific ball entry command is set to indicate that the specific ball entry operation scenario is set (S11506), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, when the ball enters, the specific entrance 4640 for performing the operation of opening the small attacker 4650 is provided. It is possible to make it easier to watch the flowing condition of the vehicle.

  Further, a period (standby period) from when the ball enters the specific entrance 4640 to when the small attacker 4650 is opened is set to the gaming state set at the time when the ball enters the specific entrance 4640. Since the configuration is such that the small attacker 4650 can be easily opened and the state in which the small attacker 4650 is difficult to open can be set according to the gaming state. Therefore, the player can be interested in the currently set game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the tenth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, during the period (symbol confirmation period) in which the third symbol indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit is stopped and displayed (symbol determination period). Is set so that an advantageous game state (latency state) that is advantageous to the player is set. When a ball enters the specific entrance 4640 in a state where the advantageous game state is set, another game state is set. An opening operation is set such that a period (standby period) from when a ball enters the specific entrance 4640 to when the small attacker 4650 is opened is shorter than when a game state is set. I have.

  Thereby, the special symbol jackpot is won, the period from the stop display of the symbol (special symbol, third symbol) for indicating the lottery result until the jackpot game is started, that is, the player wins the jackpot. During the period from when the winning is notified to when the big hit game is actually started, a special game that can frequently open the small attacker 4650 can be executed.

  In the tenth embodiment, during the period in which the third symbol indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit is stopped and displayed (symbol determination period), the small attacker 4650 can easily open the gaming state (invisible). State) is set, but a game state (latent state) in which the small attacker 4650 is easily opened at other timings may be set. As in the first embodiment, it may be set during the fluctuation display of the special symbol to indicate that the big hit has been won, or as in the sixth embodiment described above, the round game is started after the big hit game is started. The period until the game is executed (opening period of the jackpot game) may be set. Furthermore, it may be set only in any one of the above-described periods, or may be set in combination of a plurality of periods.

  Further, in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, a special game that can frequently open the small attacker 4650 before executing a notification to the player that the current lottery result is a big hit may be executed. good. With this configuration, since the special game is executed, it is possible to make the player predict that the big hit game will be executed after the end of the special game, so that the interest of the game can be improved. .

  In the case where the special game and the jackpot game are configured to be continuously executed as in the tenth embodiment, at least a part of the display effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 includes: It is good to constitute so that it may become a series production which straddles a special game and a jackpot game. In this case, for example, a period in which a special game can be executed, that is, information on the length of the symbol determination period set this time, information on the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game, and a game set after the end of the jackpot game It is preferable to set the production mode of the above-mentioned series production based on the information on the state. Thereby, it is executed in the future based on the game content (game content of special game, game content of jackpot game) executed while the series effect is displayed, and the effect content of the series effect being displayed. The content of the game can be predicted by the player.

  Also, when the big hit game is configured to be continuously executed after the end of the special game as in the tenth embodiment, the special game and the big hit game are notified to the player as one big hit game. May be set. By configuring in this way, the content of the jackpot game in the effect can be a combination of the setting content of the special game and the setting content of the jackpot game, so that the game content of one jackpot game Can be set for various types.

  In the tenth embodiment, the configuration is such that the jackpot game is executed when the display period of the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning ends (elapses). However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the ball passes through the specific area in the state where the fixed display period has elapsed, the jackpot game is executed, and after the special display period of the special symbol elapses and the ball passes through the specific area. A configuration may be adopted in which a gaming state (potential state) in which the small attacker 4650 is easily opened during the period is set.

<Regarding Modification of Tenth Embodiment>
Here, a modification of the above-described tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This modification is different from the tenth embodiment in that a start gate 670 is provided at a position where a ball flowing down the left area of the game board 13 (the left area of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view) can pass. And the arrangement positions of the specific entrance 4640 and the small attacker 4650 are changed. Other configurations are the same as those of the tenth embodiment, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the above-described tenth embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is won, the special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined period set as a variable display period, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the special symbol is set as a symbol determination period. It was configured to execute the jackpot game after the period stop display. On the other hand, in the present modified example, after a special symbol is stopped and displayed for a specific period set as a symbol determination period after a predetermined period has elapsed, a jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the ball has passed the start gate 670. It is composed.

  Then, during the period from when the special symbol is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game is executed, that is, during the period obtained by adding the symbol fixing period and the starting period until the ball passes the starting gate 670 after the symbol fixing period has elapsed. It is configured such that an advantageous game state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player is set.

  According to the present modification configured as described above, it is possible to set an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player for a period other than the predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting the advantageous game state to be continued for a longer time, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 279, in the present modification, a ball fired to execute a special game in which the small hit attacker 4650 wins a ball, that is, a position where a ball fired by a left-handed game can pass. Is provided with a start gate 670. Thereby, during the above-mentioned starting period, it can be suppressed that a special game is performed without passing the ball through the starting gate 670.

  Further, in this modification, the time from the passage of the ball through the starting gate 670 to the opening of the second variable winning device 650 due to the jackpot game, the ball passing through the starting gate 670 is the second variable winning device 650. Is configured to be shorter than the time required to reach. Accordingly, when the ball that has passed through the starting gate 670 reaches the second variable prize device 650, the second variable prize device 650 can be set to the open state, so that the jackpot game can be performed efficiently. it can.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 279, in this modification, a plurality of nails implanted in the game board 13 are configured to change the flowing direction of the ball, and the flowing direction of the ball passes through the starting gate 670. Since the ball is passed through the starting gate 670 when it is changed in the direction, it is difficult for the player to understand how long the starting period will continue, and the game area of the game board 13 is changed. Although the player could be interested in the flow of the individual balls flowing down, the starting period lasts for a long time because the flowing direction of the balls is irregularly changed by multiple nails In some cases, it ended immediately.

  Therefore, in the game area of the game board 13, the area in which the ball can flow down toward the starting gate 670 is placed in the area where the ball can flow down in the first direction and the second direction regularly. A sphere that has flowed down the other flow path (flow path in the second direction) from one flow path (flow path in the first direction) distributed by the distribution means toward the starting gate 670 is provided. You may comprise so that it may flow down easily.

  With such a configuration, the flow of the ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can have a predetermined regularity, so that the ball immediately passes through the starting gate 670 during the starting period. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation of being lost.

<Regarding Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the seventh embodiment described above, by one hit game of the second symbol (normal symbol), a ball enters the second entrance 3640, and the V prize device 650 is opened during the small hit game. The configuration is such that the presence or absence of the passage of the sphere to the specific area 650V within the area can be set.

  On the other hand, in this modification, in addition to the configuration of the above-described seventh embodiment, even if a plurality of second symbols (ordinary symbols) are hit, a ball enters the second entrance 3640 and a small ball is hit. The difference is that the presence / absence of a ball passing to a specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 that is opened during a winning game can be set. Further, a maximum of four values of the second random number counter C4 that can be obtained by passing through the through gate 67 can be reserved and stored. Note that the detailed configuration and control contents for storing the second random number counter C4 on hold are the same as those in the above-described first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 280, description will be given of the effect contents unique to the present modification that are executed by using the configuration of the present modification. FIG. 280 schematically illustrates an example of a resurrection effect performed when a second symbol (a normal symbol) is continuously won and a ball can pass through a specific area 650V in the V winning device 650. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 280, when the resurrection effect is executed, the character 811 is resurrected from the losing effect in the effect during the race described above with reference to FIG. During this resurrection effect, an effect is performed in which the rival character 860 or the goal of the effect during the race is skipped in the main display area Dm and the character 811 runs violently. Here, the conditions under which the resurrection effect is executed will be briefly described. In this modification, a predetermined win game is executed in a state where the time saving state is set, and immediately thereafter (in the next ordinary drawing lottery executed without a break) in a state where the normal state is set. When a specific winning game is executed, a ball enters the second entrance 3640 due to the previously executed winning game, and a small ball won in the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the entering ball. During the small hit game, the ball that has flowed into the second passage 660b (see FIG. 195) by the next executed hit game can pass through the specific area 650V, and such a state occurs. The possible state, that is, the result of the consecutively executed general drawing lottery (the result of pre-determining the general drawing winning information included in the general drawing hold) is a specific winning result, and each winning result is Play when a winning game is executed based on State satisfies a predetermined condition, further, among the per game continuous, when the sphere to the second passage 660b at least the following (the second time) per game is flowed, revived effect described above is executed.

  In this way, by providing a game result that is advantageous to the player (a state in which the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hitting game) based on a plurality of regular drawing lotteries, the player is provided with unexpectedness. It is possible to provide a certain game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. Further, by making it possible to execute a surprising effect (resurrection effect) corresponding to the above-mentioned surprising game, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, an electrical configuration provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. This modification is a modification of the above-described seventh embodiment, and the basic electrical configuration is the same as that of the seventh embodiment. Here, only the configuration different from the above-described seventh embodiment will be described, and the other description will be omitted. FIG. 281 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the high probability second random number 11 table 202ja, and FIG. 282 (b) is a low probability second random number 11 table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content prescribed | regulated by 202jb typically.

  As shown in FIG. 281 (a), the high probability second random number 11 table 202ja is referred to when executing the second symbol success / failure determination in the normal symbol high probability state, and is described above. In the process of acquiring the lottery result (see S805 of FIG. 219) of the ordinary symbol variation process 7 (see S192 of FIG. 219) of the seventh embodiment, the currently set gaming state is the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. Referenced in some cases.

  The high probability second hit random number 11 table 202ja is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that the second hit type (general drawing hit type) is increased. Specifically, the per-figure C is defined in a range where the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is "80 to 98". It should be noted that the second hit type of the general hits A and B are the same as those of the above-described seventh embodiment except that the corresponding range of the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is different. Therefore, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Furthermore, the selected second hit type (general-purpose hit type) is set so that the operation content of the hit operation performed according to the gaming state set at the timing at which the hit operation is executed is different. .

  The hitting operation of the ordinary symbol A and the ordinary symbol B executed in the state where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set is omitted since it is the same as that of the above-described seventh embodiment. The hitting operation is that the opening period is 0.1 second, the opening period is 2.5 seconds, the ending period is 1 second, and one ball enters the second entrance 3640 during the opening period. A hit operation is performed when the open period ends.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment described above, by setting the ending period longer than the time (3 seconds) required for the ball to pass through the second passage 660b, based on the fluctuation of the special figure 2 per one ordinary figure. While the ball that has flown into the second passage 660b based on the other hits during the small hitting game that has been executed is configured not to pass through the specific region 650V, In the hit game (hit operation) corresponding to C, the ending period is set shorter (0.1 second) than the time (3 seconds) required for the ball to pass through the second passage 660b, and the ending period is set immediately after The ball that has flowed into the second passage 660b based on the result of the drawing lottery is configured to be able to pass through the specific area 650V during the small hitting game.

  Specifically, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed by the hit operation based on the general figure C winning, the next general figure lottery can be executed 0.1 seconds after the start of the special figure 2 lottery. When the ball enters the second entrance 3640 in the shortest time (1.3 seconds) during the per-figure A by the per-figure per drawing, the previously per-figure per-figure C is executed. The ball will flow into the second passage 660b 1.4 seconds after the start of the special drawing 2 lottery based on.

  In such a case, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed by the hitting operation based on the C-winning in the normal figure is a small hit, and when the small hitting game is executed, during the small hitting game, It is possible to construct a state in which the ball that has flowed into the second passage 660b can pass through the specific area 650V based on the winning A win.

  As described above, in the present modified example, by winning a predetermined winning type (A, B per general drawing) immediately after winning a specific winning type (C per general drawing), a plurality of , And a ball flowing down to the second passage 660b can provide a game state advantageous to the player (a ball passing to the specific area 650V during the small hitting game). .

  The low probability second random number 11 table 202jb is referred to when the second symbol is determined in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and is referred to when the normal symbol variation process 7 of the seventh embodiment is performed. In the process of obtaining the lottery result (see S192 of FIG. 219) (see S805 of FIG. 219), the process is referred to when the currently set gaming state is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol.

  This low-probability second random number 11 table 202jb differs from the above-described seventh embodiment in that different normal power operation patterns are defined according to the second hit type (common drawing type). I have. More specifically, A per figure is defined when the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 19”. If the gaming state when the player wins the ordinary drawing A and executes the winning operation is in the low probability state, the opening game is 0.1 seconds, the opening period is 1 second, and the ending period is 0.1 seconds. Is defined to be executed.

  Further, the per-figure-period B is defined as the value of the second per-random number counter C4 being “20”. If the game state when winning the regular drawing per B and executing the winning operation is a low probability state, the winning game is executed with an opening period of 2 seconds, an opening period of 0.2 seconds, and an ending period of 3 seconds. And the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to “21”, and C is generally specified. If the gaming state in which the ordinary drawing C is won and the winning operation is executed is a low probability state, the winning game is executed with an opening period of 2 seconds, an opening period of 0.2 seconds, and an ending period of 3 seconds. It is prescribed to be. "Outside" is defined in the range where the value of the second random number counter C4 is "22 to 99".

  Here, when the winning is made per ordinary figure in the state where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the electric game is operated only during a period in which the ball cannot enter the second entrance 3640 due to the winning game. Although the accessory 3640a is configured not to be opened, the opening period of the electric accessory 3640a is set to be long (1 second) only in the hitting game based on A per day. When the one-second opening period is set, the ball flows down on the electric accessory 3640a and flows down to a position facing the second passage 660b (see FIG. 198).

  Then, when the opening period elapses 1 second, the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state, the ball flows into the second passage 660b, and flows down toward the out port 66 as it is. In the normal state, the ball does not enter the second entrance 3640, and thus the V winning device 650 is not opened.

  In this way, in the winning game executed in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the operation pattern (ordinary electric operation pattern) of the electric accessory 3640a is changed according to the set second winning type (ordinary symbol winning type). By changing the path along which the ball flows down, for example, the first variable winning device 65 that is opened during a jackpot game can win the ball that has passed through a plurality of flow paths. It is possible to win a plurality of balls at once.

  Further, in this modification, in a state where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the hit game based on the ordinary symbol C is executed, and immediately after that, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set and the ordinary symbol A is set. When the corresponding hit game is executed, the ball that has flown down the second passage 660b by the hit game corresponding to the normal figure per A in the low probability state is based on the general figure per C executed during the high probability state. It is configured to pass through the specific area 650 V during the small hit game executed.

  This makes it possible to execute the jackpot game based on the small hit game, despite having once shifted to the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game. Not only can it be possible, but also the player can be motivated to play the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 282, the contents of control processing executed by main controller 110 in the present modification will be described. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing 11. This through gate passage process 11 is acquired (stored) when the ball passes through the through gate 67, as compared with the through gate passage process (see S107 in FIG. 49) executed by the seventh embodiment described above (storage). The difference is that a process of determining (predicting) a game result in advance based on the values of various counters is performed.

  When the through gate passage processing 11 (S157) is executed, first, the same processing as S1901 to S1905, which is the same as the through gate passage processing (see S107 in FIG. 49) executed in the seventh embodiment, is executed. Based on the counter value stored in the process of S1905, the success or failure of the ordinary symbol lottery and the type of ordinary drawing are predicted (S1951). Then, a general figure winning information command including information indicating the predicted success / failure and the general figure winning type is set (S1958), and the present process ends.

  It should be noted that the detailed contents of the processing executed in S1951 and S1952 are the same as those in the processing of S1707 and S1708 of the starting winning processing (S105 in FIG. 47) executed for the special symbol, except that the ordinary symbol is used. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, the contents of the control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing 11. This command determination processing 11 is different from the command determination processing 7 (see S4182 in FIG. 226) executed by the above-described seventh embodiment in that the command (shown in S4182 of FIG. 226) indicates the winning information of the ordinary symbol as well as the winning information of the special symbol. A difference is that a process (see S12051) for judging that the universal drawing winning information command has been received and a process (see S12052) that is executed when the general drawing winning information command has been received are added. Are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 283, when it is determined that a prize information related command (prize information command, general figure prize information command) is received (S12051: Yes), based on the received prize information command (general figure prize information command). The winning information is stored in the winning information storage area (S12010). Here, the winning information storage area used in the present modification is configured to be able to store the received winning information in the reserved ball storing area of the ordinary symbol in addition to the reserved ball storing area of the special symbol. Then, when the process of S12010 is completed, a general-purpose effect setting process (S12052) is executed, and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 284, the contents of the ordinary figure effect setting process (S12052) will be described. The general figure effect setting process (S12052) determines each information stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see FIG. 21) based on the received general figure winning information command, and the specific condition is satisfied. Is determined, and when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, a process for specifying that the special effect is executable is executed.

  When the universal drawing effect setting process (S12052) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the winning-related information received this time is a universal drawing winning information command (S13001). It is determined whether or not the information indicating the high-accuracy drawing C is included (S13002). In the process of S13002, when it is determined that the information indicating the high-probability general-purpose per-C is included (S13002: Yes), the general-purpose C winning flag is set to ON (S13003), and the process ends.

  The general figure C winning flag is set to ON when information (command) indicating the high probability general figure C is received, and is set to OFF when the next general figure winning information command is received. Things. Thus, it is configured to be able to determine the general drawing winning information command received after the general drawing winning indicating C with high probability general figure winning.

  On the other hand, in the process of S13002, when it is determined that the information indicating the high-accuracy general-purpose per-C is not included (S13002; No), it is determined whether the information indicating the low-probability general-per-per-A is included (S13002). If it is determined that it is not included (S13004) (S13004: No), the general-purpose C winning flag is set to off (S13007), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S13004 that the information indicating the low-probability general-per-per-A is included (S13004: Yes), it is determined whether the general-purpose C winning flag is set to ON (S13005), and ON is performed. If it is determined that it has been set (S13005: Yes), the special effect possible information is set in the corresponding general figure winning information (S13006), the general figure C winning flag is set to off, and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S13005 that it is not set to ON (S13005: No), the present processing ends. As a result, it is possible to predict in advance that the low-probability general-drawing A will be executed next to the high-probability general-purpose C, and to set a special effect according to the prediction result.

  In addition, as in the present modification, in a case where a privilege that is advantageous to the player is provided across the high-probability state and the low-probability state of the ordinary symbol, for example, the number of small hits (small hits) It is preferable to terminate the high probability state of the ordinary symbol based on the number of times the game is executed). As a result, the first regular drawing lottery is executed in a high probability state, and the special figure 2 lottery is executed according to the winning game to win the small hit. Then, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is shifted to the low probability state at the timing when the small hitting game is executed.

  Since the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is still set at the timing when the special figure 2 lottery is executed, the next general figure lottery is executed in the high probability state. Then, after the elapse of the fluctuation time when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2, after the start timing of the small hit game to be executed, the hit game based on the next universal drawing lottery is executed so that Set the fluctuation time of ordinary figure fluctuation in the probability state. With this configuration, it is possible to easily execute the winning game based on the next ordinary drawing lottery in the operation pattern of the low probability state.

  In each of the above embodiments, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased), the reserved ball number command is issued. Has been described from main controller 110 to audio ramp controller 113, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d in the main control device 110 increases, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. Thereby, the number of times that main control device 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control load of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In each of the above embodiments, the winning in the first entrance 64 and the passage through the through gate 67 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. Alternatively, the number may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of retained balls of the variable display based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  Further, as described in the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the vertical direction. The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display that is performed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the result of the lottery of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, of the third symbols, different display units may be provided for a display unit for displaying a main symbol displayed to be emphasized to a player and a display unit for displaying a sub symbol. Further, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used as the configuration of the display unit.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game aiming at the right area of the game board 13 is executed in a game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player, and a left area of the game board 13 in a normal game state. The left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be made different depending on the game state. May execute a right-handed game. Further, a game in a different game state may be executed while aiming at the same area.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame buttons 22 and 23 for determining that the operation unit has been operated by the player performing a pressing operation are used as the operation unit that can be operated by the player. The lever may be used to determine that the player has operated by tilting the player left or right or back and forth, or that the player has operated by touching or approaching the lever. It is also possible to use a touch sensor-type operation unit that can be distinguished, a wireless operation unit that can determine that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c A part or all of the operation control may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the sound lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in an effect performed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is performed using the sound lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a process for executing a game (lottery) and a result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects. May be executed by the same control device. With such a configuration, a single control device can execute a plurality of different processes.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of the special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more May be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the gaming ability in which a plurality of special symbols are drawn (changed) according to a predetermined rule and the gaming ability in which a drawing (change) is performed individually and independently are described. However, each of the gaming properties described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Characteristic A group> (Small hit is possible during the change of specific special map)
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination, a first display unit on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit is displayed, and the first identification information displayed on the first display unit. , A dynamic display period setting unit for setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the first identification information by the dynamic display unit, and the second determination being executable. A second determination unit, a second display unit on which second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination unit is displayed, and a second display unit for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display unit. When the first identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. A bonus game execution means for executing There is a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state in which the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination and a second game state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the second determination. The game state setting means can set the first game state in the dynamic display period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probable change state) that is advantageous to a player during a period from the end of a bonus game to the next jackpot in accordance with a result of a lottery (for example, 2012-217766 gazette). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the period during which the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, the period during which the gaming state is executed during the advantageous gaming state. If the lottery is immediately won by the next lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened. If the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next round, the advantageous gaming state is set. Is set longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous game state provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous game state is set. Further, there is a problem that if the gaming machine has a gaming property of granting a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, the privilege given to the player is greatly different. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the period during which the first determination is dynamically displayed can be set to the first gaming state in which the second determination is easily performed, and therefore, the length of the period during which the first gaming state is set Can be set in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the second determination unit is configured to determine the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the first determination unit determines the specific first determination result. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, the second privilege game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed more than the first bonus game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Since the first game state can be easily played, the first game state can be set to a game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in the hope that the first game state is set, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, the first ball entry means, and the second ball entry A third ball entry means different from the means, a first state in which a game ball can be guided to the second ball entry means, and a third state in which it is more difficult to enter the second ball entry means than the first state. And a variable means that can be changed to two states, wherein the first determination means is configured to determine whether the first ball is entered based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. The second determination means is configured to be capable of performing the determination, and the second determination means is configured to be capable of performing the second determination based on a game ball entering the third ball entry means, and in the second game state, A gaming machine wherein the variable means is controlled to be more easily changed to the first state than in the first game state. 3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A1 or A2. That is, it is possible to make the first determination more difficult to execute in the first game state than in the second game state. Therefore, in the state where the first game state is set, it is possible to easily perform the game in which the third ball entry means makes the ball enter, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player. .

  In the gaming machine A3, after the first privilege game is executed, a high probability that the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result by the first determination can be set to a higher probability than normal time Setting means, wherein the gaming state setting means is displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means. The gaming machine A4, wherein the first gaming state is set based on the start of dynamic display of the first identification information.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A3. That is, when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means, the dynamic display of the first identification information to be displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result by the first determination. Since the first game state is set based on the start, the process until the first game state is set can be set stepwise. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the player to continuously play the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second privilege game is a game in which a privilege that can be given to a player is set to be smaller than the first privilege game. Machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the second privilege game, the number of privileges that can be given to the player is set smaller than that in the first privilege game. Therefore, during the period in which the first game state is set, the player is given an excessive privilege. There is an effect that addition can be suppressed.

<Feature B group> (Set game content and special 1 and special 2 at once)
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination, a first display unit on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit is displayed, and the first identification information displayed on the first display unit. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information, first dynamic display period determination means for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination. Determining means capable of executing the determination, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determining means, and dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means. A second dynamic display means for displaying, a second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and a second dynamic display period determining means for specifying the first display means. When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result of is displayed, A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game and executing a second bonus game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In the gaming machine, period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the first identification information to be displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed; An effect determination unit that determines an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination unit; and the effect determined by the effect determination unit. A gaming machine B1 comprising: an effect executing means for executing.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probable change state) that is advantageous to a player during a period from the end of a bonus game to the next jackpot in accordance with a result of a lottery (for example, 2012-217766 gazette). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the period during which the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, the period during which the gaming state is executed during the advantageous gaming state. If the lottery is immediately won by the next lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened. If the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next round, the advantageous gaming state is set. Is set longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous game state provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous game state is set. Further, there is a problem that if the gaming machine has a gaming property of granting a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, the privilege given to the player is greatly different. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination device is determined by the effect determination device. Since it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information in association with the dynamic display period, it is possible to provide a player with a pleasure of predicting a future game based on the effect performed. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1, the effect determination unit determines the effect based on the dynamic display period determined by the period determination unit and the game content of the first privilege game. A gaming machine B2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, by grasping the effect performed by the effect executing means, the dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed and the game of the first privilege game are realized. And the content can be predicted. Therefore, the effect can be enhanced because the player can be closely watched in the effect.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a first gaming state in which the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the second determination. The game state setting means includes a settable game state setting means, wherein the game state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information to be displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result. A gaming machine B3 for executing the first gaming state during a dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1 or B2. That is, since the first gaming state is set during the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the determination result that the first privilege game is to be executed, the period until the first privilege game is executed is set. A game aiming at the second privilege game can be performed by using the game. Further, by grasping the effect performed by the effect executing means, it is possible to predict a period in which the first game state is set, and thus it is possible to enthusiastically perform a game during the first game state. effective.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, a normal first privilege game as the first privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and a small first privilege game in which the privilege to be given to the player is smaller than the normal first privilege game. And the first dynamic display period determining means is capable of determining a first period and a second period longer than the first period. The effect determination means, wherein the small first privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, and the second period is determined by the period discrimination means; A gaming machine B4 wherein an effect in the same mode is determined when one privilege game is executed and the first period is determined by the period determining means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the effect determination means has a different combination of two factors for determining the effect content, the effect determination means has the same mode. Since the effect is determined, by grasping the contents of the effect executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player predict a plurality of future game situations in a plurality of patterns. Then, it becomes possible to gradually increase the accuracy of the prediction depending on the progress of the first game state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further enhance the fun to be predicted for the player, and to enhance the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine B4, the effect determination unit determines a specific effect when the normal first bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution unit and the second period is determined by the period determination unit. A gaming machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B4. In other words, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to inform the player that the most advantageous game content has been set, so that the player can be given a sense of superiority.

<Characteristic C group> (Rush notification)
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination, a first display unit on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit is displayed, and the first identification information displayed on the first display unit. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information, first dynamic display period determination means for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination. Determining means capable of executing the determination, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determining means, and dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means. A second dynamic display means for displaying, a second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and a second dynamic display period determining means for specifying the first display means. When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result of is displayed, A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game and executing a second bonus game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In the gaming machine, a first gaming state in which the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination and a second gaming state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the second determination can be set. When the first game state is set by the game state setting means and the game state setting means, it is determined that the first game state has been set based on the state of the dynamic display of the second identification information. And a notification timing determining means for determining a notification timing for notifying a notification mode for indicating to a player.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, an advantageous game state (probable change state) that is advantageous to the player is set during the period from the end of the privilege game to the next jackpot according to the lottery result according to the lottery result, and the player is notified that the game state has been changed. There has been proposed a gaming machine that performs an effect of performing (e.g., JP-A-2012-217766). By the way, the above-described gaming machine is configured to execute an effect to notify the effect based on the fact that the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, and for example, the advantageous gaming state is set. Despite the fact that it is not possible to execute a new lottery, the player is notified that the gaming state has been set, which gives the player discomfort. was there. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the notification timing for notifying that the first game state in which the second determination is easily executed is set can be determined based on the dynamic display state of the second identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the notification timing for notifying that the first game state has been set.

  In the gaming machine C1, the second dynamic display means can dynamically display the second identification information in a state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine C2, wherein the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on a result of the first determination by the first determining means.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1. That is, when the first game state set based on the determination result of the first determination unit that is executed separately from the second determination unit is set, the notification is performed based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. Timing is determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the first identification information and the second identification information that can be dynamically displayed at the same time are combined to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  The gaming machine C2 has dynamic display determination means for determining whether the second identification information is dynamically displayed at the time when the first game state is set, and the notification timing determination means includes When the first identification state is determined not to be dynamically displayed by the target display determination means, the notification timing is determined based on the time when the first game state is set. Gaming machine C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C2. That is, when the second determination can be performed immediately after the first gaming state is set, it is immediately notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in the first game state for a longer time.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the notification timing determination means ends the dynamic display of the second identification information when the dynamic display determination means determines that the second identification information is dynamically displayed. A game machine C4 characterized in that the notification timing is determined based on the timing of the execution.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C2 or C3. That is, even if the first game state is set, during the period in which the second determination cannot be executed, the fact that the first game state has been set is not notified, and the second determination state can be executed. In this case, it is notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the second determination cannot be executed in spite of being notified that the first game state has been set, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. There is an effect that can be.

  The gaming machine C4 includes a remaining period determining unit that determines a period from a timing when the dynamic display of the second identification information ends to the end of the first gaming state, based on a determination result by the remaining period determining unit. A gaming machine C5 comprising notification determining means for determining whether or not the notification timing is determined by the notification timing determining means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, it is determined whether or not to determine the notification timing based on a period during which the second determination can be performed during the first gaming state. For example, the second determination is performed during the first gaming state. When the executable period has become extremely short, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified that the first game state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first game state from ending in a short period of time and giving the player an unpleasant sensation despite notifying the player that the first game state has been set. There is an effect that can be.

<Feature D group>
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination, a first display unit on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit is displayed, and the first identification information displayed on the first display unit. A first dynamic display unit for dynamically displaying a predetermined period, a second determination unit capable of executing the second determination, and a second identification information for displaying a determination result by the second determination unit. A second display means, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means for a predetermined period, and the first display means for displaying a specific first determination result on the first display means. When the identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. A privilege game execution means to be executed, and a plurality of privilege contents And a second privilege game type setting unit that sets the first identification information in a state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display unit. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed, and when the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed by the second dynamic display means, A game comprising stop control means for executing stop control for dynamic display by the first dynamic display means based on the privilege contents set by the second privilege game type setting means. Machine D1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a gaming property of executing a plurality of lotteries at the same time (so-called simultaneous fluctuation type). In a gaming machine having such gaming properties, when a lottery result of one lottery is a hit, a bonus game advantageous to a player is executed and another lottery game being executed is forcibly removed. A method of terminating the process has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). By the way, regardless of the type of the bonus game, the above-mentioned gaming machine forcibly stops and displays the other lottery with the lottery result executed based on the result of the stoppage of the lottery result in which the bonus game is executed. There is a problem of giving discomfort to the person. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the content of the stop control for the first dynamic display can be set in accordance with the content of the second privilege game to be executed, thereby suppressing a situation in which the player is uncomfortable. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine D1, the stop control means includes a forced stop control for stopping and displaying the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means with the first identification information indicating a determination result different from the specific first determination result. And a temporary stop control for stopping measurement of a period dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means until a predetermined restart condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. That is, it is possible to set whether the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means is forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped in accordance with the content of the second privilege game to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from being given an excessive privilege, and to execute the privilege game in which the small privilege is given, thereby discarding the privilege game in which the big privilege is given. This has the effect of being able to suppress this.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second privilege game type setting means can set a first privilege type and a second privilege type that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege type. The gaming machine D3, wherein the control unit executes the forced stop control when the second special type is set by the second privilege game type setting unit.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second privilege type which is advantageous to the player is set, the dynamic display can be forcibly stopped by the first dynamic display means, so that an excessive privilege is given to the player. There is an effect that it can suppress that.

  In the gaming machine D3, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the dynamic display performed by the first dynamic display means ends, and the specific first determination is performed. Until the first identification information for indicating the result is displayed on the first display means, the second privilege game type setting means invalidates the setting of the second privilege type by the second privilege game type setting means. A gaming machine D4, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D3. That is, when the determination result of the first determination unit is a specific first determination result, the setting of the second privilege type is invalidated by the invalidation unit during the dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first privilege game and the second privilege game in which the second privilege type is set from being continuously executed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive privilege from being given to the player. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second privilege game type setting means sets the first privilege type and the second privilege type based on the determination result of the second determining means, A gaming machine D5 characterized in that the first privilege type is more easily set than the second privilege type.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3 or D4. That is, since the first privilege type is more likely to be set than the second privilege type, even if the second privilege game is executed many times, it is possible to suppress an excessive privilege from being given to the player. There is.

<Other Thought 1> (The latent state can be set before and after the jackpot game)
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination, a first display unit on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit is displayed, and the first identification information displayed on the first display unit. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the information, a second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means. And executing the first privilege game when the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, and displaying the specific second determination result on the second display means. When the second identification information for indicating is displayed, the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination in a gaming machine having a bonus game execution unit that executes a second bonus game. A first gaming state, wherein the first determination is executed rather than the second determination And a game state setting means for setting a second game state. The game state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information when a predetermined first condition is satisfied. The first gaming state is set during a predetermined period, and when the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set after the first privilege game is completed. E1.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probable change state) that is advantageous to a player during a period from the end of a bonus game to the next jackpot in accordance with a result of a lottery (for example, 2012-217766 gazette). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the period during which the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, the period during which the gaming state is executed during the advantageous gaming state. If the lottery is immediately won by the next lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened. If the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next round, the advantageous gaming state is set. Is set longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous game state provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous game state is set. Further, there is a problem that if the gaming machine has a gaming property of granting a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, the privilege given to the player is greatly different. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the timing at which the first gaming state is set can be divided into before and after the first privilege game, so that a surprising game can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic G group> (small hit RUSH during the symbol confirmation period)
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination, a first display unit on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit is displayed, and the first identification information displayed on the first display unit. Stop display means for stopping and displaying, a stop display period setting means for setting a stop display period for stopping and displaying the first identification information by the first stop display means, and a second determination capable of executing a second determination Means, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. Is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. A bonus game execution means, A gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state in which the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination and a second gaming state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the second determination. Wherein the game state setting means is capable of setting the first game state in the stop display period in which the first identification information is stopped and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine G1 characterized by the following.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probable change state) that is advantageous to a player during a period from the end of a bonus game to the next jackpot in accordance with a result of a lottery (for example, 2012-217766 gazette). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the period during which the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, the period during which the gaming state is executed during the advantageous gaming state. If the lottery is immediately won by the next lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened. If the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next round, the advantageous gaming state is set. Is set longer. That is, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous game state is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous game state is set. Further, there is a problem that if the gaming machine has a gaming property of granting a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, the privilege given to the player is greatly different. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine G1, since the stop display period can be set in advance as the period in which the first gaming state is set, there is an effect that the period in which the first gaming state is executed can be appropriately managed. . In addition, since the first game state is set during a period in which the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination is stopped and displayed, the game content after the first game state is ended is provided to the player in advance. It can be grasped. With this configuration, for example, when the first game state is set in a state in which a specific determination result is displayed as the determination result of the first determination, after the first game state ends, The execution of the first privilege game can be grasped in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, the stop display period setting means sets stop display periods of different lengths based on the determination result of the first determination means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the stop display period is set based on the determination result of the first determining means, so that the first bonus game is performed based on the determination result of the first determining means. Is performed, and the length of the stop display period is determined. Therefore, the player can be more closely watched by the determination result of the first determination unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G2, the stop display period setting means, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, displays a longer stop display than in the case other than the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that a period is easily set.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the stop display period is longer than in the case other than the specific first determination result. Is easily set, so that the first game state in which a longer period is set can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G2 or G3, the stop display period setting means can set a stop display period of a different length when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2 or G3, even in the case of the specific first determination result, the length of the stop display period can be made different. Therefore, even in the case of the specific first determination result, since the period in which the first game state is set is different, the player is eager to play the game so that the longer first game state is set. There is an effect that can be made.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the second determination unit may determine the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the first determination unit determines the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G5.

  According to the gaming machine G5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4. That is, the second privilege game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed more than the first bonus game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Since the first game state can be easily played, the first game state can be set to a game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in the hope that the first game state is set, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic H group>
A first determination unit capable of performing a first determination, a first display unit displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit, and a second determination unit capable of performing a second determination And second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means; and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. When displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. A first gaming state in which the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the second determination. And a game state setting means capable of setting a game state. The setting means enables the first game state to be set during a first period in which the second determination can be executed when both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that:

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probable change state) that is advantageous to a player during a period from the end of a bonus game to the next jackpot in accordance with a result of a lottery (for example, 2012-217766 gazette). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, whether or not an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set is determined by only one lottery result. There was a problem that a game could not be performed while having fun. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine H1, since the first gaming state can be set for the first period when the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are both satisfied, the second determination is made during the first gaming state. Can be surely executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the first game state is ended without performing the second determination in spite of the fact that the first game state is set, and the player is dissatisfied. No games can be offered.

  In the gaming machine H1, the game machine H1 has a first judgment number measuring means capable of measuring the number of the first judgments executed by the first judgment means, and the first judgment number measured by the first judgment number measuring means is provided. The gaming machine H2, wherein the first predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of times reaches a predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the first predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of first determinations reaches the predetermined number, so that the first determination by the first determination unit is executed. Thereby, the game content can be reliably advanced toward the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the state where the first predetermined condition is not satisfied when playing the game for a long time, and to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  The gaming machine H3, wherein in the gaming machine H1 or H2, the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, if the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the second predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the player can understand. There is an effect that an easy game can be provided.

  In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state even when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied. Setting the first game state during a second period during which the second determination is difficult to execute when the first game state is set based on the first predetermined condition being satisfied. A gaming machine H4, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2 or H3, when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set only in the second period in which the second determination is difficult to execute. Thus, the first game state set when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied can be set as a game state disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game so that both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied.

  In the gaming machine H4, when the first gaming state is set based on the second predetermined condition being satisfied, the gaming state setting means is shorter than the first period, and A gaming machine H5 for setting the first gaming state during a third period longer than two periods.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H4, when only the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set during the third period, so that the first gaming condition is set higher than the first predetermined condition. There is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically performed to satisfy the second predetermined condition first.

<Characteristic I group> (The degree of small hit RUSH entry expectation can be changed by the number of working hours)
A first determination unit capable of performing a first determination, a first display unit displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit, and a second determination unit capable of performing a second determination And second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means; and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. When displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. Game execution means, a first game state in which the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination, and a second game state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the second determination can be set. Game state setting means, the game state setting means. The means is capable of setting a third game state in which the first game state is more likely to be set than the second game state for a predetermined period, and includes a first period as a period in which the third game state is set. , A third game state period setting means capable of setting a second period longer than the first period, and the first period set by the third game state period setting means is the second period. The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that it is easier to set the first gaming state than is set.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that performs a game in which a plurality of gaming states are shifted in stages in accordance with a lottery result, and that can set an advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to a player (for example, JP-A-2005-058267). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine aims to set the advantageous gaming state because the ease of setting the advantageous gaming state in the gaming state (semi-advantageous gaming state) in which the advantageous gaming state is easily set is single. There is a problem that the content of the game performed is monotonous. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine I1, by setting different periods for setting the third gaming state in which the first gaming state is likely to be set, the degree of expectation that the first gaming state is set in the state in which the third gaming state is set Can be different. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the setting contents of the third game state, the player can actively play the game even in the game process until the first game state is set. There is an effect that it can be performed.

  The gaming machine I1 has a progress determining means for determining the elapse of the predetermined period set by the third gaming state period setting means, and the gaming state setting means uses the elapse determining means to elapse the predetermined period. The gaming machine I2, wherein the first game state is set based on a first set condition that is satisfied when the first game condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I1, when the period in which the third gaming state is set has elapsed, the first gaming state is set, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the gaming state setting unit may be configured to execute the processing when the third determination state is set and the first determination result by the first determination unit is the specific first determination result. A gaming machine I3 for setting the first gaming state based on the establishment of a second setting condition that is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, even if the third gaming state in which the first setting condition is difficult to be satisfied, that is, the long-term third gaming state is set, During the third gaming state, the first gaming state can be set based on the determination result of the first determining means. Therefore, different transition conditions can be aimed at in order to set the first gaming state according to the set period of the third gaming state, and the motivation to play depends on the length of the set period of the third gaming state. It is possible to suppress the reduction.

  In the gaming machines I2 and I3, the third gaming state period setting means can set a third period longer than the second period, and the elapse determining means has determined the elapse of the third period. In this case, the gaming machine I4 has a condition restricting means that does not satisfy the first setting condition.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the elapse of the third period is determined, the first setting condition is not satisfied by the condition limiting means, so the first gaming state is set. Can be reliably restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress providing an excessively advantageous state to the player.

  In any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the game device includes first game state period setting means for setting a period in which the first game state is set, and the first game state period setting means includes: A gaming machine in which the period in which the first gaming state is set is set longer when it is determined that the first period has elapsed than when it is determined that the second period has elapsed. I5.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, it is determined that the second period has elapsed after the first period is longer than the second period has been determined to have elapsed. A game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can watch the discrimination result of the progress discrimination means.

<Feature J group> (Surely small hit RUSH for a predetermined period)
A first determination unit capable of performing a first determination, a first display unit displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit, and a second determination capable of performing the second determination Means, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. Is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. A first gaming state in which the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the second determination. 2 game state setting means capable of setting a game state and the game state An advantageous period setting means for setting an advantageous period in which the first game state can be continuously set by the setting means; a first ending condition which is satisfied when the advantageous period set by the advantageous period setting means has elapsed; Or end means for terminating the first game state when a second end condition different from the first end condition is satisfied, wherein the second end condition is satisfied when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied. A gaming machine J1 having end restriction means for restricting the establishment of the game machine J1.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that performs a game in which a plurality of gaming states are shifted in stages in accordance with a lottery result, and that can set an advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to a player (for example, JP-A-2005-058267). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set varies based on the lottery result executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state is provided to the player for a predetermined period. There is a problem in that despite the difficulty in setting the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state ends in a short period of time and the desire to play decreases. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine J1, when the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, the satisfaction of the second ending condition can be limited by the ending restriction means. Therefore, the first game state can be continuously set during the advantageous period set by the advantageous period setting means, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine J1, the gaming state setting means can set an advantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition can be satisfied and a disadvantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition cannot be satisfied. A gaming machine J2, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine J2, an advantageous first gaming state and a disadvantageous first gaming state can be set by the gaming state setting means in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, and thus the gaming state setting means is more advantageous. There is an effect that a game can be enthusiastically performed so that the first game state is set.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied when the result of the first determination by the first determination means is the specific first determination result. J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1 or J2, if the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play a game so that the determination result becomes the specific first determination result.

  A gaming machine J4, characterized in that the gaming machine J2 or J3 has a notifying means for notifying that the advantageous first gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J2 or J3, the fact that the first advantageous gaming state is set is notified by the notification means, so that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. This has the effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines J2 to J4, a determination unit that determines that the second end condition is satisfied during a period in which the advantageous first game state is set, is provided. A gaming machine J5 having second notification means for notifying that the second end condition has been satisfied based on the determination result.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the second notification means that the condition for establishing the second end condition is satisfied during the period in which the advantageous first gaming state is set. When the first gaming state set this time is not the advantageous first gaming state but the disadvantaged first gaming state, it is determined whether the first gaming state has ended. The player can be identified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can experience the superiority of the advantageous first gaming state set this time.

<Characteristic K group> (A period in which the number of times saved is not subtracted is provided during the time saved)
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination, a first display unit on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit is displayed, and the first identification information displayed on the first display unit. A first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first determination information for a predetermined first period, and the first determination is performed when the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means. Game state setting means capable of setting an advantageous game state for facilitating the execution of the game, a period measuring means for measuring the period of the advantageous game state set by the game state setting means, and the predetermined state by the period measuring means. When a period is measured, ending means for ending the advantageous gaming state, and when a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied, measurement limiting means for limiting measurement of the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means, Having Gaming machine K1, characterized in that.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to a player during a period from the end of a privilege game to the next jackpot in accordance with a lottery result (for example, JP 2012-217766 gazette). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to set a period until the number of lotteries reaches a predetermined number as a period in which an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous gaming state is set. However, there is a problem that the period of time for which the operation is performed can be easily predicted. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine K1, the measurement of the predetermined period in which the advantageous gaming state is set can be limited by the measurement restricting means, so that the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set can be extended. Therefore, an unexpected game can be provided to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K1, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means A second dynamic display unit for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period; and a method in which the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display unit. A first privilege game, a privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, And the second dynamic display means can dynamically display the second identification information while the first dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information. And the determination result of the second determination means is the specific second determination result. Gaming machine K2, characterized in that the case, in which the predetermined limit condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in the configuration in which the second identification information can be dynamically displayed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the second determination unit Is a specific second determination result, a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied. Thus, the first determination by the first determination unit can be performed in a state where the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is limited. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K2, while the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result is being executed by the second dynamic display means, the measurement restricting means sets the advantageous game state by the period measuring means. A gaming machine K3 for limiting measurement of a period.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1, while the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result is being executed by the second dynamic display means, the period of the advantageous gaming state is measured. Is limited. Therefore, the first determination by the first determination unit can be performed in a state where the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is limited. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, there is provided a notifying unit for notifying that the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring unit is restricted by the measurement restricting unit. Gaming machine K4.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, it is notified that the measurement of the period is restricted by the measurement restricting means by the notification means, so that a game which is easy for the player to understand is provided. There is an effect that it can be provided.

<Character L group> (Small hit RUSH with different end conditions)
A first determination unit capable of performing a first determination, a first display unit displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit, and a second determination unit capable of performing a second determination And second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means; and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. When displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. A first gaming state in which the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the second determination. And a game state setting means capable of setting a game state. The setting means sets the first game state when a predetermined first condition is satisfied or when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, and the first condition is satisfied. The case where the first game state is set based on the establishment of the second condition is easier than the case where the first game state is set based on the fact that the first game state is set. A gaming machine L1.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that performs a game in which a plurality of gaming states are shifted in stages in accordance with a lottery result, and that can set an advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to a player (for example, JP-A-2005-058267). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the termination condition of the advantageous gaming state is a single, it is not possible to make the continuity of the set advantageous gaming state different from each other. There is a problem that the game to be provided becomes monotonous and the willingness to play is reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine L1, the first game state can be set by the game state setting means because the first game state that is easily set continuously and the first game state that is difficult to set continuously can be set. Even after the game is performed, the player can play the game while expecting the first game state to continue for a long period of time, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L1, the gaming state setting means sets a gaming state different from the first gaming state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied in a state where the first gaming state is set, When the first game state is set based on the establishment of the second condition, the predetermined termination is performed more easily than when the first game state is set based on the establishment of the first condition. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that the conditions are difficult to be satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine L1, the first game state is set based on the second condition being satisfied, rather than when the first gaming state is set based on the first condition being satisfied. When the gaming state is set, the first gaming state can be made more difficult to end. Therefore, for the player, the first game state that is easy to end and the first game state that is hard to end can be set, so that the first game state that is hard to end even after the first game state is set. It is possible to play a game while desiring that the game state is set, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L2, there is provided end condition setting means capable of setting a first end condition and a second end condition different from the first end condition as the predetermined end condition, and the second condition is satisfied. The gaming machine L3, wherein the first ending condition is not satisfied when the first gaming state is set on the basis of the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L2, when the first gaming state is set based on the establishment of the second condition, the first ending condition is not established, and thus it is difficult to end. The first game state can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game to satisfy the second condition.

  In the gaming machine L3, the ending condition setting means sets the second ending condition when the result of the determination by the first determining means is the specific first determination result. L4.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3, the second end condition is set when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result. Thereby, when the first gaming state is terminated based on the establishment of the second termination condition, a bonus game can be provided. Therefore, even if the first game state is ended, the privilege can be given to the player, so that there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  A gaming machine L5 having a notifying unit for notifying that the first gaming state has been set based on the establishment of the second condition in the gaming machine L3 or L4.

  According to the gaming machine L5, it is notified by the notification means that the first end condition is not satisfied, so that there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

<Characteristic M group>
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination, a first display unit on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit is displayed, and a first determination specific to the first display unit When the first identification information for indicating a result is displayed, a privilege game executing means for executing the first privilege game, and when the predetermined setting condition is satisfied, the first determining means executes the privilege game. A gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state in which the result of the first determination is more likely to be the specific first determination result than the normal gaming state. In a state where is set, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a game state transition unit that transitions the game state from the advantageous game state to the normal game state, and restricts establishment of the predetermined transition condition. Transfer Gaming machine M1, characterized in that those having a condition limiting means.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, an advantageous game state (probable change state) that is advantageous to the player is set during a period from the end of the privilege game to the next jackpot according to the lottery result, in addition to the predetermined lottery ( There has been proposed a gaming machine for terminating an advantageous gaming state when a winning is won in a falling lottery. (For example, JP 2013-152A). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured so that the falling lottery is executed based on the execution of the winning or losing lottery of the game, the player always has a sense of danger that the advantageous gaming state ends. There is a problem that it is not possible to play the game with peace of mind. In the above-described gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which a player can play a game with a sense of security and the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the gaming machine M1, the transition condition restricting means can restrict the transition of the gaming state from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state, so that the gaming state transitions from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state. A game period not to be set can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that a period in which a player can play a game with peace of mind can be provided.

  In the gaming machine M1, the first determination means executes the first determination when a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, and executes the first determination when the predetermined first determination condition is satisfied. 1 has a special determination means capable of performing a special determination different from the determination, and when the determination result by the special determination means is a specific special determination result, the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. A gaming machine M2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M1, a special determination is performed when the first determination condition is satisfied, and when the determination result is a specific special determination result, a predetermined transition condition is set. Holds. Therefore, since the determination by the first determination unit and the determination by the special determination unit can be set in association with each other, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

  In the gaming machine M1, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific second determination result different from the specific first determination result, a second privilege game different from the first privilege game is executed. A second bonus game execution means, and a variable ball entry means variably operated to an open state in which a game ball can enter the inside when the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means. A variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball entry means, provided with a specific area through which a game ball can pass inside the variable ball entry means, The gaming machine M3, wherein the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the game machine passes.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M1, a predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through a specific area. Therefore, the transition condition can be satisfied at a timing different from the determination timing of the first determination unit, so that a surprising game can be provided to the player. Further, since it is possible to determine whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player fires the game ball, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

  In the gaming machine M3, the variable control means includes: a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball-in means easily passes through the specific area; A gaming machine M4 characterized by being able to set two variable controls.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, the variable control means allows the first variable control in which the ball entering the variable ball-in means easily passes through the specific area and the second variable control in which the ball hardly passes through the specific area. Can be set, so that a surprising game can be provided to the player. Further, since it is possible to determine whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player fires the game ball, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

  The gaming machine M5, further comprising a notifying unit for notifying that the second variable control is set by the variable control unit.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M4, the fact that the second variable control is set is notified by the notifying means, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player. is there.

<Feature N group> (Game selection of small hit game)
A first determination unit capable of performing a first determination, a first display unit displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit, and a first determination unit specific to the first display unit A bonus game executing means for executing a first bonus game when the first identification information for displaying a result is displayed, and a determination result of the first determination means different from the specific first determination result When the result of the second determination is a second bonus game executing means for executing a second bonus game different from the first bonus game, the second bonus game is executed by the second bonus game executing means. In the case, the variable ball entry means variably operated to an open state in which the game ball can enter the ball, and variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball entry means, Provide a specific area inside the variable ball entry means through which game balls can pass Gaming machine N1, wherein said when a certain region game ball passes through, and has a game state setting means capable of setting a disadvantage playing state disadvantageous to the player.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player A gaming machine has been proposed in which an advantageous privilege game is executed, and when a game ball passes through a specific area during the privilege game, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player can be set (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-163873). 2013-152 publication). In the above-described gaming machine, an advantageous game state is set by passing a game ball through a specific area, and therefore, it is necessary to watch whether a game ball passes through a specific area. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the disadvantageous game state is set when the game ball passes through the specific area, so that there is an effect that a novel gaming property can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine N1, the variable control means includes a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball-in means easily passes through the specific area, and a first variable control in which a ball harder to pass through the specific area than the first variable control. A gaming machine N2 characterized by being able to set two variable controls.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N1, the variable control means makes it easier for the ball entering the variable ball input means to pass through the specific area, and the first variable control, Since any one of the second variable control that is difficult to pass through the specific area is set, when the game ball is fired according to the content of the variable control to be executed, the fired game ball can pass through the specific area. Sex can be different. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a pleasure in which the player determines whether or not to fire the game ball.

  In the gaming machine N2, the second privilege game executed by the second privilege game execution means has a notifying means capable of notifying that the second variable control is set by the variable control means. A gaming machine N3 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N2, the fact that the second variable control is set is notified by the notification means, so that when the player decides whether or not to fire the game ball. Can provide helpful information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a pleasure in which the player determines whether or not to fire the game ball.

  In any one of the gaming machine N1 to the gaming machine N3, detecting means for detecting that a game ball has passed through the specific area, and invalidating means for invalidating a detection result by the detecting means, wherein the invalidating means Is a game machine N4 for invalidating a detection result by the detection means based on a result of the determination by the first determination means.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the detection result by the detecting means can be invalidated by the invalidating means, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine N4, during the period in which the detection result by the detection means is invalidated by the invalidation means, a measurement means for counting the number of game balls detected by the detection means, and a measurement result of the measurement means. A gaming machine N5, comprising: a measurement result notifying unit that notifies information based on the information.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N4, the information based on the measurement result of the measuring means is notified by the measurement result notifying means during the period in which the detection result by the detecting means is invalidated. The player can grasp the number detected by the detection means during the period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily feel superiority.

<Character O group> (Time saving ends based on the condition that is satisfied first among the multiple conditions)
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination, a first display unit on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit is displayed, and the first identification information displayed on the first display unit. A first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying a first privilege, and a privilege for executing a first privilege game when the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the first display means. Game execution means, a first game state in which the first determination is easily performed, a second game state in which the first determination is more difficult to execute than the first game state, and a settable game state setting means. The gaming machine has end means for terminating the first game state when a predetermined first end condition is satisfied, or when a second end condition different from the first end condition is satisfied. , The ending means includes the first ending condition and the second ending condition. Gaming machine O1, characterized in that the conditions of, but to terminate the first game state based on the end condition is satisfied first.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2015-12907). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the subtraction of the period in which the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) which is advantageous to the player is set becomes the start timing of the change of the special symbol, the advantageous gaming state should be set to the maximum. There is a problem that the player is not able to play the game, which gives the player discomfort. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine O1, a first end condition and a second end condition are provided as conditions for ending the first game state, and the first game state ends when one of the end conditions ends. This has an effect that the first game state can be surely ended.

  In the gaming machine O1, a second determination unit capable of executing a second determination, a second display unit for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination unit, Second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period, wherein the privilege game execution means is for displaying a specific second determination result on the second display means. The second privilege game is executed when the second identification information is displayed, and the second dynamic game is executed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed by a dynamic display means, and the first ending condition is satisfied by the execution of the first determination means, and the second determination means is executed That the second termination condition is satisfied. Game machine O2 to.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the first termination condition is satisfied based on the first determination by the first determination unit, and the second termination condition is determined based on the second determination by the second determination unit. Is established, while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. However, there is an effect that the first game state can be appropriately ended.

  In the gaming machine O2, first execution number measuring means for measuring the number of executions of the first determination means, second execution number measuring means for measuring the number of executions of the second determination means, and first execution number measurement means And the sum of the measurement result of the second execution count measurement unit and the measurement result of the second execution count measurement unit, and the execution count of the first determination unit as a first period in which the first game state is continuously set. A first period setting means for setting a predetermined number of times that is the sum of the number of executions of the second determination means, and the execution of the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means becomes the predetermined number Execution determination means for determining that the dynamic display is being executed by the second determination means while the state determination means determines that the dynamic display is being executed. Is performed, the second judgment is executed. Gaming machine O3, characterized in that than be one in which to establish the second end condition before.

  According to the game O3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O2, the second end condition can be satisfied even during the dynamic display in which the first end condition can be satisfied. Can be terminated.

  In the gaming machine O3, the first ending condition is that the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means is the predetermined number of times is completed, and the number of executions of the first determination means is A gaming machine O4, which is established at any time before the first determination corresponding to a case where the number of times exceeds a predetermined number is performed.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O3, the first determination condition is that after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means reaches a predetermined number of times, the first determination is made. Since the condition is satisfied until the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the means becomes larger than the predetermined number is performed, the predetermined first period can be set longer. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine O4, a third determination unit capable of executing a third determination, a third display unit displaying third identification information for indicating a determination result by the third determination unit, and a third display unit. A third dynamic display unit for dynamically displaying the third identification information, and a third privilege when the third identification information for indicating a specific third determination result is stopped and displayed on the third display unit. A third privilege game execution unit for executing a game, wherein the third determination unit sets the second game state when the first game state is set by the game state setting unit. A gaming machine O5 characterized in that it is more easily executed than in the case where

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O4, when the first gaming state is set, since the third determining means that is easily executed is provided, the first gaming state is set. By extending the period during which the third determination unit is easily executed, the period during which the third determination unit can be easily executed can be extended. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Feature P group> (Special figure changes during the opening period of the jackpot game)
A first determination unit capable of performing a first determination, a first display unit displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit, and a second determination unit capable of performing a second determination And second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means; and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. The first privilege game is executed based on the display, and the second privilege game is executed based on the display of the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result on the second display means. And a bonus game execution unit that executes the first bonus game, wherein the second determination unit performs the second determination during a specific first period in the period in which the first bonus game is being performed. And does not execute the second determination during a second period different from the first period. Gaming machine P1, wherein those.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a plurality of special symbol types are provided, and the plurality of special symbols can be changed simultaneously (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine is intended to allow a player to efficiently perform a lottery by simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols, but when one of the special symbols wins, the other special symbol is won. Is not executed, there is a problem that if the lottery efficiency decreases, the willingness to play decreases. In the above-described gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decrease in game motivation and has an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine P1, the second determination can be performed while the first privilege game is being performed, so that the player can perform more determinations. Therefore, there is an effect that the game efficiency can be improved.

  In the gaming machine P1, variable ball-entering means capable of changing between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than the first state, and the first privilege And a variable control means for variably controlling the variable ball entry means to the first state and the second state when a game is executed, wherein the variable ball entry means sets the variable ball entry means to a second state. The gaming machine P2, wherein a period that is changed to the first period is the first period.

  According to the gaming machine P2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine P1. That is, since the second determination is performed using a period during which the game ball cannot enter the variable ball entry means during the period in which the first privilege game is being executed, the game result of the first privilege game can be determined. The second determination can be performed without making it difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine that can be easily understood by a player can be provided.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the second determination means may provide, as the second determination result, a player with a second advantage result and a second advantage bonus game executed based on the second advantage result. It is possible to determine a disadvantageous second discrimination result in which a disadvantageous second privilege game is executed, and the discrimination result of the second discriminating means executed during the first privilege game is the advantageous second discrimination. A gaming machine P3 having a discriminating restriction means for restricting a result.

  According to the gaming machine P3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine P1 or P2. That is, since the second determination executed during the first privilege game is limited by the determination restricting means so that the determination result does not become the advantageous second determination result, the bonus is excessively given to the player. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

  The gaming machine P3 further comprises a variable restricting unit that restricts the variable control unit from changing from the second state to the first state by the variable control unit during the disadvantageous second privilege game. Gaming machine P4.

  According to the gaming machine P4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine P3. That is, it is possible to restrict the variable bonus means from changing the first privilege game to the first state while the disadvantageous second privilege game is being executed based on the determination result of the second determination means. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the incomprehensible game from being provided by performing a plurality of privilege games in an overlapping manner.

  In the gaming machine P4, when the change of the first privilege game to the first state is restricted by the variable restricting means, the first privilege game is changed to the first state. A gaming machine P5 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, even if the first privilege game is restricted from being changed to the first state by the variable restricting means, the first state of the first privilege game is not changed. Since the length of the period is not variable, the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, while the second period of the first privilege game is set, there is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically performed to perform the second determination until the end.

  In any of the gaming machines P2 to P5, the variable control means variably controls the variable ball entry means to be in the second state when the first privilege game is executed, at least. The gaming machine P6, wherein a period from when the first privilege game is executed to when the variable ball entry means enters the first state is defined as the first period.

  According to the gaming machine P6, the following effect is achieved in addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines P2 to P5. That is, since the second determination can be executed immediately after the first privilege game is executed, the second determination can be executed continuously from the period before the first privilege game is executed. Thereby, there is an effect that the second determination can be performed during the first privilege game without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  In the gaming machine P6, a second dynamic display setting means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the second determination means for a predetermined period, and the first period differs as the first privilege game. A first privilege game setting means capable of setting a plurality of the first privilege games, wherein the privilege game granting means grants the first privilege game set by the first privilege game setting means. The first privilege game setting means is at least longer than a period for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the second determining means set by the second dynamic display setting means. A shortened first privilege game in which the first period is set shorter than a period in which the first period is set and a period in which the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination unit is dynamically displayed is set. And configurable Gaming machine P7, characterized in that it.

  According to the gaming machine P7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine P6. That is, when the first privilege game is normally set by the first privilege game setting means, the second privilege game based on the determination by the second determination means can be executed during the first period, and the shortened first bonus game can be executed. When the bonus game is set, it can be configured such that it is difficult to execute the second bonus game based on the determination by the second determination unit during the first period. Therefore, during the privilege game, the player can be interested in the first period in which the player is unlikely to be interested, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early. effective.

  In any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, there is provided a second dynamic display setting means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determining means for a predetermined period, and the first privilege game is executed. The game machine P8, further comprising a forced stop means for forcibly stopping and displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means which is dynamically displayed.

  According to the gaming machine P8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines P1 to P7. That is, when the first privilege game is executed, the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means is forcibly stopped and displayed, so that a new dynamic display is performed during the first period. Can be easily started. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide the player with the determination made by the second determination unit that is performed during the first period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Any one of the gaming machines P1 to P8 has a specific area through which a game ball can pass, and the privilege game providing means indicates that the result of the determination by the first determination means is the specific first determination result. The first privilege game is provided when a game ball passes through the specific area in a state where the identification information is stopped and displayed for the second determination means. It is assumed that the period from when the identification information for indicating that the result is the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed until the game ball passes through the specific region is also in the first period, and the second period is determined. A gaming machine P9 for performing a determination.

<Derivation of feature Pa group> (Small hit RUSH using special power starting port)
A determination unit capable of executing the determination, a display unit on which identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination unit is displayed, and the predetermined identification information for indicating a specific determination result on the display unit And a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter based on execution of the privilege game by the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game. A variable ball-in means for changing to a second state in which a game ball is easier to enter, and the variable ball-in means is shifted to the second state by the privilege game executing means after the predetermined identification information is displayed. A special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which the variable ball-in means is changed to the second state before being changed.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a plurality of special symbol types are provided, and the plurality of special symbols can be changed simultaneously (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machines allow a player to efficiently perform a lottery by simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols, but in any game, unless the player wins by the lottery, Since the privilege game cannot be given, there is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced. In the above-described gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine Pa1, the special game execution means can change the variable ball entry means to the second state by the time the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state by the privilege game execution means. In addition, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Pa1, the ball-entering means into which the ball can enter, and the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter based on the ball having entered the ball-in means from the first state to the game ball from the first state. Has a second variable ball entry means that is changed to a second state in which the ball can be easily entered, and the special game execution means, based on a game ball having entered the second variable ball entry means, A gaming machine Pa2 for executing a special game.

  According to the gaming machine Pa2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Pa1. That is, since a special game is executed by causing a game ball to enter the second variable ball entry means, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for a player.

  The gaming machine Pa2 has special game setting means for setting the content of the special game executed by the special game execution means, and the special game setting means includes a game ball entering the second variable ball entry means. A game machine for setting one special game from among a plurality of special games having different preparation periods until the variable ball entry means changes the state to the second state. Pa3.

  According to the gaming machine Pa3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Pa2. That is, depending on the special game to be executed, the preparation period from the time when the game ball enters the second variable ball entry means to the time when the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played while expecting that a special game with a short preparation period will be executed.

  In the gaming machine Pa3, the gaming machine Pa3 has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the special gaming setting means is provided by the gaming state setting means. A gaming machine Pa4, wherein when the first gaming state is set, the bonus game in which the preparation period is shorter than that when the second gaming state is set is easily set.

  According to the gaming machine Pa4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Pa3. That is, when the first game state is set, a short preparation period is easily set, so that a concentrated special game can be executed during the period in which the first game state is set, and There is an effect that the interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Pa4, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on a result of the determination by the determining means being the specific determination result. .

  According to the gaming machine Pa5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine Pa4. That is, since the presence or absence of the privilege game and the setting of the game state are executed based on the determination result of the determination means, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the determination result of the determination means. .

  In the gaming machine Pa5, there is provided a standby period setting unit that sets a standby period from when the predetermined determination result is displayed on the display unit until the bonus game is executed, wherein the special game setting unit A gaming machine Pa6 for setting, when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the special game in which the preparation period shorter than the standby period is set.

  According to the gaming machine Pa6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Pa5. That is, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, a special game in which a preparation period shorter than the standby period is set is set, so that the special game can be reliably executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature Q group> (P group derived)
A first determination unit capable of performing a first determination, a first display unit displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit, and a second determination unit capable of performing a second determination And second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means; and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. The first privilege game is executed based on the display, and the second privilege game is executed based on the display of the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result on the second display means. The second determination means executes the second determination during a specific first period of the period in which the first bonus game is being executed. However, the second determination is not performed during a second period different from the first period. Gaming machine Q1, characterized in that those.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a plurality of special symbol types are provided, and the plurality of special symbols can be changed simultaneously (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machines allow a player to efficiently perform a lottery by simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols, but in any game, unless the player wins by the lottery, Since the privilege game cannot be given, there is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced. In the above-described gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

<Characteristic R group> (V prize rate is changed according to the fluctuation time of the special figure.)
Determining means for performing a determination when a determination condition is satisfied; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period; and the dynamic display means A dynamic display period setting unit for setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information; and providing a bonus game based on the identification information indicating the first determination result being stopped and displayed on the display unit. The game ball is entered based on the fact that the identification information indicating the second determination result different from the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means as a result of the determination by the privilege game providing means and the determination means. A variable ball entry means that can be changed from a difficult first state to a second state that is easy to enter the ball, and a specific area through which game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means can pass; The means is the specific area The bonus game is also provided even when a game ball passes, and the dynamic display period setting means includes a first period and a second period longer than the first period as the dynamic display period. Gaming machine R1 wherein the second period is set more easily than the first period is set so that the game ball can easily pass through the specific area. .

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that executes a specific game when a lottery result is a specific lottery result, and also executes a privilege game even when a ball passes through a specific area during the specific game (for example, JP-A-2012-192067). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine is capable of executing a privilege game at a plurality of occasions, and thus can enhance the interest of the game. Since the passing ratio of the ball is varied, there is a problem that the lottery result has a great influence on the subsequent game content, and the interest of the game is reduced. In the above-described gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine R1, the ease with which the game ball passes through the specific area can be varied depending on the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting unit. Therefore, the player can watch the game until the identification information for indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R1, a period group storage unit having a plurality of period groups defining a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set by the dynamic display period setting unit, and a plurality of period groups stored in the period group storage unit. A period group selecting unit for selecting one period group from the period group, wherein the dynamic display period setting unit is defined in the one period group selected by the period group selecting unit. One of a plurality of dynamic display periods, wherein the period group storage means corresponds to a first period group and the second period more than the first period group. A gaming machine R2 having at least a second period group including a large number of dynamic display periods.

  According to the gaming machine R2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine R1. That is, when the second period group in which the second period is easily set is set, the second period can be set more easily than when the first period group is set. While the group is set, there is an effect that a game advantageous to the player can be executed with confidence.

  In the gaming machine R2, there is provided a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state as a gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the period group selecting means includes the gaming state setting The gaming machine R3, wherein the period group is selected according to the gaming state set by means.

  According to the gaming machine R3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine R2. That is, since the period group is set according to the game state, once the second period group advantageous to the player is set, the second group is set until the different game state is set by the game state setting means. The two-period group will continue. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can execute the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine R3, in a state where the second period group is set, the dynamic display period setting unit determines whether the first determination result and the second determination result are the results of the determination by the determination unit. A gaming machine R4 characterized in that a special dynamic display period can be set based on identification information indicating a different third determination result being stopped and displayed on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine R4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine R3. That is, the dynamic display period set when the determination result of the determination means is the third determination result indicates to the player that the currently set period group is the second period group that is advantageous to the player. Can be done. Therefore, even if the discrimination result of the discriminating means is a discrimination result in which the privilege game cannot be executed, it is possible to interest the player and improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic S group> (R derivative)
Determining means for performing a determination when a determination condition is satisfied; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period; and the dynamic display means A dynamic display period setting unit for setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information; and providing a bonus game based on the identification information indicating the first determination result being stopped and displayed on the display unit. The game ball is entered based on the fact that the identification information indicating the second determination result different from the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means as a result of the determination by the privilege game providing means and the determination means. A variable ball entry means that can be changed from a difficult first state to a second state that is easy to enter the ball, and a specific area through which game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means can pass; The means is the specific area The bonus game is also provided even when a game ball passes, and the dynamic display period setting means includes a first period and a second period longer than the first period as the dynamic display period. The gaming machine S1 is characterized in that setting the second period rather than setting the first period makes it easier for game balls to pass through the specific area. .

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that executes a specific game when a lottery result is a specific lottery result, and also executes a privilege game even when a ball passes through a specific area during the specific game (for example, JP-A-2012-192067). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine is capable of executing a privilege game at a plurality of occasions, and thus can enhance the interest of the game. Since the passing ratio of the ball is varied, there is a problem that the lottery result has a great influence on the subsequent game content, and the interest of the game is reduced. In the above-described gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

<Characteristic T group> (1 type 2 types 3 times loop)
Discriminating means for performing a discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied, display means for displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and discrimination for indicating a first discrimination result as the discrimination result on the display means When the information is stopped and displayed, a bonus game providing means for providing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player, and after the bonus game provided by the bonus game providing means is completed, a first game state, A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the privilege game is more easily provided than in the first game state, and a third game state in which the bonus game is less likely to be provided than the first game state; Based on the fact that the identification information indicating the second determination result different from the first determination result as the result of the determination by the determination means is stopped and displayed on the display means, a period in which the game ball can pass through the specific area. And a period setting unit that can set the bonus game, wherein the bonus game providing unit is configured to provide the bonus game even when a game ball passes through the specific area, and the gaming machine includes the second game machine. When a bonus game is awarded in a state in which the gaming state is set, any one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state is set to the gaming state after the bonus gaming is completed, rather than the third gaming state. A gaming machine T1 characterized by being easily set by means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, the specific game is executed, and when the ball passes through the specific area during the specific game, the bonus game is executed, and further, when the ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine capable of setting an easy gaming state has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-192067). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine is capable of improving the interest of the game because it enables a privilege game to be executed at a plurality of occasions. There is a problem that the game may end immediately and the interest of the game is reduced. In the above-described gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine T1, when the second gaming state is set, the third gaming state is not set when the next privilege game is granted, so that it is easy to give the bonus game one after another. Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in a state where the bonus game is easily provided.

  In the gaming machine T1, the gaming state setting means performs the bonus game in the state in which the first gaming state is set, more than when the bonus game is given in the state in which the second gaming state is set. A gaming machine T2 wherein the third gaming state is more easily set after the award game is over, when the award is given.

  According to the gaming machine T2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine T2. That is, when the first game state is set, the third game state is easily set based on the award of the privilege game, so that the game state advantageous to the player is set for a long time. Can be suppressed. Therefore, an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the gaming state setting means sets a first privilege game given based on a result of the determination by the determining means being a specific determination result among the privilege games, and The second bonus game provided based on the passing of the game ball is different from the second bonus game provided in accordance with the type of the bonus game provided by the bonus game providing means. Gaming machine T3.

  According to the gaming machine T3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T2 or T3. That is, since the game state to be set can be different between the case where the first privilege game is provided and the case where the second privilege game is provided, which type of privilege game is executed for the player You can be interested in what was done. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine T3, when the second gaming state is set, the gaming state setting means is more advantageous to the player when the second bonus game is provided than when the first bonus game is provided. A gaming machine T4 characterized by making it easy to set an appropriate gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine T4, when the second gaming state is set, the player can be motivated to play the game such that the second privilege game is provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine T3 or T4, when the first gaming state is set, the gaming state setting means may determine that the player is provided with the first privilege game rather than with the second bonus game. A gaming machine T5 characterized in that it is easy to set a gaming state advantageous to the game machine T5.

  According to the gaming machine T5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine T3 or T4. That is, when the first game state is set, the player can be motivated to play the game such that the first privilege game is provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature U group> (Derived from T group)
A discriminating means for discriminating when the discriminating condition is satisfied, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and the discrimination information indicating a specific discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. In this case, a bonus game providing means for providing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, and after the bonus game provided by the bonus game providing means is completed, the first gaming state and the first gaming state A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the privilege game is easily given and a third game state in which the privilege game is less likely to be given than in the first game state; Based on the fact that the identification information indicating the second determination result different from the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the game ball changes from the first state in which it is difficult to enter the ball to the second state in which it is easy to enter the ball. And variable Variable ball entry means, and a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and the privilege game providing means can be used even when a game ball passes through the specific area. The bonus game is provided, and when the bonus game is provided in a state where the second gaming state is set, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state after the completion of the bonus game. A gaming machine U1 characterized in that one of the second gaming states is easily set.

<Feature V group> (Small hit RUSH without simultaneous fluctuation)
A first ball entry means in which a game ball can enter, a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination based on a ball entering the first ball entry means, and a discrimination result by the first discrimination means are shown. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the display means, a second ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball entering the second ball entry means Obtaining means for obtaining information based on the information, second determining means capable of executing a second determination based on the information obtained by the obtaining means, and a second determining means for indicating a determination result by the second determining means. A second dynamic display unit for dynamically displaying identification information on the display unit, a storage unit capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition unit until the determination by the second determination unit is performed, The second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on a display unit. A second privilege game providing means for granting the execution of the second privilege game when the game is stopped, a restricting means for restricting a game ball from entering the second ball entering means, and a display means specific to the display means. A first privilege game executing means for executing at least a first privilege game capable of executing the release of the restriction means when the first identification information for indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine V1 characterized in that:

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) in which a ball can easily enter a specific entrance after the end of the privilege game according to a lottery result (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Gazette). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem in that the player can easily get a ball into a specific entrance when the player is in the advantageous gaming state, so that the player gets tired of the game early. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine V1, it is possible to allow the ball to enter the ball entry means only while the privilege game or the special privilege game is given, so that the privilege game or the special privilege game is given. There is an effect that the storage in the storage means can be restricted in a state where the data is not stored.

  In the gaming machine V1, a second ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position at which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, and the entry of the game ball from the first position. A variable member that can be changed to a second position that regulates a ball, and the variable member is variably controlled when the bonus game or the special bonus game is executed, The gaming machine V2, wherein the restricting means positions the variable member at the first position, and the restriction releasing means positions the variable member at the second position.

  According to the gaming machine V2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine V1. That is, it is possible to vary the ease of entry of the ball into the ball entry means according to the variable state of the variable member executed in the bonus game or special bonus game, so that the bonus game, or A ball can be made to enter the ball entry means in synchronization with the special privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the playability during the bonus game or the special bonus game.

  In the gaming machine V1 or V2, when the special bonus game is executed, it is easier to release the restriction by the restriction unit by the restriction releasing unit than when the bonus game is executed. Gaming machine V3.

  According to the gaming machine V3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1 or V2. That is, according to the type of the game in which the variable member is changed, the ease with which the ball enters the ball entry means can be changed, so that the playability during the bonus game or the special bonus game is improved. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine V3, the bonus game is more difficult to execute than the special bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine V4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine V3. That is, the bonus game is harder to be executed than the special bonus game, but it is possible to easily make the ball enter the ball entry means during the game. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to execute the privilege game, and it is possible to increase the operation of the game.

<Characteristic W group> (variable ease of establishment of a plurality of game conditions in the accessory action pattern)
A determination unit capable of performing the determination, a variable unit that is changed from the first state to the second state when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result, and a variable operation content of the variable unit; Variable operation setting means, and variable control means for controlling the variable means based on the variable operation content set by the variable operation setting means, wherein the variable control means (1) When the variable operation content is set, the variable means is variably controlled so that the first privilege is more easily provided than the second privilege different from the first privilege. Therefore, when the second variable operation content different from the first variable operation content is set, the variable means is variably controlled so that the second privilege is more easily provided than the first privilege. Gaming machine W1, wherein.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine for setting an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) in which a specific electric auditors can easily perform a variable operation after the end of a bonus game in accordance with a lottery result (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). . By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the privilege that can be given to the player by variably operating the electric accessory is always the same, and furthermore, one privilege is given by making the variable operation content of the electric accessory different. Since it is only possible to set a state in which the game is easily performed and a state in which the game is not easily performed, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game early. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine W1, the privilege to be given can be made different based on the content of the movable operation set by the movable operation setting means, so that the player can watch the variable condition of the variable means. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine W1, end condition setting means for setting a plurality of end conditions, condition judging means for judging the establishment of the plurality of end conditions set by the end condition setting means, and the end condition by the condition judging means. And a variable control ending means for terminating the variable control of the variable means by the variable control means when it is determined that the condition has been satisfied, based on the fact that a specific end condition among the plurality of end conditions has been satisfied. When the variable control ending means ends the variable control, a special state in which the first privilege and the second privilege are easily given is set.

  According to the gaming machine W2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine W1. That is, when the specific end condition is satisfied, a special state is set, so that the player can be motivated to play a game so that the specific end condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine W2, a ball entry means, a second discrimination means capable of executing a second discrimination based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means, and the result of the discrimination by the second discrimination means is a specific A gaming machine W3, comprising: a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the result of the second determination is obtained, wherein the first privilege is the one for which the second determination is performed.

  According to the gaming machine W3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine W2. That is, since the second determination that can execute the privilege game is given as the first privilege, the player is expected to set the first variable operation content in which the first privilege is easily given. The game can be performed while playing. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine W3, when the award game is executed by the award game execution means, the game ball is changed from the first state in which it is difficult to enter the ball to a second state in which it becomes easier to enter the ball than the first state. A gaming machine W4 having operable variable ball entry means, wherein the second privilege is that a game ball enters the variable ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine W4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine W3. That is, when the privilege game is being executed, the game can be performed while expecting that the second variable operation content in which the second privilege is easily given is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine W5 according to any one of the gaming machines W2 to W4, wherein the end condition setting means sets the grant of the first privilege as the specific end condition.

  According to the gaming machine W5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines W2 to W4. That is, the player can be motivated to play the game while expecting the first privilege to be provided so that the special state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature X group> (can pass through during hit game)
First ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, discrimination condition establishment means for establishing a discrimination condition based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and said discrimination by said discrimination condition establishment means. Determining means capable of executing a determination when a condition is satisfied; privilege game providing means for providing a bonus game based on a result of the determination by the determining means being a specific determination result; Passing means through which the game ball can pass while the bonus game is granted, determining means capable of executing a determination based on the passing of the game ball by the passing means, and the determination result being a specific determination result A variable means variably controlled from the first position to the second position based on the above, and when the variable means is in the second position, a game ball is more inserted than in the first position. The second entry ball that makes it easier to ball It has a stage, the said discrimination condition is satisfied means, the gaming machine wherein the game balls in the second ball entrance means in which to establish the discrimination condition even when the ball entrance X1.

  In the gaming machine X1, the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a ball passing through the passing means can enter the ball.

  In the gaming machine X2, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and a dynamic display period for setting a period for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means Setting means, wherein the dynamic display period setting means comprises: a first period during which a ball passing through the passing means can enter the second ball entering means; and a ball entering more than the first period A gaming machine X3 wherein at least a difficult second period can be set.

  In the gaming machine X3, the first period is longer than the second period.

<Feature Y group> (Advantageous zuzu ending)
Determining means for performing a determination, and a period determining means for determining a period for notifying a result of the determination by the determining means, having a notification result for indicating the specific determination result notified. A gaming machine that is in an advantageous state based on the player based on the setting, comprising: setting means for setting a set period until the next determination by the determination means can be performed after the advantageous state ends. The gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that the period includes at least a first set period and a second set period that is more advantageous to the player than the first set period.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. (For example, JP 2013-226399 A). By the way, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous because the period until the hit game or the like which is advantageous to the player is executed becomes long, and the player gets tired of the game early. It has been demanded that the player can enjoy the game even during the period until the winning game is executed, and to suppress the problem of getting tired of the game early. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  According to the gaming machine Y1, when the advantageous state is set, it is possible to make the player expect the second setting period to be set, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early. effective.

  In the gaming machine Y1, in the advantageous state, the gaming machine Y1 has a first flow path through which a game ball can pass, and when the second setting period is set, the first flow path is set to the first flow path. A gaming machine Y2 characterized in that the gaming balls are configured to flow more easily than when one set period is set.

  According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Y1, when the second set period is set, the game ball can easily flow down to the first flow path, and the second set period is reduced. There is an effect that it can be expected to be set more.

  In the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, during the second set period, the determination result by the determination unit next to the advantageous state becomes the specific determination result and the state becomes the advantageous state. And the game machine Y3 is set in a period in which the privilege is easily given by passing the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine Y3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, by setting the second setting period, it is possible to increase the value of setting the next advantageous state, and the advantageous state is changed. There is an effect that expectations for setting can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, a specific ball entry means in which a game ball flowing down the first flow path is arranged at a position where the game ball can enter, and at least a part of the privilege is given when the game ball enters. And a state setting means for setting a first state in which a game ball can enter the specific entering means and a second state in which entering the ball is more difficult than the first state, The gaming machine Y4 is characterized in that the second setting period is a period in which a game ball can reach the specific entering means during a period in which the first state is set.

  According to the gaming machine Y4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the second set period is set so that the gaming ball can easily reach the specific ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation that the second setting period is set can be further increased.

  In the gaming machine Y4, a ball-in means for allowing the game ball to enter by entering the advantageous state, and a specific determination means for executing a specific determination based on the game ball entering the ball-in means. A period determining unit that determines a variable period for varying a period until the specific entering unit is set to the first state based on the specific determination being performed by the specific determining unit. The gaming machine Y5, wherein the period determining means is configured to be able to determine a period that is advantageous to the player even when the second setting period is not set.

  According to the gaming machine Y5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Y4, even when the second setting period is not set by the period determining means, the period that is advantageous to the player is determined, so that it is advantageous to the player. Is increased, and there is an effect that a disadvantage that the player gets tired of the game early can be suppressed.

<Derivation of feature β group> (Advantageous at regular intervals at regular intervals)
Determining means for performing the determination, period determining means for determining a period for notifying the determination result by the determining means, and a player based on the notification result indicating the specific determination result being notified to the player An advantageous state setting unit that sets an advantageous state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a first flow path through which a game ball can pass when the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting unit; And wherein the first flow path is set to have a high probability of being able to pass when the interval at which the advantageous state is set is the first interval. Gaming machine β1.

Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. (For example, JP 2013-226399 A). by the way,
In addition, there has been a demand for a gaming machine having a more interesting game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having improved gaming interest.

  According to the gaming machine β1, when the interval at which the advantageous state is set is the first interval, the probability of being able to pass through the first flow path is set high, so that after the advantageous state is executed, This also has the effect of increasing the interest in the game and increasing the interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine β1, a ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball, a first position for guiding a game ball to the ball-entering means, and a second position making it difficult to enter the ball-entering means. A gaming machine β2, comprising: a variable means that can be varied, wherein the advantageous state setting means varies the variable means to the first position as the advantageous state.

  According to the gaming machine β2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine β2, since the advantageous state is set by changing the variable means to the first position, the advantage state can be easily recognized. .

  In the gaming machine β2, when the advantageous state is set, the advantageous state setting means cancels the setting of the advantageous state based on a predetermined number of game balls having entered the ball entry means. Wherein when the setting of the advantageous state is released, a game ball rolling on a predetermined range of the variable means is guided to the first flow path. Machine β3.

  According to the gaming machine β3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine β2, even when the advantageous state is released, the player can be interested in the game ball on the variable means, and expects the cancellation of the advantageous state. There is an effect that it can be provided.

  In any one of the gaming machines β1 to β3, a specific area where a game ball guided to the first flow path can enter is arranged, and a first state in which a game ball can enter the specific area. And a state changing means for setting a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than the ball entry state, and before the elapse of the flow-down period in which the game ball flows down the first flow path, A first variable control for changing the state variable means to the first state after changing the state variable means to the first state; and a variable state control means for changing the state variable means to the first state during a period in which the flow-down period elapses. A variable control means for executing at least one of the second variable control and the game machine β4.

  According to the gaming machine β4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines β1 to β3, it is possible to expect that the second variable control is executed by the variable control means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. is there.

<Characteristic Z group> (Attacker below the public train)
Entering means into which a game ball can enter, determining means capable of executing a judgment based on entering the entering means, and display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of the judgment by the judging means Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, and, when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player. A variable means that can be changed between a first state that facilitates the entry of game balls into the entry means and a second state that makes it more difficult to enter the game balls than the first state; And a variable control means for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on the establishment of Being guided by the variable means, and A specific flow path in which a game ball that has flowed down by being changed to the second state before entering the ball can enter the ball, and a specific area in which a game ball that has flowed down the specific flow path can enter the ball, Wherein the award game execution means executes the award game in which a ball entry state in which a game ball can enter the specific area is set until an end condition is satisfied. Machine Z1.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. (For example, JP 2013-226399 A). By the way, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that further enhances the interest in gaming. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having improved gaming interest.

  According to the gaming machine Z1, it is possible to cause a game ball, which could not be made to enter the ball entry means by the variable means, to play a game by expecting a ball to enter a specific flow path, and to enjoy the game. There is an effect that can be improved.

  When starting the dynamic display of the identification information in the gaming machine Z1, the gaming machine Z1 has dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period, and the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display period determining means is provided. The period is that at least an advantageous dynamic display period in which a game ball easily enters the specific region and an inconvenient display period in which it is difficult to enter the specific region are set. Gaming machine Z2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine Z2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Z1, the player can be interested in the dynamic display period of the identification information, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Z1 or Z2, the privilege game execution means starts executing the setting of the entering state in the specific area according to a certain rule based on the start of execution of the privilege game. Gaming machine Z3.

  According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Z1 or Z2, the specific area is set to the ball-entering state according to a certain rule based on the start of execution of the bonus game, so that fairness to the player is achieved There is an effect that the sex can be kept constant.

<Characteristic AA group> (Direction based on fluctuation of Toku-zu 2)
Entering means into which a game ball can enter, determining means capable of executing a judgment based on entering the entering means, and display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of the judgment by the judging means Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information, a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a specific determination result to the display means. When the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, a specific ball-in means for allowing a game ball to enter until an end condition is satisfied. Detecting means for detecting a game ball flowing down a possible flow path, and effect executing means capable of executing an effect during the dynamic display period, wherein the effect executing means includes the detecting means At least a part of the effect based on the detection result by Gaming machine AA1, characterized in that in which row.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, when notifying the lottery result, by configuring such that the effect suggesting the lottery result is performed for a predetermined period and then notifying the player of the lottery result, the player can have high expectations for the lottery result. Gaming machines have been proposed. (For example, JP 2013-226399 A). By the way, since the effect is performed based on the lottery result determined in advance, the effect is likely to be constant, and the game is monotonous, and there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game early. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of a game early.

  According to the gaming machine AA1, the detecting means detects the game ball flowing down the flow path that can enter the specific ball inputting means, and at least a part of the effect executed based on the detection result is executed. Therefore, not only the dynamic display of the identification information but also the effect that is being executed can be performed so as to be variable depending on the flow of the game ball, and the interest of the game is improved, and the player gets tired of the game early. There is an effect that defects can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine AA1, in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination unit, at least a first dynamic display period set so that a game ball can easily enter the specific ball entry unit is set. The gaming machine AA2, wherein the effect executing means executes a specific effect under at least one condition that the first dynamic display period is determined.

  According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AA1, the specific effect is executed under at least one condition that the first dynamic display period that is advantageous to the player is determined. Is executed, it is possible to expect that the first dynamic display period is determined.

  In the gaming machine AA2, even when the first dynamic display period is determined, if the game ball is not detected by the detection unit during a specific detection period, the effect execution unit may execute the specific effect. Is a game machine AA3 characterized by executing different effects.

  According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AA2, even when the first dynamic display period is determined, if a game ball is not detected by the detection means during a specific detection period, a specific effect is produced. Is not executed, it is possible to suppress a problem that the execution of the specific effect is uselessly performed and the degree of expectation for the specific effect is reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the specific ball entry means is provided with a specific area through which a game ball that has entered can pass, and based on passing through the specific area, the special bonus game is provided. A gaming machine AA4, wherein settings for execution are executed.

  According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, when the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the game ball passes through the specific area and the privilege game is executed. Is expected, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AA4, variable means that can be changed into a first state in which it is easy to enter a game ball into the ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state. And variable control means for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on establishment of a specific condition, wherein the flow path comprises Is configured to be guided to the variable means by being in the first state, and to be changed to the second state before entering the first ball entry means, thereby allowing a flowing game ball to flow in. A gaming machine AA5 characterized by being performed.

  According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA4, the variable means is changed so that even the game balls that did not enter the ball entry means are expected to flow into the flow path. This has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine AA5, the specific ball entry means is configured to make it easier for game balls that have flowed down the flow path to enter the specific area. .

  According to the gaming machine AA6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA5, there is an effect that by flowing down the flow path, the degree of expectation for passing through the specific area can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristics AB group>
First ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the first discrimination means First dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating the determination result on the display means for a predetermined period, a first state in which a game ball can enter, and a first state A first variable ball entry means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the ball; First variable control means for changing the state from the first state to the first state, a first guiding path capable of guiding a game ball to the first variable ball inputting means, and a second guide path capable of entering a game ball. Ball entry means, and second discrimination means capable of executing a second discrimination based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means A second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on the display means, second identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the second determination means for a predetermined period; A second variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which the ball can enter and a second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and a result of the discrimination by the second discrimination means being a specific discrimination result A second variable control means for changing the second variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state, the first variable ball entry means, A gaming machine AB1 characterized in that a gaming ball flowing down the first taxiway can enter without entering the second variable ball entry means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first design in which the variable display is executed for a predetermined period based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening and the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting winning opening are provided. And a second symbol in which the variable display is executed for a predetermined period based on the second symbol, and each symbol can be simultaneously varied. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit) is obtained as the second symbol lottery result, a small privilege game (for example, a small hit game) that can give a small privilege to the player is provided. There is a configuration in which a game state in which the lottery of the second symbol is easily executed and a game state in which the lottery of the second symbol is hardly executed can be set. (For example, JP 2015-39398 A).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, by changing the length of the fluctuation time of the second symbol, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the lottery of the second symbol is easily executed and a gaming state in which the lottery of the second symbol is difficult to be executed. Since it is configured to set a game state in which the small privilege game is easily executed and a game state in which the small privilege game is difficult to be executed, for example, in a state where the lottery of the second symbol is easily performed, the small bonus game is given to the player by the small privilege game. It is not possible to make detailed settings such as making the amount of privilege different, and the interest in the game is reduced. An object of the present invention is to solve the above-described problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine AB, the number of game balls reaching the first variable ball entry means can be varied according to the situation of the second variable means. Adjustment can be made by the control contents of the two variable means. Therefore, since the amount of privilege given to the player in the game in which the first variable ball entry means is opened can be adjusted, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AB1, gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display means A dynamic display period setting unit that can set a dynamic display period from a different period, wherein the dynamic display period setting unit sets the first gaming state by the gaming state setting unit. A game machine AB2 characterized in that it is easy to set a longer dynamic display period than when the second game state is set.

  According to the gaming machine AB2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine AB1. That is, the dynamic display period of the second dynamic display means can be changed according to the set game state. Further, when the first gaming state is set, a longer dynamic display period is more likely to be set than when the second gaming state is set. Therefore, the period during which the ball cannot enter the second variable ball entry means can be lengthened, so that the ball can easily reach the first variable ball entry means, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine AB2, the second variable ball entry means has at least an opening through which a game ball can enter, and an opening / closing lid member for opening / closing the opening. When the part is closed, the upper surface of the opening / closing lid member is configured to form a part of the first guide path, and the dynamic display period setting unit is configured to set the first display path by the gaming state setting unit. A gaming machine AB3, wherein when a gaming state is set, it is easy to set a dynamic display period longer than a passing time for a game ball to pass over the upper surface of the opening / closing lid member.

  According to the gaming machine AB3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AB2 described above. That is, when the first game state is set, the ball can reliably reach the first variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AB2 or AB3 has variable pattern setting means capable of setting a variable pattern variably controlled by the second variable control means from among a plurality of different variable patterns, wherein the variable pattern setting means When the first game state is set by the setting means, a variable pattern in which the period during which the second variable ball entry means is in the second state is set longer than when the second game state is set. A gaming machine AB4, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine AB4, the following effects are exerted in addition to the effects exerted by the gaming machines AB2 or AB3. In other words, when the first game state is set, a variable pattern in which the period during which the second variable ball entry means is in the second state is set longer than in the case where the second game state is set. One game state can be set to a game state more advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ1 is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the above-described gaming machines, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable a ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

In any of the above-described gaming machines, the gaming machine γ3 is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. There is a game in which an advantageous privilege game is executed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of games.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 comprises a discriminating means for discriminating when a discriminating condition is satisfied, and identification information for indicating the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means for a predetermined period. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means, and a display means for displaying a first determination result on the display means. A bonus game providing means for providing a bonus game based on the stop display of the identification information, and identification information indicating a second determination result different from the first determination result as a result of the determination by the determination means is displayed on the display means. On the basis of the stop display, the variable ball-in means capable of changing from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter, and the game ball having entered the variable ball-in means Specific area where can pass The privilege game providing means is to provide the privilege game even when a game ball passes through the specific area, the dynamic display period setting means, as the dynamic display period, A first period and a second period longer than the first period can be set, and the setting of the second period rather than the setting of the first period makes it possible to set a game ball in the specific area. Is made to pass easily.
The gaming machine according to the second technical concept is the gaming machine according to the first technical concept, wherein the period display unit includes a plurality of period groups in which a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set by the dynamic display period setting unit are defined. And a period group selection unit that selects one period group from the plurality of period groups stored in the period group storage unit, wherein the dynamic display period setting unit includes the period group selection unit. Means for setting one dynamic display period from a plurality of dynamic display periods defined in the one period group selected by the means, wherein the period group storage means includes a first period group; And a second period group including more dynamic display periods corresponding to the second period than the first period group.
The gaming machine according to the third technical concept is a gaming machine according to the second technical concept, wherein a gaming state setting unit capable of setting a first gaming state as a gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state. And the period group selecting means selects the period group according to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means.
The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the third aspect, wherein the dynamic display period setting unit sets the second period group as a result of the determination by the determination unit. The special dynamic display period can be set based on the fact that the identification information indicating the third determination result different from the first determination result and the second determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the determination means for performing the determination when the determination condition is satisfied, and the identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means are dynamically displayed on the display means for a predetermined period. Dynamic display means, dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means, and the identification information indicating a first determination result on the display means is stopped. A bonus game providing means for providing a bonus game based on the display, and identification information indicating a second determination result different from the first determination result as a result of the determination by the determination means is stopped and displayed on the display means. Based on the fact that the game ball can be changed from the first state where it is difficult to enter the ball to the second state where it is easy to enter the ball, and the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass through Having a specific area, and The privilege game providing means is for providing the privilege game even when a game ball passes through the specific area, and the dynamic display period setting means includes a first period as the dynamic display period, A second period longer than the first period can be set, and the second period is set more easily than the first period is set so that the game ball can easily pass through the specific area. It is.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects can be obtained. That is, a period group storage unit having a plurality of period groups defining a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set by the dynamic display period setting unit, and a plurality of the period groups stored in the period group storage unit And a period group selecting unit for selecting one period group from among the plurality of period groups, wherein the dynamic display period setting unit includes a plurality of groups defined by the one period group selected by the period group selecting unit. Setting one dynamic display period from the dynamic display periods, wherein the period group storage means stores the first period group and the dynamic period corresponding to the second period more than the first period group; And a second period group including many display periods.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effects can be obtained. That is, there is provided a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state as a game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and the period group selecting means is set by the game state setting means. The period group is selected according to the game state to be played.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, in a state where the second period group is set, the dynamic display period setting unit sets the third determination result different from the first determination result and the second determination result as a result of the determination by the determination unit. The special dynamic display period can be set based on the identification information indicating the determination result being stopped and displayed on the display means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
3640 Second attacker ( second variable ball entry means)
S306 determination means S307 dynamic display means S10011 dynamic display period setting means S2204 bonus game providing means

Claims (2)

First variable ball entry means that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which game balls are easier to enter than the first state;
Discriminating means capable of executing discrimination based on a game ball having entered the first variable ball-in means,
Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period;
Dynamic display period setting means capable of setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means,
Privilege game providing means capable of providing a bonus game when the identification information indicating that the result of the determination by the determination means is a first determination result is stopped and displayed;
The third variable state is provided at a position where a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means can reach, and is variable between a third state and a fourth state where the game ball is easier to enter than the third state. Possible second variable ball entry means;
Before Symbol of the discrimination by the discrimination means result the second variable ball entrance means given when it is stopped display stop is the identification information for indicating the second determination result different from the first determination result Variable control means capable of variably controlling with a variable pattern;
A specific area through which a game ball having entered the second variable ball entry means can pass;
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on a game ball passing through the specific area ,
The dynamic display period setting means, as the dynamic display period of the identification information for indicating that the result of the determination by the determination means is the second determination result, from the first variable ball entry means It is possible to set a first period that is likely to be shorter than a falling period until the game ball reaches the second variable ball-in means, and a second period that is longer than the falling period ,
The gaming machine may be changed to the fourth state when the identification information is dynamically displayed in the second period, rather than when the identification information is dynamically displayed in the first period. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to make it easier for game balls to reach the second variable ball entry means . 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a notifying unit that can notify that the privilege game is being executed .

Images